大犍度注释巴利
1. Mahākhandhakavaṇṇanā
菩提故事注释巴利
Bodhikathāvaṇṇanā
现在正是说明犍度中隐晦词句等分类的时候;
所以,我要讲说的并不是以前讲过的,而只是律藏本身的含义,目的是为了简要地掌握它。巴利
Yaṃ khandhake līnapadādibheda-pakāsanaṃ dāni supattakālaṃ; Tasmā apubbaṃ vinayatthameva, vakkhāmi saṅkhepagahaṇatthaṃ.
在这里,为什么这一部叫做“犍度”呢?因为它是诸蕴的聚集,就像《分别》那样。那它们又是什么呢?因为它们阐明、开显了诸蕴。这里所说的“蕴”,指的是出家等律仪行事,以及应行、应止之学处所摄的各种制立。因为出家等是世尊所制立的,所以称为“制立”。而“蕴”这个词也出现在“木蕴”“火蕴”“水蕴”等用法中。因为阐明、注释了那些称为制立的蕴,所以出家犍度等二十种被称为“犍度”;最后两种因为与它们相似,就像说“时宜”和“戒的时宜”一样,因为与时宜相似。再者,这里“部分、聚集”的意思也说得通,因为那些制立是依部分和聚集来分别的。那么,这些犍度的先后顺序有什么原因呢?这个问题并不成立,因为即使以其他方式宣说,也不会超出它们的关联。或者说,因为进入教法以出家、受达上为前提,所以首先宣说了包含此义的大犍度。那是谁说的呢?是结集法的长老们。世尊则是依各处所生的事而随宜宣说,并非依照这个顺序。长老们则依各自所需,将同类的内容集在一起,按次第诵出。其余各篇的用意,将在各处自行显明。巴利
Tattha kenaṭṭhenāyaṃ khandhakoti? Khandhānaṃ samūhattā vibhaṅgo viya. Te pana kathanti? Khandhānaṃ pakāsanato dīpanato. Khandhāti cettha pabbajjādivinayakammasaṅkhātā, cārittavārittasikkhāpadasaṅkhātā ca paññattiyo adhippetā. Pabbajjādīni hi bhagavatā paññattattā ‘‘paññattiyo’’ti vuccanti. Paññattiyañca khandha-saddo dissati ‘‘dārukkhandho aggikkhandho udakakkhandho’’tiādīsu viya. Tesaṃ paññattisaṅkhātānaṃ khandhānaṃ pakāsanato vaṇṇanato pabbajjakkhandhakādayo vīsati ‘‘khandhakā’’ti vuttā, avasāne dve taṃsadisattā velāya sadisattā sīlassa velāti vacanaṃ viya. Apica bhāgarāsatthatāpettha yujjate tesaṃ paññattīnaṃ bhāgato ca rāsito ca vibhattattā. Kiṃ panetesaṃ khandhakānaṃ anupubbakāraṇanti? Nāyaṃ pucchā sambhavati, aññathā vuttesupi tappasaṅgānatikkamanato. Atha vā pabbajjupasampadāpubbaṅgamattā sāsanappavesanassa tadatthasaṅgahako mahākhandhako paṭhamaṃ vutto. Kenāti ce? Dhammasaṅgāhakattherehi. Bhagavatā pana tattha tattha uppannavatthuṃ paṭicca tathā tathā vuttāni, na iminā anukkamena. Therā pana taṃ taṃ payojanaṃ paṭicca samānajātike ekajjhaṃ katvā anukkamena sajjhāyiṃsu. Sesānaṃ payojanaṃ tattha tattheva āvi bhavissati.
“通达犍度者”:就制立的部分与聚集这一层含义而言,指的是通达那些犍度之义的人,即已达到词无碍解彼岸的人。这是对义理不明显的词句所作的注释。为什么要这样特别说明?因为其余部分与此相应。这里应当知道,对论母与缘起的把握,正是通过对分别句的把握来了知的。那些在注释书中已经阐明的特定词句之义,若我们在这里再对那些特定词句加以宣说,注释要到什么时候才能结束?因此说“依他们义”,这与它的指示相符。至于那些原本浅显的圣典文句,又怎么能对它作注释呢?因为并不存在“义理浅显”这回事。若说“依意图与脉络等”这样的话也能成立吗?不能,因为这里已用“义”一词摄取了特定词句。应当知道,那些词句因为不离于义,或以能诠之义、或依义的假借,就是“义”。“注释之方法”:所谓注释,因显示对未明说之处的推度取舍次第,故称为“方法”。巴利
Khandhakovidāti paññattibhāgarāsaṭṭhena nesaṃ khandhatthakovidā, niruttipaṭisambhidāpārappattāti attho. Tesaṃ anuttānatthānaṃ padānaṃ saṃvaṇṇanā. Kasmā panevaṃ visesitanti? Tato sesabhāgā yuttā. Mātikāṭṭhuppattiggahaṇampettha padabhājaniyaggahaṇeneva veditabbaṃ. Yehi atthā yesaṃ padavisesānaṃ aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pakāsitā, tesaṃ te padavisese puna idha vadeyyāma, vaṇṇanāya pariyosānaṃ kadā bhave te te attheti vuttaṃ, taṃ tassa niddesena yujjati. Uttānā ceva yā pāḷi, tassā saṃvaṇṇanāya kinti vattabbaṃ? Na hi atthā uttānāti sambhavati. Adhippāyānusandhīhītiādivacanehipi taṃ vacanaṃ sambhavatīti ce? Na, atthaggahaṇena cettha padavisesānaṃ gahitattā. Te hi atthato anapetatthena, abhidhānatthena vā atthopacārena vā atthāti veditabbā. Saṃvaṇṇanānayoti saṃvaṇṇanā nāma avuttesu uhāpohakkamanidassanato ‘‘nayo’’ti vutto.
1 优楼频螺:这是那个村庄的名字,它是因为前面说过的沙堆而得名的,所以这里的“优楼频螺”是表示“在附近”的处所格。为了说明它确实是这样,经文才说“在尼连禅河岸边”等等。不然的话,就会变成“住在那个沙堆里”,而且和“进优楼频螺村乞食,前往优楼频螺将军镇”等说法相矛盾。不过注释书里只指出了根本原因。那里针对这一点说……应当理解为总结性的话。这有什么用意呢?是为了说明:指向村庄时,前面所说的词义能够成立。至于“那个村庄只是依邻近关系才得到这个名字”这句话,应当知道,因为它是没有明说就自然成立的,所以注释书里没有说。或者也可以说:如果“优楼频螺”是前面说的那个沙堆的名字,那么它附近的村庄也因此得名。在这里,具寿优波离长老并不是指向村庄而说“住在优楼频螺”,因为那里没有作为乞食村落的用途。世尊当时并不是以那个村庄为乞食处而住在那里。因此应当知道,注释书作者是想说明:长老在这里是依住在沙堆附近的菩提树下这一点才那样说的。所以应当知道,长老用这三句确定了第二个出现之处,即说明世尊是在远离村庄的林中证得正等觉;否则这三句的说法就没有意义。其中,“流动而行,所以叫河”。本来应该说“尼蓝阇罗”,但把 la 音变成了 ra 音,所以说成“尼连禅罗”,意思是没有泥、没有苔藓的清净水;或者这就是那条河本身的名字,意思是青黑色的水。巴利
1.Uruvelāti yathāvuttavālikarāsivasena laddhanāmako gāmo, tasmā samīpatthe etaṃ bhummaṃ. Tathābhāvadassanatthaṃ ‘‘najjā nerañjarāya tīre’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Aññathā tasmiṃ vālikarāsimhi viharatīti āpajjati, ‘‘uruvelaṃ piṇḍāya pāvisīti yena uruvelasenānigamo’’tiādivacanavirodho ca. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana mūlakāraṇameva dassitaṃ. Tattha taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ…pe… daṭṭhabboti nigamanavacanaṃ. Taṃ kimatthanti ce? Gāmaṃ sandhāya yathāvuttapadatthasambhavadassanatthaṃ. ‘‘So pana gāmo tadupacārena evaṃ nāmaṃ labhatī’’ti vacanaṃ pana avuttasiddhanti katvā na vuttanti veditabbaṃ, atha vā yassa ‘‘uruvelā’’ti yathāvuttavālikarāsissa, tassa samīpagāmassapi nāmaṃ. Tattha āyasmā upālitthero na idha gāmaṃ sandhāya ‘‘uruvelāyaṃ viharatī’’ti āha gocaragāmapayojanābhāvato. Na hi bhagavā taṃ gāmaṃ gocaraṃ katvā tadā tattha vihāsi, tasmā ettha vālikarāsissa samīpe bodhirukkhamūle vihāraṃ sandhāya so evamāhāti dassetukāmo aṭṭhakathācariyo evamāhāti veditabbaṃ, tasmā bhagavato gāmato dūratare araññe abhisambodhidīpanena dutiyuppattiṭṭhānaniyamaṃ tīhi padehi akāsi theroti veditabbaṃ, aññathā padattayavacanapayojanābhāvato. Tattha nadantā gacchatīti nadī. Nelañjalāyāti vattabbe la-kārassa ra-kāraṃ katvā ‘‘nerañjarāyā’’ti vuttaṃ, kaddamasevālavirahitattā niddosajalāyāti attho, nīlajalāyāti tassā nāmameva vā etaṃ.
在菩提树下这句话里,菩提指的是正觉。从含义上说,它就是世尊的第四道智,因为《无碍解道》中说“这叫做解脱之终”。虽然那个作为命名依据的第四果智也可以叫菩提,但因为它完成了应当完成的作用,所以这里应当知道菩提就是指第四道智。正因如此,经文中用“以第三明而证得漏尽智”来显示的就是它。注释书里则说为“觉支”“菩提分法”。其中,因为四道中的智被称为菩提,所以出于想用通称来叙述的意图,而说“菩提是指四道中的智”,因为这里所说的智也包含在其中。或者,因为经文中没有提到世尊的前三道,只有第四道智在世尊心中生起,世尊并不是先成为入流者等之后才成佛的;为了防止误解为其他时段,所以说“于四道”,因为前三道可以作为第四道的亲依止缘而生起,从而成立菩提的同义语。依据“人也是亲依止缘,住所也是亲依止缘”的说法,应当知道:就像以果为因、能生果的树叫果树一样,以菩提为因的树就叫菩提树。这里后面说“因为菩提纯粹也是树的名字,所以叫菩提”。而说“榕树等”来区别这棵树,是为了防止误指其他菩提树的树根。因为道智以善根为性,所以可以称为菩提,而那棵树是它的根,因此得名。初成正觉者坐在那里——这是句子的关联。由此显示,连同成等正觉那天一起,他以一个盘腿坐姿坐了八天。这里“一”这个字,显示那叫做坐的、与出家精进相应的盘腿坐姿,没有其他威仪相续,也显示它不动摇。在“解脱乐”中,这里不能说“在解脱中的乐”。因为世尊具足第五禅,所以那叫做果定现前的解脱,以随顺之义就是涅槃乐,因此叫解脱乐;他进入那种定而领受、体验着坐在那里。因为还没有超过所化众生的时机,所以他期待着他们而坐在那里,不是因为执著于解脱乐。巴利
Bodhirukkhamūleti ettha ca bodhi vuccati abhisambodho. So ca atthato bhagavato catutthamaggañāṇaṃ hoti ‘‘vimokkhantikametaṃ nāma’’nti (paṭi. ma. 1.162) paṭisambhidāvacanato. Kiñcāpi taṃ nāmakaraṇabhūtaṃ catutthaphalañāṇampi vattuṃ sambhavati, kattabbakiccānaṃ pana karaṇato taṃ catutthamaggañāṇameva ettha bodhīti veditabbaṃ. Teneva pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘tatiyavijjāya āsavānaṃ khayañāṇāyā’’ti tadeva dassitaṃ. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘bojjhaṅgā’’ti, ‘‘bodhipakkhiyā dhammā’’ti ca. Tattha yasmā catūsu maggesu ñāṇaṃ ‘‘bodhī’’ti vuccati, tasmā sāmaññato vattukāmatādhippāyavasena ‘‘bodhi vuccati catūsu maggesu ñāṇa’’nti (cūḷani. khaggavisāṇasuttaniddesa 121) vuttaṃ idhādhippetañāṇassapi tadantogadhattā. Atha vā pāḷiyaṃ bhagavato ādimaggattayavacanassa vuttaṭṭhānābhāvā catutthamaggañāṇameva bhagavato uppannaṃ, na bhagavā sotāpannādibhāvaṃ patvā buddho jātoti samayantarappasaṅganivāraṇatthaṃ ‘‘catūsū’’ti vuttaṃ ādittayassa catutthaupanissayasambhavena bodhipariyāyasiddhito. ‘‘Puggalopi senāsanampi upanissayapaccayena paccayo’’ti (paṭṭhā. 1.1.9 paccayaniddesa) vacanato phalahetuko phalajanako rukkho phalarukkhoti viya bodhiheturukkho bodhirukkhoti veditabbo. Ettha ‘‘yasmā kevalaṃ bodhīti rukkhassapi nāmaṃ, tasmā bodhī’’ti parato vuttaṃ. Nigrodhādirukkhato assa visesanavacanaṃ pana tadaññabodhimūlappasaṅganivāraṇatthaṃ. Maggañāṇañhi kusalamūlattā bodhi ca taṃ mūlañcāti saṅkhyaṃ labheyya. Paṭhamābhisambuddho nisīdatīti sambandho. Tena abhisambuddhadivasena saddhiṃ aṭṭhāhaṃ ekapallaṅkena nisinnabhāvaṃ dasseti. Ettha eka-saddo tassa nisajjāsaṅkhātassa pabbajjānuyogānurūpassa pallaṅkassa aññena iriyāpathena anantariyabhāvaṃ athassa akopitabhāvaṃ dasseti. Vimuttisukhanti ettha vimuttiyaṃ vā sukhanti na sambhavati. Pañcamajjhānikattā bhagavato phalasamāpattisaṅkhātā vimutti eva anujaṅghanaṭṭhena nibbānasukhanti vimuttisukhaṃ, taṃ samāpajjanena paṭisaṃvedī anubhavanto nisīdi. Veneyyakālānatikkamanato taṃ apekkhamāno nisīdi, na vimuttisukhasaṅgena.
“尔时”是开启另一章节的两个不变词。借此表明:他并不是在体验解脱乐时以意修习缘起,而是从那种定境出来之后才(修习)。对于已经通过证悟之力善加作意的缘起,之所以一再地作意,是因为它甚深而能引生喜悦,并不是为了开示前所未见之理。由于世尊对一切法都已现量亲证、毫无迷惑,所以对已证悟的境界(作意),就像国王巡视已征服的领土一样,能引生前所未有的喜悦。正如所说:“正观法者,生起非人之喜。”(《法句经》373)“夜之初分”是以持续相连之义而用的业格,借此显示其作意的分别与多样。虽然“顺逆作意”被合在一起说,但为了显示是依此顺序,才说“无明缘”等。在这里,虽然只预期观察流转,但怎么知道呢?因为是初分所应作的;而逆作意则是为了成立顺观中缘与缘所生法确实如此。因为只有无明灭,行才灭,并非其他方式;所以这是为了说明:无明是行的缘,而行是它的果。同样地,对涅槃的观察,顺作意是为了由因灭而成立果灭。在这里,涅槃是依其威力而显示的,并非仅仅是无明等的灭尽。因此,从“从彼,知缘之灭尽”这句话,可以成立顺观并非此处所想要的。对于道的观察则没什么可说的,因为无论从作用还是从所缘来说,那道已在两处(流转与还灭)中被显示出来了。巴利
Atha khoti adhikārantarārambhe nipātadvayaṃ. Tena vimuttisukhaṃ paṭisaṃvedayamāno na paṭiccasamuppādaṃ manasākāsi, kintu tato vuṭṭhāyāti dasseti . Paṭivedhavaseneva sumanasikatassa paṭiccasamuppādassa punappunaṃ manasikaraṇaṃ gambhīrattā assādajananato, na apubbanayadassanādhippāyato. Paccakkhabhūtasabbadhammattā bhagavato asammohato, paṭividdhassa visayato vā manasikaraṇaṃ pana vijitadesapaccavekkhaṇaṃ viya rañño apubbaṃ pītiṃ janeti. Vuttañhi ‘‘amānusī ratī hoti, sammā dhammaṃ vipassato’’ti (dha. pa. 373). Rattiyā paṭhamaṃ yāmanti accantasaṃyogavasena upayogavacanaṃ, tena tassa vikappanānattataṃ dasseti. Kiñcāpi ‘‘anulomapaṭilomaṃ manasākāsī’’ti ekatova vuttaṃ, tathāpi iminā anukkamenāti dassanatthaṃ ‘‘avijjāpaccayā’’tiādi. Tattha ca kiñcāpi pavattimattapaccavekkhaṇā adhippetā kathaṃ paññāyatīti? Paṭhamabhāvāya, paṭilomamanasikaraṇaṃ pana anulome paccayānaṃ, paccayuppannānañca tathābhāvasādhanatthaṃ. Yasmā avijjāya eva nirodhā saṅkhāranirodho, na aññathā, tasmā saṅkhārānaṃ avijjā paccayo, tassā ca saṅkhārā phalanti dīpanato. Tathā nibbānapaccavekkhaṇāya anulomamanasikaraṇaṃ kāraṇanirodhā phalanirodhasādhanatthaṃ. Ettha ca anubhāvato nibbānaṃ dassitaṃ. Na hi taṃ avijjādinirodhamattanti. Tattha ‘‘yato khayaṃ paccayānaṃ avedī’’ti vacanena anulomo nādhippetoti siddhaṃ. Maggapaccavekkhaṇāya vattabbaṃ natthi, ubhayatthapi kiccato, ārammaṇato ca tassa maggassa visayato ca tattha maggo dassito.
对此,有人说:“‘他以意作意逆的缘起’——这不合理,因为涅槃是被以逆的方式指出的,它不可能成为缘起。”回答:不对,因为了知其中的义理。“顺、逆”是一个中性复合词。意思是:他从顺的方向、从逆的方向,以意作意那缘起。否则,就会导致“灭成为逆观的对象”这一过失。而且应当知道,在这逆观中,顺序的确定是由顺观中的顺序确定而成立的。这样一来,缘起的逆就成立为“非缘起”。因此,注释书中说“灭就是不生”等等。如果这样,就产生了前后矛盾。怎么矛盾呢?因为“缘”这个词,通过果对缘的把握以及缘对缘的依存,显示了果朝向生起,所以“不生”不可能成立。因此,有些论师说:应当以遮遣缘与生起两者来理解它的逆,即“非缘起”。这不合理,因为那样就会把它确定为顺,而且没有额外的意义。所以,应当知道“非缘起”才是它的逆。正因如此,世尊在经文中说了缘与缘所生法的灭。在那里,以“无明无余离贪灭故”这样,从缘的已断除缘性之力显示缘灭,从果的不再领受缘之力显示缘所生法灭。经中的灭有两种,从义理上说就是“不生”,因此注释书中说“灭就是不生”。如果这样,岂不是成了涅槃仅仅是缘与缘所生法的灭吗?不是,因为意在显示涅槃的威力。“于了知之时”,意思是在作意之时;否则会导致在那之前未曾了知的过失。巴利
Tatthāha – ‘‘paṭiccasamuppādaṃ paṭilomaṃ manasākāsī’’ti na yujjati, na hi paṭilomāpadesena niddiṭṭhaṃ nibbānaṃ paṭiccasamuppādo bhavitumarahatīti? Vuccate – na, tadatthajānanato. Anulomapaṭilomanti hi bhāvanapuṃsakaṃ. Anulomato, paṭilomato ca taṃ paṭiccasamuppādaṃ manasākāsīti hi tattha attho. Aññathā nirodhassa paṭilomappasaṅgāpattiyevāpajjati. Paṭilome ca panetasmiṃ anukkamaniyamo anulome anukkamaniyamato siddhoti veditabbaṃ. Evaṃ sati paṭiccasamuppādassa paṭilomo nāma apaṭiccasamuppādoti siddhaṃ hoti. Tena vuttaṃ aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘nirodho hotīti anuppādo hotī’’tiādi. Evaṃ sante pubbāparavirodho hoti. Kathaṃ? Paṭiccāti hi iminā phalassa paccayapariggahena, paccayānañca paccayāyattupagamanena tassa uppādābhimukhabhāvadīpanato asamuppādo na sambhavati, tasmā apaṭiccasamuppādoti evaṃ ubhayapaṭikkhepena panassa paṭilomatā veditabbāti eke. Taṃ ayuttaṃ tassa anulomabhāvaniyamanato, atthātisayābhāvato, tasmā appaṭiccasamuppādo tassa paṭilomoti veditabbaṃ. Teneva bhagavatā pāḷiyaṃ paccayapaccayuppannanirodho vutto. Tattha hi ‘‘avijjāya tveva asesavirāganirodhā’’ti evaṃ paccayassa samucchinnapaccayabhāvavasena paccayanirodhaṃ, phalassa paccayapaṭiggahābhāvavasena paccayuppannanirodhañca dīpeti. Duvidho pāḷiyaṃ nirodho atthato anuppādo nāma hotīti katvā aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘nirodho hotīti anuppādo hotī’’ti vuttaṃ. Evaṃ sante nibbānaṃ paccayapaccayuppannānaṃ nirodhamattanti āpajjatīti ce? Na, tassānubhāvadīpanādhippāyato. Viditavelāyanti manasikatavelāyanti attho, aññathā tato pubbe aviditappasaṅgato.
在这里,“禅修”一词:虽然以特相审察来禅修时,菩提分法会显现,或者四圣谛法会显明,但为了显示前行阶段止禅等行者的差别,所以取“所缘审察”的含义。取四圣谛法,虽然似乎与随顺缘起的观察角度相违,但应知这是依“遍知苦者舍断集”这一已成立之义而说的。巴利
Jhāyatoti ettha kāmaṃ lakkhaṇūpanijjhānena jhāyato bodhipakkhiyadhammā pātubhavanti, catuariyasaccadhammā vā pakāsanti, tathāpi pubbabhāge samathādiyānikavibhāgadassanatthaṃ ārammaṇūpanijjhānaggahaṇaṃ. Catusaccadhammaggahaṇaṃ kāmaṃ anulomapaṭiccasamuppādadassanādhikārena virujjhati, tathāpi ‘‘yo dukkhaṃ parijānāti, so samudayaṃ pajahatī’’ti laddhivasena katanti veditabbaṃ.
2 “缘的灭尽”这一说法,是依作用的角度来说的。由此显示了两种涅槃:缘涅槃和依缘涅槃。虽然它并不只是作缘的灭尽,同时也作缘所生法的灭尽,但因为显示了这两者的灭,所以依“因灭则果灭”的道理而说“缘的灭尽”。在“所说之法”这句中,应当知道第一偈里四圣谛的摄取,是依照前面所说的方式以逆序来作的。巴利
2.‘‘Paccayakkhayassā’’ti kiccapariyāyavasena vuttaṃ. Tena paccayanibbānaṃ, tadupanissayanibbānañcāti duvidhaṃ nibbānaṃ dassitaṃ hotīti. Kāmañca taṃ na kevalaṃ paccayakkhayamattaṃ karoti, atha kho paccayuppannakkhayampi karoti. Yato ubhinnampi nirodho dassito, tathāpi hetunirodhā phalanirodhoti katvā ‘‘paccayakkhayassā’’ti vuttaṃ. Vuttappakārā dhammāti ettha catusaccaggahaṇaṃ paṭhamagāthāyaṃ vuttanayavipallāsena katanti veditabbaṃ.
3 3. “集与灭”的含义:在这里,“集”是就作用来说的,“灭”是就所缘的作用来说的。由此,依照它的威力,显示了两种灭,这就是这句话的意思。因为盘腿而坐的地方也叫“结跏趺座”,所以证得果位的地方就称为“结跏趺座”。巴利
3.Samudayanirodhasaṅkhāto atthoti ettha samudayo kiccavasena, nirodho ārammaṇakiriyāya. Etena dvippakārā nirodhā dassitā honti tassa anubhāvassa vasenāti attho. Yasmā pallaṅkābhujitaṭṭhānañca ‘‘pallaṅko’’ti vuccati, tasmā phalādhigamaṭṭhānaṃ ‘‘pallaṅka’’nti vuttaṃ.
牧羊人故事注释巴利
Ajapālakathāvaṇṇanā
4 “欢喜致意”:世尊出于想利益对方的心,与那位婆罗门互相欢喜地问候。“吠陀的终极”:在这里,“终极”指的就是涅槃。或者说,因为已经到达吠陀的终极,所以这里指的是阿拉汉果。在这两种解释里,按第一种,因为他是到达吠陀终极的人,所以是已住于梵行的人;按第二种,因为他是到达吠陀终极的人,所以是已住于梵行的人——应当这样把前后句连接起来理解。虽然从意义上说,已经对那位婆罗门讲说了与四圣谛相应之法,但针对优陀那偈颂里没有提到亲证这一点,所以用“转法轮”来回应。巴利
4.Sammodīti hitakāmatāya bhagavā tena brāhmaṇena saddhiṃ sammodi. Vedehi antanti ettha nibbānaṃ anto nāma. Vedānaṃ vā antaṃ gatattāti ettha arahattaṃ. Tattha paṭhamena vedantagū yasmā, tasmā eva vusitabrahmacariyo. Dutiyena vedantagū yasmā, tasmā vusitabrahmacariyoti evaṃ yojanā kātabbā. Kiñcāpi brāhmaṇassa catusaccayuttaṃ atthato vuttaṃ, udānagāthāyaṃ vuttapaṭivedhābhāvaṃ sandhāya ‘‘dhammacakkappavattana’’nti vuccatīti parihāro.
目恰林达故事注释巴利
Mucalindakathāvaṇṇanā
5 在目恰林达故事中,“此义”是就现在要说的义理而说的。“那远离”指依止远离。“世间无恼害为乐”:用这句话显示第一道,因为通过它断除了对众生以杀害方式生起的嗔害。“于众生中自制”:用这句话显示第二道。因为行道之人由于残余嗔害已被削弱,没有伤害的意图,所以对众生自制。如此,四道也依次被含摄了。巴利
5. Mucalindavatthumhi etamatthanti idāni vattabbamatthaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Taṃ vivekanti upadhivivekaṃ . ‘‘Abyāpajjaṃ sukhaṃ loke’’ti iminā paṭhamamaggaṃ dasseti tena sattesu māraṇavasena uppajjanakabyāpādappahānasiddhito. ‘‘Pāṇabhūtesu saṃyamo’’ti iminā dutiyamaggaṃ dasseti. Maggī hi puggalo avasiṭṭhabyāpādatanuttavasena pāṇabhūtesu saṃyato hoti vihiṃsādhippāyābhāvato. Evaṃ cattāro hi maggā anukkamenāpi gahitā honti.
王处故事注释巴利
Rājāyatanakathāvaṇṇanā
6 王树就是帕塔利树。“从四方来”是经文省略的部分。据说,在他口边所施的四者也有字划的界限。那些商人因为见天神之恭敬,又因为亲眼见到世尊的色身而生起净信,所以皈依了。应当知道:他们听天神说“世尊在王树下最初成正觉”之后,便了解到还没有弟子僧团,而只有已证悟的教法。了知者即是佛陀——这样连接起来理解。巴利
6.Rājāyatanaṃ pātali. ‘‘Catuddisā āgantvā’’ti pāṭhaseso. Mukhavaṭṭiyaṃ kirassa dinnānaṃ catunnampi lekhāparicchedo atthi, te vāṇijā devatāya gāravadassanena bhagavato rūpakāyadassanena pasannattā saraṇaṃ aggahesuṃ. Devatāya ‘‘bhagavā rājāyatanamūle paṭhamābhisambuddho’’ti vacanaṃ sutvā sāvakasaṅghābhāvaṃ, abhisambuddhadhammasabbhāvañca jāniṃsūti veditabbaṃ. Jānantīti buddhāti sambandho.
梵天劝请故事注释巴利
Brahmayācanakathāvaṇṇanā
7 在“我已证得”这句话里,“法”指的是四圣谛的法,因为它极其深奥,所以难以看见;因为难以看见,所以难以领悟。“寂静”就是涅槃,“殊胜”就是没有热恼。这两者都只是针对出世间法而说的。“非寻思所能及”:意思是不能靠推理和反复思索去深入,只有智慧才能了知。“唯智者所能了知”:就是真正修行正道的人才能了知。“一切行寂止”等语,说的都是涅槃。因为涅槃虽然只有一个,但根据果的作用,从不同角度用不同的说法来描述。“乐”指众生。“随随”指稀有、非稀有。这是指他们过去曾听闻世尊成道前的修行,或过去曾证得法的深奥。虽然世尊的四道都是乐行,但针对菩萨的修行则说“我以艰难”。“已开示,当开示”两种读法皆可。被他人所相应。“贪染”指被欲贪、见贪所染。执常我等者不见、将不见。巴利
7.Adhigatokho myāyantiādimhi dhammoti catusaccadhammo, gambhīrattā duddaso. Duddasattā duranubodho. Santoti nibbuto. Paṇītoti atappako. Idaṃ dvayaṃ lokuttarameva sandhāya vuttaṃ. Atakkāvacaroti takkena ākāraparivitakkena ogāhitabbo na hoti, ñāṇeneva avacaritabboti attho. Paṇḍitavedanīyoti sammāpaṭipadaṃ paṭipannehi paṇḍitehi vedanīyo. Sabbasaṅkhārasamathotiādi sabbaṃ nibbānameva. Tañhi phalūpacārena ekampi samānaṃ tathā tathā vuccati. Rāmāti pajā. Anu anu acchariyā anacchariyā. Tesaṃ bhagavato pubbabhāgapaṭipadaṃ sutapubbānaṃ, dhammassa vā gambhīrabhāvaṃ adhigatapubbānaṃ. Kiñcāpi bhagavato cattāropi maggā sukhappaṭipadā, tathāpi bodhisattapaṭipadaṃ sandhāya ‘‘kicchena me’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Pakāsitaṃ pakāsitu’’nti ubhayathāpi pāṭho. Paretehi yuttehi. Rāgarattāti kāmarāgadiṭṭhirāgehi rattā. Attaniccādigāhakā na dakkhanti na passissanti.
8 据说,娑婆主发出“这世间确实要毁灭了”这样的声音,使得十千世界的梵天神们听到后都聚集过来。在智慧之眼中,由于随眠相续的缘故,他们只有极少、极微细的贪等尘垢,具有这样的性质,所以称为“眼中少尘垢性”。“不听闻性”,就是因为不听闻。巴利
8. Sahaṃpati kira ‘‘nassati vata bho loko’’ti imaṃ saddaṃ tathā nicchāreti, yathā dasasahassilokadhātubrahmāno sutvā sannipatiṃsu. Paññāmaye akkhimhi santānānusayitavasena appaṃ parittaṃ rāgādirajaṃ etesaṃ, evaṃsabhāvāti apparajakkhajātikā. Assavanatāti assavanatāya.
对具垢染的导师们。开显此门,就是打开这个。不死之门,指圣道,或者四圣谛法。以三明和四道智,一再地通达佛陀所证悟的。在岩石上,指石头所成的山上。因为远离尘垢,所以适合好好观看,就像一个有眼睛的人从这里到那里,站着不动,就能从四面看到人群。你也是善慧者,有美好的智慧,为了证得一切知智而具备遍眼。因为战胜了一切烦恼之战,所以是战胜战争者。为了引导应受教化的众生渡过生的荒漠等,因为有能力担任商队首领,所以是商主。因为没有欲贪的债务,所以是无债者。巴利
Samalehi satthārehi. Apāpuretanti vivara etaṃ. Amatassa dvāranti ariyamaggaṃ, catusaccadhammaṃ vā. Vijjattayacatumaggañāṇehi punappunaṃ buddhaṃ paṭividdhaṃ. Seleti silāmaye. Vigatarajattā sukhadassanayogge ito ca etto ca āgantvā yathā ṭhito cakkhumā puriso samantato janataṃ passeyya. Tvampi sumedha sundarapañña sabbaññutaññāṇādhigamāya samantacakkhu. Sabbakilesasaṅgāmānaṃ vijitattā vijitasaṅgāma. Jātikantārādinittharaṇatthaṃ veneyyajanasatthavāhanasamatthatāya satthavāha. Kāmacchandaiṇassa abhāvato aṇaṇa.
9 以佛眼,也就是知根器优劣的智和知意乐与随眠的智。这两种智合起来就叫“佛眼”。“在青莲池中”就是指在青莲花丛里。剩下的几个也照这样理解。“沉在水中滋养的”,是指那些一直沉在水里滋养自己的:其中已经冒出水面站着的,正等着阳光照到,今天就会开花;跟水面齐平的,明天会开花;还没浮出水面的,后天会开花。至于完全没入水中的,还有别的种类,叫“高茎青莲”等等。那些根本不会开花、只会成为鱼鳖食物的,这些未载入巴利原文,但应取来阐明。应该把四种人——略知者、广知者、应引导者、随文句者——跟这些对应起来。“回答”就是反过来应答。巴利
9.Buddhacakkhunā indriyaparopariyattañāṇena ca āsayānusayañāṇena ca. Imesañhi dvinnaṃ ñāṇānaṃ ‘‘buddhacakkhū’’ti nāmaṃ. Uppaliniyanti uppalavane. Evaṃ sesesupi . Anto nimuggaposīnīti yāni anto nimuggāneva posiyanti, tattha yāni udakaṃ accuggamma ṭhitāni, tāni sūriyaraṃsisamphassaṃ āgamayamānāni ṭhitāni ajja pupphanakāni. Yāni samodakaṃ ṭhitāni, tāni sve pupphanakāni. Yāni udakānuggatāni, tāni tatiyadivase pupphanakāni. Udakā pana anuggatāni aññānipi sarogauppalādīni nāma honti. Yāni neva pupphissanti macchakacchapabhakkhāneva bhavissanti, tāni pāḷināruḷhāni, āharitvā pana dīpetabbāni. Etehi ugghaṭitaññū vipañcitaññū neyyo padaparamoti cattāro puggalā yojetabbā. Paccabhāsīti pati abhāsi.
“开显”就是敞开。最后两个词的意思是这样:这个殊胜、最上的法,本来是我自己熟悉、能够流畅宣说的,我却觉得身体和言语会劳累,而没有说出来。巴利
Apārutāti vivaṭā. Pacchimassa padadvayassa ayamattho. Ahañhi attano paguṇaṃ suppavattampi imaṃ paṇītaṃ uttamaṃ dhammaṃ kāyavācākilamathasaññī hutvā nābhāsi.
五比丘故事注释巴利
Pañcavaggiyakathāvaṇṇanā
10 现在,应该让所有人都成为有信心的容器,我要满足他们的愿望。所谓“少尘垢类型”,是指因为通过等至镇伏了烦恼,所以成为离烦恼的类型。所谓“他将了知”,如果那些了知律之次第的结集法的人没有作出决定,意思是“我要宣说,他将通达”。像“他的头也会裂开”那样,这里说的是一种不符合事实的臆测。因为在世间,这句话是为了说明他对此有信解倾向,也是为了说明他自己没有从别人的教导中知道。是为了说明他没有同住弟子等等,这些就是这里的作用。所谓“世尊也有智”,是指一切知智以他的死亡为所缘而生起。由此说明,在此之前,当他还在时,对于说法有迅速了知的所缘。也显示了他不是从别人的教导而知道,而是从现前经验中证知死亡。诸佛也不是没有多种智同时具足,所以这句话说得好。因为心的生起以心为先导,否则就会有新众生突然出现的过失。如果对一切法一次性执取,就会有在相违的时间一次性了知的过失,这样一来,一智就变成不真实的过失。因此,对于所证知的法,并非没有多种智的具足,而是因为对于诸法具有无碍智,所以应知世尊就是一切知者,并不是一切时候都一次性了知。那么,是因为了知阿喇拉等人的死亡吗?不是。如果因为那种了知,凡夫也会成为一切知者。某法不存在则某法不存在,由某法存在则成为那样。有人问:由“世尊也有智生起”这句话,可证知他了知他们的死亡,因此按尊者的意见,世尊是一切知者,这已成立,并非在天神告知之前不知。答:不然。因为他是把握了差别之后在中间了知的,而且若依天神则天神也成一切知者的过失。他并不是从任何人的话而了知的。巴利
10. Idāni pana sabbo jano saddhābhājanaṃ upanetu, pūressāmi nesaṃ saṅkappanti. Apparajakkhajātikoti samāpattiyā vikkhambhitakilesattā nikkilesajātiko. Ājānissatīti ce na niṭṭhānamakaṃsu dhammasaṅgāhakā te vinayakkamaññā, ahaṃ deseyyaṃ paṭivijjhissatīti adhippāyo, ‘‘muddhāpi tassa vipateyyā’’ti (a. ni. 8.11; pārā. 2) ettha viya abhūtaparikappo kireso. Loke tassa adhimuttabhāvadīpanatthañhi idaṃ vacanaṃ attano tadupadesena aviditabhāvadīpanatthaṃ. Tassa anantevāsikabhāvadīpanatthanti evamādīni panettha payojanāni. Bhagavatopi kho ñāṇanti sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ tassa maraṇārammaṇaṃ uppajji. Tena tato pubbe tassa sati dhammadesanāya khippaṃ jānanabhāvārammaṇanti dīpeti. Paropadesato ajānitvā paccakkhato maraṇasacchikiriyampi dasseti. Buddhānampi anekañāṇasamodhānābhāvato suvuttametaṃ. Cittapubbikā hi cittappavatti, aññathā navasattapātubhāvappasaṅgo. Sabbadhammānaṃ ekato gahaṇe viruddhakālānaṃ ekato jānanappasaṅgo. Tato ekañāṇassa vitathabhāvappattidoso, tasmā sabbassa vinānekañāṇasamodhānaṃ āpajjitadhammesu appaṭihatañāṇavantattā pana sabbaññū eva bhagavāti veditabbaṃ, na sabbakālaṃ ekato. Āḷārādīnaṃ maraṇājānanatoti ce? Na, tassa jānanena puthujjanassāpi sabbaññutāpattippasaṅgato. Yadābhāvena yadābhāvo tabbhāvena tassābhāvappasaṅgo loke siddhoti. ‘‘Bhagavatopi kho ñāṇaṃ udapādī’’ti vacanato tassa maraṇajānanaṃ siddhanti katvā bhavaṃ mateneva bhagavā sabbaññūti siddhaṃ na devatārocanato pubbe ajānanatoti ce? Na, visesaṃ pariggahetvā antarā pajānanato, devatāya sabbaññubhāvappattidosato ca. Na hi so kassaci vacanena aññāsīti.
那么,这里所说的“了知”是指以那(众生之死)为所缘的智生起吗?不是。否则就得出世间根本没有一切知者的结论。因为我(佛陀)在一个智的刹那中,一切智都已具足,其他诸智也依此而生起。如果说一切知者在一切法境上智的现起已经成立,那么那种智是以自身为所缘境吗?不是。因为因与譬喻的生起(可以说明这一点)。再者,“世尊也生起了智”这句话里有特别的说明,由此可知世尊的智是在天神报告之后才生起的。然而,仅仅因为言辞有先后,并不意味着所表达的内容也有先后,所以这种说法不合理。
“初夜命终”——就是在初夜时分命终。也有人说是“在中夜”。这两种情况都是巨大的损失。因为在七天之内、或在一天之内,就会从已证得的道与果上退失,所以是巨大的损失,即重大的灾患。在这两人当中,阿喇拉投生到无所有处天,伍达咖投生到有顶天。因此,世尊这样思惟,是针对他们在说法时机之外投生这件事,而不是针对他们从人间死去这件事,应当这样理解。这是针对他们未觉悟、不堪受教的状态而言,并非逻辑推理,否则会有不希望的过失——阿阇梨是这样说的。巴利
Apica kimidaṃ tattha jānanaṃ nāma tadārammaṇañāṇuppattīti ce? Na, loke sabbaññuno accantābhāvappasaṅgato. Sādhikā hi mayā ekañāṇakkhaṇe sabbaṃ ñāṇaṃ, tadaññesañca tadaññāṇānuppatti. Apica sabbaññuno sabbadhammavisaye ñāṇapaccupaṭṭhānasiddhi tassa ñāṇassa attanāva attano avisayoti ce? Na, hetunidassanānuppattito. Apica ‘‘bhagavatopi kho ñāṇaṃ udapādī’’ti ettha visesavacanaṃ atthi. Yena devatārocanuttarakālameva bhagavato ñāṇaṃ udapādīti paññāyati. Na hi vacanapubbāpariyabhāvamattena tadatthapubbāpariyatā hoti, tasmā ayuttametaṃ. Abhidosakālaṃkatoti paṭhamayāme kālaṃkato. ‘‘Majjhimayāme’’tipi vadanti. Ubhayatthapi mahājāniyo. Sattadivasabbhantare, ekadivasabbhantare ca pattabbamaggaphalato parihīnattā mahatī jāni assāti mahājāni. Tesu hi dvīsu āḷāro ākiñcaññāyatanabhave nibbatto, udako bhavagge, tasmā nesaṃ dhammadesanāya akkhaṇe nibbattabhāvaṃ sandhāya bhagavā evaṃ cintesi, na ito manussalokato cutibhāvaṃ sandhāyāti veditabbaṃ. Abuddhaveneyyatañca sandhāyāti no takko, aññathā aniṭṭhappasaṅgoti ācariyo.
菩萨出生的时候,有八位婆罗门,既接受梦兆,也把握相好。其中三位分两种情况来记说:“具备这些相的人,如果在家,就成为转轮王;如果出家,就成为佛陀。”五位婆罗门则一向断言:“他不会在家,只会成为佛陀。”这三位停留在咒语理解的限度内。而这五位超越了咒语的理解,舍弃了自己获得的大功德,为了菩萨而更早就出家了。说的就是他们,所以称为“五群”。也有人说是“他们的儿子”,这在注释里已被否定。那么,世尊为什么在这里想“他们对我很有帮助”呢?难道他只对有帮助的人说法,对其他人就不说法吗?不是,他也说法。注释的立场是:这只是忆念他们曾给予的帮助而已。目的是显示自己知恩报恩,赞叹知恩等品德,也为了让别人也去实践知恩等品德,并防止有人以为这是很快就能了知的。巴利
Bodhisattassa jātakāle supinapaṭiggāhakā ceva lakkhaṇapariggāhakā ca aṭṭha brāhmaṇā. Tesu tayo dvidhā byākariṃsu ‘‘imehi lakkhaṇehi samannāgato agāraṃ ajjhāvasanto rājā hoti cakkavatti, pabbajanto buddho’’ti. Pañca brāhmaṇā ‘‘agāre na tiṭṭhati, buddhova hotī’’ti ekaṃsabyākaraṇāva ahesuṃ. Tesu purimā tayo yathāmantapāraṃ gatā. Ime pana mantapāraṃ atikkamantā attanā laddhaṃ puññamahattaṃ vissajjetvā bodhisattaṃ uddissa puretarameva pabbajiṃsu. Ime sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘pañcavaggiyā’’ti. ‘‘Tesaṃ puttā’’tipi vadanti, taṃ aṭṭhakathāyaṃ paṭikkhittaṃ. Kasmā panettha bhagavā ‘‘bahūpakārā kho me’’ti cintesi. Kiṃ upakārakānaṃ eva esa dhammaṃ deseti, itaresaṃ na desetīti? No na deseti. Upakārānussaraṇamattakeneva vuttanti aṭṭhakathānayo. Attano kataññukatavedibhāvappakāsanatthaṃ, kataññutādipasaṃsanatthaṃ, paresañca kataññubhāvādiniyojanatthaṃ, khippajānanappasaṅganivāraṇatthaṃ.
11 在伽耶和菩提道场之间:也就是在伽耶与菩提道场中间、相距三伽浮他的地方。因为从菩提道场到伽耶是三伽浮他,到波罗奈是十八由旬。伍巴咖是在菩提道场和伽耶之间的路上见到世尊的。由于和“之间”这个词搭配,所以用了宾格。在这类情况下,文法家只用一个“之间”,但它应该同时连接第二个词;如果不连接,就构不成宾格。而这里正是连接之后才这样说的。巴利
11.Antarā ca gayaṃ antarā ca bodhinti gayāya ca bodhiyā ca majjhe tigāvutantare ṭhāne. Bodhimaṇḍato hi gayā tīṇi gāvutāni. Bārāṇasinagaraṃ aṭṭhārasa yojanāni. Upako pana bodhimaṇḍassa ca gayāya ca antare bhagavantaṃ addasa. Antarā-saddena pana yuttattā upayogavacanaṃ kataṃ. Īdisesu ca ṭhānesu akkharacintakā ekameva antarāsaddaṃ payujjanti, so dutiyapadepi yojetabbo. Ayojiyamāne pana upayogavacanaṃ na pāpuṇāti. Idha pana yojetvāva vuttoti.
征服了一切:指已经战胜并超越了三界内的一切法,安住于此。渴爱灭尽:指在涅槃中灭尽。解脱:指从所缘中解脱出来。没有与我同等的人:意思是说,没有一个名叫“与我同等”的人,也就是没有能与我相比的人;或者说,由于没有人能指出我一切知智的过失、从而在世间与我抗衡,所以意思是说,没有能与我为敌的人。我将击响不死法鼓:意思是说,为了令众生获得法眼,我将击响不死之鼓,因此前行。巴利
Sabbābhibhūti sabbaṃ tebhūmakadhammaṃ abhibhavitvā ṭhito. Taṇhakkhayeti nibbāne. Vimuttoti ārammaṇato vimutto. Natthi me paṭipuggaloti mayhaṃ paṭipuggalo nāma natthi, asadisoti attho, mama sabbaññubhāve dosaṃ dassetvā loke ṭhātuṃ asamatthatāya mama paccatthikapuggalo vā natthīti attho. Āhañchaṃ amatadundubhinti dhammacakkhupaṭilābhāya amatabheriṃ paharissāmīti gacchāmi.
你堪当成为无边的胜者,意思是“你适合成为那样的人”。这也是他对自己的导师的称呼。“愿你成为”,意思是“贤友,愿你也成为这样”。“他离开了”,是指他去了一个叫弯行者国的地方。世尊看到他(优波迦)的因缘已经成熟,心想:“他在那里会因为猎人的女儿遮波而生起厌离心,之后再来这里,将成为不来者”,于是就和他交谈。后来他果然回来了,出家之后证得不来果,逐渐命终后投生到无烦天,在那里证得了阿拉汉。巴利
Arahasi anantajino bhavituṃ yutto tvanti attho. Idampi attano satthunāmaṃ. Hupeyyāsīti āvuso evampi nāma bhaveyya. Pakkāmīti vaṅkahārajanapadaṃ nāma agamāsi. Bhagavāpi ‘‘tattha tassa migaluddakassa dhītuyā cāpāya ukkaṇṭhitvā puna āgantvā anāgāmī ayaṃ bhavissatī’’ti upanissayasampattiṃ disvā tena saddhiṃ ālapi. So ca tathevāgantvā pabbajitvā anāgāmī hutvā anukkamena kālaṃ katvā avihesu uppajjitvā arahattaṃ pāpuṇi.
12 他们立下约定,订立了契约。“偏离精勤者”,是指从精勤中退堕、失落了。“你们还记得这话说过吗”,以及“话确实说过”,意思是:他没有说过任何这类不同的话。“他们渴望听闻世尊”,是指他们想听世尊的教导。“了知”,就是知道、明白的意思。巴利
12.Saṇṭhapesunti katikaṃ akaṃsu. Padhānavibbhantoti padhānato bhaṭṭho parihīno. ‘‘Abhijānātha nu bhāsitameta’’nti, ‘‘vācaṃ bhāsitameva’’nti ca evarūpaṃ kañci vacanabhedaṃ akāsīti adhippāyo. Bhagavantaṃ sussūsiṃsūti bhagavato vacanaṃ sotukāmā ahesuṃ. Aññāti aññāya, jānitunti attho.
13 13. 那么,世尊为什么要招呼他们呢?是为了让他们更加清楚地承认,为了说明法是极其难以得到的,也是为了防止他们打断话头。这里说的“二”,是指两种极端,用的是双数说法,因为其他内容也都包含在这两者之中。另外,从义理关联来看,渴爱和无明是推动轮回运转的两种首要烦恼。它们因为是止和观的对立面,所以称为“极端”。其中,因渴爱而沉溺于欲乐享受的愚人,会退失止;同样,因无明而沉溺于自我折磨的愚人,会退失观。因此,如果不舍弃这两种极端,就不可能证得不死——这就是上面那句话的意思。此外,这也是为了显示断除昏沉和掉举。因为昏沉的人放弃精进努力,沉溺于欲乐;另一种人则过度精进,沉溺于自我折磨。这两种都与精进的平衡相对立,所以称为“极端”。再者,教法中说了三种行道:粗重行、烧灼行和中道行。其中,粗重行就像“他是杀生者,对欲乐没有过错”这一类;烧灼行就像“他是裸行者,行为放逸”这一类;中道行就像“这就是圣八支道”这一类。其中,欲乐随行就是粗重行,因为它是一切不善的根源;自我折磨随行就是烧灼行,因为它烧灼自己。这两者都因为与中道行相对立而称为“极端”,所以正是针对它们才说“二”。世尊为什么说“出家人不应亲近”,只针对出家人说,而不是针对在家人呢?因为出家人对此有志向,有能力避开欲乐,而且在这方面更为突出,所以这里只指出家人,不说在家人。如果是这样,那为什么还要说欲乐随行呢?他们不是本来就已经舍弃了欲乐,为了出离才出家的吗?不是的,因为他们还依赖这两种极端。要知道,他们在这里是希望通过欲乐得到清净,修习自我折磨随行,又希望死后凭那种苦行的果报享受天界的欲乐,所以实际上更强烈地沉溺于欲乐随行。这里的“极端”应当从“卑劣”的意义来理解,就像“比丘们,这是活命方式中的极端,也就是托钵乞食”等说法中那样。巴利
13. Atha kimatthaṃ āmantesīti? Tatopi suṭṭhutaraṃ paṭijānanatthaṃ, dhammassa abhibhāriyadullabhabhāvadīpanatthaṃ, akkharavikkhepanivāraṇatthañca. Tattha dvemeti antadvayavacanaṃ aññesampi tadantogadhabhāvato. Apica yojanāvasena. Taṇhāavijjāti hi saṃsārappavattiyā sīsabhūtā dve kilesā. Te ca samathavipassanānaṃ paṭipakkhabhūtattā antā nāma. Tesu taṇhāvasena kāmasukhallikānuyogaṃ bhajanto samathaṃ parihāpeti bālo, tathā avijjāvasena attakilamathānuyogaṃ bhajanto gacchanto vipassananti na sakkā ubho dve ante appahāya amataṃ adhigantunti evaṃ vuttā. Apica līnuddhaccapahānadassanametaṃ. Līno hi nikkhittavīriyārambho kāmasukhañca bhajati, itaro accāraddhavīriyo attakilamathaṃ. Ubhopi te vīriyasamatāya paṭipakkhattā antā nāma. Apica tisso sāsane paṭipadā vuttā āgāḷhā, nijjhāmā, majjhimā ca. Tattha āgāḷhā ‘‘pāṇātipātī hoti, natthi kāmesu doso’’ti evamādikā. Nijjhāmā ‘‘acelako hoti, muttācāro’’ti evamādikā, majjhimā ‘‘ayameva ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo’’ti evamādikā. Tattha kāmasukhallikānuyogo āgāḷhā nāma paṭipadā hoti sabbākusalamūlattā. Attakilamathānuyogo nijjhāmā nāma attajjhāpanato. Ubhopete majjhimāya paṭipadāya paṭipakkhabhūtattā antā nāma, tasmā imeva sandhāya dvemeti. Kimatthaṃ bhagavā ‘‘pabbajitena na sevitabbā’’ti pabbajite eva adhikaroti, na gahaṭṭheti? Pabbajitānaṃ tadadhimuttattā, sukhaparivajjanasamatthatāya, tadadhikatattā ca pabbajitā ettha adhikatā, na gahaṭṭhā. Yadi evaṃ kimatthaṃ kāmasukhallikānuyogamāha, nanu te pakatiyāpi kāmapariccāgaṃ katvā taṃ nissaraṇatthaṃ pabbajitāti? Na, tesaṃ antadvayanissitattā. Te hi idha loke kāmena visuddhimicchanti attakilamathānuyogamanuyuttā tasseva tapassa phalena pecca dibbe kāme āsīsamānā daḷhataraṃ kāmasukhallikānuyogamanuyuttāti veditabbā . Antattho pana idha kucchitaṭṭhena veditabbo ‘‘antamidaṃ, bhikkhave, jīvikānaṃ, yadidaṃ piṇḍolya’’ntiādīsu (itivu. 91; saṃ. ni. 3.80) viya.
这里说的“在诸欲中沉溺于欲乐”中的“诸欲”,指的是作为对象的欲,第二种是烦恼欲。与它相应的乐,在这里就叫欲乐。这是为了说明异熟乐本身没有过失。“执著”就是对它的欢喜。“沉溺”就是希望在别的生命里继续追随它。因为它使善法退失,被下劣的人所修习,又从下劣的界生起,所以从卑劣的意义上说它是“下劣的”。因为它是住在村落里的众生的法,所以叫“村俗的”。因为凡夫都有,所以叫“凡夫的”。应当知道,“非圣的”是因为它不是圣者所认可的,与圣法对立,造作非圣的行为,属于非圣的法,是非圣者所惯行的。因为它带来被称为无意义的轮回恐惧,又产生无意义的结果,所以叫“与无义相连的”。只是让自己陷入疲惫,就叫“自我折磨”。它是基于先前的见取而产生的,依靠苦行精进等特殊行为而运转,随着那种见解而沉溺,所以叫“自我折磨的沉溺”。因为它使人离开自己、耗尽精力,以不正确的方法进行,修成了就会投生到鹿胎、牛胎、狗胎、猪胎等畜生道中;果报成熟时则引向地狱,所以叫“与无义相连的”。“这些呢”就是“这些却”。“由如来”是表明自己来得不虚,以此显示:“这不是只凭我自己思考出来的,而是我作为如来,以现等觉的智慧亲自证悟的。”接着用“能生眼”等话,是在赞叹那条行道。就像给病人的药一样,用“能生眼”说明它能清净智慧之眼。用“能生智”说明它能破除黑暗。用“寂静”说明烦恼热恼的止息。用“证知”说明对真理的透彻了知。用“正觉”说明对真理的觉悟。用“涅槃”则应当根据情况,分别配合“有余依涅槃界”和“无余涅槃界”来说明。巴利
Yo cāyaṃ kāmesu kāmasukhallikānuyogoti ettha kāmesūti vatthukāmo adhippeto, dutiyo kilesakāmo . Taṃsampayuttasukhamettha kāmasukhaṃ nāma. Tena vipākasukhassa niravajjabhāvaṃ dīpetīti. Allīyanaṃ nāma tadabhinandanā. Anuyogo nāma bhavantare tadanuyogapatthanā. Hānabhāgiyakarattā kusalapakkhassa, hīnapuggalabhāvitattā, hīnadhātupabhavattā ca lāmakaṭṭhena hīno. Gāmanivāsisattadhammattā gammo. Puthujjanasādhāraṇattā pothujjaniko. Anariyoti ariyānaṃ anadhippetattā, ariyadhammapaṭipakkhattā, anariyakarattā, anariyadhammattā, anariyāciṇṇattā ca veditabbo. Anatthasaṅkhātasaṃsārabhayāvahattā, anatthaphalanibbattakattā ca anatthasaṃhito. Attano kevalaṃ khedūpagamo attakilamatho nāma. So diṭṭhigatapubbakattatapānukkamakiriyāvisesaṃ nissāya pavattati, tassa diṭṭhivasena anuyogo attakilamathānuyogo nāma. Attaviyogavittāparissamattā, anupāyapavattattā sampajjamāno migayonigoyonikukkurayonisūkarayonīsu pātāyati. Vipaccamāno narakaṃ netīti anatthasaṃhito. Ete tvāti ete tu. Tathāgatenāti attānaṃ avitathāgamanaṃ āvi karoti, tenetaṃ dasseti ‘‘na mayā parivitakkitamattena vitakkitā, kintu mayā tathāgateneva satā abhisambodhiñāṇena abhisambuddho’’ti. Cakkhukaraṇītiādīhi pana tameva paṭipadaṃ thometi. Bhesajjaṃ āturassa viya ‘‘cakkhukaraṇī’’ti iminā ñāṇacakkhuvisodhanaṃ vuttaṃ. Ñāṇakaraṇīti iminā andhakāravidhamanaṃ vuttaṃ. Upasamāyāti kilesapariḷāhapaṭippassaddhi vuttā. Abhiññāyāti saccapaṭivedhanaṃ vuttaṃ. Sambodhāyāti saccapaṭivijjhanaṃ vuttaṃ. Nibbānāyāti sopādisesanibbānadhātuyā anupādisesanibbānadhātuyāti evaṃ yathāsambhavaṃ yojetvā kathetabbaṃ.
14 14. 那么,世尊为什么在这里不像在其他地方那样先作次第说法,而是一开始就先说两种不应亲近的极端,然后才开示中道呢?这是为了阻止以自我为首的邪慢,也是为了阻止走上邪道。先说了应避开两种极端之后,为了通过显示自己证得殊胜的方式来表明不奢华等状态,并且通过开示中道来令他们致力于其中,所以后来才开示正道;此后,为了显示该名为中道的圣道的行境,想要以简略和详细的方式开示四谛法,便说“诸比丘,此是苦”等。这是这里的连贯关系。为了说明“诸比丘,此苦是圣谛,于我”等经文的连贯关系,应知此一次第。据说,孔丹尼亚听了如上所说的道之后,说道:“世尊所说的道如何能够生起呢?此道只有在烦恼不生起时才能成立,否则不能。而如果烦恼是从贪生起的,如饥渴那样,那么由不亲近它就可以不生起,或者由那对治就可以使它们不生起。由与那对治相反的勤修苦行就可以不生起。世尊把这两者都称为‘极端’,那么这正道的生起又如何能够成立呢?”世尊说:由不亲近非方便。如何呢?——巴利
14. Kasmā panettha bhagavā aññattha viya anupubbiṃ kathaṃ akathetvā paṭhamameva asevitabbamantadvayaṃ vatvā majjhimapaṭipadaṃ desesīti? Attādimicchābhimānanivāraṇatthaṃ, kummaggapaṭipattinivāraṇatthañca antadvayavajjanaṃ vatvā attano visesādhigamadīpananayena abāhullikādibhāvadassanatthaṃ, tesañca majjhimapaṭipadādīpanena tattha anuyojanatthaṃ pacchā sammāpaṭipadaṃ desesi, tato tassa majjhimapaṭipadāsaṅkhātassa ariyamaggassa visayadassanatthaṃ catusaccadhammaṃ saṅkhepavitthāravasena desetukāmo ‘‘idaṃ kho pana, bhikkhave, dukkha’’ntiādimāha, ayamettha anusandhi. ‘‘Idaṃ dukkhaṃ ariyasaccanti me, bhikkhave’’tiādi suttānusandhipakaāsanatthaṃ ayamanukkamo veditabbo. Yathāvuttaṃ paṭipadaṃ sutvā kira koṇḍañño āha ‘‘kathaṃ bhagavatā vuttapaṭipadāya uppatti siyā. Ayañhi paṭipadā kilesānaṃ anuppattiyā sati sambhavati, na aññathā. Kilesānañca yadi lobhato uppatti khuppipāsānaṃ viya, tadāsevanāya anuppatti siyā, tadavatthussa vā tesaṃ uppatti. Tadavatthuviparītakāyakilamathāsevanāya anuppatti siyā. Ubhopetā bhagavatā ‘antā’ti vuttā, tasmā kathaṃ panetissāya sammāpaṭipadāya uppatti sambhaveyyā’’ti. Bhagavā āha anupāyāsevanato. Kathanti ce? –
智从轮回根本而生,而那轮回根本也被智所断除。
有生命,才有那个;而那个也要靠生命来成办。
因此,有智慧的人为了证得智慧,应当守护自己的生命;
还要守护作为智慧基础的戒。
就像在世间,身体坏散时,命就不存在了;
同样地,戒行被毁坏的人,智慧就不可能生起。
因此,想要成就智慧的人应当具念守护寿命与戒德;
既不该沉溺于感官欲望,也不该用毁坏身体的方式去修行。
“ 耽溺诸欲,则堕为卑劣粗鄙;
愚痴者不趋极端,却走上折磨自己的路。
凡是走上至高无上中道的人,
他很快就证得至高的解脱。”
听完了善逝的这番话,
那位牟尼获得了闻所成的智慧之后,
正入思所成智,
为断此疑,乃发是问。
“ 已舍离洞彻之基的可怕苦行,
您啊,那苦行又如何呢?
请开示:比丘应如是而行,
彼即趣向苦谛之离欲。
仅仅因为看见,就是体验苦。
那正是嗔的缘。”
孔丹尼亚一听完牟尼的话,
他欢喜地起身,随即说道:
“ 世尊,请您为我说明这件事:
比丘如何见到苦谛。”巴利
‘‘Saṃsāramūlato ñāṇaṃ, tañca ñāṇā pahiyyati; Jīvite sati taṃ hoti, tañca jīvitasādhane. ‘‘Tasmā ñāṇāya medhāvī, rakkhe jīvitamattano; Ñāṇasādhanabhūtañca, sīlañca paripālaye. ‘‘Jīvitañca yathā loke, bhinne kāye na vijjati; Tatheva bhinnasīlassa, natthi ñāṇassa sambhavo. ‘‘Tasmā āyuñca sīlañca, ñāṇatthaṃ rakkhatā satā; Sevitabbā na kāmāpi, nāpi kāyavināsanā. ‘‘Kāmesu gedhamupagamma hino gammañca, Accuddhano kilamathaṃ gamupeti mūḷho; Yo majjhimaṃ paṭipadaṃ paramaṃ upeti, So khippameva labhate paramaṃ vimokkha’’nti. Sutvā tadetaṃ sugatassa vākyaṃ, Paññaṃ munī so sutajaṃ labhitvā; Cintāmayaṃ ñāṇa pavesamāno, Ucchindayaṃ pañhamimaṃ apucchi. ‘‘Nibbedhapadaṭṭhānaṃ pahāya ghoraṃ, Tapaṃ kathamivāti so tvaṃ; Brūhi tadeva hoti bhikkhu cara, Virāgamupayāti ca dukkhasaccassa; Dassaneneva dukkhānubhavanā, Tamhi dosassa paccayo’’ti. Sutvāva koṇḍañño munivacanaṃ, Vuṭṭhāya haṭṭho sahasā avoca; ‘‘Udāhara tvaṃ bhagavā mametaṃ, Bhikkhu yathā passati dukkhasacca’’nti.
据说,世尊宣说此经曰:“应当由此得知,思所成慧达到圆满,就是修所成慧的成就。”为什么世尊不先为孔丹尼亚详细开示四谛,却先讲自己证悟的次第呢?这是为了表明:“我不是从任何人那里接受传承来说法,而是自己就这样证得了。”其中,“于先前未曾听闻的诸法中”这句话显示了两层意思:这个法不是我从阿喇拉或伍达咖那里听来的,而是在先前未曾听闻的情况下,我心中生起了智——由此彰显中道的力量。再者,因为这样修行的人即使没有别人的教导也能见到圣谛,所以说:“你们为什么不见我的教导呢?”巴利
Cintāmayissa paññāparipuṇṇā bhāvanāmayipaññāsampatti jānitabbā imehi iti bhagavā suttamidamāhāti kira. Kasmā bhagavā koṇḍaññassa purimameva saccadesanaṃ avaḍḍhetvā attano adhigatakkamamāhāti? Nāhaṃ kassaci āgamaṃ desemi, apica kho sayameva evamadhigatomhīti dassanatthaṃ. Tattha ‘‘pubbe ananussutesu dhammesū’’ti iminā idaṃ atthadvayaṃ dasseti, na mayā āḷārato, udakato vā ayaṃ dhammo suto, kintu pubbe ananussutesveva ñāṇaṃ me udapādīti majjhimāya paṭipadāya ānubhāvaṃ pakāseti. Apica yasmā evaṃ paṭipanno vināpi paropadesena ariyasaccāni passati, tasmā kathaṃ tumheva mamāpadesena na passathāti.
15 眼等五个词,都是智的同义词。因为智能照明诸谛,所以叫眼;因为能了知实义,所以叫智;因为以种种方式了知,所以叫慧;因为能破除烦恼、能觉了,所以叫明;因为能破坏覆盖诸谛的黑暗、能开显诸谛的究竟归宿,所以应当知道叫光。其中,第一转显示的是安立诸谛、使它们互不混杂的慧;第二转显示的是简择限定应作之相的慧;第三转显示的是在诸谛中智的作用之确立。巴利
15.Cakkhuntiādīni pañca padāni ñāṇavevacanāneva. Ñāṇañhi saccānaṃ ālocanato cakkhubhūtatthajānanato ñāṇaṃ. Pakārehi jānanato paññā. Kilesavidāraṇato, vijjanato ca vijjā. Saccacchādakatamavināsanato, tesaṃ gatikoṭipakāsanato ālokoti veditabbaṃ. Tattha paṭhamena parivaṭṭena saccānaṃ aññamaññaṃ asaṅkarato ṭhapanapaññaṃ dasseti, dutiyena tesaṃ kattabbākāraparicchindanapaññaṃ, tatiyena saccesu ñāṇakiccasanniṭṭhānaṃ dasseti.
16 16. “Yāvakīvañca”这个说法,是用两个词来表达“yāva icc eva”,就像“iti cittamano”等那样。因为不被贪等烦恼所动摇,所以是“不动解脱”。“Veyyākaraṇa”指的是说法。因为它能解释、阐明诸法,所以称为“记说”。“Virajaṃ vītamalaṃ”中,virajaṃ 是因为远离了不平等因论;vītamalaṃ 是因为远离了无因论。virajaṃ 是因为断除了常见;vītamalaṃ 是因为断除了断见。virajaṃ 是因为断除了缠缚烦恼;vītamalaṃ 是因为断除了随眠烦恼。“法眼”指的是只见到诸法本身,在那里看不到众生、命者、作者或受者,因此说:“凡是集起之法,那一切都属于灭尽之法。”这是为了说明法眼生起时的行相。法眼以灭为所缘,仅仅依作用而现观诸行,然后生起。巴利
16.Yāvakīvañcāti dvīhi padehi yāvaicceva vuttaṃ hoti ‘‘iti cittamano’’tiādi viya. Rāgādīhi akuppatāya akuppā vimutti. Veyyākaraṇanti dhammadesanā. Sā hi dhammānaṃ byākaraṇato pakāsanato ‘‘veyyākaraṇa’’nti vuccati. Virajaṃ vītamalanti ettha virajaṃ visamahetuvādavigamato. Vītamalaṃ ahetukavādavigamato. Virajaṃ sassatadiṭṭhippahānato. Vītamalaṃ ucchedadiṭṭhippahānato. Virajaṃ pariyuṭṭhānappahānato. Vītamalaṃ anusayappahānato. Dhammacakkhunti dhammamattadassanaṃ, na tattha satto vā jīvo vā kārako vā vedako vāti, tenevāha ‘‘yaṃ kiñci samudayadhammaṃ, sabbantaṃ nirodhadhamma’’nti. Idañhi tassa dhammacakkhussa uppattiākāradassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Tañhi nirodhaṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā kiccavasena eva saṅkhataṃ paṭivijjhantaṃ uppajjati.
17 17.“法轮”在这里指的是说法的智慧,同时也包含证悟的智慧。那么,这里天人为什么要发出“善哉”的声音呢?他们说:因为驱除了种种邪见的黑暗而得到了光明,因为超越了恶趣的恐惧而获得了安稳,因为见到了天宫而欢喜踊跃——他们在这里说的就是诸如此类的原因。有些人说,大地震动和巨大声音的出现,只是法性自然如此。另一些人说,大地震动是因为诸天神想要嬉戏,因为众多天众聚集,也因为世尊身体放出光网。巴利
17.Dhammacakkanti ettha desanāñāṇaṃ adhippetaṃ, paṭivedhañāṇañca labbhateva. Ettha kimatthaṃ devā saddamanussāvesunti? Nānādiṭṭhigatandhakāravidhamanato laddhālokattā, apāyabhayasamatikkamanato assāsaṃ pattattā, devakāyavimānadassanato pītipāmojjacalitattā cāti evamādīnettha kāraṇāni vadanti. Pathavikampanamahāsaddapātubhāvo ca dhammatāvaseneva hotīti eke. Devatānaṃ kīḷitukāmatāya pathavikampo. Bahuno devasaṅghassa sannipātato, bhagavato sarīrappabhājālavisajjanato cāti ekacce.
18 第十八,“出家与达上的差别”就是这里的意思。其中,“iti”这个词,是用来表明他获得“善来比丘”达上的因缘话语到此结束,因为他的比丘身份就是以那句话为终点。“善说”等话,则是为了显示“来吧”这一召唤的目的而说的。句子的关联是:世尊说“来吧,比丘”,又说“法已善说,修行……乃至……圆满”。其中,“修行梵行”是指证得其余三道——即三种圣道——的梵行。目的是什么?就是“正确地作苦的终结”。由于“来吧,比丘”这句话是世尊亲口所说而成就的,所以用原因来代称结果,说为“善来比丘达上”。意思是:那位尊者终其一生就以这个作为达上。因此,注释书中显示了这两层含义:他的这种达上不会因为舍戒等而中断,也不需要另外的达上来起作用。在八种达上中,善来比丘、受教诫、答问、受持八敬法这四种达上,受达上的人不会中断,也不需要其他达上来起作用;其余四种则可能中断。然而,各部派的论师说:“佛与独觉佛的入决定达上,以及把白四甘马达上分为十众所作和五众所作两种,合起来共是十种达上。”那么,从意义上说,这里所谓的“达上”到底是什么呢?它是由证得那法的作用所生起的无学五蕴,是由随顺忍可之思所修习的内在相续。这里所谓的“修习”又是什么呢?就是与那些相反的法、与恶行相对立的状态;因为达到了那种对立状态,所以依着那修习的力量,在某些地方就称为“具足”。正如经中说:“比丘们,具足贪欲的人,不能修习四念处”等等。对此,各部派的论师说:“按照上面所说的达上,有一种与心不相应、属于行蕴的法,叫做‘得’;依着它的相续,前后生起而不断绝,在这期间才算是已受达上;否则的话,在那个相续中另一法生起的刹那,就会导致‘已受达上的人变成未受达上’的过失。”对他们应当说:“请举出经证来。”如果他们这样说:“凡是依着这十种无学法而获得成就、具足,就是圣者、已断烦恼——诸如此类的,就是我们的经证。”这样一来,他们就会犯下“与不存在的法、与其他有情共同具足”的过失。为什么呢?因为经证另有其例。正如经中说——“比丘们,转轮王具足七宝”(长部3.199-200,义同)等等,广说可知。那里是用“具足”这个词来说自在之义。那么,对于那些宝,有没有自在、随欲而转呢?这里,“自在”之义是用“具足”这个词来说的,在别处则是用“得”来说,这是不同的法。这里有什么差别的原因呢?并没有差别,所以,如上所说的相状,就是真正的达上。这个道理,也应当引申到出家等法上。巴利
18. Pabbajjupasampadāvisesanti attho. Tattha iti-saddo tassa ehibhikkhūpasampadāpaṭilābhanimittavacanapariyosānadassano. Tadavasāno hi tassa bhikkhubhāvo. Svākkhātotiādi ‘‘ehī’’ti āmantanāya payojanadassanavacanaṃ. ‘‘Ehibhikkhū’’ti bhagavā avoca ‘‘svākkhāto dhammo cara…pe… kiriyāyā’’ti ca avocāti padasambandho. Tattha cara brahmacariyanti avasiṭṭhaṃ maggattayabrahmacariyaṃ samadhigaccha. Kimatthaṃ? Sammādukkhassantakiriyāyāti attho. ‘‘Ehibhikkhū’’ti iminā bhagavato vacanena nipphannattā kāraṇūpacārena ‘‘ehibhikkhūpasampadā’’ti vuttā. Sāva tassāyasmato yāvajīvaṃ upasampadā ahosīti attho. Tena tassā upasampadāya sikkhāpaccakkhātādinā vicchedā vā tadaññāya upasampadāya kiccaṃ vā natthīti idamatthadvayaṃ aṭṭhakathāyaṃ dasseti. Aṭṭhannampi upasampadānaṃ ehibhikkhuovādapaṭiggahaṇapañhabyākaraṇagarudhammapaṭiggahaṇūpasampadānaṃ catunnaṃ aññatarāya upasampannassa antarā vicchedo vā tadaññūpasampadāya kiccaṃ vā natthi, itarassatthīti. Nikāyantarikā panāhu ‘‘buddhapaccekabuddhānaṃ niyāmokkantisaṅkhātāya upasampadāya ñatticatutthakammupasampadañca dasavaggapañcavaggakaraṇīyavasena dvidhā bhinditvā dasavidhopasampadā’’ti. Kā panettha atthato upasampadā nāmāti? Tadadhigatakiriyāvasena nibbattiyā asekkhā tadadhivāsanacetanāya paribhāvitapañcakkhandhikā ajjhattasantati. Kā panettha paribhāvanā nāma? Tabbipakkhadhammajjhācāraviruddhabhāvo, tassa pattiyā tāya paribhāvanāya vasena katthaci ‘‘samannāgato’’ti vuccati. Yathāha ‘‘lobhena samannāgato, bhikkhave, abhabbo cattāri satipaṭṭhānāni bhāvetu’’ntiādi. Etthāhu nikāyantarikā ‘‘yathāvuttāya upasampadāya pattisaṅkhāto cittavippayutto saṅkhārakkhandhapariyāpanno dhammo atthi, tassa santativasena pubbāpariyaṃ uppajjamānassa yāva avicchedo, tāva upasampannoti, aññathā tato dhammantaruppattikkhaṇe tassa upasampannassa anupasampannabhāvappasaṅgo āpajjatī’’ti. Te vattabbā ‘‘suttaṃ āharathā’’ti. Te ce vadeyyuṃ ‘‘yo tesaṃ dasannaṃ asekkhānaṃ dhammānaṃ upādāya paṭilābhasamannāgamo ariyo hoti vippahīnoti evamādīni no suttānī’’ti. Evaṃ sati asantadhammehi, parasattehi ca samannāgamadosappasaṅgo nesaṃ pāpuṇāti. Kiṃkāraṇaṃ? Suttasambhavato. Yathāha – ‘‘rājā, bhikkhave, cakkavattī sattahi ratanehi samannāgato hotī’’ti (dī. ni. 3.199-200 atthato samānaṃ) vitthāro. Vasibhāvo tattha samannāgatasaddena vutto. Tassahitesu ratanesu vasibhāvo kāmacāro atthīti ce? Ettha vasibhāvo samannāgamasaddena vutto, aññattha pattisaṅkhāto, taṃ dhammantaranti. Kimettha visesakāraṇaṃ? Natthi ca, tasmā yathāvuttalakkhaṇāva upasampadā. Ayameva nayo pabbajjādīsupi netabbo.
19 虽然瓦帕长老在半月第一日……阿说示长老在第四天,就这样在不同的日子里各自生起了法眼,但也应该知道,这里因为教诫的共同性,把瓦帕和跋迪亚、玛哈那玛和阿说示合在一起说了。巴利
19. Kiñcāpi vappattherassa pāṭipadadivase…pe… assajittherassa catutthiyanti evaṃ nānādivasesu pāṭekkaṃ dhammacakkhuṃ udapādi, tathāpi ovādasāmaññena vappabhaddiyānaṃ, mahānāmaassajīnañcettha ekato vuttanti veditabbaṃ.
20 20. “诸比丘,色是无我。”为什么一开始就开示无我的特征呢?因为对这些人来说,即使还在凡夫阶段,另外两个特征(无常和苦)就已经很明显了。他们正是因为看到可爱的欲乐会坏灭,心生警醒才出家,所以无常这个特征对他们来说,至少已经部分地显现了;出家之后,由于修持自我折磨的苦行,身体的苦很明显,而身体的苦又是心的苦的缘,所以心的苦也很明显。因此,世尊避开这两个特征,直接开始开示无我的特征。而在开示无我特征时,他是通过苦的特征来开示的,所以说了“诸比丘,如果色是我”等话。这是为什么呢?因为对他们来说,苦的特征比无常的特征更加明显。他们因为一直从事自我折磨的苦行,并且以苦行为归宿,所以苦的特征非常明显。因此,世尊先用这个非常明显的苦的特征来开示无我的特征,然后又将用无常和苦这两个特征一起来开示同一个无我特征,所以接下来会说:“诸比丘,你们怎么认为?色是常还是无常?”“Kallaṃ nu”的意思是“是否合适”。“这是我的”是渴爱的执取。“我是这个”是慢的执取。“这是我的我”是见的执取。其中,渴爱的执取应该按照一百零八种渴爱行相来理解,慢的执取应该按照九种慢来理解,见的执取应该按照六十二种邪见来理解。巴利
20. ‘‘Rūpaṃ, bhikkhave, anattā’’ti kimatthaṃ āditova anattalakkhaṇaṃ dīpetīti? Tesaṃ puthujjanakālepi itaralakkhaṇadvayassa pākaṭattā. Te hi manāpānaṃ kāmānaṃ aniccatādassanena saṃviggā pabbajiṃsūti aniccalakkhaṇaṃ tāva nesaṃ ekadesena pākaṭaṃ, pabbajitānañca attakilamathānuyogato kāyikadukkhaṃ, tañca mānasassa paccayoti mānasikadukkhañca pākaṭaṃ, tasmā tadubhayaṃ vajjitvā anattalakkhaṇameva dīpetuṃ ārabhi. Tañca dīpento dukkhalakkhaṇeneva dīpetuṃ ‘‘rūpañca hidaṃ, bhikkhave, attā abhavissā’’tiādimāha. Kimatthanti? Aniccalakkhaṇatopi tesaṃ dukkhalakkhaṇassa suṭṭhutaraṃ pākaṭattā. Tesañhi attakilamathānuyogamanuyuttattā, tapparāyaṇabhāvato ca dukkhalakkhaṇaṃ suṭṭhu pākaṭaṃ, tasmā tena tāva suṭṭhu pākaṭena anattalakkhaṇaṃ dīpetvā puna tadeva tadubhayenāpi dīpetuṃ ‘‘taṃ kiṃ maññatha, bhikkhave, rūpaṃ niccaṃ vā aniccaṃ vā’’ti vakkhati. Kallaṃ nūti yuttaṃ nu. Etaṃ mamāti taṇhāggāho. Esohamasmīti mānaggāho. Eso me attāti diṭṭhiggāho. Taṇhāggāho cettha aṭṭhasatataṇhāvicaritavasena, mānaggāho navavidhamānavasena, diṭṭhiggāho dvāsaṭṭhidiṭṭhivasena veditabbo.
出家故事注释巴利
Pabbajjākathāvaṇṇanā
25 25. 在那个时候,世尊让五群比丘中的第五位证得阿拉汉果之后,在第七天向那罗卡长老开示了那罗卡的行道,在跋达巴达满月日知道亚萨的诸根已经成熟,便一直注视着他,住在波罗奈。这就是与“那时,有一位名叫亚萨的”这句话的关联。据说,从他出生开始,他家族的名声,或者说随从众的名声,也就是“声誉”,就特别增长。因此他的父母给他取了这样的名字。“柔软”等话,是优波离长老为了激发后来人生起出离心的踊跃而说的。意思是:像这样具足最上等欲乐享受的人,尚且因为一点点不净相就心生厌离,不顾时间早晚,以喜爱远离之心,把巨大的财富堆像草一样舍弃,从家里出来出家,那还有谁做不到呢?“具足”是指与那些财富等合为一体,也就是不相离。“入睡”的意思是:睡眠在可爱的所缘上止住了心的活动之后,超越了、压伏了那心,将其带到自己的掌控之下。“整夜”指三个时分。以此说明亚萨看到随从们变形的原因。不过这里的“夜”字,应当知道用于“太阳不现之时”和“时分”两种意思。在“时分”这个意思上,也用于“三衣别处”等处。“腋下”指腋窝。“喉部”指喉咙下面。意思是:睡觉的女人把喉咙放在鼓的上部,因此她看见鼓在喉部。“ Āḷambara”指一种鼓。它两边开口,细而长。对于宽窄均匀的乐器,这是它的名称。“说胡话”指因为做梦等而说些没有关联的胡话。“像坟场”意思是:他把自己的随从看作像坟场一样。这是关联。“过患”指不净的状态。“心住于厌离”意思是:以想要解脱为特征的厌倦,使心倾向那边。“说出感叹”意思是:他说出满意的话:“从今以后,我不会再和这些女人在一起了。”据说,在亚萨看到放逸经中所说的随从时,有两种情况变得明显:烦恼力量强大,以及不净相极为粗显。这样一来,在更粗显的不净相上,由于烦恼的作用,这整个世界都被压迫、迷醉。对于正在观察“啊,烦恼真是更加强大”的他来说,那两种情况都变得明显,因此他这样说了。巴利
25. Yena samayena bhagavā pañcavaggiye pañcamiyaṃ arahatte patiṭṭhāpetvā sattamiyaṃ nāḷakattherassa nāḷakapaṭipadaṃ ācikkhitvā bhaddapadapuṇṇamāyaṃ yasassa indriyānaṃ paripakkabhāvaṃ ñatvā taṃ udikkhanto bārāṇasiyaṃ vihāsi, tena samayena yaso nāmāti sambandho. Tassa kira uppattito paṭṭhāya tassa kulassa kittisaddasaṅkhāto, parijanasaṅkhāto vā yaso visesato pavaḍḍhati. Tena tassa mātāpitaro evaṃ nāmamakaṃsu. ‘‘Sukhumālo’’tiādi kimatthaṃ āyasmatā upālittherena vuttanti? Pacchimajanassa nekkhamme samussāhanajananatthaṃ. Evaṃ uttamabhogasamappitānampi uttamesu bhogesu appamattakenāpi asubhanimittena vitajjetvā kālākālaṃ agaṇetvā vivekābhiratiyā mahantaṃ bhogakkhandhaṃ tiṇaṃ viya pahāya gehato nikkhamanā ahosi, kassa panaññassa na siyāti adhippāyo. Samaṅgībhūtassāti tehi ekattaṃ upagatassa, avivittassāti attho. Niddā okkamīti manāpesupi visayesu pavattiṃ nivāretvā tassa cittaṃ atikkamitvā abhibhavitvā attano vasaṃ upanesīti attho. Sabbarattiyo cāti tayopi yāme. Tena parijanassa vikāradassane kāraṇaṃ dasseti. Ratti-saddo panettha kāle sūriyābhāve, yāme ca pavattatīti viññeyyo. Yāmevidha viññeyyo ticīvaravippavāse ca. Kaccheti kacchapasse. Kaṇṭheti kaṇṭhassa heṭṭhā. Mudiṅgassa hi upari kaṇṭhaṃ ṭhapetvā sayantiyā kaṇṭhe mudiṅgaṃ addasāti attho. Āḷambaranti paṇavaṃ. Ubhatomukhassa tanukā dīghā. Vitthinnasamatalassa vāditassa etaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Vippalapantiyoti supinadassanādivasena asambandhapalāpaṃ vippalapantiyo. Susānaṃ maññeti susānaṃ viya addasa sakaṃ parijananti sambandho. Ādīnavoti asubhabhāvo. Nibbidāya cittaṃ saṇṭhātīti vimuccitukāmatāsaṅkhātāya ukkaṇṭhāya cittaṃ namīti attho. Udānaṃ udānesīti ‘‘ito paṭṭhāya imāhi itthīhi saha nāhaṃ bhavissāmī’’ti attamanavācaṃ nicchāresi. Dve kira ākārā tassa pamādasuttaparijanadassane pākaṭā jātā kilesānaṃ balavabhāvo, asubhākārassa atioḷārikabhāvo ca. Evaṃ sati oḷārikatare ca asubhākāre kilesavasenāyaṃ sabbopi loko ettha pīḷito mucchito. Aho kilesā balavatarāti hi passato passato tassa dvepi te ākārā pākaṭā jātā, yenevamavocāti.
穿上金拖鞋这句话,是在说明他因为无所执著而走得从容自在。因为他内心被强烈的紧迫感所震撼,即使随从们醒着,他也无法忍受他们可能阻止自己离开,于是独自思量着,从容地走了。“非人”指的是天神。因为天神与人类在通达善趣的智慧、形相等各方面有共通之处,所以被称为“非人”。不同种类/种姓的畜生等并不会被称为“非婆罗门”或“非贱民”;而是因为种姓相同,贱民等才被称为“非婆罗门”。同样,因为与人类在某些方面有共通之处,天神才被称为“非人”。否则,畜生等不是人,也应该被称为“非人”了。巴利
‘‘Suvaṇṇapādukāyo ārohitvā’’ti etenassa nissaṅgatāya vissaṭṭhagamanaṃ dīpeti. So hi balavasaṃvegābhitunnahadayattā parijanassa pabodhe satipi attano gamananivāraṇasamatthabhāvaṃ asahamāno attānaṃ takkento vissaṭṭho agamāsi. Amanussāti devatā. Tā hi manussehi sugatipaṭivedhañāṇasaṇṭhānādiguṇasāmaññena ‘‘amanussā’’ti vuccanti. Na hi asamānajātikā tiracchānādayo ‘‘abrāhmaṇā’’ti vā ‘‘avasalā’’ti vā vuccanti, kintu jātisabhāgatāya eva vasalādayo ‘‘abrāhmaṇā’’ti vuccanti, evaṃ manussehi kenaci ākārena sabhāgatāya devatā ‘‘amanussā’’ti vuttā. Aññathā manussā na hontīti tiracchānagatāpi ‘‘amanussā’’ti vattabbā bhaveyyuṃ.
26 他看到森林密处,心想“我已经从城里脱身了”,因为心生欢喜,就在世尊不远处发出感叹。世尊说“亚萨啊,这里”,是就涅槃而说的。因为涅槃不被渴爱等烦恼所逼迫、所侵扰,而且仅仅见到它就能产生喜乐。世尊的意思是:“我要说法,你只要坐在这里,就能证得那涅槃。”
“据说”这个词用在表示不信、无知和轻蔑的场合,这里表示无知。“从金拖鞋下来”,就是从金拖鞋上走下来。这里是以主格形式表示从格“从……出来”的意思。他刚坐下,世尊没有先作任何寒暄,也没有打招呼,就直接为他次第说法。这是因为他的根器已经非常成熟,为了不让他错过证悟的时机,他的心已经朝向不被逼迫、不被侵扰的恶法之教,而且世尊看到那位富有的居士不久就会到来。为什么世尊对这位内心深受震动、渴望从轮回中解脱的人,首先就讲说关于诸有的过患和出离的功德的次第说法呢?是为了让他看到一切有的过患。因为他只看到了人间的逼迫和侵扰,没有看到天界的,所以可能会认为天界是快乐的。如果对天界生起快乐的想法,就会把心导向涅槃,因此世尊为了也显示天界的过患,就开始讲次第说法。在这里,讲布施、布施的功德、持戒的功德时,就叫作说布施持戒论。讲天界的美好时,就叫作说天界论。其中,讲事欲和烦恼欲的无常性、卑劣性和大过患时,就是显示诸欲的过患、卑贱和杂染。讲出离中没有这些过患,以及从这些欲中出离的相反功德时,就是显示出离的功德。其中“卑贱”的意思是贬损、低劣。“杂染”的意思是杂染、恼害或逼恼。能任心,是靠慧根的力量,因为见结和疑结都被慧根摧毁了。柔软心,是靠与念根相应,阻止害、恚等烦恼进入,让柔软等善法进入,使俱生心变得柔软。靠定根的力量,成为无盖心,因为它特别能对治盖。靠精进根的力量,成为踊跃心,因为它能对治昏沉睡眠所摄的退缩状态。靠信根的力量,成为净信心,因为它具有净信的特征。“独得法”是就所缘境而言,优波离长老在这里显示这个教说。因为诸谛正是独得教说的所缘境;否则,苦等也会变成独得法教,因为在显示它时已经开示了诸谛。巴利
26. Vanagahanaṃ disvā ‘‘sumuttohaṃ nagarato’’ti pamuditattā bhagavato avidūre udānesi. Idaṃ kho yasāti bhagavā nibbānaṃ sandhāyāha. Tañhi taṇhādikilesehi anupaddutaṃ, anupasaṭṭhatañca dassanamattenāpi assādajananato. Dhammaṃ desessāmīti yena taṃ nibbānaṃ idha nisinnamattova tvaṃ adhigamissasīti adhippāyo. Kirāti assaddheyyaabyattiparihāsesu nipāto, idha abyattiyaṃ. Suvaṇṇapādukāyo orohitvāti ca suvaṇṇapādukāhi otaritvā. Nissakkatthe hi idaṃ paccattavacanaṃ. Tassa nisinnamattasseva aññaṃ sammodanīyaṃ kathaṃ akatvā anāmantetvā anupubbiṃ kathaṃ kathesi. Suparipakkindriyattā, paṭivedhakkhaṇānatikkamanatthaṃ anupaddutānupasaṭṭhatānaṃ pāpakadhammadesanābhimukhacittattā, seṭṭhissa gahapatino acirāgamanadassanato ca. Kimatthaṃ bhagavā tassa suṭṭhutaraṃ saṃviggahadayassa bhavato muccitukāmassa bhavābhavūpāyānisaṃsakathaṃ paṭhamameva kathesīti? Sabbabhavādīnavadassanatthaṃ. So hi manussalokasseva upaddutaupasaṭṭhabhāvaṃ addasa, na saggānanti kadāci saggalokaṃ sukhato maññeyya. Tattha sukhasaññena nibbānābhimukhaṃ cittaṃ peseyyāti saggānampi ādīnavaṃ dassetukāmatāya anupubbiṃ kathaṃ ārabhi. Ettha dānaṃ, dānānisaṃsaṃ, sīlānisaṃsañca kathento dānasīlakathaṃ katheti nāma. Saggavaṇṇaṃ kathento saggakathaṃ katheti nāma. Tattha vatthukāmakilesakāmānaṃ aniccataṃ, apasādataṃ, mahādīnavatañca kathento kāmānaṃ ādīnavaṃ, okāraṃ, saṃkilesañca pakāseti. Nekkhamme tadabhāvato ca taṃnissaraṇato ca tabbiparītaṃ ānisaṃsaṃ kathento nekkhamme ānisaṃsaṃ pakāseti nāma. Tattha okāranti avakāraṃ lāmakabhāvaṃ. Saṃkilesanti saṃkilissanaṃ bādhanaṃ upatāpanaṃ vāti attho. Kallacittaṃ paññindriyassa ānubhāvena, diṭṭhiyogavicikicchāyogānaṃ paññindriyena vihatattā. Muducittaṃ satindriyasamāyogena, vihiṃsāsārambhādikilesapavesaṃ nivāretvā cittamudutādikusaladhammappavesanaṃ karontaṃ sahajātaṃ cittaṃ muduṃ karoti. Samādhindriyassa ānubhāvena vinīvaraṇacittaṃ. Tañhi visesato nīvaraṇavipakkhabhūtanti. Vīriyindriyavasena udaggacittaṃ. Tañhi thinamiddhasaṅkhātalīnabhāvavipakkhanti. Saddhindriyassa ānubhāvena pasannacittaṃ tassa pasādalakkhaṇattā. Sāmukkaṃsikāti etaṃ visayavasena desanaṃ upālitthero pakāseti. Saccāni hi sāmukkaṃsikadesanāya visayāni. Aññathā dukkhādīni sāmukkaṃsikā dhammadesanāti āpajjati tassa vibhāvane saccānaṃ niddiṭṭhattā.
27 “四方”就是四个方向。“作了准备”就是做了安排。这是为了什么?是为了防止两个人证得各自应得的殊胜果位时出现障碍。如果那位父亲见到了儿子,儿子证得法眼和阿拉汉果,那位富有的居士证得法眼,就都不会发生。一个已经见谛的人,自己说着“把你母亲的生命还来”,他还有什么做不出来的?耶舍听到这番话,即使已经是阿拉汉,如果他自己不拒绝,只是仰望着世尊,他又怎么能稳得住呢?巴利
27.Catuddisāti catūsu disāsu. Abhisaṅkharesīti abhisaṅkhari. Kimatthanti ce? Ubhinnaṃ paṭilabhitabbavisesantarāyanisedhanatthaṃ. Yadi so puttaṃ passeyya, puttassapi dhammacakkhupaṭilābho arahattuppatti, seṭṭhissapi dhammacakkhupaṭilābho na siyā. Diṭṭhasaccopi ‘‘dehi te mātuyā jīvita’’nti vadanto kimaññaṃ na kareyya. Yasopi taṃ vacanaṃ sutvā arahāpi samāno sayaṃ appaṭikkhipitvā bhagavantaṃ ullokento kimaññāya saṇṭhaheyya.
28 世尊因为两人都已达到应当证得的殊胜顶点,所以又让他平静下来。说“先前是在家人”,是针对他证得入流果的那个时候说的。因为入流者还能住在家里,所以就叫在家人,是没出家的人。现在他已经出家,不可能再住在家里,所以不叫“在家人”,因此世尊这样说。“他所见的”是关联语,意思是“由他见到的”。由于前面“譬如先前是在家人”这句话已经让人理解了,后面就针对穿着在家白衣的亚萨说“由善男子亚萨作为随从沙门”。其中,“你且修习、圆满增上戒学所摄的梵行,直到彻底灭尽苦,直到死心为止”。古师认为这是针对相状梵行而说的,这也是合宜的。因为那位尊者正是针对仅有相状而说“大德,愿我得受出家、受达上”。巴利
28. Ubhohipi pattabbavisesakoṭiyā pattattā bhagavā puna taṃ paṭippassambhesi. Pubbe agārikabhūtoti tassa sotāpannakālaṃ sandhāyāha. Sotāpanno hi agāramajjhe vasanārahattā agāriyabhūto nāma hoti apabbajito. Sampati pabbajito samāno agāramajjhavasanassa abhabbattā ‘‘agāriko’’ti na vuccati, tasmā evamāha. Yassa diṭṭhoti sambandho, yena diṭṭhoti vuttaṃ hoti. ‘‘Seyyathāpi pubbe agārikabhūto’’ti vacanena laddhanayattā pacchā gahapati gihivesadhārimeva yasaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘yasena kulaputtena pacchāsamaṇenā’’ti. Tattha cara brahmacariyanti ābhisamācārikasīlaṃ brahmacariyaṃ cara paripūrehi tāva, yāva sammādukkhassantakiriyā, yāva cuticittāti adhippāyo. Liṅgabrahmacariyaṃ sandhāyāti porāṇā, tañca yuttaṃ. Liṅgamattañhi sandhāya so āyasmā ‘‘labheyyāhaṃ, bhante, pabbajjaṃ upasampada’’nti āha.
世尊为什么在亚萨的母亲和妻子还没供养饭食之前,就先为她们说法呢?因为她们被亚萨出家这件事带来的忧悲之箭刺透了心,如果先让她们供饭,她们就不会以欢喜心去布施;而且对导师心生忧恼之后,也无法证得道果。所以世尊先让她们的心摆脱忧悲之箭,得到安稳,然后才让她们完成供饭这件事。巴利
Kimatthaṃ bhagavā yasassa mātu, pajāpatiyā ca bhattakiccaṃ akatvāva dhammaṃ desesīti? Yasassa pabbajjāya sokasallasamappitattā dānañca somanassikacittena na dadeyyuṃ, satthari ca domanassappattā hutvā maggapaṭivedhampi na labheyyunti bhagavā paṭhamaṃ tāva tā vigatasokasallahadayāyo katvā puna bhattakiccaṃ akāsi.
30 “长者与随长者”是指“依次第的诸长者”,这是古师们的解释。有文献写道:“凡属于长者与随长者的家族,那些就是长者与随长者的家族,也就是那些长者与随长者们的家族。”关于“法与律”,在这里,从意义上说,教法、梵行、圣典是同一回事。或者,以法而制定的律,不是以刑罚等手段制定的,所以叫“法与律”;为法而制定的律,不是为了伤害而制定,所以叫“法与律”;依法而制定的律,不是非法而制定,所以叫“法与律”;法本身就是律,不是非法,所以叫“法与律”;是诸法的律,不是其他的律,所以叫“法与律”;或者,因为世尊是法身、是法主,所以称为“法”,属于那位法的律,不是诡辩者的律,所以叫“法与律”。或者,按照同位关系,“法与律”就像“青莲花”一样,法与律二者是一体,所以叫“法与律”;就像“果与非果”是中性词一样,这里依据阳性词的用法,其词性得以成立;或者,以法为律的,就是“法与律”,就像“白衣之人”;或者,与法相应的律,就是“法与律”,就像“马与车”等。应当按这些方式来理解其释义。巴利
30.Seṭṭhānuseṭṭhīnanti anukkamaseṭṭhīnanti porāṇā. ‘‘Seṭṭhino cānuseṭṭhino ca yāni kulāni, tāni seṭṭhānuseṭṭhāni kulāni, tesaṃ seṭṭhānuseṭṭhīnaṃ kulāna’’nti likhitaṃ. Dhammavinayoti sāsanabrahmacariyaṃ pāvacananti idha atthato ekaṃ. Atha vā dhammena vinayo, na daṇḍasatthehīti dhammavinayo, dhammāya vinayo, na hiṃsatthanti vā dhammato vinayo, nādhammatoti vā dhammo vinayo, nādhammoti vā dhammānaṃ vinayo, na aññesanti vā dhammakāyattā, dhammasāmittā vā dhammo bhagavā, tassa dhammassa vinayo, na takkikānanti vā dhammavinayo. Samānādhikaraṇavasena vā dhammavinayo nīluppalaṃ viya, dhammo ca vinayo cāti dhammavinayo phalāphalaṃ viya napuṃsakamiti pulliṅgāpadesato assa liṅgabhāvo siddho, yassa vā dhammo vinayo, so dhammavinayo setapaṭo puriso viya, dhammena yutto vā vinayo dhammavinayo assaratho viyāti evamādinā nayena yojanā veditabbā.
34 “带到断界”这句话,是为了说明剃发和取回衣的事情才说的。因此,说“在有比丘的精舍里,也可以让别人给他剃发”,这是不成立的。为了说明“令出家”这句话的用意,才说“穿上袈裟再来吧”。如果戒师没有做剃除须发等事,就给求出家的人授三皈依,出家就不成立。如果诵了甘马语之后再授达上,达上就成立。有些人认为:因为从这里可以看出,还没有得到衣的人也能成就达上,而且没有甘马的过失,所以这是合理的。在这里有偈颂——巴利
34.‘‘Khaṇḍasīmaṃ netvā’’ti bhaṇḍukammārocanapaṭiharaṇatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Tena ‘‘sabhikkhuke vihāre aññampi etassa kese chindā’’ti vattuṃ na vaṭṭatīti. Pabbājetvāti imassa adhippāyapakāsanatthaṃ ‘‘kāsāyāni acchādetvā ehī’’ti vuttaṃ. Upajjhāyo ce kesamassuoropanādīni akatvā pabbajatthaṃ saraṇāni deti, na ruhati pabbajjā. Kammavācaṃ sāvetvā upasampādeti, ruhati upasampadā. Appattacīvarānaṃ upasampadāsiddhidassanato, kammavipattiyā abhāvato cetaṃ yujjatevāti eke. Hoti cettha –
“ 具相者唯是出家,异相者则是其余(受具足戒);
已舍旧相者,此二皆成——余师如是说。”巴利
‘‘Saliṅgasseva pabbajjā, viliṅgassāpi cetarā; Apetapubbavesassa, taṃ dvayaṃ iti cāpare’’ti.
比丘亲手给的,或者通过指示给的袈裟,才可以用;没给的就不可以用。不过这只是说在有袈裟可给的情况下;如果没有袈裟,那就不可能——这是他们的用意。而且,诸比丘,应该这样让他出家、受达上。首先……诸比丘,我允许以这三次皈依来出家、受达上。在这里,因为要显示用意:我允许仅仅以这依次给予的三次皈依来出家、受达上。巴利
Bhikkhunā hi sahatthena vā āṇattiyā vā dinnameva kāsāvaṃ vaṭṭati, adinnaṃ na vaṭṭatīti pana santesveva kāsāvesu, nāsantesu asambhavatoti tesaṃ adhippāyo. Evañca pana, bhikkhave, pabbājetabbo upasampādetabbo. Paṭhamaṃ…pe…anujānāmi, bhikkhave, imehi tīhi saraṇagamanehi pabbajjaṃ upasampadanti ettha iminā anukkamena dinnehi tīhi saraṇagamanehi pabbajjaṃ upasampadaṃ anujānāmi kevalehīti adhippāyadassanato –
对于先前已取得相状的人,即使裸体,两者也可以成立。
“ 对非此者则不然”,这是我们的主张,与所有读法相符。巴利
Ādinnapubbaliṅgassa, naggassāpi dvayaṃ bhave; Netarassāti no khanti, sabbapāṭhānulomatoti. –
阿阇梨。关于“阿阇梨未给予的,则不合宜”,这里写道:“他们说,出家不成立。”古抄本的词条注释里也是这样写的。Urā等是处所的名称。Saṃvuta等是仪轨的名称。文中写道:“应作鼻音化,连成一体,在施与时不应中途停顿而说。即使分开而施,也只在所说的位置分开,别处则不合宜。”在作鼻音化施与时,如果出错,说成“buddhaṃ saraṇaṃ gacchāmi”,落入与m音混杂的境地,伍巴帝萨长老认为这是合宜的。法喜长老说:混杂而说是合宜的,但在说的时候,不应在鼻音的位置断开。“在甘马语中也是如此”,这样说。只有双方都清净才合宜——在这里,大长老因为掉牙等原因而说不清楚时,聪明的沙弥让站在近旁的求出家者清楚地说出来。如果让他说出大长老没说过的话,就不合宜。如果甘马语由另一位比丘说出,则合宜。因为作甘马的是僧团,不是个人。不应以“不同界内所行甘马语相同”为理由而否定。如果大长老清楚地说了,而求出家者说不出来,沙弥自己先说一遍再让他跟着说,那就是双方清净,因为说的正是大长老说过的话。皈依佛时,是皈依佛不共的功德;皈依法时,是皈依涅槃;皈依僧时,是皈依有学法和无学法——应这样理解,这是以“未取者而取”的方式来说的。否则会有三皈依混淆的过失。这一切对他而言,是适宜与不适宜的——即脱离十学处后的执取与非执取等。由于说“应在阿毗沙摩遮罗学处中调伏”,应以学处、亲教师义务等阿毗沙摩遮罗戒来圆满。其中,若不做应做的,或做了不应做的,就说明他应受惩罚。巴利
Ācariyo . Ācariyena adinnaṃ na vaṭṭatīti ettha ‘‘pabbajjā na ruhatīti vadantī’’ti likhitaṃ. Porāṇagaṇṭhipadepi tatheva likhitaṃ. Urādīni ṭhānāni nāma. Saṃvutādīni karaṇāni nāma. ‘‘Anunāsikantaṃ katvā ekasambandhaṃ katvā dānakāle antarā aṭṭhatvā vattabbaṃ. Vicchinditvā dānepi yathāvuttaṭṭhāne eva vicchedo, aññatra na vaṭṭatī’’ti likhitaṃ. Anunāsikante diyyamāne khalitvā ‘‘buddhaṃ saraṇaṃ gacchāmī’’ti makārena missībhūte khette otiṇṇattā vaṭṭatīti upatissatthero. Missaṃ katvā vattuṃ vaṭṭati, vacanakāle pana anunāsikaṭṭhāne vicchedaṃ akatvā vattabbanti dhammasiritthero. ‘‘Evaṃ kammavācāyampī’’ti vuttaṃ. Ubhatosuddhiyāva vaṭṭatīti ettha mahāthero patitadantādikāraṇatāya acaturassaṃ katvā vadati, byattasāmaṇero samīpe ṭhito pabbajjāpekkhaṃ byattaṃ vadāpeti. Mahātherena avuttaṃ vadāpetīti na vaṭṭati. Kammavācāya itaro bhikkhu ce vadati, vaṭṭatīti. Saṅgho hi kammaṃ karoti, na puggaloti. Na nānāsīmapavattakammavācāsāmaññanayena paṭikkhipitabbattā. Atha therena caturassaṃ vuttaṃ pabbajjāpekkhaṃ vattuṃ asakkontaṃ sāmaṇero sayaṃ vatvā vadāpeti, ubhatosuddhi eva hoti therena vuttasseva vuttattā. Buddhaṃ saraṇaṃ gacchanto asādhāraṇe buddhaguṇe, dhammaṃ saraṇaṃ gacchanto nibbānaṃ, saṅghaṃ saraṇaṃ gacchanto sekkhadhammaṃ, asekkhadhammañca saraṇaṃ gacchatīti aggahitaggahaṇavasena yojanā kātabbā. Aññathā saraṇattayasaṅkaradoso. Sabbamassa kappiyākappiyanti dasasikkhāpadavinimuttaṃ parāmāsāparāmāsādi. ‘‘Ābhisamācārikesu vinetabbo’’ti vacanato sekhiyaupajjhāyavattādiābhisamācārikasīlamanena pūretabbaṃ. Tattha cārittassa akaraṇe vārittassa karaṇe daṇḍakammāraho hotīti dīpeti.
第二魔事注释巴利
Dutiyamārakathāvaṇṇanā
35 从“以此因由”这句话来看,经典中说的“如理作意与正勤”应当理解为表示原因的从格。巴利
35. ‘‘Tena hetunā’’ti vacanato pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘yonisomanasikārāsammappadhānā’’ti hetvatthe nissakkavacananti veditabbaṃ.
优楼频螺神变故事注释巴利
Uruvelapāṭihāriyakathāvaṇṇanā
37-8 “我们应当住在一起”这句话,据说是用亲爱的话语来摄受他,意思是“你和我一起住”。
“以光明对光明”,就是以威力对威力,或者是以火界对火界。
“两者都成为有光焰的”,这里的属格是表示轻视的意思,或者是表示处格的第七义。被燃烧的只是火屋本身,并不是住在里面的有情众生,因为神通所行的境界是不可思议的。
那么,世尊为什么不加持火屋,让它也不被烧呢?因为如果那样,就会招来“自己没有痛苦,这也不算极其稀有”之类的讥嫌。
为什么要毁掉那座属于别人、用大量资具建成的房子呢?因为世尊有意用神通威力让它恢复原样。
“被耗尽”就是被灭尽。
“以光明对光明”,就是以威力对威力。由于火屋很小,所以其他的解释就说不通了。这个意思和“不能忍受毁坏”这句话非常吻合。因为在那里,对神通威力的毁坏就叫作“毁坏”。
“以叶”——古师们也说是“以莲叶”。他们认为,世尊当时是站在莲丛中间。巴利
37-8.Vaseyyāmāti ‘‘tvañca ahañca vaseyyāmā’’ti piyavacanena tassa saṅgaṇhanatthaṃ vuttaṃ kira. Tejasā tejanti ānubhāvena ānubhāvaṃ. Tejodhātuyā vā tejodhātuṃ. Ubhinnaṃ sajotibhūtānanti anādaratthe sāmivacanaṃ, bhāvasattamīatthe vā. Agyāgārameva ādittaṃ, na tattha vasanako sattajātiko. Acinteyyo hi iddhivisayo. Kasmā pana bhagavā agyāgārampi anādittaṃ nādhiṭṭhāsīti? Attano dukkhuppādābhāvassa anativimhādibhāvappasaṅgato. Kimatthaṃ parasantakaṃ mahāsambhārapavattaṃ taṃ vināsetīti? Puna yathāporāṇaṃ iddhānubhāvena kattukāmatādhippāyato. Pariyādinnoti khayaṃ nīto. Tejasā tejanti ānubhāvena ānubhāvaṃ. Agyāgārassa parittattā itaro attho na sambhavati. Ayamattho ‘‘makkhaṃ asahamāno’’ti iminā ativiya sameti. Iddhānubhāvamakkhanañhi tattha makkho nāma. Pattenāti padumapattenātipi porāṇā. Paduminisaṇḍe ṭhito hi bhagavā tattha ahosīti tesaṃ mati.
39 “已给与”的意思是已允许。“无畏”就是没有恐惧。为什么?因为他已经通过道超越了恐惧。书上写道:“‘善心’是指被称为善心状态的心,或者就是善心本身。”
“有光辉”就像火一样。“善于界”就是善于火界。“若被隔开”——因为这是音声特征方面的前缀,所以意思是善于火界等至。“他们仰望”就是他们向上看。也写作“他们环绕”。意思就是他们这样说。“被摧毁”就是平息的意思,这里想表达的是它们变黑了。它们丝毫不费力,安住于与寂止相应的状态。为了显示那些有种种颜色的火焰,说了“青色、赤色”等。巴利
39.Dinnanti anumatinti attho. Abhīto nibbhayo. Kasmā? Yato so maggena bhayamatīto. ‘‘Sumanamanasoti sundaracittasaṅkhātamano. Sumano eva vā’’ti likhitaṃ. Tejovāti aggi viya. Dhātukusaloti tejodhātumhi kusalo. ‘‘Byavahitā ce’’ti saddalakkhaṇattā ca upasaggo. Tejodhātusamāpattīsu kusalo iccevattho. Udicchareti ullokesuṃ. ‘‘Saṃparivāresu’’nti ca likhitaṃ. Iti evaṃ bhaṇantīti attho. Hatāti samāti attho, kāḷakāva hontīti kirettha adhippāyo. Īsakampi byāpāraṃ akatvā upasamānurūpaṃ tiṭṭhanti. Ye ca anekavaṇṇā acciyo hontīti taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘nīlā atha lohitikā’’tiādimāha.
40 四方,就是指四个方向。巴利
40.Catuddisāti catūsu disāsu.
44 粪扫衣已生起,意思是:对寻求它的人来说,是依获得而生起的。而这种寻求是为了显示种种心神通变化。sā 就是“此”(ayaṃ),sāyaṃ 就是“此”(ayaṃ)。tā 就是“这些”(imā),tayimā 就是“这些”(imā)。这是把两个词合在一起说。āyāmi 就是“我来”(āyāmi ahaṃ),āyamahaṃ 就是“我来”(āyāmi ahaṃ)。etanti 就是“此的”(etassa)。yathā mayanti 就是“因为我们”(yasmā mayaṃ)。巴利
44.Paṃsukūlaṃ uppannanti pariyesamānassa paṭilābhavasena uppannaṃ hoti. Cittavicittapāṭihīradassanatthāya ca sā pariyesanā. Sā ayaṃ sāyaṃ. Tā imā tayimā. Dve ekato gahetvā vadati. Āyāmi ahaṃ āyamahaṃ. Etanti etassa. Yathā mayanti yasmā mayaṃ.
50-51 运水者就是水流。水流是古师的说法。“你以何”是针对前分观行而说的。“长久以来”是指从很久以前,从调伏龙的时候起就是长久以来。他们也说“长久随念”。在“发混”等词中,因为头发等被分开绑好后再反复投进去,所以古师称为“发混”。这里的“筐混”中,“筐”指苦行者的用具。“遣送到结发者那里”意思是派了两三个苦行者去。经中说:“六十一万七千种神变。”巴利
50-51.Udakavāhakoti udakogho. Udakasototi porāṇā. ‘‘Yāya tva’’nti pubbabhāgavipassanāpaṭipadaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Cirapaṭikāti cirapabhuti, nāgadamanato paṭṭhāya cirapaṭikā. ‘‘Cirapaṭisaṅkhā’’tipi vadanti. Kesamissantiādimhi abbokiṇṇaṃ visuṃ visuṃ bandhitvā pakkhittattā kesādayova kesamissāti porāṇā. Khārikājamissanti ettha khārī vuccati tāpasaparikkhāro. Jaṭile pāhesīti dve tayo tāpase pāhesi. ‘‘Soḷasātirekaaḍḍhauḍḍhāni pāṭihāriyasahassānī’’ti vuttaṃ.
54 54. 因为那些人一向熟悉火祭,世尊就为他们讲了《燃烧经》(相应部4.28)。其中,有些事物是依所缘而说为燃烧,比如眼等被贪火所烧;有些是依结合而说为燃烧,比如由眼触所生的受等本身就在烧;有些是依被制伏之义而说为燃烧,比如眼等被生等所制伏;有些是依缘之义而说为燃烧,比如那眼等是愁等的缘。应当按各自的情况,在这里理解燃烧之义。在这里,虽然只有苦相是明显的一相,但应知道,随着这一点,其余两相也被他们见到了——因为显示了苦的行相,也就显示了其余的行相。不过,由于他们执著于对安乐的渴爱,所以应知道,这个开示是以苦相为先导而说的。巴利
54. Aggihutte kataparicayattā bhagavā tesaṃ ādittapariyāya-mabhāsi (saṃ. ni. 4.28). Tattha ekaccaṃ ārammaṇavasena ādittaṃ cakkhādi rāgagginā, ekaccaṃ sampayogavasena cakkhusamphassapaccayā vedayitādikeneva, ekaccaṃ abhibhūtatthena cakkhādi eva jātiādinā , ekaccaṃ paccayatthena, tadeva sokādināti yathāsambhavamettha ādittatā veditabbā. Ettha kiñcāpi dukkhalakkhaṇamevekaṃ pākaṭaṃ, tadanusārena pana itaraṃ lakkhaṇadvayampi tehi diṭṭhanti veditabbaṃ dukkhākārassa itarākāradīpanato. Santasukhataṇhābhiniviṭṭhattā panesaṃ dukkhalakkhaṇapubbaṅgamā desanā katāti veditabbā.
频婆娑罗会见故事的注释巴利
Bimbisārasamāgamakathāvaṇṇanā
55-7 作为欲贪对象基础的女人,就是“欲女”。第二类等则是给予安慰的人。因为当世尊还没出现时,世间最先会生起佛陀的传闻,而且最初长达一千年。梵天神们化作婆罗门的模样,把大约三千部与佛陀相关的教法编进吠陀里,让人诵习;又从世尊出生开始,由懂得相术的婆罗门传出佛陀的事迹,在世间流传开来,所以这是合理的,并非虚妄。“频婆娑罗站在宫殿上看见了他”等偈颂,说明频婆娑罗在菩萨时期就已经被灌顶了。巴利
55-7. Vatthukāmabhūtā itthiyo kāmitthiyo. Dutiyādayo assāsakā. Yasmā anuppanne eva bhagavati buddhakolāhalaṃ loke paṭhamameva vassasahassaṃ uppajjati. Brahmāno ca brāhmaṇavaṇṇaṃ abhinimminitvā vedesu sahassattayamattaṃ buddhapaṭisaṃyuttaṃ pariyattiṃ pakkhipitvā vācenti, bhagavato jātito paṭṭhāya ca buddhakathā lakkhaṇaññūhi brāhmaṇehi uppāditā, patthaṭā loke, tasmā yujjanti, na aññathā. ‘‘Tamaddasa bimbisāro, pāsādasmiṃ patiṭṭhito’’tiādigāthāhi bodhisattakāle eva abhisittatā bimbisārassa siddhā.
58 58. 贤友,在这里,漏已尽的比丘断除了五支,具足了六支,有一守护,有四依止,舍断了种种异端之见,善舍断了寻觅执取,思惟清净无浊,身行轻安,心善解脱,慧善解脱——这就是十种圣住。八种色界与无色界的等至、灭尽定以及大悲定——这是古师的说法。其中,五支就是五盖。六支就是六支舍。以念来守护,就是有一守护。经过审察而受用、忍受、避开、遣除,这就是四依止。种种沙门婆罗门各自的四种异端之见已被断除,这样就是舍断了种种异端之见。欲的寻觅和有的寻觅已被断除,梵行的寻觅已经止息,这样就是善舍断了寻觅执取。欲的思惟、嗔害的思惟已被断除,这样就是思惟清净无浊。由于断除了乐……乃至……进入第四禅而安住,这样就是心善解脱。贪已被断除,连根拔起……乃至……了知它不再生起;嗔、痴也不再生起,了知它们不再生起,这样就是慧善解脱。巴利
58. Idhāvuso khīṇāsavo bhikkhu pañcaṅgavippahīno hoti chaḷaṅgasamannāgato ekārakkho caturāpasseno paṇunnapaccekasacco samavayasaṭṭhesano anāvilasaṅkappo passaddhakāyasaṅkhāro suvimuttacitto suvimuttapaññoti (dī. ni. 3.348, 360; a. ni. 10.19) dasa ariyavāsā nāma. Rūpārūpasamāpattiyo aṭṭha nirodhasamāpatti mahākaruṇāsamāpattītipi porāṇā. Tattha nīvaraṇā pañcaṅgā ca. Chaḷaṅgupekkhā chaḷaṅgā. Satārakkhena ekārakkhā. Saṅkhāya ekaṃ paṭisevati, adhivāseti, parivajjeti, saṅkhāya ekaṃ vinodetīti ayaṃ caturāpasseno. Puthusamaṇabrāhmaṇānaṃ puthupaccekasaccāni cattāri pahīnāni, evaṃ paṇunnapaccekasacco. Kāmesanā bhavesanā pahīnā hoti, brahmacariyesanā paṭippassaddhā, evaṃ samavayasaṭṭhesano. Kāmabyāpādavihiṃsāsaṅkappo pahīno hoti, evaṃ anāvilasaṅkappo, sukhassa ca pahānā…pe… catutthaṃ jhānaṃ upasampajja viharati evaṃ suvimuttacitto hoti. Rāgo pahīno ucchinnamūlo…pe… anuppādadhammoti pajānāti, doso, moho anuppādadhammoti pajānāti, evaṃ suvimuttapaññoti.
处与非处、异熟,遍达一切之智;
多界世间、众生信解。
“ 牟尼能了知诸根的胜劣。
禅那等杂染等的智,以及三明,也是如此。”巴利
‘‘Ṭhānāṭhānaṃ vipākañca, ñāṇaṃ sabbatthagāminiṃ; Anekadhātuyo lokaṃ, adhimuttiñca pāṇinaṃ. ‘‘Jānāti indriyānañca, paropariyataṃ muni; Jhānādisaṃkilesādi-ñāṇaṃ vijjattayaṃ tathā’’ti. –
这些是十力。所谓无学支,就是无学正见……乃至……无学解脱、无学解脱智见。其中,第十是无学。古代长老们说:具足这十力和诸巴拉密。巴利
Imāni dasa balāni. Asekkhaṅgāni nāma asekkhā sammādiṭṭhi…pe… asekkhavimutti asekkhavimuttiñāṇadassananti. Tattha dasamaṃ asekkhaṃ. Etehi dasahi cupeto pāramīhīti porāṇā.
舍利弗与目犍连出家这件事的注释巴利
Sāriputtamoggallānapabbajjākathāvaṇṇanā
60 “Kiṃ kāhasī”就是“kiṃ kāhati”。意思是:用“做什么?你在做什么?”等许多词句来说。“Paṭipādento”就是“nigamento”(令出离)。也有人读作“paccabyathā, paccabyatha”。在这里,“kappanahutehi”应当知道:百个十是一千,百个一千是十万,百个十万是一俱胝,百个十万俱胝是一婆俱胝,百个十万婆俱胝是一俱胝婆俱胝,百个十万俱胝婆俱胝是一那由他。“kappanahutehi”按这样依次推算,就名为“过去”——这是《犍度诵者》的读法。巴利
60.Kiṃ kāhasīti kiṃ kāhati. ‘‘Kiṃ karoti, kiṃ karosī’’ti vā byañjanaṃ bahuṃ vatvāti attho. Paṭipādentoti nigamento. ‘‘Paccabyathā , paccabyatha’’ntipi paṭhanti. Kappanahutehīti ettha dasakānaṃ sataṃ sahassaṃ, sahassānaṃ sataṃ satasahassaṃ, satasahassānaṃ sataṃ koṭi, koṭisatasahassānaṃ sataṃ pakoṭi, pakoṭisatasahassānaṃ sataṃ koṭipakoṭi, koṭipakoṭisatasahassānaṃ sataṃ nahutanti veditabbaṃ. Kappanahutehīti evamanusārato abbhatītaṃ nāmāti khandhakabhāṇakānaṃ pāṭhoti.
63 “kulacchedāya”是一种读法,意思是“kulupacchedāya”(断绝家族)。人们心想:“沙门释子确实是依法引导,不是依非法”,所以不再指责。应该如此与读法的剩余部分建立联系。巴利
63. ‘‘Kulacchedāyā’’ti pāṭho, kulupacchedāyāti attho. Manussā ‘‘dhammena kira samaṇā sakyaputtiyā nayanti, nādhammenā’’ti na puna codesunti evaṃ pāṭhasesena sambandho kātabbo.
到这里,应该知道长老已经把因缘部分讲完了。这里还有几首偈颂:巴利
Ettāvatā thero nidānaṃ niṭṭhapesīti veditabbaṃ. Honti cettha –
法将在此所说的根本——
通过展示论书成就的次第,
他们为诸法作了缘起的结语。
那些结集者,他们通晓律的次第。
“ 了知缘起中隐义之句,
此即缘起之归趣。
从此以后,
只应审察与律义相应的句。”巴利
‘‘Yaṃ dhammasenāpati ettha mūla- Ganthassa siddhikkamadassanena; Nidānaniṭṭhānamakaṃsu dhamma- Saṅgāhakā te vinayakkamaññū. ‘‘Nidānalīnatthapadānameva, Nidāniṭṭhānamidaṃ viditvā; Ito paraṃ ce vinayatthayutta- Padāni vīmaṃsanameva ñeyya’’nti.
亲教师义务的注释巴利
Upajjhāyavattakathāvaṇṇanā
64 以佛陀本人为亲教师的比丘,与其余以“来,比丘”方式得度的比丘,在穿下衣、披上衣的仪则上各不相同,因此被说成“下衣穿得不整、上衣披得不整、威仪不具足”。他们不只是这样去乞食,还有在人们吃饭时从人家上方经过等情形。人们之所以讥嫌,一是因为难以忍受饥渴,二是因为对另一些威仪具足的人生起净信。巴利
64. Buddhupajjhāyakānaṃ itaresaṃ ehibhikkhūnaṃ nivāsanapārupanakappato nesaṃ visuṃ visuṃ sadisattā ‘‘dunnivatthā duppārutā anākappasampannā’’ti vuttā. Na kevalañca itthambhūtā piṇḍāya caranti, apica manussānaṃ bhuñjamānānaṃ uparītiādi. Manussā ujjhāyanti pipāsāsahanato, itaresaṃ ākappasampattiyā pasannattā ca.
65 65. 由谁、怎样才算接受了亲教师?有人这样写道:“那时他在谁面前出家,现在他就在谁面前求受达上。这是就亲教师以‘萨度’表示同意而说的。”他们是这样理解的:“亲教师以‘萨度’等语表示同意之后,同住弟子说‘萨度,我完全同意’——这话只是比丘们之间的惯例,在哪里都找不到明文规定,所以即使没有说这句话,亲教师也已经被接受了。”这里“sāhū”就是“萨度”的意思。“lahū”就是“轻”,意思是“你不是我的负担”。“opāyikaṃ”就是“与方便相应”,其义为:“以此方便,你从今往后成为我的负担。”“patirūpaṃ”就是“相称”,其义为:“你接受亲教师是相称的。”巴利
65. Kena ko upajjhāyo gahetabboti? ‘‘Tadā so yassa santike pabbājito, etarahi yassa santike upasampadāpekkho hoti. Upajjhāyena ca sādhūti sampaṭicchanaṃ sandhāyā’’ti kehici likhitaṃ. Taṃ te evaṃ jānanti ‘‘upajjhāyena ‘sāhū’tiādinā sampaṭicchite saddhivihārikassa ‘sādhu suṭṭhu sampaṭicchāmī’ti vacanaṃ kevalaṃ bhikkhūhi āciṇṇameva, na katthaci dissati, tasmā vināpi tena upajjhāyo gahitova hotī’’ti. Tattha sāhūti sādhūti vuttaṃ hoti. Lahūti lahu, tvaṃ mama na bhāriyosīti vuttaṃ hoti. Opāyikanti upāyapaṭisaṃyuttaṃ, iminā upāyena tvaṃ me ito paṭṭhāya bhāro jātosīti attho. Patirūpanti anurūpaṃ te upajjhāyaggahaṇanti attho.
66 漱口水也同样,在同一时节中。从“从此以后”开始,是从“不得在亲教师说话时……”这条规定中的“不”字开始算起。因此,有人解释说:在“不得走得太远,不得走得太近”这条规定中,那个“不”字就表明不犯戒。这个犯戒是有心的犯戒,还是无心的犯戒?因为是以不恭敬为因缘,所以是有心的犯戒。怎么知道是以不恭敬为因缘?因为它被归入不恭敬的因缘之中。在巴帝摩卡诵戒中,对应学法条文不划分数量范围,是为了把属于篇章所摄的犯戒归摄进去。不过这个特征只应在行持规范中理解,而不应在禁止规范中理解,因为像吃不净肉这类犯戒属于无心之犯。老师说:篇章禁止规范中的那些犯戒,由无心之犯所摄,比如应学法禁止规范中以汤饭作乞求等为因缘的情况。凡是以“不”字作禁止的地方,是不是一律都犯恶作?是的。凡是注疏没有示明方法的地方,一律如此。此后注疏以“如果是黑色地、石灰地或无尘土地,则可以放在那样的地上”等方式示明了方法。巴利
66.Tādisameva mukhadhovanodakaṃ utumhi ekasabhāgeti. Ito paṭṭhāyāti ‘‘na upajjhāyassa bhaṇamānassā’’ti ettha vuttana-kārato paṭṭhāya. Tena ‘‘nātidūre gantabbaṃ, nāccāsanne gantabba’’nti ettha vuttana-kārena anāpattīti dīpetīti eke. Sacittakā ayaṃ āpatti, udāhu acittakāti? Anādariyapaccayattā sacittakā. Anādariyapaccayatā kathaṃ paññāyatīti ce? Anādariyapaccayehi saṅgahitanti. Pātimokkhuddese sekhiyānaṃ gaṇaparicchedākaraṇañhi khandhakapariyāpannāpattiyā saṅgaṇhanatthaṃ. Idaṃ pana lakkhaṇaṃ cāritteyeva veditabbaṃ, na vāritte akappiyamaṃsakhādanādiāpattīnaṃ acittakattā. Khandhakavārittānaṃ tehi saṅgaho, sekhiyavāritteyeva acittakehi sūpodanaviññattipaccayādīhīti ācariyo. Yattha yattha na-kārena paṭisedho karīyati, kiṃ sabbattha dukkaṭāpattīti? Āma. Yattha aṭṭhakathāya nayo na dassito, tattha sabbattha. Parato hi aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘sace pana kāḷavaṇṇakatā vā sudhābaddhā vā hoti nirajamattikā, tathārūpāya bhūmiyā ṭhapetuṃ vaṭṭatī’’tiādinā nayena nayo dassito.
这里有人问:既然巴利圣典里就有“如果亲教师生起不喜乐,或者生起邪见”(《大品》66)这样的话,为了说明注疏里所说的方法确实是依据世尊的话而成立的,那么“不太远、不太近”这个地方,世尊的话的依据是什么呢?回答说:像“应当先到,把座位铺好”这些说法,是从教导的规范来说的。如果说亲教师已经同意了,那么第一次去就是允许的吗?不是,因为这种说法不能成立;即使能成立,按照上面所说的方法也已经成立了。对于被禁止的事情,默许并不能使它成为无罪;即便如此,还是要审察之后再接受。“门廊”就是门洞。不能丢弃,也不能藏起来。巴利
Etthāha – yasmā pāḷiyaṃyeva ‘‘sace upajjhāyassa anabhirati uppannā hoti, diṭṭhigataṃ uppannaṃ hotī’’ti (mahāva. 66) bhagavato vacanavasena aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttanayo yuttoti dassetuṃ ‘‘nātidūre nāccāsanne’’ti ettha ko bhagavato vacanalesoti? Vuccate – ‘‘paṭhamataraṃ āgantvā āsanaṃ paññāpetabba’’ntiādīni vadanti desaniyamanato. Upajjhāyena anumataṃyeva paṭhamagamananti ce? Na, asiddhattā, siddhepi yathāvuttanayasiddhito ca . Na hi vārittassa anumati anāpattikarā hoti, evaṃ santepi vicāretvā gahetabbaṃ. Koṭṭhakanti dvārakoṭṭhakaṃ. Na nissajjitabbaṃ, na nidahitabbaṃ vā.
不如法行为等论的注释巴利
Nasammāvattanādikathāvaṇṇanā
68 68. “不会有过度的在家依附之情”——在这里,“在家依附之情”不能只当成不善法来看,因为这种特征也通于漏尽者。如果说漏尽者不会有不如法的行为,那也不对,因为对他们来说,“不应驱出”这一规定,正是依于具足这种特征而成立的。因此应当理解:在这里,“这是我的负担”这种生起我执的情感,就是“情”。就像“若有一位具足行仪的比丘……他们无犯”那段所说的:如果有一位具足行仪的比丘说:“尊者,您不用操心,我会照顾您的同住弟子或亲近弟子,或者照顾病人;需要教诫的,我会教诫;该做的事,我会尽力去做。”而那些同住弟子等人却说:“尊者,您自己不用操心。”或者不接受这样的行仪,从那时起,亲教师和老师便无犯。巴利
68.Adhimattaṃ gehassitapemaṃ na hotīti ettha gehassitapemaṃ na akusalamicceva daṭṭhabbaṃ khīṇāsavānampi sādhāraṇattā imassa lakkhaṇassa. Na khīṇāsavānaṃ asammāvattanābhāvatoti ce? Na, tesaṃ na paṇāmetabbaṃ taṃsamannāgamanasiddhito, tasmā ‘‘mamesa bhāro’’ti mamattakaraṇaṃ tattha pemanti veditabbaṃ. ‘‘Eko vattasampanno…pe… tesaṃ anāpattī’ti ettha viya sace eko vattasampanno bhikkhu ‘bhante, tumhe appossukkā hotha, ahaṃ tumhākaṃ saddhivihārikaṃ, antevāsikaṃ vā gilānaṃ vā upaṭṭhahissāmi, ovaditabbaṃ ovadissāmi, iti karaṇīyesu ussukkaṃ āpajjissāmī’ti vadati, te evāsaddhivihārikādayo ‘bhante, tumheva kevalaṃ appossukkā hothā’ti vadanti, vattaṃ vā na sādiyanti, tato paṭṭhāya ācariyupajjhāyānaṃ anāpattī’’ti vuttaṃ.
罗达婆罗门的故事注释巴利
Rādhabrāhmaṇavatthukathāvaṇṇanā
73 先说“腐尿,就是尿如同腐臭之身”,之后又写道:“因为腐臭的性质而被舍弃的尿,作为药物,就是腐尿药。”在所有这些地方,“名为某某”中,只有一个“na”字。巴利
73.‘‘Pūtimuttanti muttaṃ pūtikāyo viyā’’ti vatvāpi ‘‘pūtibhāvena muttaṃ paṭinissaṭṭhaṃ bhesajjaṃ pūtimuttabhesajja’’nti likhitaṃ. Sabbattha itthannāmoti ekova na-kāro hoti.
阿阇梨行仪论注释巴利
Ācariyavattakathāvaṇṇanā
76 76. 说“我将依止具寿而住”。应当根据文句省略的读法,理解为“我依止具寿的教诫而住”。或者,“nissāya”就是“nissayā”,意思是“以依止”。或者,“āyasmato”是用于宾格意义的属格。巴利
76. ‘‘Āyasmato nissāya vacchāmī’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Āyasmato ovādaṃ nissāya vasāmī’’ti pāṭhasesavasena veditabbā. Nissāyāti vā nissayā, nissayenāti vuttaṃ hoti. Āyasmatoti vā upayogatthe sāmivacanaṃ.
依止寂静论巴利
Nissayapaṭippassaddhikathāvaṇṇanā
83 前往他方:在那里放下职责而住之后,又前往别的村子。哪里能得到依止,就该去哪里——在这里也一样,按照亲教师所说的方式,以“我过几天就走”来保持出行的劲头。“不要在这里退回去”,意思是不要往这边来。所谓“同类”,就是亲教师的弟子们。在那里受取依止之后——如果这样,那还有什么差别呢?因此这样说:“或许能容忍。”
“可以住”——意思是既然已被亲教师舍弃,再和亲教师会合就没有意义了。如果亲教师打算很久以后才摄受,那么从那时起,还是以亲教师为依止。如果亲教师是无惭之人,同住弟子应当反复劝阻;如果亲教师不肯停止,就可以舍弃这位亲教师,不必经过依止的驱摈程序,直接到别人那里受取依止而住。如果亲教师改变性别,一天也不必守护。如果亲教师是半月般哒咖,依止者说“请等亲教师白分到来”,或者亲教师自己等待,都可以。如果亲教师已被举罪甘马,因为他处于不同住的状态,依止就自动解除。但如果看到他如法行持,可以等他甘马解除。如果亲教师正在行敬悦,应当等他出罪。如果行长期别住,应当到别人那里受取依止,与亲教师会合则没有限度。因为别住和敬悦行者不应给予(他人)依止。至于《别住犍度注疏》中所说“对同住弟子也随喜者,仅仅是恶作”等等,那正好印证了上面所说的道理。而所说“如果因信心出家的善男子们说‘尊者,你们只管做律仪甘马就好’,然后照样履行义务,照样请示入村,从被劝阻之时起就没有罪”——这应当理解为只是为了说明:随喜义务并不构成恶作的缘故,或者是针对同住弟子的有所期待而说的。因此,如果他们按照亲教师的劝阻去做,他们的依止就解除了——这一点就成立了。巴利
83.Disaṃ gatoti tattha dhuranikkhittavāso hutvā tirogāmaṃ gato. Yattha nissayo labbhati, tattha gantabbanti etthāpi upajjhāye vuttanayeneva ‘‘katipāhena gamissāmī’’ti gamane cesa ussāho rakkhati. Mā idha paṭikkamīti mā idha gaccha. Sabhāgā nāma upajjhāyassa sissā. Tattha nissayaṃ gahetvā. Yadi evaṃ ko visesoti ce? Tena idaṃ vuccati ‘‘appeva nāma khameyyā’’ti. Vasituṃ vaṭṭatīti upajjhāyena pariccattattā upajjhāyasamodhānaṃ niratthakanti attho. Sace upajjhāyo cirena anuggahetukāmo hoti, tato paṭṭhāya upajjhāyova nissayo. Upajjhāyo ce alajjī hoti, saddhivihārikena anekakkhattuṃ vāretvā aviramantaṃ upajjhāyaṃ pahāya vināpi nissayapaṇāmanena aññassa santike nissayaṃ gahetvā vasitabbaṃ. Upajjhāyassa ce liṅgaṃ parivattati, ekadivasampi na rakkhati. Pakkhapaṇḍako ce hoti, nissayajātiko ce ‘‘upajjhāyassa sukkapakkhaṃ āgamehī’’ti vadati, sayameva vā āgameti, vaṭṭati. Upajjhāyo ce ukkhepaniyakammakato hoti, nānāsaṃvāsakabhūmiyaṃ ṭhitattā nissayo paṭippassambhati. Sammāvattantaṃ pana passitvā kammapaṭippassaddhiṃ āgametuṃ labhati. Mānattācārī ce hoti, abbhānaṃ āgametabbaṃ. Dīghaṃ ce parivāsaṃ carati, aññassa santike nissayo gahetabbo, upajjhāyasamodhānaṃ appamāṇaṃ. Parivāsamānattacārinā hi na nissayo dātabbo. Yaṃ pana pārivāsikakkhandhakaṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘saddhivihārikānampi sādiyantassa dukkaṭamevā’’tiādi (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 75), taṃ yathāvuttamatthaṃ sādheti eva. Yaṃ pana vuttaṃ ‘‘sace saddhāpabbajitā kulaputtā ‘tumhe, bhante, vinayakammamattaṃ karothā’’ti vatvā vattaṃ karontiyeva, gāmappavesanaṃ āpucchantiyeva, taṃ vāritakālato paṭṭhāya anāpattī’’ti. Taṃ vattasādiyanapaccayā dukkaṭābhāvamattadīpanatthaṃ, saddhivihārikānaṃ sāpekkhataṃ vā sandhāya vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Tasmā te ce upajjhāyena vāritānurūpameva paṭipajjanti, nissayo tesaṃ paṭippassaddhoti siddhaṃ hoti.
越过两个土块投掷的距离之后才返回——对此有文献这样写:“到了这个程度,就叫做已经离开这个方向。所以,即使同住弟子还没有放下职责,依止关系也解除了。如果老师和亲教师没有越过两个土块投掷的距离,住在两个土块投掷距离之内——不管那里有围墙还是没有围墙,都可以住。”然而乌波底萨长老不认可“就在没有围墙的地方”这种说法:这里说的住在没有围墙的地方,意思是指住在应该有围墙的范围之外的另一座寺院里。这里所说的“寺院”,据说乌波底萨长老认为是指位于那座寺院边上的一间小屋。在这里,“如果师徒两人都因为某事……依止关系不解除”这句依照通说写成的注疏话,与法喜长老的说法一致。而“或者在没有围墙的地方”,就是指在两个土块投掷距离之内,不管有围墙还是没有围墙。然而,因为也提到了“寺界之外”,所以住在寺界之内却超出了两个土块投掷的距离,依止关系也照样成立;这样一来,乌波底萨长老的说法就对不上了。在同一个住处里,不管有墙没墙,即使住在三由旬之内,依止关系也不解除。这个住处是由近行界来界定的,而近行界是以有围墙寺院的围墙、无围墙寺院应当围起来的区域为界限,算作同一个住处。巴利
Dve leḍḍupāte atikkamitvā nivattatīti ‘‘ettāvatā disāpakkanto nāma hoti, tasmā antevāsike anikkhittadhurepi nissayo paṭippassambhati. Ācariyupajjhāyā dve leḍḍupāte anatikkamma leḍḍupātadvayabbhantare tirovihārepi parikkhitte, aparikkhitte vā vasituṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti likhitaṃ. Aparikkhitteyevāti no takkoti ācariyo, ettha pana aparikkhittassa parikkhepārahaṭṭhānato vimutte aññasmiṃ vihāre vasantīti adhippāyo. Vihāroti cettha ‘‘tādisassa vihārassa ante ṭhitā ekā kuṭikā adhippetāti upatissatthero’’ti vuttaṃ. Tattha ‘‘sace ubhopi ācariyantevāsikā kenaci…pe… nissayo na paṭippassambhatī’’ti iminā sāmaññato vuttena aṭṭhakathāvacanena dhammasirittheravādo sameti. Aparikkhitte vāti dvinnaṃ leḍḍupātānaṃ anto parikkhitto vā hoti aparikkhitto vā. ‘‘Bahisīma’’nti ca vuttattā antovihārasīmāyaṃ dve leḍḍupāte atikkamitvāpi vasituṃ vaṭṭatīti siddhattā pana upatissattheravādo na sameti. Ekāvāse hi parikkhitte vā aparikkhitte vā antamaso antotiyojanepi vasato nissayo na paṭippassambhati. So ca upacārasīmāya paricchinno, sā ca upacārasīmā parikkhittassa vihārassa parikkhepena aparikkhittassa parikkhepārahaṭṭhānena paricchinno ekāvāso.
有人问:在《伍波萨他犍度》里,对于同一住处所产生的疑惑,不是已经因为界(结界)被认可而解决了吗?回答:不是。因为《衣犍度注》里已经讨论过这个问题。正如注书所说:“界内的僧团应当分好之后领取。”(mahāva. aṭṭha. 379)那么,应当按哪种界来分呢?据说玛哈斯瓦长老说:“按不离衣界来分。”于是有人对他说:“所谓不离衣界,连三由旬也算在内。若真是这样,住在三由旬处的人也要领取利养;住在三由旬处的人要完成客比丘的义务之后才能进寺;出行的人要走三由旬去告假住处;依止行者一旦越过三由旬,依止就舍断;别住者要越过三由旬后才能让明相升起;比丘尼要站在三由旬处告假才能入寺——这一切都应当按近行界来划分才合理。”所以可以成立:住在近行界之内,即使越过两处掷石之间的距离,依止也不会因为越过三由旬而舍断。当然,如果这里的近行界正好有三由旬那么大,或者更大,那前面说的那些过失就可能出现。因为据说近行界随着住处增多而增大,随着住处减少而缩小。所以这里所说的“寺院”,是指位于那座寺院边缘的一间小屋——因为那间小屋也属于那座寺院,所以仍算同一住处。如果指的是不同的住处,就不该说“位于边缘的小屋”。而在两处掷石距离之内、没有围墙的不同住处中,依止不会舍断——这就是前面所说的“不合道理”那一说,它是就这类不同住处中卧具执取不舍断的道理而说的。因为卧具执取的特征是“以新的执取使旧的执取和贪着舍断”,所以在别处才会舍断。这里的巴利文是:“那时,具寿伍巴南达·释迦子一人在两处住处度过雨安居……诸比丘,就给这愚人一份吧,因为他只有一个意向。”(mahāva. 364)注书对此也说:“这是就不同利养、不同近行、同一界的诸寺院而说的;而在不同界的诸寺院中,卧具执取则会舍断。”(mahāva. aṭṭha. 364)没有围墙的不同住处算作同一近行;有围墙的同一近行则算作不同。到这里就成立了这个意思:住在两处掷石距离之内、没有围墙的另一座寺院中,依止不舍断;有围墙的则舍断。对此有人说:越过两处掷石距离之后,即使还在,依止也不舍断。因为《尼萨耆亚注》里说过:“如果正在行走的年少比丘还没到达,明相就升起了,衣成尼萨耆亚,但依止不舍断。”(pārā. aṭṭha. 2.495)回答:那是就与和尚会合、弟子有心力追随的情况说的;这里则是就固定安住说的,所以两者并不矛盾。不过有些人说“越过两处掷石距离,这是就每天禀告之后而住说的”——依我看,那只是他们自己的猜测罢了。因为“要每天禀告之后才能住”,无论在巴利圣典还是注书中都看不到,应当知道那只是不明教理者的习惯做法。巴利
Uposathakkhandhake ekāvāsavimatiyaṃ sīmāya anuññātattāti ce? Na, cīvarakkhandhakaṭṭhakathāya vicāritattā. Yathāha ‘‘sīmaṭṭhakasaṅgho bhājetvā gaṇhātū’’ti (mahāva. aṭṭha. 379). Katarasīmāya bhājetabbaṃ? Mahāsivatthero kirāha ‘‘avippavāsasīmāyā’’ti. Tato naṃ āhaṃsu ‘‘avippavāsasīmā nāma tiyojanāpi hoti, evaṃ sante tiyojane ṭhitā lābhaṃ gaṇhissanti, tiyojane ṭhatvā āgantukavattaṃ pūretvā ārāmaṃ pavisitabbaṃ bhavissati, gamiko tiyojanaṃ gantvā senāsanaṃ āpucchissati, nissayapaṭippannassa tiyojanātikkame nissayo paṭippassambhissati, pārivāsikena tiyojanaṃ atikkamitvā aruṇaṃ uṭṭhāpetabbaṃ bhavissati, bhikkhuniyā tiyojane ṭhatvā ārāmappavesanā āpucchitabbā bhavissati, sabbametaṃ upacārasīmāparicchedavasena kātuṃ vaṭṭatīti. Tasmā antoupacārasīmāya leḍḍupātadvayaṃ atikkamitvāpi vasato nissayo tiyojanātikkame nissayo na paṭippassambhatīti siddhaṃ. Kāmañcettha upacārasīmāya tiyojanappamāṇāya, atirekāya vā yathāvuttadosappasaṅgo siyāti. Sā hi āvāsesu vaḍḍhantesu vaḍḍhati, parihāyantesu parihāyatīti vuttattā, tasmā tādisassa vihārassa ante ṭhitā ekā kuṭi vihāroti idhādhippetā. Sāpi tasseva vihārassa kuṭikāva hotīti katvā so āvāso hoti. Nānāvāso eva ce adhippeto, ‘‘ante ṭhitā kuṭikā’’ti na vattabbaṃ. Dvinnaṃ leḍḍupātānaṃ abbhantare pana aparikkhitte nānāvāse nissayo na paṭippassambhatīti yvāyaṃ ‘‘no takko’’ti vutto, so tādise nānāvāse senāsanaggāhassa appaṭippassaddhinayena vutto. Senāsanaggāho hi ‘‘gahaṇena gahaṇaṃ ālayo paṭippassambhatī’’ti lakkhaṇattā itarattha paṭippassambhati. Tatrāyaṃ pāḷi ‘‘tena kho pana samayena āyasmā upanando sakyaputto eko dvīsu āvāsesu vassaṃ vasi…pe… detha, bhikkhave, moghapurisassa ekādhippāya’’nti (mahāva. 364). Aṭṭhakathāyañcassa evaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘idañca nānālābhehi nānūpacārehi ekasīmavihārehi kathitaṃ, nānāsīmavihāre pana senāsanaggāho paṭippassambhatī’’ti (mahāva. aṭṭha. 364). Aparikkhittā nānāvāsā ekūpacārasaṅkhyaṃ gacchanti. Parikkhittañca ekūpacāraṃ aparikkhittasaṅkhyaṃ gacchati. Ettāvatā leḍḍupātadvayabbhantare aparikkhitte aññasmiṃ vihāre vasato nissayo pana na paṭippassambhati, parikkhitte paṭippassambhati evāti ayamattho sādhitoti. Etthāha – dve leḍḍupāte atikkamitvāva satopi nissayo na paṭippassambhati. Vuttañhi nissaggiyaṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘sace gacchantānaṃyeva asampattesu daharesu aruṇaṃ uggacchati, cīvaraṃ nissaggiyaṃ hoti, nissayo pana na paṭippassambhatī’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.495)? Vuccate – taṃ upajjhāyena samāgame saussāhatāya vuttaṃ. Idha dhuvavāsaṃ sandhāya, tasmā aññamaññaṃ na vilomenti . Keci pana ‘‘dve leḍḍupātaṃ atikkammāti idaṃ devasikaṃ ārocetvā vasanavasena vutta’’nti vadanti, taṃ tesaṃ matimattamevāti mama takko. Devasikaṃ ārocetvā vatthabbanti hi neva pāḷiyaṃ na aṭṭhakathāyaṃ dissati, tañca pana apakataññūhi āciṇṇanti veditabbaṃ.
应授具足戒五法论的注释巴利
Upasampādetabbapañcakakathāvaṇṇanā
84 “不以无学戒蕴”等话,是依照“应先把自己安立在适宜之处”这句经文说的,不是从犯戒的构成要素来说的。就像因为与蓝色结合而说为蓝色一样,这里也说“以无学解脱智见蕴”。在增上戒方面,所谓“戒律败坏者”,是指已经犯戒但还没有出罪的人。巴利
84.Naasekkhena sīlakkhandhenātiādi ‘‘attānameva paṭhamaṃ, patirūpe nivesaye’’ti (dha. pa. 158) vacanavasena vuttaṃ, na āpattiaṅgavasena. Nīlasamāyogato nīlaṃ viya vuttaṃ ‘‘asekkhena vimuttiñāṇadassanakkhandhenā’’ti. Adhisīle sīlavipanno nāma āpajjitvā avuṭṭhito.
外道出家前事迹论的注释巴利
Aññatitthiyapubbavatthukathāvaṇṇanā
86 关于“曾属外道者”这一说法,有两种理解:
第一种:就那位名叫巴苏拉的比丘而言,他以前是外道,后来却又转回了同一个外道宗派——这是第一种意思。
第二种:像这样转投外道之后,又以在家人的身份回来,他就是“曾属外道者”,这个人回来时不应给他授达上——这是第二种意思。
除了这种转投外道的人之外,在“比丘们,若有曾属外道者”这句话里,“曾”字并不是只指穿着在家衣服的人,也包括仍然穿着自己原先所受外道服装的人。因为邪见的缘故而曾经是非外道,所以是“曾属非外道者”,这样的人如果还俗之后再来,就不需要给他别住。
这位曾属外道者,穿上比丘的衣服,通过皈依而成为沙弥、出家了没有?这件事上:如果已经出家了,那就和“比丘们,若有其他曾属外道者,想在这个法和律中出家、想受达上,应给他四个月别住”这句话相矛盾。如果还没有出家,那又和别住甘马的语句中没有提到出家这件事相矛盾。
对此,大寺的住者们说:“应该对还是沙弥的人给别住。”其他人不这么说。他们说:“‘比丘们,像这样随顺的曾属外道者来了,应给他授达上’这段经文必须维护;而且因为前后都有‘曾属外道者’这个说法,如果还不是沙弥——那就等于没有让他出家就直接给他授达上,这就成了过失。这样一来,就和最先说的那段经文相矛盾。‘转入外道宗派’这个读法也不妥当。如果他犯了杀生等任何一条戒,即使四个月已经满了,看起来还得重新圆满。又因为已经允许以他的戒律来成就比丘身份,所以在戒方面不必再说。”他们这样说,应当审慎考虑之后再采纳。
如果皈依破了,那就只是沙弥。巴利
86.Yo so aññatitthiyapubboti ettha dve atthavikappā – tassa pasūrassa bhikkhubhāvaṃ sandhāya aññatitthiyapubbo, so bhikkhu taṃyeva titthāyatanaṃ saṅkamīti ayameko attho. Evaṃ titthiyapakkantako puna gihivesena āgato aññatitthiyapubbo, so āgato na upasampādetabboti ayameko attho. Taṃ aññatitthiyapakkantakaṃ ṭhapetvā ‘‘yo so, bhikkhave, aññatitthiyapubbo’’ti ettha na gihivesadhāraṇova pubbasaddena vutto, kintu tasmiṃ attano yathāsamādinnatitthiyavese ṭhitopi. Diṭṭhivasena atitthiyabhūtattā atitthiyapubbo, so panāgato vibbhanto āgacchati, tassa parivāsadānakiccaṃ natthi. Kiṃ imassa aññatitthiyapubbassa bhikkhuvesaṃ gahetvā saraṇagamanena sāmaṇerapabbajjā jātā, na jātāti? Kiñcettha yadi jātā, ‘‘yo so, bhikkhave, aññopi aññatitthiyapubbo imasmiṃ dhammavinaye ākaṅkhati pabbajjaṃ, ākaṅkhati upasampadaṃ, tassa cattāro māse parivāso dātabbo’’ti (mahāva. 86) vacanaṃ virujjhati. Atha na jātā, parivāsakammavācāya pabbajjāya aparāmasanaṃ virujjhatīti. Tattha mahāvihāravāsino ‘‘sāmaṇerasseva sato parivāso dātabbo’’ti vadanti. Itare tathā na vadanti. Te hi ‘‘evaṃ ārādhako kho bhikkhave aññatitthiyapubbo āgato upasampādetabbo’ti (mahāva. 87) suttapadaṃ pariharitabbaṃ, pure ca pacchā ca ‘aññatitthiyapubbo’ti vacanasāmaññato na sāmaṇero jātoti ce, yadi evaṃ apabbājetvāva upasampādetabboti āpajjati. Tato ca sabbapaṭhamaṃ vuttasuttaṃ virujjhati. ‘Titthāyatanaṃ saṅkanto’ti pāṭhopi na sundaraṃ. Pāṇātipātādīsu aññataraṃ sace bhindati, cattāro māse paripuṇṇepi puna paripūretabbaṃ viya dissati. Vuttampi tassa saṃvaraṃ bhikkhukaraṇatthāya anuññātattā sīle vattabbaṃ natthī’’ti vadanti, vicāretvā gahetabbaṃ. Saraṇāni sace bhijjanti sāmaṇerasseva.
五病事论注释巴利
Pañcābādhavatthukathāvaṇṇanā
88 “指甲背面”指的是小指指甲的背面。有人说:“在遮蔽处,从指甲背面起,即使是大面积的(纹身)也可以,其他部位也一样。”这种说法似乎和注疏不一致。莲花的花蕊上,攀上去时呈现出红莲色般的彩纹。巴利
88.Nakhapiṭṭhīti cūḷaṅgulinakhapiṭṭhi adhippetā. ‘‘Paṭicchanne nakhapiṭṭhito mahantampi vaṭṭati, evaṃ sesesupī’’ti keci vadanti, taṃ aṭṭhakathāya na sameti viya. Padumakaṇṇikāpi āruḷhe rattapadumavaṇṇacitraṃ.
盗贼事论的注释巴利
Coravatthukathāvaṇṇanā
91-2 “法主”这个称呼:因为世尊本身就是法主,所以比丘们把指鬘——一个原本不该被允许出家的盗贼——也度化出家,并在后来这样宣说。这就是这句话的意思。在一些巴利语写本里,也写作“持刀者”。“已就坐者”,意思是“已经平息下来的人”。巴利
91-2.Dhammasāmīti yasmā sayaṃ dhammasāmī, tasmā bhikkhūhi apabbājetabbakampi coraṃ aṅgulimālaṃ pabbājetvā āyatiṃ evamāhāti attho. Pāḷipotthakesu ‘‘kharabhedako’’tipi likhitaṃ. Sannisinnāsūti vūpasantāsu.
负债者和奴仆故事的注释巴利
Iṇāyikadāsavatthukathāvaṇṇanā
96 96. 请看,我只有钵和衣,我要把这个布施出去——这样做是合乎规矩的,因为没有犯戒。所谓“各半各半”,就是一点一点的意思。巴利
96. Passa me pattacīvaramattaṃ, ahaṃ idaṃ dassāmīti sāmīci, yato natthi āpatti. Upaḍḍhupaḍḍhanti thokaṃ thokaṃ.
97 不遵守地方习俗,是指宣告、署名等各地所行的习俗。注疏里写道:“神庙女婢之子可以这么做。”又说:“若想让园民出家,必须另给一个人代替,才能让他出家。”这就是《大筏疏》在这里的意思。因为是以“我们把这个人布施给比丘僧团做园民”的名义给出的,所以他们不是僧团的奴仆。注疏里也写道:“园民既不是奴仆,也不是自由人,因此不能称为奴仆。”在僧伽罗岛,用酪浆浇洒是一种地方习俗。他们既然是僧团的园民,就应当允许他们出家。无主的奴仆,自己也可以使他成为自由人。注疏里还写道:“据说奴仆出家后,见到原来的主人就逃走,并不犯戒。”意思是:或者这个奴仆本来就是自己的,而这个人现在已经出家成了比丘。至于无主的奴仆,国王就是他的主人,所以应当先禀告国王或那个村里的人,然后才能让他出家——这是一些人的主张。注疏里写的是“使他成为自由人”。他们解释使其解脱的办法时说:“应当使他达到自由人的状态。”这样表明意向后,有些典籍写道“没有实际用处”。“必须使他成为自由人才能出家”——这是针对“如果被发现,就会被追查”而说的,在这种情况下不犯戒。据说“他们不清净,我也一样”,这句话也是针对这个而说的。巴利
97.Desacārittanti sāvanapaṇṇāropanādi taṃ taṃ desacārittaṃ. ‘‘Devadāsiputte vaṭṭatī’’ti likhitaṃ. ‘‘Ārāmikaṃ ce pabbājetukāmo, aññamekaṃ datvā pabbājetabba’’nti vuttaṃ. Mahāpaccarivādassa ayamidha adhippāyo. ‘‘Bhikkhusaṅghassa ārāmike demā’’ti dinnattā na te tesaṃ dāsā. ‘‘Ārāmiko ca neva dāso na bhujissoti vattabbato na dāso’’ti likhitaṃ. Takkāsiñcanaṃ sīhaḷadīpe cārittaṃ. Te ca pabbājetabbā saṅghassārāmikattā. Nissāmikaṃ dāsaṃ attanāpi bhujissaṃ kātuṃ labhati. ‘‘Dāsassa pabbajitvā attano sāmike disvā palāyantassa āpatti natthīti vadantī’’ti ca likhitaṃ. Attano vā dāso assa bhikkhunoti attho. Nissāmikassa dāsassa rājā sāmi, tasmā rājānaṃ vā tasmiṃ gāme manusse vā āpucchitvā pabbājetabboti eke. ‘‘Bhujissaṃ katvā’’ti likhitaṃ. Tassa parihāraṃ bhaṇanti ‘‘yathā bhujisso hoti, tathā kattabbo’’ti. Evaṃ saṅkappena vatvā ‘‘payojanaṃ natthī’’ti kehici likhitaṃ. Bhujissaṃ kātumeva vaṭṭatīti ‘‘sace passanti, anubandhissantī’’ti vuttaṃ. Āpatti natthi. ‘‘Asuddhā kira metipi taṃ sandhāyeva vutta’’nti vadanti.
铁匠般度事缘的注释巴利
Kammārabhaṇḍuvatthādikathāvaṇṇanā
98 98.“铁匠般度”这里说的是:男孩来的时候只留着一撮顶髻,所以可以问他。如果是他本人或者别人把那撮顶髻除去,也没有过失。他们说:“没有剃除须发,因为疏忽而授予皈依并让他出家,也照样成立。”巴利
98.Kammārabhaṇḍūti ettha dārako cūḷāmattaṃ ṭhapetvā āgacchati, tasmā āpucchituṃ labhati. Tañce so vā añño vā avaharati, doso natthi. ‘‘Kesamassuorohanaṃ akatvā asatiyā saraṇāni datvā pabbājeti, ruhatevā’’ti vadanti.
101-3 这里关于“家族”的部分。《摩呾理迦注疏》里已经写明:“‘他的两种……中略……随好相’——这一切方法的分类,在《摩呾理迦注疏》中是可以知道的。”还写道:“即使‘知道犯戒’这一读法不成立,如果他知道‘做了这件事就会犯这条戒’,那也可以。”又说:“应当理解为:要先把前面的文句读熟;对阿阇梨和和尚也是同样的做法。”巴利
101-3.Ettha kule. ‘‘Ubhayāni kho panassa…pe… anubyañjanasoti sabbopāyaṃ pabhedo mātikāṭṭhakathāyaṃ ñāto hotī’’ti ca ‘‘āpattiṃ jānātīti pāṭhe avattamānepi idaṃ nāma katvā idaṃ āpajjatīti jānāti ce, vaṭṭatī’’ti ca likhitaṃ. ‘‘Tañca kho tato pubbe pāṭhe paguṇe kateti gahetabbaṃ, ācariyupajjhāyānampi eseva nayo’’ti vuttaṃ.
罗睺罗事缘的注释巴利
Rāhulavatthukathāvaṇṇanā
105 尊者,树木如今已成了炭色等等,用这样的偈颂大约有六十首。他命令我:“请指给我看。”这里应当补上“这样”这个词。“莲叶雨”:就是颜色像莲叶的水,当它下起来的时候,想被淋湿的人就让自己被淋湿。“从头巾开始”:就是从头顶开始。巴利
105. ‘‘Aṅgārino dāni dumā bhadante’’tiādīhi (theragā. 527) saṭṭhimattāhi. Dassehi iti maṃ āṇāpesi. Ettha iti-saddo āharitabbo. Pokkharavassanti pokkharapattavaṇṇaṃ udakaṃ, tamhi vassante temitukāmāva tementi. Uṇhīsato paṭṭhāyāti muddhato paṭṭhāya.
“ 头发润泽、深青、柔软、卷曲,
额头像太阳一样纯净无瑕。
鼻梁匀称、高挺、柔软而修长,
以光芒之网遍覆全身的人中狮子。”巴利
‘‘Siniddhanīlamudukuñcitakeso , Sūriyanimmalatalābhinalāṭo; Yuttatuṅgamudukāyatanāso, Raṃsijālavitato narasīho’’ti. (apa. aṭṭha. 1.santikenidānakathā; jā. aṭṭha. 1.santikenidānakathā) –
以开头的偈颂来说明。或者也可以这样说——巴利
Ādigāthāhi. Atha vā –
双足红润,印有轮相而庄严美好,
具有美好相好装饰的修长脚踵;
双脚装饰着拂尘和华盖。
这位确实是你的父亲,人中狮子。
释迦族王子中最尊贵的一位,身体极其柔嫩细滑,
具足种种相好的圆满色身
那位人中豪杰为了世间的利益而踏上此行,
这位确实是你的父亲,人中狮子。
面容的色泽就像满月一样。
天人们所喜爱的,人中龙象;
步伐像发情醉象王那样优雅。
这位确实是你的父亲,人中狮子。
刹帝利种,生于最上族姓,
双足为诸天神与人类所礼敬。
内心安住在戒与定上,
这位就是你的父亲,人中的雄狮。
鼻梁修长匀称而端正,
睫毛如犊牛,双目深蓝而秀美。
帝释弓般的深蓝色眉毫,
这位确实是你的父亲,人中狮子。
脖颈圆润美好,端正匀称。
脸如狮面,身如兽王;
肤色像金子一样,皮肤洁净,相貌极其美好,
这位确实是你的父亲,人中狮子。
音声清净甚深柔美妙,
舌如朱砂所染赤红极鲜妍。
二十颗、二十颗洁白的牙齿,
这位就是你的父亲,人中狮子。
他的头发像眼膏一样,呈现深蓝色,也很漂亮。
额头像金片一样清净。
皎如晨星,清净白毫——
此实汝父,人中之狮。
“ 犹如明月行于青空,
众星环绕其形。
那位沙门之主坐在声闻弟子中间,
这位确实是你的父亲,人中狮子。”巴利
‘‘Cakkavaraṅkitarattasupādo, Lakkhaṇamaṇḍitaāyatapaṇhi; Cāmarachattavibhūsitapādo, Esa hi tuyha pitā narasīho. ‘‘Sakyakumāravaro sukhumālo, Lakkhaṇacittikapuṇṇasarīro; Lokahitāya gato naravīro, Esa hi tuyha pitā narasīho. ‘‘Puṇṇasasaṅkanibho mukhavaṇṇo, Devanarāna piyo naranāgo; Mattagajindavilāsitagāmī, Esa hi tuyha pitā narasīho. ‘‘Khattiyasambhavaaggakulīno , Devamanussanamassitapādo; Sīlasamādhipatiṭṭhitacitto, Esa hi tuyha pitā narasīho. ‘‘Āyatayuttasusaṇṭhitanāso, Gopakhumo abhinīlasunetto; Indadhanū abhinīlabhamūko, Esa hi tuyha pitā narasīho. ‘‘Vaṭṭasuvaṭṭasusaṇṭhitagīvo, Sīhahanū migarājasarīro; Kañcanasucchaviuttamavaṇṇo, Esa hi tuyha pitā narasīho. ‘‘Suddhasugambhīramañjusaghoso, Hiṅgulabaddhasurattasujivho; Vīsati vīsati setasudanto, Esa hi tuyha pitā narasīho. ‘‘Añjanavaṇṇasunīlasukeso, Kañcanapaṭṭavisuddhanalāṭo; Osadhipaṇḍarasuddhasuuṇṇo, Esa hi tuyha pitā narasīho. ‘‘Gacchatinīlapathe viya cando, Tāragaṇāpariveṭhitarūpo; Sāvakamajjhagato samaṇindo, Esa hi tuyha pitā narasīho’’ti. (jā. aṭṭha. 1.santikenidānakathā) –
“已诵出”是指应当如此行持于自身;“uttiṭṭhe”是《法句经》的读法。“法”是指次第乞食的行持。避开不当的求索,而行善行。巴利
Uddiṭṭheti evaṃ caritabbanti attano, ‘‘uttiṭṭhe’’ti dhammapadapāṭho. Dhammanti sapadānacārikavattaṃ. Anesanaṃ vajjetvā sucaritaṃ care.
“剃发”是指去掉五髻的样子,只留一髻的样子。“头巾”在这里是指那个家族中惯用的一种特别装饰。“家庆”就是家中的庆典。“伞庆”就是太子伞盖的庆典。“随转”是指随烦恼轮转。因为有苦恼的缘故,所以叫有苦恼。长老以前已经让拉特婆罗门出家了,现在为什么又说“尊者,我怎么能让罗睺罗出家”呢?这里的意思是拒绝授予达上。因此要知道:“世尊只是拒绝了达上,现在世尊的意图是消除未来的疑惑。”这样明白之后才这么说。依心生色法来说,所以讲“触及骨髓”。诸佛和转轮王的差别,应当从智慧等方面来理解;否则难陀等人出家后也该成佛了,因为经里有“如果出家,就成为佛”这句话。巴利
Kesavissajjananti pañcasikhākāraṃ vajjetvā ekasikhākāraṃ. Paṭṭabandhoti ettha paṭṭoti tasmiṃ kule āciṇṇo alaṅkāraviseso. Gharamaṅgalanti gharamaho. Chattamaṅgalanti yuvarājachattapaṭṭi. Vaṭṭānugatanti kilesavaṭṭānugataṃ. Vighātapaccayattā savighātakaṃ. Thero rādhaṃ brāhmaṇaṃ pubbe pabbajitvā kasmā idāni ‘‘kathāhaṃ, bhante, rāhulaṃ pabbājemī’’ti āhāti ce? Tattha upasampadāpaṭikkhepo adhippeto, tasmā ‘‘bhagavā upasampadameva paṭikkhipi, idāni anāgate saṃsayāpanayanādhippāyo bhagavā’’ti ñatvā āha. Cittasamuṭṭhānarūpavasena ‘‘aṭṭhimiñjaṃ āhaccā’’ti vuttaṃ kira. Buddhānaṃ, cakkavattīnañca byattādivasena nānattaṃ veditabbaṃ, aññathā nandādayopi pabbajitvā buddhā siyuṃ ‘‘sace pabbajati, buddho hotī’’ti vacanato.
送出去让他能见面,这样做是合适的;说“我要告辞”,然后让他出家,这样做也是合适的。因为一个人到了远方,按世俗的习惯,就算已经离开父母的住处、自由自在地生活,也会被说成是“到了远方”。所以,对这些人来说,他们就像是站在“不在场”那一边一样。因此才说“不会对那人的出家师父等产生不满”,这样说并没有错。“出家者同行”是世俗的说法。所以这里把“遭遇苦难等而前往别处”也算作“同行”。说到“去了远方”,这里的“远方”是指父母住处以外的地方,不是指出生地。如果只按字面意思来定标准,那就不合理了。这样一来,连父母已经死了的人也不该让他出家了。所以应当知道,这里的意思是:只要父母还活着、还处在不该越过的位置上,没有得到父母允许的儿子就不该让他出家。否则就会和经典相冲突,而且注疏也不应该把犯戒的条件放宽。暂且这样说,那么“我要烧掉精舍”这类说法又怎么会不相违呢?因为那是出于害怕自身遭遇灾难的危险才出家,也是为了保护儿子才出家。这样一来,是他自己出家,不是被谁劝诱才出家。“因为爱儿子,或者为了护儿子而成为所爱的”,依照因缘的道理,并不相违。巴利
Pesetvā dassetuṃ vaṭṭati, āpucchissāmāti pabbājetuṃ vaṭṭatīti ca idaṃ yasmā videsappatto nāma lokasaṅketenāpi mātāpituvāsato mutto serivihārīti vuccati, tasmāssa te asantapakkhe ṭhitā viya hontīti katvā ‘‘na tassa pabbajjācariye vā appasādaṃ karontī’’ti evaṃ vuttaṃ naṭṭhameva. Pabbajitā samagatikāti lokavohāro. Teneva cettha dukkhappattādinā desantaragamanañca samagatikaṃ kataṃ. Videsaṃ gantvāti cettha videso nāma mātāpituvāsato añño deso, na uppattidesato. Byañjanattho eva ce pamāṇaṃ, na yutti. Matamātāpitikopi na pabbājetabboti āpajjati, tasmā anuppattabbaṭṭhāne ṭhitehiyeva mātāpitūhi ananuññāto putto na pabbājetabboti evamidhādhippāyo veditabbo, aññathā pāḷiyā virujjheyya, āpattiṭṭhānassa ca sithilakaraṇaṃ aṭṭhakathāya na yujjati. Idaṃ tāva evaṃ hotu, ‘‘vihāraṃ vā jhāpemī’’tiādinayo kathaṃ na virujjhatīti ce? Attaparūpaddavappasaṅgabhayena avasena pabbajitattā, puttarakkhaṇatthaṃ pabbajitattā ca. Evañhi sati sayameva so attanā pabbajito hoti, na kenaci upalāpetvā pabbajito. ‘‘Puttapemaṃ vā puttarakkhe piyo hotī’’ti nidānānulomato na virujjhati.
学处与处罚事之论述注释巴利
Sikkhāpadadaṇḍakammavatthukathāvaṇṇanā
107 “自己的住处”,就是个人专属的住处。“口门食”,是指应当通过嘴巴来吃的东西。对于这上面该用的东西,他们设置障碍、加以阻挡。或者说,“诸比丘,我允许设置障碍”——凡是所允许的障碍,他们就把那个障碍当作通过口门吃进去的食物,这就是这段话的意思。巴利
107.Attanopariveṇañcāti puggalikaṃ. Mukhadvārikanti mukhadvārena bhuñjitabbaṃ. Tattha niyojitabbakaṃ, tassa āvaraṇaṃ nivāraṇaṃ karonti. Atha vā ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, āvaraṇaṃ kātu’’nti yaṃ āvaraṇaṃ anuññātaṃ, taṃ āvaraṇaṃ mukhadvārikaṃ āhāraṃ karontīti adhippāyo.
关于“未询问而障难事等”的注释巴利
Anāpucchāvaraṇavatthuādikathāvaṇṇanā
108 108. “他人的破戒比丘”也有这个意思。有些人写成“破戒比丘们”,这并不好。不过古师们说:“如果被劝告到第三次还不停止,就应该先告知僧团,然后把他灭摈;即使他再来请求出家,也要先告知僧团,然后才让他出家。”关于“如同比丘们受达上时的甘马语”这一句,意思是:“就像一个人受了达上之后,舍弃了学处,仍然穿着原来的衣服,后来再次受达上时,对先前比自己戒腊更低的、戒腊相同的人,又要重新行礼等;同样,沙弥再次受了三皈依之后,对在那之前比自己戒腊更低的、戒腊相同的沙弥,也要重新行礼等。不过在这里,外在形相并不能证明戒腊更长,这就是所说的意思。”有些人说:“非时食对沙弥来说只是违犯而已。”应当以“尊者,罪过落到了我身上”这样的方式,让他发露忏悔罪过。有人说:“如果不舍弃邪见,只要被说‘你,沙弥,走吧’,就成了巴拉基格”;又说:“因为说到‘到第三次’,所以仅仅说佛陀等的坏话,或者仅仅执取邪见,三皈依并不会破失。”他们这样说。既然如此,我的想法是:对杀生等行为的人,也会同样成立。有些人说:“对无戒者才更要说灭摈”,这看起来是合理的。因为世尊不允许对有戒者作形相的灭摈,这一点应当考察。古师们说:“以染污比丘尼为借口,把堪任和不堪任的人都收摄进来。”像这里所显示的“连出家也得不到”这个道理,同样地,按照“诸比丘,黄门未受达上者不应授达上,已受达上者应当灭摈”等说法所说的人,也没有出家,这一点已经说明了。因为除了这个情况之外,并没有其他地方禁止他们出家。又有人说:“‘诸比丘,染污比丘尼者,未受达上者不应授达上,已受达上者应当灭摈’——既然这样说是一样的,那么为了说明他们也被禁止出家,就像他被禁止出家一样,所以又提到了‘染污比丘尼者’。”这话有什么用呢?难道注书中不是已经说了吗:“这里凡是出家被禁止的,就是针对他而说:‘未受达上者不应授达上,已受达上者应当灭摈。’”巴利
108. Parassa dussīlabhikkhussapīti attho. Keci ‘‘dussīlabhikkhūpī’’ti likhanti, taṃ na sundaraṃ. Porāṇā pana ‘‘yāvatatiyaṃ vuccamāno ce na oramati, saṅghaṃ apaloketvā nāsetabbo, puna pabbajjaṃ yācamānopi apaloketvā pabbājetabbo’’ti vadanti. Bhikkhūnaṃ upasampadakammavācāsadisanti ettha ‘‘yathā upasampanno sikkhaṃ paccakkhāya yathānivatthapārutova hutvā pacchā upasampanno pubbe attano navakatarassa samānavassikassa puna vandanādīni karoti, evaṃ sāmaṇeropi puna gahitasaraṇo tato pubbe attano navakatarassa samānavassikassa sāmaṇerassa puna vandanādīni karoti. Liṅgaṃ panettha vuḍḍhatarabhāvaṃ na sādhetīti vuttaṃ hotī’’ti vuttaṃ. Vikālabhojanaṃ sāmaṇerānaṃ vītikkamevāti eke. ‘‘Accayo maṃ, bhante, accāgamā’’tiādinā nayena accayaṃ desāpetabbo. ‘‘Diṭṭhiyā anissajjanena ‘tvaṃ, sāmaṇera, gacchā’ti vutteyeva pārājiko hotī’’ti vuttaṃ, ‘‘yāvatatiyanti vuttattā buddhādīnaṃ avaṇṇabhāsitamattena ca diṭṭhiggahitamattena ca saraṇāni na bhijjantīti vuttaṃ hotī’’ti vadanti. Evaṃ sante pāṇātipātādiṃ karontassāpi taṃ sambhotīti mama takko. ‘‘Nissīlassa puna nāsanā vuttā’’ti ca keci vadanti, taṃ yuttaṃ viya. Na hi bhagavā sīlavantassa liṅganāsanaṃ anujānātīti vicāretabbaṃ, bhikkhunidūsakāpadesena bhabbābhabbe saṅgaṇhātīti porāṇā. ‘‘Pabbajjampi na labhatīti yathā cettha ayamattho dassito, tathā ‘paṇḍako, bhikkhave, anupasampanno na upasampādetabbo, upasampanno nāsetabbo’ti (mahāva. 109) ādinā nayena vuttānampi pabbajjaṃ natthīti dīpitaṃ hoti. Na hi idaṃ ṭhānaṃ ṭhapetvā tesaṃ pabbajjāya vāritaṭṭhānaṃ atthi. ‘Bhikkhunidūsako, bhikkhave, anupasampanno na upasampādetabbo, upasampanno nāsetabbo’ti (mahāva. 114) vuttenapi samānattā tassa pabbajjā viya tesampi pabbajjā vāritāva hotītipi dassetuṃ puna bhikkhunidūsakoti gahitanti apare’’ti vuttaṃ. Kiṃ iminā? Nanu aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘yassa cettha pabbajjā vāritā, taṃ sandhāya idaṃ vuttaṃ anupasampanno na upasampādetabbo, upasampanno nāsetabbo’’ti.
般哒咖事缘的注释巴利
Paṇḍakavatthukathāvaṇṇanā
109 对于“以手段造成的黄门”(opakkamikapaṇḍaka),因为根器残劣,所以未出家的人被禁止出家,已经出家的人不应受达上。如果先前已经受达上的人有亲近行为,不应作灭摈——这不是我们的推论,是阿阇梨说的。断根而生的人不是黄门。在五种黄门中,只有无男根黄门才是无性者。其余四种应知为有性者。不过他们的性就是黄门性。有些人说这四种也是男子。有些人说女人也有半月黄门。一旦做了那种行为,黄门性就必定存在,所以不能出家。“但如果对某个人并不存在,那出家就不被遮止——有人这样宣说决断。”巴利
109. Opakkamikapaṇḍakassa hīnaṅgattā apabbajitassa pabbajjā vāritā, pabbajitassa upasampadā na kātabbā. Pubbe upasampannassa ce upacaraṇaṃ atthi, na nāsanā kātabbāti no takkoti ācariyo. Chinnaṅgajāto na paṇḍako. Pañcasu napuṃsakapaṇḍakova abhāvako. Itare cattāro sabhāvakāti veditabbā. Bhāvo pana tesaṃ paṇḍako hoti. Ete cattāropi kira purisāvāti eke. Itthīpi pakkhapaṇḍakī hotīti eke. Upakkame kate paṇḍakabhāvo avassaṃ hoti, tasmā pabbajjaṃ na labhati. ‘‘Yadi pana kassaci na hoti, pabbajjā na vāritāti vinicchayaṃ vadantī’’ti vuttaṃ.
有人写道:“‘出家被遮止’的意思是:在非般哒格那一类里,应该让他出家;在般哒格那一类里,应该灭摈。”不过在古义疏里,连同马萨般哒格和列卡般哒格一起,一共说了七种般哒格。其中,所谓列卡般哒格,据说是因为咒术而种子受损的人。那里还说:“已经出家的奥巴咖米咖列卡般哒格不应被灭摈。谁让他出家,谁就犯恶作。”巴利
‘‘Pabbajjā vāritāti apaṇḍakapakkhe pabbājetvā paṇḍakapakkhe nāsetabboti adhippāyo’’ti likhitaṃ. Porāṇagaṇṭhipade pana māsapaṇḍakalekhapaṇḍakehi saha satta paṇḍakā vuttā. Tattha lekhapaṇḍako nāma kira mantavasena upahatabījo. Tattha ‘‘opakkamikalekhapaṇḍakā pabbajitā na nāsetabbā. Yo pabbājeti, tassa dukkaṭa’’nti ca vuttaṃ.
关于贼住者事例的注释巴利
Theyyasaṃvāsakavatthukathāvaṇṇanā
110 关于“贼住”,这里虽然从字面意思看,只以“共住”之义就表现为“贼住”,但实际上有三种贼住。这里所说的“共住”,不是指同一甘马等意义上的共住,而是指计算比丘戒腊等一类行事上的差别,在这里称为共住。因为这种事可以用偷盗的方式来做,别的则不行,这是注疏的意图。前往外地出家的人,被出家人问到时说“有十年戒腊”之类的话,就有过失。如果是对在家人说的,就没有过失,有人这样主张。因为王难等而穿上袈裟之相的人,即使有“让在家人知道我是沙门”的欺骗心,但由于没有欺骗比丘的意图,也没有想和他们共住的意图,所以不构成过失。有人说“一切外道之食”,是指来到寺院而拿取僧团物品的人,因为要避开共住很难,所以这样说,这是书里写的。因为说了“善具戒”,所以如果是在家人,若让他受具足戒,就成了善具戒者;“正在未具足戒时”这句话,是说明:如果在受具足戒的时候听到这件事,即使不告知,也还是“善具戒”。在《安达卡注》和《古义疏》中,把破戒比丘称为“贼住”,应当理解为是依据“诸比丘,你们以偷盗方式吃了国家布施的食物”这种方式来说的。因此说“不应取彼”。“在玛哈贝喇等处”这句话,是用来说明在家人那边的情况。巴利
110.Theyyasaṃvāsakoti ettha kiñcāpi byañjanatthavasena saṃvāsatthenakova theyyasaṃvāsakoti paññāyati, atha kho tayo theyyasaṃvāsakā. Saṃvāsoti cettha na ekakammādiko saṃvāso, kintu bhikkhuvassagaṇanādiko kiriyabhedo idha saṃvāso nāma. Imañhi sakkā theyyāya kātuṃ, netaranti aṭṭhakathāya adhippāyo. Videsaṃ gantvā pabbajitehi pucchite ‘‘dasavasso’’tiādiṃ bhaṇantassa doso. Gihīnaṃ vutte doso natthīti keci. Rājabhayādīhi gahitaliṅgānaṃ ‘‘gihī maṃ samaṇoti jānātū’’ti vañcanacitte satipi bhikkhūnaṃ vañcetukāmatāya, tehi saṃvasitukāmatāya ca abhāvā doso na jāto. ‘‘Sabbapāsaṇḍiyabhattānīti vihāraṃ āgantvā saṅghikaṃ gaṇhantassa saṃvāsaṃ pariharituṃ dukkaraṃ, tasmā vutta’’nti ca likhitaṃ. ‘‘Sūpasampanno’’ti vuttattā gahaṭṭhampi sace upasampādenti, sūpasampannoti āpannaṃ, ‘‘anupasampannakāleyevā’’ti iminā sace upasampannakāle suṇāti, sūpasampanno eva anārocentopīti dasseti. Andhakaṭṭhakathāyaṃ, porāṇagaṇṭhipadesu ca dussīlabhikkhu ‘‘theyyasaṃvāsako’’ti vutto ‘‘theyyāya vo, bhikkhave, raṭṭhapiṇḍo bhutto’’ti (pārā. 195) iminā kira pariyāyenāti veditabbaṃ. Tenevāha ‘‘taṃ na gahetabba’’nti. ‘‘Mahāpeḷādīsū’’ti etena gihisantakaṃ dassitaṃ.
自己还是沙弥时,虚报戒腊而受用供养,就犯巴拉基格,但不算贼住;比丘也是这样。不过这个人应当按物品价值来处罚,正是出于这个意思,才说了“自己还是沙弥”等话。然而,这个名为“贼住”的人,因为是已出家者,而不是未出家者,所以不能说“诸比丘,贼住者,未出家者不应让他出家,已出家者应被驱摈”。正因如此,从般哒咖开始,才以“未受达上者不应让他受达上”等方式安立经典条文,并不是因为仅仅未受达上本身就没有资格,否则就会推出这十一类人也都适合出家的过失。再者,也是为了避免出现不想要的过失,才这样安立经典条文。因为投向外道和破僧,只发生在已受达上的人身上,不会发生在未受达上的人身上;这两种人也都是已出家者,而不是未出家者。所以,如果存在“诸比丘,投向外道者,未出家者不应让他出家”等经典条文,那么这两种人就都会变成不应让他出家,于是就会陷入不想要的过失。然而,在三种贼住中,依止沙弥身份而犯的是持相盗窃者,依止已受达上身份而犯的是共住盗窃者,兼具两种意义的则是二义盗窃者。因为沙弥的共住在这里并不叫“共住”,所以有些人在注疏中说:“比丘的戒腊计算等一切行事差别,在这个意义中才叫共住。”按长幼次序礼拜、欢喜承事、拒绝迎接、遮止等,因为与沙弥共住有共通之处,所以并非如此,这是阿阇黎所说。巴利
Sayaṃ sāmaṇerova kūṭavassāni gaṇetvā gaṇhanto pārājiko hoti, theyyasaṃvāsako pana na hoti, tathā bhikkhupi, so pana bhaṇḍagghena kāretabboti iminā adhippāyena ‘‘sayaṃ sāmaṇerovā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Ayaṃ pana theyyasaṃvāsako nāma yasmā pabbajitova hoti, nāpabbajito, tasmā ‘‘theyyasaṃvāsako, bhikkhave, apabbajito na pabbājetabbo, pabbajito nāsetabbo’’ti vattuṃ na sakkāti katvā imassa vasena paṇḍakato paṭṭhāya ‘‘anupasampanno na upasampādetabbo’’tiādinā pāḷi ṭhapitā, na upasampadāmattasseva abhabbattā ekādasannampi nesaṃ pabbajjārahabhāvappasaṅgato. Apica aniṭṭhadosappasaṅgato tathā eva pāḷi ṭhapitā. Yasmā titthiyapakkamanaṃ, saṅghabhedanañca upasampannasseva hoti, nānupasampannassa, so duvidhopi pabbajitova hoti, nāpabbajito, tasmā ‘‘titthiyapakkantako, bhikkhave, apabbajito na pabbājetabbo’’tiādipāḷiyā sati te ubhopi apabbājetabbā hontīti aniṭṭhappasaṅgo āpajjatīti. Tīsu pana theyyasaṃvāsakesu sāmaṇerālayaṃ karonto liṅgatthenako, upasampannālayaṃ karonto saṃvāsatthenako, ubhayatthenako ca. Na hi sāmaṇerasaṃvāso idha saṃvāso nāma, teneva aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘bhikkhuvassagaṇanādiko hi sabbopi kiriyabhedo imasmiṃ atthe saṃvāso’’ti vuttanti eke. Yathāvuḍḍhaṃ vandanasādiyanāsanapaṭibāhanānaṃ sāmaṇerasaṃvāsasāmaññato nevāti ācariyo.
外道叛教者故事的注释巴利
Titthiyapakkantakakathāvaṇṇanā
“诸比丘,外道离去者”等语,本来应该在作为其缘起的婆苏罗事件本身中宣说,虽然应当如此,但因为在那里没有禁止的场合,所以不可能。只有在这里,因为不涉及贼住者的情况才宣说。其中,“那时也不应令出家”这句话,应当理解为只是就这里而言,因为看出婆苏罗对受达上本身有乞求之意,而世尊以“他来了不应令受达上”一语只禁止了受达上,所以有允许出家的过失之虞,应如此理解。那些人,只要在相上刚一取著,不论其见解已被接受还是未被接受,就成为外道离去者,或者落到不应礼敬的裸形相的最胜地位,不得解脱。对此,有人说:“在足处得恶作,将成为邪命外道,因为以不正之心而离去故;非裸形者,因为以行走而离去故。”依这两种说法都合理,这是我的推论。暂时来说,其见解保护他,因为未被接受故。由已受达上的比丘所说,如何了知?有人说:“以注疏言说的量为准。”有人说:“以因缘为准。”还有人说:“因为婆苏罗是受达上者,所以外道离去性之说只属于受达上者。”正如阿阇黎所说:“或和尚离去,或还俗,或命终,或转派。”有人说:“所谓‘或转派’者,因为在驱摈沙弥的事情中没有这种情况。”又有人说:“因为担心有其他外道先前受达上者转派,所以在未受达上时,为受达上的目的而制定别住。”是否也为了出家?不是,因为前面已经考察过,而且未出家者没有增上戒。巴帝摩卡戒才叫增上戒,这在未出家者身上不存在。而此人的别住行仪中说的是增上戒。正如所说:“诸比丘,又有曾属外道者,对诵说、询问、增上戒有强烈欲求。”(《大品》87)再者,“诸比丘,若有生为释迦族的曾属外道者前来,他来了应予受达上”(《大品》87),这里只说明受达上本身。因为这里只说明受达上本身,正是由于其人已成就别住的授予。这段圣典正是为了显示别住的授予。巴利
Titthiyapakkantako, bhikkhavetiādi attano nidānabhūte pasūravatthusmiṃ eva vattabbaṃ samānampi tattha vāritaadhikārābhāvā abhabbā. Idheva theyyasaṃvāsakena vinā sambhavato vutto. Tattha ‘‘atha kho na pabbājetabbopī’’ti idheva vacanaṃ pasūrassa upasampadāya eva yācanicchāya dassanena, ‘‘so āgato na upasampādetabbo’’ti bhagavato upasampadāmattapaṭisedhanena ca pabbajjānumatidosappasaṅgabhayāti veditabbaṃ. Tesaṃ liṅge ādinnamatte laddhiyā gahitāyapi aggahitāyapi titthiyapakkantako hoti, avandanīyasseva naggaliṅgassa seṭṭhabhāvaṃ vā upagacchati, na muccati, ettha ‘‘padavāre dukkaṭaṃ, ājīvako bhavissanti visamacittavasena gatattā naggo hutvā na gamanenā’’ti vadanti. Ubhinnampi vasena yuttanti mama takko. Tāva naṃ laddhi rakkhati asampaṭicchitattā. Upasampannabhikkhunā kathitoti kathaṃ paññāyati? Aṭṭhakathāvacanappamāṇatovāti eke. Nidānavasenāti eke. Pasūrassa upasampannattā upasampannānaṃ eva titthiyapakkantatāvacanatoti eke. Yathāha ‘‘upajjhāyo pakkantovā hoti, vibbhanto vā, kālaṃkato vā, pakkhasaṅkanto vā’’ti ācariyo. Pakkhasaṅkanto vāti sāmaṇeranāsanāvatthūsu abhāvatoti eke. Aññatitthiyapubbassa upasampannassa sato pakkhasaṅkantabhayā anupasampannakāle upasampadatthaṃ parivāsapaññāpanenāti eke . Pabbajjatthampīti ce? Na, pubbe vicāritattā, apabbajitassa adhisīlābhāvato ca. Pātimokkhasīlañhi adhisīlaṃ nāma, tañca apabbajitassa natthi. Imassa ca parivāsavatte adhisīlaṃ vuttaṃ. Yathāha ‘‘puna caparaṃ, bhikkhave, aññatitthiyapubbo tibbacchando hoti uddese paripucchāya adhisīle’’ti (mahāva. 87). Apica ‘‘sace, bhikkhave, jātiyā sākiyo aññatitthiyapubbo āgacchati, so āgato upasampādetabbo’’ti (mahāva. 87) ettha upasampadāmattaparidīpanato. Upasampadāmattaparidīpanañhettha tasseva parivāsadānasiddhito. Parivāsadānattanidassanatthe hesā pāḷi.
畜生之基的注释巴利
Tiracchānagatavatthukathāvaṇṇanā
111 “龙种”是指从龙族而来,意思是说,以自身的龙族出身作为原因。为什么这样说呢?因为所有的龙都经常与同类行淫交合,而且全都放纵地沉溺于睡眠。巴利
111.Nāgayoniyāti nāgayonito, attano nāgajātihetūti adhippāyo. Kiṃkāraṇā? Abhikkhaṇaṃ sakajātiyā methunapaṭisevane, vissaṭṭhaniddokkamane ca sabbesampi.
杀母等事例的注释巴利
Mātughātakādivatthukathāvaṇṇanā
112-5 “堕胎”是指使胎儿滑落,意思是想要穿着袈裟衣。以恶心。什么样的恶心?意思是怀着杀心。有些人说,是因为导致出血才说是恶心,这并不妥当。巴利
112-5.Apavāhananti pakkhalanaṃ, kāsāyavatthanivāsanaṃ icchamānanti attho. Duṭṭhacittena. Kīdisena? Vadhakacittenāti adhippāyo. Lohituppādanavasena duṭṭhacittanti keci, taṃ na sundaraṃ.
关于二根者事的讨论注释巴利
Ubhatobyañjanakavatthukathāvaṇṇanā
116 有人写道:“如果认为他们在结生时是依据所生起的性征而得到这个名称,这就是那句话的意思。”巴利
116. ‘‘Yadi paṭisandhiyaṃ uppannaliṅgena etaṃ nāmaṃ labhantīti adhippāyo’’ti likhitaṃ.
无依止师等事例论的注释巴利
Anupajjhāyakādivatthukathāvaṇṇanā
117 有人主张“甘马被破坏”,这种说法不应采纳。之所以说这个说法站得住,是因为按照“比丘们,如果本该由五人僧团来做的甘马,却由一个以比丘尼为第五人的团体来做,那就是非法甘马,不应做”(《大品》390)这类律文所显示的方式,黄门等人只有在充当补足人数时,甘马才会被破坏,并不是在所有情况下都会被破坏。否则,就应该有“若以黄门为亲教师而做甘马,则是非法甘马,不应做”这样的律文出现。就像为衣钵不具足的人授达上时,在甘马语中宣称“衣钵具足”这个并不存在的事实,即使以这种不实的说法授了达上,那个事实虽然不存在,达上仍然成立。同样,在宣称“这位佛护是具寿丹玛·拉奇达的求达上者”时,即使所依据的是黄门亲教师等并不存在的事实,或者宣称了一个不存在的事实,由于有人补足了人数,达上依然成立。正因为没有“比丘们,不应以黄门为亲教师给人授达上,谁授了,就犯恶作,而那个人也不算得达上”这类明文,这个道理自然就成立了。佛陀绝不会对应当说的事保持沉默,所以才说了“若有比丘明知……年未满二十……而那个人仍是未得达上者”(《巴吉帝亚》403)等话。同样,也不应采纳这样的说法:“按照‘应由一位贤能、有能力的比丘向僧团宣告’(《大品》71)这句话,如果由贼住者等人担任老师来唱诵,达上就不成立。”更进一步说,当按照“这四种甘马以五种方式败坏”(《附随》482)等方式讲述甘马的成就与败坏时,由于并没有说到“甘马以七种方式败坏:从事、从白、从宣告、从结界、从众会、从亲教师、从老师”,所以不应采纳。如果说“从众会”这句话已经包含了老师和亲教师,那也不对,因为在解释“甘马以十二种方式从众会败坏”时,并没有提到他们。这个道理就是说:因为在各处都可以通过律文本身直接了解,所以先指出方法,再加以概括,这就是对道理的探求。这里应当考察的是:那些比丘为没有亲教师的人授达上时,是按照前面所说的方式宣说了那个不实的事实呢,还是因为害怕妄语而根本没有唱诵那些词句?如果因为亲教师不存在而没有唱诵,那就会产生所说的“没有触及补特伽罗”这种败坏;如果唱诵了,那他们不就犯妄语了吗?回答是:他们确实唱诵了,因为害怕前面所说的那种败坏,也因为注释书说“甘马并不会被破坏”,并非因为妄语不可能发生,而且即使有妄语,甘马仍然可以成立。因为不可能通过妄语使甘马败坏或成就。因此,对于“为没有亲教师的人授达上”这句话,应当寻求一个远离这两种过失的含义。巴利
117. ‘‘Keci ‘kuppatī’ti vadanti, taṃ ‘na gahetabba’’nti yaṃ vuttaṃ, taṃ ‘‘pañcavaggakaraṇīyañce, bhikkhave, kammaṃ bhikkhunipañcamo kammaṃ kareyya, akammaṃ na ca karaṇīya’’ntiādinā (mahāva. 390) nayena vuttattā paṇḍakādīnaṃ gaṇapūraṇabhāve eva kammaṃ kuppati, na sabbanti katvā suvuttaṃ, itarathā ‘‘paṇḍakupajjhāyena kammaṃ kareyya, akammaṃ na ca karaṇīya’’ntiādikāya pāḷiyā bhavitabbaṃ siyā. Yathā aparipuṇṇapattacīvarassa upasampādanakāle kammavācāyaṃ ‘‘paripuṇṇassa pattacīvara’’nti asantaṃ vatthuṃ kittetvā upasampadāya katāya tasmiṃ asantepi upasampadā ruhati, evaṃ ‘‘ayaṃ buddharakkhito āyasmato dhammarakkhitassa upasampadāpekkho’’ti avatthuṃ paṇḍakupajjhāyādiṃ, asantaṃ vā, vatthuṃ kittetvā katāyapi gaṇapūrakānamatthitāya upasampadā ruhateva. ‘‘Na, bhikkhave, paṇḍakupajjhāyena upasampādetabbo, yo upasampādeyya, āpatti dukkaṭassa, so ca puggalo anupasampanno’’tiādivacanassābhāvā ayamattho siddhova hoti. Na hi buddhā vattabbayuttaṃ na vadanti, tena vuttaṃ ‘‘yo pana, bhikkhu, jānaṃ ūnavīsativassaṃ…pe… so ca puggalo anupasampanno’’tiādi (pāci. 403). Tathā ‘‘byattena bhikkhunā paṭibalena saṅgho ñāpetabbo’ti (mahāva. 71) vacanato theyyasaṃvāsakādiācariyehi anussāvanāya katāya upasampadā na ruhati tesaṃ abhikkhuttā’’ti vacanampi na gahetabbaṃ. Kiñca bhiyyo ‘‘imāni cattāri kammāni pañcahākārehi vipajjantī’’tiādinā (pari. 482) nayena kammānaṃ sampattivipattiyā kathiyamānāya ‘‘sattahi ākārehi kammāni vipajjanti vatthuto vā ñattito vā anussāvanato vā sīmato vā parisato vā upajjhāyato vā ācariyato vā’’ti akathitattā na gahetabbaṃ. ‘‘Parisato vā’’ti vacanena ācariyaupajjhāyānaṃ vā saṅgaho katoti ce? Na, ‘‘dvādasahākārehi parisato kammāni vipajjantī’’ti etassa vibhaṅge tesamanāmaṭṭhattā. Ayamattho ‘‘yasmā tattha tattha sarūpena vuttapāḷivaseneva sakkā jānituṃ, tasmā nayamukhaṃ dassetvā saṃkhittoti ayamassa yuttigavesanā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tatridaṃ vicāretabbaṃ – anupajjhāyakaṃ upasampādentā te bhikkhū yathāvuttanayena abhūtaṃ taṃ vatthuṃ kittayiṃsu, udāhu musāvādabhayā tāneva padāni na sāvesunti. Kiñcettha yadi tāva upajjhāyābhāvata na sāvesuṃ, ‘‘puggalaṃ na parāmasatī’’ti vuttavipattippasaṅgo hoti, atha sāvesuṃ, musāvādo nesaṃ bhavatīti? Vuccate – sāvesuṃyeva yathāvuttavipattippasaṅgabhayā, ‘‘kammaṃ pana na kuppatī’’ti aṭṭhakathāya vuttattā ca, na musāvādassa asambhavato, musāvādenāpi kammasambhavato ca. Na hi sakkā musāvādena kammavipattisampattiṃ kātunti. Tasmā ‘‘anupajjhāyakaṃ upasampādentī’’ti vacanassa ubhayadosavinimutto attho pariyesitabbo.
这里还有一个理据:古注中说:“从前,在出家、受达上和亲教师都实际存在的情况下,仅仅因为没有按照受亲教师的程序来认定,所以才有‘那时比丘们没有亲教师’等说法;同样,这里虽然亲教师实际存在,也只因为没有认定,才说‘为没有亲教师的人授达上’。不过,被甘马语阿阇梨认定的人,应当以‘这是我的亲教师’这样的认知来称名亲教师,然后唱诵甘马语;或者,亲教师因为某种原因不能亲自到场配合,就取来他的同意后再唱诵甘马语;或者,亲教师把弟子给了求达上的人之后,后来那人受达上后,在像那样的事情上被追问或不被追问时,那个沙弥自己承认是舍戒者或犯了极重罪;又或者,像持欲人那样,亲教师去了别的结界。有人说‘甘马语仍然成立’,并引用‘比丘们,我允许在边地由持律者为第五人的团体授达上’(《大品》259)这句话,主张‘以持律者为第五人的亲教师必须现前’。如果这种说法算标准,那么在中部地区就不该有那句话了。如果说即使亲教师不现前,甘马语也成立,那岂不是成了过失?不是。为什么?因为在判定甘马成就时,我们依据的是‘触及补特伽罗’那段原文。那里,未现前而被称为亲教师的那个人,根本算不上被触及,所以在那里应当理解为像触及僧团一样,是触及补特伽罗。他们由僧团、团体和亲教师一起授达上,从意义上说,是因为这些都属于补特伽罗。以黄门等为亲教师而授达上,是因为授戒时并不知道,这是古师们的意见。巴利
Ayañcettha yutti – ‘‘yathā pubbe pabbajjupasampadupajjhāyesu vijjamānesupi upajjhāyaggahaṇakkamena aggahitattā ‘tena kho pana samayena bhikkhū anupajjhāyaka’ntiādi vuttaṃ, tathā idhāpi upajjhāyassa vijjamānasseva sato aggahitattā ‘anupajjhāyakaṃ upasampādentī’ti vuttaṃ. Kammavācācariyena pana gahito tena upajjhāyoti saññāya upajjhāyaṃ kittetvā kammavācaṃ sāvetabbaṃ, kenaci vā kāraṇena kāyasāmaggiṃ adentassa upajjhāyassa chandaṃ gahetvā kammavācaṃ sāveti, upajjhāyo vā upasampadāpekkhassa upajjhaṃ datvā pacchā upasampanne tasmiṃ tādise vatthusmiṃ samanuyuñjiyamāno vā asamanuyuñjiyamāno vā upajjhāyadānato pubbe eva sāmaṇero paṭijānāti, sikkhāpaccakkhātako vā antimavatthuajjhāpannako vā paṭijānāti, chandahārakādayo viya upajjhāyo vā aññasīmāgato hoti, ‘kammavācā ruhatī’ti vatvā ‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, paccantimesu janapadesu vinayadharapañcamena gaṇena upasampada’nti (mahāva. 259) vuttattā keci ‘vinayadharapañcamena upajjhāyena sannihiteneva bhavitabba’nti vadantī’’ti porāṇagaṇṭhipade vuttaṃ. So ce pāṭho pamāṇo majjhimesu janapadesu tassa vacanassābhāvato. Asannihitepi upajjhāye kammavācā ruhatīti āpajjatīti ce? Na, kasmā? Kammasampattiyaṃ ‘‘puggalaṃ parāmasatī’’ti vuttapāṭhova no pamāṇaṃ. Na hi tattha asannihito upajjhāyasaṅkhāto puggalo parāmasanaṃ arahati, tasmā tattha saṅghaparāmasanaṃ viya puggalaparāmasanaṃ veditabbaṃ. Saṅghena gaṇena upajjhāyena upasampādenti tesaṃ atthato puggalattā. Paṇḍakādiupajjhāyena upasampādenti upasampādanakāle aviditattāti porāṇā.
关于无钵者等事的讨论注释巴利
Apattakādivatthukathāvaṇṇanā
118 “为衣钵不具足者授具足戒”:甘马语阿阇梨带着“衣钵已具足”的想法,或者根本不顾事实是否具足,只是顺着文句念出“衣钵具足”的甘马语。就像现在,即使父母已经去世或远在他方的人,被问到“你得到父母允许了吗?”时,也会回答“是的,尊者”。不用多说,这里的要点是这样的:因为“那时,四种甘马以五种方式失败”这一判别标准还没有制定,他们就为没有依止师等人授具足戒;因为应被拒绝的人还没有说明,他们就为以黄门为依止师等人授具足戒;因为没有询问十三种障碍,他们就为衣钵不具足者授具足戒。应当知道,“比丘们,我允许以白四甘马授具足戒”(《大品》69)——在最初允许的甘马语中并没有“衣钵具足”这句话,这句话是后来才被允许的,这就是此处的明证。巴利
118.Apattacīvaraṃupasampādentīti kammavācācariyo ‘‘paripuṇṇassa pattacīvara’’nti saññāya , kevalaṃ atthasampattiṃ anapekkhitvā santapadanihārena vā ‘‘paripuṇṇassa pattacīvara’’nti kammavācaṃ sāveti. Yathā etarahi matavippavutthamātāpitikopi ‘‘anuññātosi mātāpitūhī’’ti puṭṭho ‘‘āma bhante’’ti vadati. Kiṃ bahunā, ayaṃ panettha sāro – ‘‘tasmiṃ samaye cattāri kammāni pañcahākārehi vipajjantī’’ti lakkhaṇassa na tāva paññattattā anupajjhāyakādiṃ upasampādenti, vajjanīyapuggalānaṃ avuttattā paṇḍakupajjhāyādiṃ upasampādenti. Terasantarāyapucchāya adassanattā apattacīvarakaṃ upasampādenti. ‘‘Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, ñatticatutthena kammena upasampādetu’’nti (mahāva. 69) evaṃ sabbapaṭhamaṃ anuññātakammavācāya ‘‘paripuṇṇassa pattacīvara’’nti avacanamettha sādhakanti veditabbaṃ. Tañhi vacanaṃ anukkamenānuññātanti.
关于断手等事例的注释巴利
Hatthacchinnādivatthukathāvaṇṇanā
119 这件事暂且完全成立。可是,“让哑巴出家,让聋子出家”这种说法,怎么可能成立呢?因为从一开始,世尊就已经在“诸比丘,我允许以这三种皈依仪式出家”等文句里作了开许。有人问:那该怎么解释?回答是:在“诸比丘,应当这样让他出家。应当对他说‘你要这样说’……乃至……第三次,我皈依僧”这一段里,有人误解了“应当对他说‘你要这样说’”这句话的意思,于是就真的让哑巴出了家。其实,“你要这样说”的意思是:先命令那个想出家的人,然后依止师自己应当说“第三次,我皈依僧”。那个想出家的人受了这样的命令之后,无论他跟着依止师的话一句一句地念,还是不念,世尊在各地都已说过:“以身表示、以语表示、以身和语表示,依止师就算被接受了,欲就算给出了,清净就算给出了,自恣就算给出了。”按照这个道理类推,那个想出家的人以身表示,就算作了皈依;或者说,在世间,以身表示的人也被说成“他这样说了”。抓住这个方便之义,就说“让哑巴出家”。应当这样理解。古注中说:先问“怎么会让哑巴出家呢?”然后回答说:因为他的身体也能生起信心,所以给他身体上的接触,用手势让他表示,然后让他出家。何必多说呢?这里的要点是:就像先前在讲出家仪节时,截断了“出家”的说法,转而依照“诸比丘,黄门、未受达上者不应授达上”等文句,只就达上来说。在贼住那一节里,虽然因为不可能成立,所以那里没有说出家,但一切地方都是以受达上的说法来意指,因为受达上的效力涵盖出家;如果受达上的出家被禁止,那么受达上本身也就被禁止了。同样,这里正当讲受达上的时候,截断了受达上的说法,而只就受达上之义来作出家的表述,应当这样理解。当然,这话本来不该说,因为在哑巴那一节里出家是不可能成立的,所以照理从一开始就应该只就受达上来说;然而正是为了遮止误解,才偏偏依着哑巴那一节,从一开始就作出家的表述。为什么呢?因为经中说:“诸比丘,哑巴未达接纳,如果僧团接纳他,他就是已被接纳。”由此可知,哑巴是已受达上的人。于是就会产生一种误解:“他只是受了达上,并没有出家,因为他的出家不可能成立。”为了让人舍弃这种误解,应当知道:凡是已受达上的人,就是已出家的人;但已出家的人当中,有些已受达上,有些未受达上。世尊就是要让人产生这个正确的理解。巴利
119. Idaṃ tāva sabbathā hotu, ‘‘mūgaṃ pabbājenti, badhiraṃ pabbājentī’’ti idaṃ kathaṃ sambhavitumarahati ādito paṭṭhāya ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, imehi tīhi saraṇagamanehi pabbajja’’ntiādinā (mahāva. 34) anuññātattāti? Vuccate – ‘‘evañca pana, bhikkhave, pabbājetabboti. Evaṃ vadehīti vattabbo…pe… tatiyampi saṅghaṃ saraṇaṃ gacchāmī’’ti ettha ‘‘evaṃ vadehīti vattabbo’’ti imassa vacanassa micchā atthaṃ gahetvā mūgaṃ pabbājesuṃ. ‘‘Evaṃ vadehī’’ti taṃ pabbajjāpekkhaṃ āṇāpetvā sayaṃ upajjhāyena vattabbo ‘‘tatiyaṃ saṅghaṃ saraṇaṃ gacchāmī’’ti, so pabbajjāpekkho tathā āṇatto upajjhāyavacanassa anu anu vadatu vā, mā vā, tattha tattha bhagavā ‘‘kāyena viññāpeti, vācāya viññāpeti, kāyena vācāya viññāpeti, gahito hoti upajjhāyo. Dinno hoti chando. Dinnā hoti pārisuddhi. Dinnā hoti pavāraṇā’’ti vadati. Tadanumānena vā kāyena tena pabbajjāpekkhena viññattaṃ hoti saraṇagamananti vā lokepi kāyena viññāpento ‘‘evaṃ vadatī’’ti vuccati, taṃ pariyāyaṃ gahetvā mūgaṃ pabbājentīti veditabbaṃ. Porāṇagaṇṭhipade ‘‘mūgaṃ kathaṃ pabbājentī’ti pucchaṃ katvā tassa kāyappasādasambhavato kāyena pahāraṃ datvā hatthamuddāya viññāpetvā pabbājesu’’nti vuttaṃ. Kiṃ bahunā, ayaṃ panettha sāro – yathā pubbe pabbajjādhikāre vattamāne pabbajjābhilāpaṃ upacchinditvā ‘‘paṇḍako, bhikkhave, anupasampanno na upasampādetabbo’’tiādinā nayena upasampadavaseneva abhilāpo kato. Theyyasaṃvāsakapade asambhavato kiñcāpi so na kato pabbajjāva tattha katā, sabbattha pana upasampadābhilāpena adhippetā tadanubhāvato. Upasampadāya pabbajjāya vāritāya upasampadā vāritā hotīti katvā. Tathā idha upasampadādhikāre vattamāne upasampadābhilāpaṃ upacchinditvā upasampadameva sandhāya pabbajjābhilāpo katoti veditabbo. Kāmaṃ so na kattabbo, mūgapade asambhavato tassa vasena ādito paṭṭhāya upasampadābhilāpova kattabbo viya dissati, tathāpi tasseva mūgapadassa vasena ādito paṭṭhāya pabbajjābhilāpova kato micchāgahaṇanivāraṇatthaṃ. Kathaṃ? ‘‘Mūgo, bhikkhave, appatto osāraṇaṃ, tañce saṅgho osāreti, sosārito’’ti (mahāva. 396) vacanato mūgo upasampanno hotīti siddhaṃ. So ‘‘kevalaṃ upasampannova hoti, na pana pabbajito tassa pabbajjāya asambhavato’’ti micchāgāho hoti. Taṃ pariccajāpetvā yo upasampanno, so pabbajitova hoti. Pabbajito pana atthi koci upasampanno, atthi koci anupasampanno. Imaṃ sammāgāhaṃ uppādeti bhagavāti veditabbaṃ.
另外,对截手者等这些已出家的人,为了说明他们是善出家,也为了排除“他们到底有没有出家”的疑虑,这里才用了“出家”这个说法。怎么说呢?如果只靠“比丘们,截手者不应被允许出家”这类遮止的说法,又没有“已出家者是善出家”这样的交代,那人们就可能怀疑他们根本没有出家。既然有产生疑虑的可能,就应该把疑虑预先排除掉。在《犍度》里,针对受达上,世尊是用“比丘们,截手者没有资格被接纳,如果僧团接纳了他,他就是已被接纳”这样的方式来遮止的。正是按同样的方式,这里说明他们这些人全都是善出家;否则,就会得出一个不想要的结论:他们这些人只是受了达上,并没有出家。怎么说呢?如果律文里立的是“比丘们,截手者不应被允许出家,已经出家的应当被驱摈”,或者“比丘们,截手者不应被允许出家,谁让他出家就犯恶作,而且他还是没出家”,那么由于《瞻波犍度》里说的是“已被接纳”,就会落入这样的困境:要么“这些截手者之类的人只是受了达上,并没有出家”,要么“即使既受了达上又出了家,也应当被驱摈”——这就是这里要表达的意思。巴利
Apica tesaṃ hatthacchinnādīnaṃ pabbajitānaṃ supabbajitabhāvadīpanatthaṃ, pabbajjābhāvāsaṅkānivāraṇatthañcettha pabbajjābhilāpo kato. Kathaṃ? ‘‘Na, bhikkhave, hatthacchinno pabbājetabbo’’tiādinā paṭikkhepena, ‘‘pabbajitā supabbajitā’’ti vuttaṭṭhānābhāvena ca tesaṃ pabbajjābhāvappasaṅkā bhaveyya. Yathā pasaṅkābhave, tathā pasaṅkaṃ ṭhapeyya. Khandhake upasampadaṃ sandhāya ‘‘hatthacchinno, bhikkhave, appatto osāraṇaṃ, tañce saṅgho osāreti, sosārito’’tiādinā nayena bhagavā nivāreti. Teneva pana nayena pabbajitā te sabbepi supabbajitā evāti dīpeti, aññathā sabbepete upasampannāva honti, na pabbajitāti ayamaniṭṭhappasaṅgo āpajjati. Kathaṃ? ‘‘Hatthacchinno, bhikkhave, na pabbājetabbo, pabbajito nāsetabbo’’ti vā ‘‘na, bhikkhave, hatthacchinno pabbājetabbo, yo pabbājeyya, āpatti dukkaṭassa, so ca apabbajito’’ti vā tantiyā ṭhapitāya campeyyakkhandhake ‘‘sosārito’’ti vuttattā kevalaṃ ‘‘ime hatthacchinnādayo upasampannāva honti, na pabbajitā’’ti vā ‘‘upasampannāpi ce pabbajitā, nāsetabbā’’ti vā aniṭṭhakoṭṭhāso āpajjatīti adhippāyo.
这里还要再考察一下:因为并没有“他还没有出家”这种说法,所以会推出哑巴也能成功出家的结论;这样一来,出家也就成了单方面清净。这个不受认可的结论,怎么会不落到头上呢?
如果正确地把“出家”这个说法理解为这里指的是达上,那就不会落入这个结论。否则,如果只按字面去抓取含义,就会落入另一个也不受认可的结论,也就是所谓“没有像制定那样犯恶作”。
怎么回事呢?戒律里说:“诸比丘,不应让哑巴出家;谁让他出家,就犯恶作。”这里说的恶作,是在出家完成时才成立,而不是在它还没完成的时候。因为最先犯的只是前行阶段的恶作。所以,既然哑巴的出家完成本身根本不存在,这种恶作就任何时候都不可能有机会成立。
但如果按达上的含义来理解,因为甘马能够成立,所以就有可能成立。正因如此,圣典里才没有制定“诸比丘,不应让般哒咖受达上;谁让他受达上,就犯恶作”这条恶作。由于没有制定这条,这里只可能出现前行阶段的恶作,不会是别的。到这里就可以成立:以“出家”这个说法,那里指的其实是达上,而不是出家。巴利
Idaṃ panettha vicāretabbaṃ – ‘‘so ca apabbajito’’ti vacanābhāvato mūgassa pabbajjasiddhippasaṅgato pabbajjāpi ekatosuddhiyā hotīti ayamaniṭṭhakoṭṭhāso kathaṃ nāpajjatīti? Pabbajjābhilāpena upasampadā idhādhippetāti sammāgāhena nāpajjati, aññathā yathābyañjanaṃ atthe gahite yathāpaññattadukkaṭābhāvasaṅkhāto aparopi aniṭṭhakoṭṭhāso āpajjati. Kathaṃ? ‘‘Na, bhikkhave, mūgo pabbājetabbo, yo pabbājeyya, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti vuttadukkaṭaṃ pabbajjapariyosāne hoti, na tassāvippakatāya. Pubbapayogadukkaṭameva hi paṭhamaṃ āpajjati , tasmā mūgassa pabbajjapariyosānasseva abhāvato imassa dukkaṭassa okāso ca sabbakālaṃ na sambhaveyya. Upasampadāvasena pana atthe gahite sambhavati kammanipphattito. Teneva pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘na, bhikkhave, paṇḍako upasampādetabbo, yo upasampādeyya, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti dukkaṭaṃ na paññattaṃ. Apaññattattā pubbapayogadukkaṭameva cettha sambhavati, netaraṃ, ettāvatā siddhametaṃ ‘‘pabbajjābhilāpena upasampadā ca tattha adhippetā, na pabbajjā’’ti.
这里有人问:沙弥出家不是由身体的动作造成的,这怎么看得出来呢?回答说:从“以身表示”等三种说法的经文来看,就能知道。这里还有一段话:巴利
Etthāha – sāmaṇerapabbajjā na kāyapayogato hotīti kathaṃ paññāyatīti? Vuccate – kāyena viññāpetītiādittikādassanato. Hoti cettha –
“ 就算有哪只兔子,能在大海里站住脚,
然而,绝不可能在四重深广、难以执取的律海中立足。”巴利
‘‘Appeva sasako koci, patiṭṭheyya mahaṇṇave; Na tveva catugambhīre, duggāho vinayaṇṇave’’ti.
关于“梵直身”这一说法,这里写道:“取‘梵’字所含的无过失义与最胜义,一个人没有过失,身体又端正挺直,这就是梵直身。”另一种解释是:因为帝释天神等天人还贪著欲乐,所以不拿他们作比喻;像梵天神那样身体端正挺直的,就是梵直身。大腹瓮,就是肚子很大的瓮。和它相似,就说“像大腹瓮一样”。“颈瘿”等等,只是举例说明而已。怎么知道呢?因为经中说“诸比丘,患五种病的人不应被允许出家”。这里也暗指白癞病等,而且不只是那一种人,凡是患五种病的人、经典中提到的从王臣一直到奴隶、以及罗睺罗的事例中未获父母允许的人,这十种人在此都包括在内。正是为了说明这个意思,优波离长老才在这部《断手》圣典中,把前面已经提过的文书作者、被打击者等相貌特征也引过来讲述。也正因为如此,在《瞻波犍度》中“诸比丘,有一种人还没达到接纳的资格,僧团却接纳了他,有人是善接纳,有人是恶接纳”的分别里,并没有列入“患五种病者、王臣、盗贼破坏者、负债者、奴隶、未获父母允许者”这七种人,也找不到他们。如果不是这样,这些人也应该在那个分别中被提到。如果说:因为不该在那里说,所以不可能?若真是这样,那么在“僧团接纳,有人是恶接纳”的分别中,就应该像般哒咖等人那样被提到,可是并没有说。因为两处都没有提到,所以这些人并非不属于这两类。因此,为了把如前所说而未明说的十种人收摄进来,才又说了文书作者等人。那么,为什么在这里用倒序来说呢?为了显示负债者仍应还给主人,说明他们从属于主人,所以承担显得轻微。因此那里说“即使逃跑了也要找回来交还”等等。这里如果有造了恶业的盗贼,或者犯了罪过的王臣出家,应当知道他们已经被“负债者”这个词所涵盖。又或者,因为按照上面所说的特征,一切负债者都不该被称为“善接纳”,为了避开这个过失,所以这段教说以倒序趋向上文而非下文,由此得以表明。因为“文书作者”既然被称为“善接纳”,就应该引到别处去解释。毁约者等,也应这样理解。巴利
Brahmujugattoti ettha ‘‘niddosatthe, seṭṭhatthe ca brahma-saddaṃ gahetvā niddosaṃ hutvā uju gattaṃ yassa so brahmujugatto’’ti likhitaṃ. Atha vā kāmabhogittā devindādayo upamāvasena aggahetvā brahmā viya ujugatto brahmujugatto. Mahākucchito ghaṭo mahākucchighaṭo. Tena samāno vuccati ‘‘mahākucchighaṭasadiso’’ti. Galagaṇḍīti desanāmattamevetanti kathaṃ paññāyatīti? ‘‘Na, bhikkhave, pañcahi ābādhehi phuṭṭho pabbājetabbo’’ti vacanato. Kilāsopi idhādhippetoti na kevalaṃ so eveko, kintu pañcahi ābādhehi phuṭṭho, pāḷiyaṃ āgatā rājabhaṭādayo dāsapariyosānā, rāhulavatthumhi āgatā ananuññātamātāpitaro cāti dasapi janā idhādhippetā. Tadatthadīpanatthameva likhitakakasāhatalakkhaṇāhate pubbe vuttepi ānetvā upālitthero idha hatthacchinnapāḷiyaṃ āha. Teneva campeyyakkhandhake ‘‘atthi, bhikkhave, puggalo appatto osāraṇaṃ, tañce saṅgho osāreti, ekacco sosārito, ekacco dosārito’’ti (mahāva. 396) imassa vibhaṅge ‘‘pañcahi ābādhehi phuṭṭhā, rājabhaṭā, corakārabhedakaiṇāyikadāsā, ananuññātamātāpitaro cā’’ti satta janā na gahitā, na ca labbhanti, aññathā imepi tassa vibhaṅge vattabbā siyuṃ. Na vattabbā tattha abhabbattāti ce? Evaṃ sante ‘‘saṅgho osāreti, ekacco dosārito’’ti imassa vibhaṅge vattabbā paṇḍakādayo viya, na ca vuttā. Ubhayattha avuttattā na cime anubhayā bhavitumarahanti, tasmā avuttānameva dasannaṃ yathāvuttānaṃ saṅgaṇhanatthaṃ puna likhitakādayo vuttāti. Atha kimatthaṃ te idha uppaṭipāṭiyā vuttāti? Iṇāyikadāsānaṃ sosāritabhāvepi iṇāyikadāsā sāmikānaṃ dātabbāti tadadhīnabhāvadassanatthaṃ. Teneva tattha vuttaṃ ‘‘palātopi ānetvā dātabbo’’tiādi. Yo panettha coro katakammo pabbajati, rājabhaṭo vā sace katadoso, iṇāyikaggahaṇeneva gahitoti veditabbo. Atha vā yathāvuttalakkhaṇo sabbopi iṇāyikadāsānaṃ ‘‘sosārito’’ti vattabbāraho na hotīti katvā tesaṃ parivajjanatthaṃ uppaṭipāṭiyā desanā upari ārohati, na heṭṭhāti dīpanato. Likhitako ‘‘sosārito’’ti vuttattā desantaraṃ netabbo. Tathākārabhedakādayopīti veditabbaṃ.
到此应当明白:世尊凭着自己说法上的善巧,借着前面已举出的例子,说明了前面所说的十种人出家、受达上之作法如何成立;又借着倒过来的次序说,向通达说法的人指出了人的种种差别。这里还有这样的话:巴利
Ettāvatā bhagavatā attano desanākusalatāya pubbe gahitaggahaṇena yathāvuttānaṃ dasannampi pabbajjupasampadākammanipphatti, uppaṭipāṭivacanena puggalavemattatañca desanāya kovidānaṃ dīpitaṃ hotīti veditabbaṃ. Hoti cettha –
“ 以言说宣说应说之语,以理教示非宜与可意;
阐明善逝之教言,喜悦令心灿若斑斓。”巴利
‘‘Vattabbayuttaṃ vacanena vatvā, ayuttamiṭṭhaṃ nayadesanāya; Sandīpayantaṃ sugatassa vākyaṃ, cittaṃ vicittaṃva karotipī’’ti.
这里有人问:在《瞻波犍度》里,未满二十岁的人,因为两处都没有提到,是不是应该算作“非两者”?不应该算作“非两者”,正因为没有提到。如果真有第三种情况,世尊一定会说到它,可是并没有说,所以他不是“非两者”。那他属于哪一方呢?他属于有罪过的那一方。那为什么没有说到呢?因为被学处禁止了。“结怨恨后”,意思是再次结缚。有书写道:“用各种药物绑住脚后,放进坑里,这是应当做法门的同义语。”像迦波头象那样。“牛食管”,是指为牛做来吃喝的管子。“伍巴咖木口”,说的是发怒的嘴;“瓦丹地迦”,说的是患有睾丸肿大病的人。“维迦德”,说的是有横行足的人。“古尼库尼”,据说有两种读法。“凡出家被拒者,达上也被拒”等等,因为断手等只是就达上而说的,所以正是针对那些断手等的人而说。巴利
Etthāha – campeyyakkhandhake ūnavīsativasso ubhayattha avuttattā anubhayo siyāti? Na siyā avuttattā eva. Yadi hi tatiyāya koṭiyā bhavitabbaṃ, sā avassaṃ bhagavatā vattabbāva hoti, na ca vuttā, tasmā na so anubhayo hoti. Atha kataraṃ pakkhaṃ bhajatīti? Dosāritapakkhaṃ bhajati. Atha kasmā na vuttoti? Sikkhāpadena paṭisiddhattā. Upanāhaṃ bandhitvāti puna bandhanaṃ katvā. ‘‘Nānāvidhehi osadhehi pādaṃ bandhitvā āvāṭake pavesetvā kattabbavidhānassetaṃ adhivacana’’nti likhitaṃ. Kappasīso vā hatthī viya. Gobhattanāḷikā nāma gunnaṃ bhattapānatthaṃ katanāḷikā. Upakkamukho nāma kudhitamukho vuccati, vātaṇḍiko nāma aṇḍakesu vuḍḍhirogena samannāgato. Vikaṭo nāma tiriyaṃ gamanakapādehi samannāgato. ‘‘Guṇi kuṇī’’ti duvidho kira pāṭho. Yesañca pabbajjā paṭikkhittā, upasampadāpi tesaṃ paṭikkhittāvātiādi yasmā hatthacchinnādayo upasampadāvaseneva vuttā, tasmā te eva hatthacchinnādayo sandhāyāha.
无惭依止事缘的论注释巴利
Alajjīnissayavatthukathāvaṇṇanā
120 比丘们,不应把依止给无惭者。由于这句话,跟无惭的比丘或沙弥一起受用法和食物这两种受用,都被禁止了,因为他们处于依止状态。就像经文里说的:比丘们,老师应当以诵习、提问、教诫、教导来摄受和护念弟子等等。由于亲教师也有授予依止的情况,他也应被理解为同住弟子的依止。所以,如果亲教师是无惭者,就不应依止他而住,这一点就成立了。在比丘们的正行中,同等分的比丘就是同分。那种状态就是比丘同分性。这个比丘同分性,允许以我要知道的心态而住。与比丘们的同分性。那是什么?就是有惭的状态。关于七日……应取,这里有人写道:我将只住七日,何必知道比丘同分性,像这样放弃知道的义务而住,是不允许的,这就是它的意思。然而,如果知道比丘同分性,心想我明天就走,何必告知依止,那就不能使天亮升起。如果想着天亮之前起来就走而躺下,若天亮升起,则允许。巴利
120. ‘‘Na , bhikkhave, alajjīnaṃ nissayo dātabbo’’ti iminā alajjīhi bhikkhūhi, sāmaṇerehi vā saddhiṃ dvepi dhammāmisaparibhogā paṭikkhittā honti nissayabhāve bhāvato tesaṃ. Yathāha ‘‘ācariyena, bhikkhave, antevāsiko saṅgahetabbo anuggahetabbo uddesena paripucchāya ovādena anusāsaniyā’’tiādi (mahāva. 79) upajjhāyassapi nissayappaṇāmanasambhavato, sopi saddhivihārikassa nissayoti veditabbaṃ, tasmā upajjhāyo ce alajjī hoti, na taṃ nissāya vasitabbanti siddhaṃ hoti. Bhikkhūnaṃ sammāpaṭipattiyā samānabhāgo bhikkhu sabhāgo. Tassabhāvo bhikkhusabhāgatā. Taṃ bhikkhusabhāgataṃ. Yāva jānāmīti adhippāyena vasituṃ vaṭṭati. Bhikkhūhi sabhāgataṃ. Kiṃ taṃ? Lajjibhāvaṃ. ‘‘Sattāhaṃ…pe… gahetabbo’’ti ettha ‘‘sattāhamattaṃ vasissāmi, kiṃ bhikkhusabhāgatājānanenāti jānane dhuraṃ nikkhipitvā vasituṃ na labhatīti attho’’ti likhitaṃ. ‘‘Bhikkhusabhāgataṃ pana jānanto sveva gamissāmi, kiṃ me nissayārocanenā’’ti aruṇaṃ uṭṭhapetuṃ na labhati. ‘‘Pure aruṇaṃ uṭṭhahitvā gamissāmī’’ti ābhogena sayantassa ce aruṇo uggacchati, vaṭṭati.
行者等依止事论注释巴利
Gamikādinissayavatthukathāvaṇṇanā
121 121.“走在路上的比丘,如果找不到依止,就可以没有依止而住”,这句话说的是只在非雨安居期才允许;因为在雨安居期间,律藏本身就禁止了上路远行。这个说法是不成立的,因为实际上有以七天为限、或者以中断雨安居等方式上路的可能,而且正在路上走的人也可能在雨安居期间继续赶路。“在途中……无罪”,这只是指实在找不到能给予依止的人的情况。“依止于他”是依照文本的读法来说的,意思是依靠他。从“当合适的依止给予者到来时”这句话可以看出,这个规定只适用于非雨安居期。有人说“但在雨安居期间,没有人会来”。如果这个人住在水边或陆地上,在接近雨安居入居日时想要离开,听说“某位大长老将要来”,如果他为此等待,那是可以的。如果等着等着就到了雨安居入居日,那就这样吧,他应该去能找得到依止给予者的地方。如果因为没有诵戒者都可以允许离开,那更何况是因为没有依止给予者呢。如果他在路上看到有生命危险或梵行危险,就应该就地住下,有些人这样说。巴利
121.‘‘Addhānamaggappaṭipannena bhikkhunā nissayaṃ alabhamānena anissitena vatthunti avassakāleyeva vassakāle addhānagamanassa pāḷiyaṃyeva paṭikkhittattā’’ti vuttaṃ, taṃ appamāṇaṃ sattāhaṃ vassacchedādivasena addhānagamanasambhavato, gacchantasseva vassakālagamanasambhavato ca. Antarāmagge…pe… anāpattīti nissayadāyakābhāveyeva. ‘‘Tassa nissāyā’’ti pāṭhānurūpaṃ vuttaṃ, taṃ nissāyāti attho. ‘‘Yadā patirūpo nissayadāyako āgacchissatī’’ti vacanena ayaṃ vidhi avassakāle evāti siddhaṃ. ‘‘Antovasse pana kassaci āgamanābhāvā’’ti vuttaṃ. Sace so jalapaṭṭane vā thalapaṭṭane vā vasanto vassūpanāyikāya āsannāya gantukāmo suṇāti ‘‘asuko mahāthero āgamissatī’’ti, taṃ ce āgameti, vaṭṭati. Āgamentasseva ce vassūpanāyikadivaso hoti, hotu, gantabbaṃ tattha, yattha nissayadāyakaṃ labhatīti. Pātimokkhuddesakābhāvena ce gantuṃ vaṭṭati, pageva nissayadāyakābhāvena. Sace so gacchanto jīvitantarāyaṃ, brahmacariyantarāyaṃ vā passati, tattheva vasitabbanti eke.
122 有人说:“我不习惯直接叫长老的名字。”于是就用特征来描述:“名叫某某的人,是某某具寿。”从“也可以用姓”这句话来看,凡是人们日常用来称呼的方式,都可以用,这个道理就成立了。所以,当被问“你的戒师叫什么名字”时,直接把姓当作名字来说,也是可以的。因此,在四种名字当中,用任何一种名字来念诵告知文都可以。
如果一个人有多个名字,在某个场合用这个名字作白,在另一个场合用那个名字告知,这是不行的。告知文必须在意义和文句上都保持一致,不能有差别。有人在某处说“具寿佛护长老”,在另一处只告知“佛护”,有人说这不算“缺失告知”,因为名字并没有丢掉。如果在某处说“具寿佛护”,在另一处告知“佛护具寿”,因为文句相应,只是落入了细枝末节,也有人这样主张。但另一些人说,因为文句有差异的过失,在告知中这样用是不允许的。不过,如果在一切场合都同样地说,那就允许,因为与世尊所制定的特征相符。如果问:与特征相违,因为不同所以不允许吗?不是的,因为与运用方式相应。如果问:在那边是那样,在这里运用却不同呢?也不是,因为与坏失的特征相违。并非在所有情况下都完全不行——在律藏本身中,为了告知而进行的说明正是为了阐明这个意义而出现的,在其他告知语句中想要完全避免是不可能的,因为与惯常规定相违。那又以什么为标准呢?以老师所接受的标准为标准。巴利
122. ‘‘Nāhaṃ ussahāmi therassa nāmaṃ gahetu’’nti itthannāmo itthannāmassa āyasmatoti lakkhaṇato āha. ‘‘Gottenāpī’ti vacanato yena vohārena vohariyanti, tena vaṭṭatīti siddhaṃ, tasmā ‘ko nāmo te upajjhāyo’ti puṭṭhenāpi gottameva nāmaṃ katvā vattabbanti siddhaṃ hoti, tasmā catubbidhesu nāmesu yena kenaci nāmena anussāvanā kātabbā’’ti vadanti. Ekassa bahūni nāmāni honti, tattha ekaṃ nāmaṃ ñattiyā, ekaṃ anussāvanāya kātuṃ na vaṭṭati, atthato, byañjanato ca abhinnāhi anussāvanāhi bhavitabbanti. Katthaci ‘‘āyasmato buddharakkhitattherassā’’ti vatvā katthaci kevalaṃ ‘‘buddharakkhitassā’’ti sāveti, ‘‘sāvanaṃ hāpetī’’ti na vuccati nāmassa ahāpitattāti eke. Sace katthaci ‘‘āyasmato buddharakkhitassā’’ti vatvā katthaci ‘‘buddharakkhitassāyasmato’’ti sāveti, pāṭhānurūpattā khettameva otiṇṇantipi eke. Byañjanabhedappasaṅgato anussāvane taṃ na vaṭṭatīti eke. Sace pana sabbaṭṭhānepi tatheva vadati, vaṭṭati bhagavatā dinnalakkhaṇānurūpattā. Lakkhaṇavirodhato aññathā na vaṭṭatīti ce? Na, payogānurūpattā. Tattha tathā, idha aññathā payogoti ce? Na, vipattilakkhaṇānaṃ virodhato. Na sabbena sabbaṃ, sāvanāhāpanā eva hi pāḷiyaṃ tadatthavibhāvane āgatāti aññapadesu sāvanesu parihāro na sambhavati āciṇṇakappavirodhato. Sopi kiṃpamāṇanti ce? Pamāṇaṃ ācariyuggahassa pamāṇattā.
123 123.“两人,一次宣读”:这里,在结集注中先这样写道:“同时进行的宣读”。这是针对什么说的呢?是针对“不是同一位亲教师、而由一位老师作宣读”这件事说的。它的意思是:由一位亲教师与多位老师作宣读,我允许;但不允许由多位亲教师、一位老师来作。古结集注里也这样说,并且说:“三人以上,无论以什么方式都不能一起进行。”这是合理的,因为僧团确实不会为僧团作甘马——这是老师的说法。不过这里还有一点需要思考。怎么思考呢?四位或更多求受达上的人,因为还没有获得比丘身份,所以不能称为僧团;只是因为世尊限定说“三人”,所以超过三人就不行,这不是推论所能达到的——这是老师的说法。在补充结集注中,这个意思也经过多方考察后说了。在安达咖注疏中也是这样。在这个义理的解释上,并不是处处都有见解分歧。然而,关于“两人都满二十岁”“两人同一位亲教师、同一位老师、同一篇甘马语、一位已受达上、一位未受达上”这一围绕说明,展示之后,有人主张:如果一位老师为两位或三位求受达上者,以一位亲教师宣读一篇甘马语,这是合法的。这不合理,因为在那当下,不可能展示出具备松缓、紧促等语调特征的甘马语,会落入解脱等过失。为了说明这是针对分别进行而说的,所以没有说“三人满二十岁,三人同一位亲教师、同一位老师、同一篇甘马语、两位已受达上、一位未受达上”。如果这样说,就可以除去三人的虚空住者,展示与两位在界内者相应的甘马语,为了防止这种不理想的情况,所以说了“两人”。关于“其中,以满二十岁之语显示事成就,以僧众为主显示众成就,以老师和亲教师之语显示众成就,以甘马语显示宣读成就,唯独没有显示界成就。由此产生过失,因为甘马语不同时。若同一刹那,两者的成就或过失可能存在,但不可能一者有成就、一者有过失,因为会落入解脱等语过失”——这段话说明:这两人都在界内,显示两人共同完成甘马,因此证明两人由一位亲教师、一位老师共同宣读是合法的。两人、三人共同随喜诵说也在巴利文中显示,这也随顺。注疏老师们既未认可,也未否定,应当考察后采纳——这是老师的说法,这与法性相违。巴利
123.Dve ekānussāvaneti ettha gaṇṭhipade tāva evaṃ likhitaṃ ‘‘ekato pavattaanussāvane’’. Idaṃ sandhāyāti nānupajjhāyaṃ ekācariyaṃ anussāvanakiriyaṃ sandhāya, tañca anussāvanakiriyaṃ ekenupajjhāyena nānācariyehi anujānāmīti attho. Nānupajjhāyehi ekenācariyena na tveva anujānāmīti atthoti. Porāṇagaṇṭhipadepi tatheva vatvā ‘‘tiṇṇaṃ uddhaṃ na kenaci ākārena ekato vaṭṭatī’’ti vuttaṃ, taṃ yuttaṃ, na hi saṅgho saṅghassa kammaṃ karotīti ācariyo. Idaṃ panettha cintetabbaṃ. Kathaṃ? Cattāro vā atirekā vā upasampadāpekkhā saṅghavohāraṃ na labhanti bhikkhubhāvaṃ appattattā. Kevalaṃ bhagavatā paricchinditvā ‘‘tayo’’ti vuttattā tato uddhaṃ na vaṭṭatīti no takkoti ācariyo. Anugaṇṭhipadepi ayamevattho bahudhā vicāretvā vutto. Tathā andhakaṭṭhakathāyampi. Na sabbattha imasmiṃ atthavikappe matibhedo atthi. Yā panesā ubho paripuṇṇavīsativassā, ubhinnamekupajjhāyo, ekācariyo, ekā kammavācā, eko upasampanno, eko anupasampannoti parivārakathā, taṃ dassetvā eko ce ācariyo dvinnaṃ, tiṇṇaṃ vā upasampadāpekkhānaṃ ekaṃ kammavācaṃ ekenupajjhāyena sāveti, vaṭṭatīti eke. Taṃ ayuttaṃ, na hi sakkā sithiladhanitādibyañjanalakkhaṇasampannaṃ tasmiṃ khaṇe kammavācaṃ dassetuṃ vimuttadosādīsu patanato . Visuṃ visuṃ karaṇaṃ sandhāya idaṃ vuttanti dīpanatthaṃ ‘‘tayo paripuṇṇavīsativassā , tiṇṇamekupajjhāyo, ekācariyo, ekā kammavācā, dve upasampannā, eko anupasampanno’’ti na vutto. Evañhi vutte sakkā tīsu ākāsaṭṭhamapanetvā sīmaṭṭhānaṃ dvinnamanurūpaṃ kammavācaṃ dassetuṃ, tamaniṭṭhappasaṅgaṃ nivāretuṃ ‘‘ubho’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Tattha paripuṇṇavīsativassavacanena vatthusampatti, parisāya padhānattā, ācariyupajjhāyavacanena parisasampatti, kammavācāya anussāvanasampatti dassitā, sīmasampatti evekā na dassitā. Tato vipatti jātā kammavācānaṃ nānākkhaṇikattā. Ekakkhaṇabhāve sati ubhinnaṃ sampatti vā siyā vipatti vā, na ekasseva sampatti ekassa vipattīti sambhavati vimuttādibyañjanadosappasaṅgato’’ti vuttaṃ, taṃ vacanaṃ ubhopi cete sīmagatāva honti, ubhinnaṃ ekato kammasampattidīpanato dvinnaṃ ekato anussāvanaṃ ekena upajjhāyena ekenācariyena vaṭṭatīti sādheti. Dvinnaṃ, tiṇṇañca ekato sasamanubhāsanā ca pāḷiyaṃyeva dassitā, tañca anulometi. Aṭṭhakathācariyehi nānuññātaṃ, na paṭikkhittaṃ, vicāretvā gahetabbanti ācariyo, taṃ dhammatāya virujjhati.
诸佛的法性就是这样:在哪里言辞有差异,就在那些重大事项上说出该说的话。这里以派使者授达上等为例。因为在这里,先前所允许的甘马语并没有差异,所以说了“诸比丘,我允许一次宣读中为两人或三人作”之后,并没有说“诸比丘,应当这样做”。如果有人问:即使有差异,也应当依据各处为两人或多人所说的甘马语来理解,所以虽然没说,也可以采用?——不是的。导师说:在轻微的事项上说了,在重大的事项上却不说,这不是法的本性。然而,在另一部结集注中这样详细阐述:“两人一次宣读”,意思是两人一起宣读。如果读作“以一人”,意思就是以一位老师。“依前述方式”,就是依照“以一位或两位老师”所说的方式,因此由一位老师为两人或三人作宣读。如果读作“以两人或三人”。如果有人问:那么,多位老师、多位亲教师的情况呢?这里已经说了“这应当以一位亲教师,而不是以多位亲教师”,这样是否就不合法了?——合法。怎么合法呢?因为“以一人宣读”被解析为“一次宣读”,这个解析本身就很明显,所以只是为了显示简略之义,才说成“一起宣读”这样的解析形式。因此,就直截了当的含义来说,“以一人宣读”就是一次宣读,我允许以一位亲教师宣读,而不是以多位亲教师。正是针对这一点,才有两种解析方式,所以也有人这样说:“多位老师、多位亲教师不合法,这一点已经成立。”它的意思是:这应当由一位亲教师为一位亲教师所应宣读的宣读,而不是以多位亲教师来允许。这话说的是什么呢?据说意思是:“一位老师,为两位或三位求达上者,面对两位或三位亲教师,我不允许。”在另一部结集注中则写道:“‘以一人宣读’这个解析很明显,为了说明这一点,所以说了‘以一人’。这样说的时候,智者必然知道。如果因为明显就能知道,那‘以一人’这个说法又有什么用呢?虽然能知道,但因为所立之义没有成立,就会产生争论,而且无法真正知道;如果说‘以一人’,那么这一切问题就都没有了。”这样,这里许多导师和论师作了种种详细阐发,对这一切都应当好好审察,亲近尊师,依照传承来把握义理。已经说过:“在这个义理抉择上,并非处处都有见解分歧。”巴利
Ayañhi buddhānaṃ dhammatā – yadidaṃ yattha yattha vacananānattamatthi, tattha tattha garukesu ṭhānesu vattabbayuttaṃ vadanti. Dūtena upasampadādayo cettha nidassanaṃ. Yasmā cettha pubbe anuññātakammavācāya nānattaṃ natthi, tasmā ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, dve tayo ekānussāvane kātu’’nti vatvā ‘‘evañca pana, bhikkhave, kātabbo’’ti na vuttaṃ. Nānatte satipi tattha tattha dvinnaṃ, bahūnaṃ vā vasena vuttakammavācānusārena gahetabbato avuttanti ce? Na hi lahukesu ṭhānesu vatvā garukesu avacanaṃ dhammatāti ācariyo. Aññatarasmiṃ pana gaṇṭhipade evaṃ papañcitaṃ dve ekānussāvaneti dve ekato anussāvane. ‘‘Ekena’’ iti pāṭho, ekena ācariyenāti attho. Purimanayenevāti ‘‘ekena vā dvīhi vā ācariyehī’’ti vuttanayena eva, tasmā ekenācariyena dve vā tayo vā anussāvetabbā. ‘‘Dvīhi vā tīhi vā’’ti pāṭho. Nānācariyā nānupajjhāyāti ettha ‘‘tañca kho ekena upajjhāyena, na tveva nānupajjhāyenā’’ti vuttattā na vaṭṭatīti ce? Vaṭṭati. Kathaṃ? Ekena anussāvane ekānussāvaneti viggahassa pākaṭattā līnameva dassetuṃ ‘‘ekato anussāvane’’ti viggahova vutto, tasmā ujukattameva sandhāya tañca kho ekena anussāvanaṃ ekānussāvanaṃ, ekena upajjhāyena anujānāmi, na tveva nānupajjhāyenāti attho. Idaṃ sandhāya hi dvidhā viggaho, tasmā ‘‘nānācariyehi nānupajjhāyā na vaṭṭantīti siddhamevā’’ti aññathāpi vadanti. Tañca kho ekena upajjhāyena ekassa upajjhāyassa vā vattabbaṃ anussāvanaṃ, na tveva nānupajjhāyena anujānāmīti attho. Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti? ‘‘Eko ācariyo, dve vā tayo vā upasampadāpekkhā dvinnaṃ tiṇṇaṃ vā upajjhāyānaṃ na tveva anujānāmī’’ti kira vuttanti. Aparasmiṃ pana gaṇṭhipade ‘‘ekena anussāvaneti viggahassa pākaṭattā taṃ pakāsetuṃ ‘ekenā’ti vuttaṃ. Evaṃ vutte avassaṃ paṇḍitā jānanti. Taṃpākaṭattā ce jānanti, ekenāti iminā kinti ce? Kiñcāpi jānanti, vivādo pana hoti aladdhalesattā, jānituñca na sakkā, ‘ekenā’ti vutte pana taṃ sabbaṃ na hotīti vutta’’nti likhitaṃ. Evaṃ ettha aneke ācariyā ca takkikā ca anekadhā papañcenti, taṃ sabbaṃ suṭṭhu upaparikkhitvā garukulaṃ payirupāsitvā vaṃsānugatova attho gahetabbo. ‘‘Na sabbattha imasmiṃ atthavikappe matibhedo atthī’’ti vuttameva.
达上仪轨注释巴利
Upasampadāvidhikathāvaṇṇanā
125 关于“癞病、疮肿”这一句,古师们认为:举出癞病等,就已经把断手之类的情况也包括进去了。因此,用“你是人吗?你是男人吗?”这些话,来区分堪任与不堪任的人。用“你是自由人吗?你没有债务吗?”等话,来支持前面在断手等章节中所说的义理分别里的第二种分别。其中,不按顺序先说“你没有债务吗?你是自由人吗?”而是颠倒次序来说,因为他是自由人,却不是靠国王的口粮或薪俸受雇的人;但由于他归国王管辖,所以会偏向国王雇佣那一方;为了问他是否属于这一方的对立面,才说“你不是国王的兵吗?”否则,用涉及五种疾病所侵者的话,就已经把所有人都包括进去了,其余的话就不必再说。如果要说,那一切也都该说。巴利
125.Kuṭṭhaṃ gaṇḍoti ettha kuṭṭhādiggahaṇena hatthacchinnādayopi gahitāva hontīti porāṇā, tasmā ‘‘manussosi purisosī’’ti etehi bhabbābhabbapuggalaparivajjanaṃ karoti. ‘‘Bhujissosi aṇaṇosī’’tiādīhi pubbe hatthacchinnādhikāre vuttaatthavikappesu dutiyaṃ vikappaṃ upathambheti. Tattha ‘‘aṇaṇosi bhujissosī’’ti anukkamena avatvā uppaṭipāṭiyā vacanena bhujisso hoti, na ca rañño bhattavetanavasena bhaṭo. Rājādhīnattā pana so rājabhaṭapakkhaṃ bhajatīti tabbipakkhabhāvapucchanatthaṃ ‘‘nasi rājabhaṭo’’ti vuttaṃ. Aññathā pañcahi ābādhehi phuṭṭhānaṃ gahaṇeneva sabbesaṃ gahaṇe siddhe itare na vattabbā. Atha vattabbā, sabbepi vattabbā siyuṃ.
四种依止等注释巴利
Cattāronissayādikathāvaṇṇanā
128-9 “应当立刻量影子”等话,是因为前面有“让比丘们顶礼(长老的)双足”这句话,为了让人知道谁是长老、谁是下座才说的。据说古本读作“很久才来”,也有本子读作“很久才做”。巴利
128-9.‘‘Tāvadeva chāyā metabbā’’tiādi ‘‘bhikkhūnaṃ pāde vandāpetvā’’ti vacanato therātherabhāvajānanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. ‘‘Cirena agamāsī’’ti kira porāṇapāṭho, ciraṃ akāsīti catthi.
130 在与被举罪者共受用、共住这件事上,由于和被举罪者共受用、共住的缘故,制定了巴吉帝亚罪;从这一点来说是无犯的,这就是它的意思。怎么知道呢?从“共住”这个说法就可以知道。与无惭者共受用的缘故,该犯的恶作罪确实还是会犯,但不是因为共住的缘故。因为与无惭者共住并没有被禁止。不过这里说的“共住”,是指在能同宿的住所里一起居住,不是“成为巴拉基格者,不共住”那里说的那种共住。这种共住,和被举罪者一起是不允许的;和无惭者一起,某些情况下是允许的。与法的共受用不同,其余情况则另当别论。而这段“被举罪者还俗”等经文,是从总体上说明应受达上和不应受达上的情形而说的。还有,清净是从行持的次第、从罪中出离而得的,不是靠还俗得来的。所以,为了说明已受达上比丘的清净之道——已受达上的比丘,哪怕犯了恶说这样的轻罪,后来还俗又回来受达上,也必须忏悔那个罪才能清净,不是别的途径能清净。对于非共通的罪,因为不承认而被举罪的人,通过改变形相(还俗)从罪中出来,如果再恢复原来的形相,就成了不同住者;即使还俗后回来,按上面说的方式受了达上,也还是没有出罪,难道不是吗?不是的,不是因为出现另一种形相就算出罪,也不是因为还俗就能让甘马清净。如果甘马不因还俗而清净,那再受达上的甘马就有甘马失坏的问题;但既没有甘马失坏,也没有甘马止息。还俗的人作为未受达上者,以不同住者的身份扰乱甘马——因为这是法自在者(佛陀)当面说的,所以才用了“你将见到”这种未来式的说法。这样的人就像舍弃义务的别住者一样,处在原本的状态,只是以还俗等方式停留在未受达上的本然状态。应当知道,这段话正是为了显示以上所有这些含义的分别。至于前面说的那种人:曾经改变形相、后来又恢复原本形相的被举罪者,应当再问他“你见到了吗?”他若说“是的,我见到了”,就应当为他解除甘马(恢复僧籍)。不应当对他说“去忏悔吧”,因为他已经通过改变形相出罪了。对那已作忏悔的被举罪者,应当问“你的忏悔做了吗?”他若说“是的,做了”,就应当为他解除甘马。有人说:他若说“我没有什么该做的忏悔”,就不应为他解除甘马。这个规定是针对非共通的罪,不是针对共通的罪。有人说:其中,被举罪者仅仅通过改变形相(还俗),甘马就已经止息了。老师说:应当审察之后采取更合理的说法。在《随难句释》中说:“无惭者的受用应当根据亲手施与等方式来界定;对于那些说‘只要示以圆满六和敬法者等,就可以亲手施与无惭者’的人,他们的说法应当驳斥。怎么驳斥?依据‘不可亲手施与被举罪者’这一判定来驳斥。但让别人代为施与则是可以的。”虽然依无惭者的受用会犯恶作,但这个人并不是无惭者,所以是从一切方面都无犯的角度说“于共受用、共住无犯”。怎么知道呢?应当从义理上理解:甘蔗汁和糖渣分属七日药和尽形寿药,有人生起“非时可以吃甘蔗”的想法而吃了,因为这个缘故不觉得自己犯了巴吉帝亚,反而以为如法而这样想;或者,有人承认自己犯了罪却坚持“我不忏悔”——这两种人——巴利
130.Anāpattisambhoge saṃvāseti ukkhittakena saddhiṃ sambhogasaṃvāsapaccayā pācittiyāpatti paññattā, tato anāpattīti attho. Kathaṃ paññāyatīti? Saṃvāsaggahaṇe. Alajjinā saddhiṃ sambhogapaccayā āpajjitabbaṃ dukkaṭaṃ pana āpajjati eva, na saṃvāsapaccayā. Na hi alajjinā saddhiṃ saṃvāso paṭikkhitto. Saṃvāso panettha sahaseyyappahonake āvāse sahavāso, na ‘‘pārājiko hoti asaṃvāso’’ti ettha vuttasaṃvāso. Ayaṃ saṃvāso ukkhittakena saddhiṃ na vaṭṭati. Alajjinā saddhiṃ ekacco vaṭṭati. Dhammasambhogavinimuttovetaro . Idaṃ pana ‘‘ukkhittako vibbhamī’’tiādisuttaṃ imasmiṃ upasampādetabbānupasampādetabbadīpanasāmaññato vuttaṃ. Kiñca bhiyyo paṭipattikkamatova āpattito suddhi hoti, na vibbhamena, tasmā upasampanno bhikkhu antamaso dubbhāsitampi āpajjitvā aparabhāge vibbhamitvā āgato upasampajjati, taṃ āpattiṃ desetvāva sujjhati, na aññathāti upasampannassa suddhikkamadassanatthaṃ. Asādhāraṇāpattiyā adassanapaccayā ukkhittakassa liṅgaparivattanena āpattito vuṭṭhitassa puna ce pakatiliṅgamevuppajjati, nānāsaṃvāsakatāva, vibbhamitvā āgatepi yathāvuttanayeneva upasampādetvā na vuṭṭhitattāti ce? Na liṅgantarapātubhāvā. Na vibbhamena kammāsujjhanato. Na kammāsujjhane puna upasampadākammavipattippasaṅgato. Na ca kammavipatti, na ca kammapaṭippassaddhi. Vibbhamena ca anupasampanno nānāsaṃvāsakabhāvena kammaṃ kopeti dhammissarena āhacca bhāsitattā. Teneva ‘‘passissasī’’ti anāgatavacanaṃ kataṃ. Tādiso pana gahaṭṭho nikkhittavattapārivāsiko viya pakatattabhūmiyaṃ vibbhamādinā anupasampannapakatiyaṃyeva tiṭṭhatīti imassa sabbassapi atthavikappassa dassanatthamidaṃ vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Pubbe vuttappakāro pana parivattitaliṅgo hutvā puna pakatiliṅge ṭhitaukkhittako puna pucchitabbo ‘‘passasī’’ti. ‘‘Āma passāmī’’ti vadanto osāretabbo. ‘‘Desehī’’ti na vattabbo liṅgaparivattanena vuṭṭhitattā. Tappaṭikammo ukkhittako pucchitabbo ‘‘paṭikammaṃ kiṃ te kata’’nti, ‘‘āma kata’’nti vadanto osāretabbo. ‘‘Kattabbaṃ me paṭikammaṃ na hotī’’ti vadanto na osāretabboti eke. Asādhāraṇāpattimhi idaṃ vidhānaṃ, na sādhāraṇāya. Tattha ukkhittako liṅgaparivattaneneva paṭippassaddhakammoti eke. Vicāretvā yuttataraṃ gahetabbanti ācariyo. Anugaṇṭhipade pana ‘‘alajjiparibhogo sahatthadānādivasena paricchinditabbo, ‘sāraṇīyadhammapūrakādayo dassetvā alajjissa sahatthā dātuṃ vaṭṭatī’ti vadantānaṃ vādo paṭisedhetabbo. Kathaṃ? Ukkhittakassa sahatthā dātuṃ na vaṭṭatīti vinicchayānusārena. Dāpetuṃ pana vaṭṭatevāti ca. Kiñcāpi alajjiparibhogavasena dukkaṭaṃ, atha kho ayaṃ alajjī na hoti, tasmā sabbākārena nirāpattitaṃ sandhāya ‘anāpatti sambhoge saṃvāse’ti vuttaṃ. Kathaṃ paññāyatīti? Viññeyyo atthato ucchurasakasaṭānaṃ sattāhakālikayāvajīvikattā ‘vaṭṭati vikāle ucchuṃ khāditu’nti saññaṃ uppādetvā taṃ khāditvā tappaccayā pācittiyaṃ na passati, vaṭṭatīti tathāsaññitāya. Yo vā pana āpattiṃ āpannabhāvaṃ paṭijānitvā ‘na paṭikaromī’ti abhinivisati, ime dve –
‘ 故意犯戒,还包庇隐瞒自己的罪过;
他行于非道,这样的人就叫做无惭者。’巴利
‘Sañcicca āpattiṃ āpajjati, āpattiṃ parigūhati; Agatigamanañca gacchati, ediso vuccati alajjīpuggalo’ti. (pari. 359) –
对于已说过的特征,由于没有违犯,他们不会成为无惭者。因此,通过“如果有人不忏悔罪过、不作补救,与他一起受用等行为则无犯”这一加以特别限定的说法,以及另一种说法——即使与那人一起进行金银交易也不算犯,但通过买卖则确实犯戒——这个准则被给出了;还有与五种人一起时无论如何都无犯的准则。如此,在有犯戒之处要加以特别限定;而这里没有那样说,所以不存在与那人一起受用无惭者物品的情况。然而,被亲近时会亲近无惭者一方,以这个方法,在一切处都应结合那相应的内容,去寻求其中的含义——这是另一些论师的说法。但诸位阿阇梨不这样说。因为律中说“如果我说‘我将不见’”,则不应度他出家,所以先前所犯的罪过,即使对已还俗的人也不会消失,这一点已经成立。正因如此,诸位阿阇梨让他忏悔罪过后,才让他舍学处。“共住共享无犯”——这应当被怀疑为:对先前所犯而现有的罪,他作“不见”想。有人认为,这样说是为了让对方知道该罪已止息。“你将见”——因为是在家人身份,不适合忏悔,所以是就未来而说的。“受具足戒后你将见”——对于应作别住等事的人,因为有事存在,所以不说“你见”,而是就未来而说。“令出”是依出罪而说。在那里,因为没有再应作的事,所以说“你见”。这一切都是就承认而言,处处如此。如果连一处也不承认,就不应与那人一起共住,因为那罪与他不相应,也就是说,因为他是无惭者的缘故。在“见”等之中,“令出”的意思是以同甘马等方式来做。在“共享无犯”中,与已被摈除的人共享是无犯的。为什么?因为摈除甘马因他是在家人身份而已经失效,正因如此才说“因为得不到僧团”。现在有人认为,在比丘身份时应作。或者,在两种情况下,只有他们知道甘马失效的规定,因此应在一切情况下好好观察合适与不合适之后再说。巴利
Vuttalakkhaṇe apatanato alajjino na honti, tasmā ‘yo āpattidesanapaṭikammāni na karoti, tena saddhiṃ sambhogādikaraṇe anāpattī’ti visesetvā vuttavacanena, itarenapi saddhiṃ kiñcāpi rūpiyasaṃvohāro na hoti, atha kho kayavikkayena āpatti hotiyevāti nayo dinno hoti, pañcahi saddhiṃ sabbathāpi anāpattīti nayo ca. Evaṃ sāpattiṭṭhānesu visesetvā ca vacanato idha tathā avuttattā tena saha alajjiparibhogo natthi. Bhajāpiyamāno pana alajjipakkhaṃ bhajatīti imināpi upāyena sabbattha taṃ taṃ saṃsanditvā attho pariyesitabboti apare. Ācariyā pana evaṃ na vadantī’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Sacāhaṃ na passissāmīti vadati, na pabbājetabbo’’ti vuttattā pubbe āpannāpattiyo uppabbajitassāpi na paṭippassambhantīti siddhaṃ, teneva ācariyā āpattiṃ desāpetvāva sikkhāpaccakkhānaṃ kārāpentīti ca anāpatti sambhoge saṃvāseti idaṃ pubbe āpannaṃ santiṃ eva āpattiṃ na passatīti āsaṅkitabbo. Sā paṭippassaddhāti ñāpanatthaṃ vuttanti ca eke. ‘‘Passissasī’’ti gahaṭṭhattā desetuṃ na vaṭṭatīti anāgatavasena vuttaṃ. ‘‘Upasampādetvā passissasī’’ti parivāsādinā kattabbassa atthibhāvena ‘‘passasī’’ti avatvā anāgatavasena vuttaṃ, osāretvāti abbhānavasena. Tattha puna kātabbassa abhāvā ‘‘passasī’’ti vuttaṃ. Idaṃ sabbaṃ sabbattha paṭijānanaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Ekatrāpi puna na paṭijānāti, etena saha tassā āpattiyā anurūpena saṃvāso na kātabbo, alajjibhāvenāti vuttaṃ hoti. Diṭṭhiyātiādīsu osāraṇaṃ nāma samānakammādinā karaṇanti attho. Anāpatti sambhogeti ukkhittakena sambhoge anāpatti. Kasmā? Ukkhittakakammassa gahaṭṭhabhāvena paṭippassaddhattā, teneva ‘‘alabbhamānāya sāmaggiyā’’ti vuttaṃ. Idāni bhikkhubhāve kattabbatoti keci. Dvīsupi vāresu kammapaṭippassaddhividhānaṃ teyeva jānanti, tasmā sabbavāresu yuttamayuttañca suṭṭhu sallakkhetvā kathetabbaṃ.
名为“出家”之犍度,
具种种理趣,乃教法之根本。
知已,正确为他者宣说;
此即其在牟尼教法中之主宰地位。巴利
Yo khandhakaṃ pabbajjanāmadheyyaṃ, Nānānayaṃ sāsanamūlabhūtaṃ; Ñatvā pakāseti parassa sammā, Tassādhipaccaṃ munisāsanasminti.
伍波萨他犍度注释巴利
2. Uposathakkhandhakavaṇṇanā
关于允许集会等事的注释巴利
Sannipātānujānanādikathāvaṇṇanā
132-3 “于彼时”是指:世尊放下了亲自教诫诵巴帝摩卡的担子,允许比丘们单独举行伍波萨他的那个时候。那又是什么时候呢?就是中菩提时期,也就是足以诵出巴帝摩卡的诸学处已经圆满制定的时候。所以经文才说“应允许他们诵巴帝摩卡”。“诸比丘,应当这样诵”这句话,是为了制定序文的诵法,并显示学处诵出的范围和段落。否则,如果“诸比丘,应当这样诵此学处”已经表明了一切学处诵出的次第,那么这里“诸比丘,应当这样诵”就成了没有意义的话。而这句话是针对全体僧团的伍波萨他说的。巴利
132-3.Tenasamayenāti attano ovādapātimokkhuddese dhuraṃ nikkhipitvā bhikkhūnaṃyeva visuṃ uposathakaraṇaṃ anujānitvā ṭhitasamayena. Ko pana soti? Majjhimabodhiyaṃ pātimokkhuddesappahonakasikkhāpadānaṃ pariniṭṭhānakālo. Tenevāha ‘‘tāni nesaṃ pātimokkhuddesaṃ anujāneyya’’nti. ‘‘Evañca pana, bhikkhave, uddisitabba’’nti nidānuddesaṃ paññāpetukāmatāya ca sikkhāpadānaṃ uddesaparicchedanidassanatthañca vuttaṃ. Aññathā ‘‘evañca pana, bhikkhave, imaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ uddiseyyathā’’ti sabbasikkhāpadānaṃ uddisitabbakkamassa dassitattā idāni ‘‘evañca pana, bhikkhave, uddisitabba’’nti idaṃ niratthakaṃ āpajjati, idañca sabbasaṅghuposathaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ.
134 诸位尊者何不……集会,这是说明许多人共同参与的事务。在这里,依律而称“比丘尊主”,是为了表明不只是僧团上座,也是为了显示僧团值得用恭敬言辞相待,所以说“诸位尊者,请听我说”。在这里,如果自己就是上座,对比丘说“贤友”才合适。怎么知道呢?佛在世时,僧团上座中不娴熟的人是很难得的。而且在一切甘马语的示范中,世尊都只显示“诸位尊者,请听我僧团”,难道不是这样吗?确实如此,因为世尊就是这样示范的。依僧团而言,即使是僧团上座也应当说“诸位尊者,请听我僧团”;依比丘而言,则说“贤友”,这从大迦叶的甘马语示范可以看出,也从清净伍波萨他时上座比丘说“我清净,贤友”的示范可以看出。“若僧团时机适合”,这是针对后面要告知的举行伍波萨他的障碍而说的。因为伍波萨他有多种,就它的实际内容来说,所以说“应诵巴帝摩卡”。到这里,白已成立。因为伍波萨他甘马正是由白二甘马完成的。难道不是由第三唱和而成的吗?不是,因为它与其他白四甘马不同。这里并不是四次发起“请听我说”。又难道因为与其他白二甘马不同,白二也就不应有吗?不是,因为白二甘马也可以以其他方式来做。也就是说,白二甘马也可以按告白甘马的方式来做,其他的则不能以其他方式来做。怎么知道呢?这个伍波萨他甘马本身就是说明。巴利
134. ‘‘Yaṃnūna ayyāpi…pe… sannipateyyu’’nti bahūnaṃ adhikārappavatti. Tatrāpi vinayaṃ āgamma vutto bhikkhu sāmi, na kevalaṃ saṅghattheroti dassanatthaṃ, saṅghassa gāravayuttavacanārahatādassanatthañca ‘‘suṇātu me, bhante’’ti āha. Tattha sayaṃ ce thero, bhikkhuṃ sandhāya ‘‘āvuso’’ti vattuṃ yujjati. Kathaṃ paññāyati? Buddhakāle saṅghatthero abyatto nāma dullabho. Sabbakammavācāya payoganidassane ca ‘‘suṇātu me, bhante, saṅgho’’ icceva bhagavā dassetīti ce? Evametaṃ tathā dassanato. Saṅghaṃ upādāya saṅghattherenāpi ‘‘suṇātu me, bhante, saṅgho’’ti vattabbaṃ, bhikkhuṃ upādāya ‘‘āvuso’’ti mahākassapassa kammavācāya payogadassanato, pārisuddhiuposathe ca therena bhikkhunā ‘‘parisuddho ahaṃ, āvuso’’ti payogadassanato ca. ‘‘Yadi saṅghassa pattakalla’’nti parato paññāpetabbe uposathakaraṇantarāye sandhāyāha. Uposathassa bahuvidhattā sarūpato vattuṃ ‘‘pātimokkhaṃ uddiseyyā’’ti āha. Ettāvatā ñattiṃ niṭṭhapesi. Ñattidutiyakammato eva hi uposathakammaṃ. Na, tatiyānussāvanasambhavatoti ce? Na, aññehi ñatticatutthakammehi asadisattā. Na hi ettha catukkhattuṃ ‘‘suṇātu me’’ti ārabhīyatīti. Aññehi ñattidutiyehi asadisattā ñattidutiyampi māhotūti ce? Na, ñattidutiyakammassa aññathāpi kattabbato. Tathā hi ñattidutiyakammaṃ ekaccaṃ apalokanavasenapi kātuṃ vaṭṭati, na aññaṃ aññathā kātuṃ vaṭṭati. Kathaṃ paññāyatīti? Idameva uposathakammaṃ ñāpakaṃ.
僧团的前行事务是什么?这句话不应该在动议完成之后才说,因为那件事本来就是在动议之前就该做的。所以,是不是应该这样说:尊者,请僧团听我说,僧团的前行事务是什么?如果僧团……?即便如此,也不应该这样说,因为那件事并不包含在动议之内。如果这样,那是不是在任何情况下都不该说,因为没有意义?不是的,因为只有在相应的地方才该说,也就是说,要等后面的话来决定。如果僧团或个人没有做这个前行事务就举行伍波萨他,就会犯越出规定界限的罪。因为当界限被越过时,扫地、设座、备水、点灯这些事并不能免罪。这个罪的起因,在于没有做伍波萨他甘马之前该做的事,而不是等到甘马结束才生起——不像这里所说的明知故犯的妄语罪那样。所以,诵戒比丘想说“诸尊者,请报告清净”时,首先要让大家忆念与清净有关的前行事务。因为这件事如果做了,就成为清净的条件;如果没做,就成为不清净的条件。正是为了兼顾这两种情况,才不说“做了没做”,而说“僧团的前行事务是什么?”。其中,在没做的情况下,为了说明随后报告清净的程序,后面会说“如果有罪,就应当发露”;在做了的情况下,则说“如果没有罪,就应当保持沉默”。巴利
‘‘Kiṃ saṅghassa pubbakicca’’nti idaṃ na ñatti niṭṭhapetvā vattabbaṃ, tañhi ñattito puretarameva karīyatīti. Tasmā ‘‘suṇātu me, bhante, saṅgho, kiṃ saṅghassa pubbakiccaṃ, yadi saṅghassā’’ti vattabbaṃ siyāti? Tathāpi na vattabbaṃ, na hi taṃ ñattiyā antokarīyatīti. Yadi evaṃ sabbattha na vattabbaṃ payojanābhāvāti ce? Na, yathāgataṭṭhāneyeva vattabbato, parapadāpekkhatāyāti vuttaṃ hoti. Idaṃ pubbakiccaṃ akatvā uposathaṃ karonto saṅgho, puggalo vā ṭhapanakkhettātikkame āpajjati. Na hi tasmiṃ khette atikkante sammajjanāsanodakapadīpakaraṇe āpattimokkho hoti. Uposathakammato pubbe kattabbakiccākaraṇapaccayattā tassā āpattiyā, na sā kammapariyosānāpekkhā etthāgatasampajānamusāvādāpatti viya, tasmā pātimokkhuddesako bhikkhu ‘‘pārisuddhiṃ āyasmanto ārocethā’’ti vattukāmo paṭhamaṃyeva parisuddhāparisuddhapaccayaṃ pubbakiccaṃ sarāpeti. Tañhi kataṃ parisuddhapaccayo hoti, akataṃ aparisuddhapaccayo, teneva ubhayāpekkhādhippāyena ‘‘kataṃ na kata’’nti avatvā ‘‘kiṃ saṅghassa pubbakicca’’ miccevāha. Tattha akatapakkhe tāva pārisuddhiārocanakkamanidassanatthaṃ parato ‘‘yassa siyā āpatti, so āvi kareyyā’’ti ca, katapakkhe ‘‘asantiyā āpattiyā tuṇhī bhavitabba’’nti ca vakkhati.
诸位尊者,请报告清净。为什么呢?因为我要诵巴帝摩卡。这里有人主张:不取“我诵”这个现在时,而用“我将诵”这个未来时,是指《大品》一五〇中说的“现在允许他们诵巴帝摩卡”那个诵巴帝摩卡,针对它才说“我将诵巴帝摩卡”。又因为说过“诸比丘,有五种诵巴帝摩卡”,所以对现在正在进行、名为序诵的巴帝摩卡,在其末尾有“你们是否清净?”等直到三遍宣告的部分,那正是罪的范围所在;又因为部分也可以借用整体的说法,所以这里正是针对罪的范围说“我将诵巴帝摩卡”。这样说的时候,因为接下来就要进入罪的范围,所以“你们这些畏惧罪的人,都应当首先报告清净”这个意思就能成立。如果按现在时来说,“诸位尊者,请报告清净”这句话本身就站不住脚,因为那时候的报告应当先被期待,更不用说“我将诵巴帝摩卡”这句话了,因为那时还没做这件事。这个道理适用于有罪时发露的场合,不适用于沉默的情况,因为沉默是在甘马未结束时才出现的;即便如此,在那种情况下也适用。因为诵戒比丘看到比丘们没有互相发露罪而保持沉默,就以那沉默当作已经报告了清净,于是开始诵巴帝摩卡:“尊者,请听我说……”巴利
Pārisuddhiṃ āyasmanto ārocetha. Kiṃkāraṇā? Yasmā pātimokkhaṃ uddisissāmi. Ettha ca ‘‘uddisāmī’’ti vattamānakālaṃ aparāmasitvā ‘‘uddisissāmī’’ti anāgatakālaparāmasanena yvāyaṃ ‘‘dāni nesaṃ pātimokkhuddesaṃ anujāneyya’’nti (mahāva. 150) ettha vuttapātimokkhuddeso, taṃ sandhāya ‘‘pātimokkhaṃ uddisissāmī’’ti vuttanti eke. Yasmā ‘‘pañcime, bhikkhave, pātimokkhuddesā’’ti vuttaṃ, tasmā vattamānassa nidānuddesasaṅkhātassa pātimokkhassa yadetaṃ ante ‘‘kaccittha parisuddhā’’tiādikaṃ yāvatatiyānussāvanaṃ, tasseva āpattikhettattā, avayavepi avayavīvohārasambhavato ca idha āpattikhettameva sandhāya ‘‘pātimokkhaṃ uddisissāmī’’ti vuttaṃ. Evañhi vutte yasmā parato āpattikhettaṃ āgamissati, tasmā āpattibhīrukā tumhe sabbeva paṭhamameva pārisuddhiṃ ārocethāti ayamattho sambhavati. Vattamānakālavasena vutte ‘‘pārisuddhiṃ āyasmanto ārocethā’’ti vacanameva na sambhavati tadārocanassa paṭhamaṃ icchitabbattā, pageva tassa karaṇābhāvena ‘‘pātimokkhaṃ uddisissāmī’’ti vacanaṃ. Ayaṃ nayo santiyā āpattiyā ārocane yujjati, na tuṇhībhāve, akammapariyosānā tuṇhībhāvappattito, evaṃ santepi tasmiṃ yujjateva. Pātimokkhuddesako hi aññamaññaṃ āpattiāvikaraṇaṃ akatvā tuṇhībhūte bhikkhū passitvā teneva tuṇhībhāvena ārocitapārisuddhiko hutvā ‘‘suṇātu me, bhante’’ti pātimokkhuddesaṃ ārabhi.
这里有人问:前面已经说过“僧团应举行伍波萨他,应诵巴帝摩卡”,那么这里是不是也应该说“僧团将举行伍波萨他,将诵巴帝摩卡”?还是因为它的性质是“个人的诵出”,就应该按照字面来说?即便如此,是不是也应该说“我将举行伍波萨他,我将诵巴帝摩卡”?不应该这样说,因为这与它的性质相违背,而且会引出不想要的结论。因为正是通过个人的诵出,僧团的伍波萨他才算完成,而不是通过个人举行伍波萨他。而且那件事是那个人自己将做的,不是僧团将做的,这样就落入了不想要的结论。当说“请听”时,因为害怕导致心不和合的过失,所以说了“我们听”。如果说:既然说了“我将诵”,是不是也应该说“我们将听”?不应该这样说,因为不需要顾及显示犯罪范围的意图,所以只说“我们听”。仅仅这一个词,他的那个意图就已经超越了。如果这样的话,为什么众人都开始应答呢?是为了以“我将诵”这句不共的话,防止犯罪者产生心不和合的过失。“忆念者”这个词,显示了这个明知故犯的妄语是刻意做的。世尊说这是障碍法,这样就显示了即使是由不作为而生起的、如此微小的这个妄语,也有很大的过患。“欲求清净者”是指想要有余的清净,也就是就残余的罪而言的无犯状态,以及无余的清净,也就是就在家人状态而言的清净。为什么应当发露呢?因为不进入障碍,就是安乐住的助缘。这里没有说“今天是十五伍波萨他日”,因为后面要确定日期的意图没有说出来的缘故。然而那些比丘确实在所有的日子都诵了。巴利
Etthāha – paṭhamaṃ ‘‘saṅgho uposathaṃ kareyya, pātimokkhaṃ uddiseyyā’’ti vuttattā idhāpi ‘‘saṅgho uposathaṃ karissati, pātimokkhaṃ uddisissatī’’ti vattabbaṃ, atha ‘‘puggalassa uddesā’’ti lakkhaṇattā yathārutameva vattabbaṃ, tathāpi ‘‘uposathaṃ karissāmi, pātimokkhaṃ uddisissāmī’’ti vattabbanti? Na vattabbaṃ lakkhaṇavirodhato, aniṭṭhappasaṅgato ca. Puggalassa uddesā eva hi saṅghassa uposatho kato hoti, na puggalassa uposathakaraṇena. Tañca sova karissati, na saṅghoti aniṭṭhappasaṅgova āpajjati. ‘‘Suṇāthā’’ti vutte acittasāmaggippasaṅgabhayā ‘‘suṇomā’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Suṇissāmā’’ti vattabbaṃ ‘‘uddisissāmī’’ti vuttattāti ce? Na vattabbaṃ, āpattikhettadassanādhippāyanirapekkhatāya ‘‘suṇoma’’ icceva vattabbaṃ. Ekapadeneva hissa tadadhippāyo atikkantoti. Yadi evaṃ kimatthaṃ taṃ sabbeheva āraddhanti ce? ‘‘Uddisissāmī’’ti iminā asādhāraṇavacanena āpannassa acittasāmaggippasaṅganivāraṇatthaṃ. Saramānenāti iminā cassa sampajānamusāvādassa sacittakataṃ dasseti. Antarāyiko dhammo vutto bhagavatāti evaṃ akiriyasamuṭṭhānassāpi evaṃ parittakassa imassa musāvādassa mahādīnavataṃ dasseti. Visuddhāpekkhenāti sāvasesaṃ āpattiṃ upādāya anāpattibhāvasaṅkhātaṃ anavasesañca upādāya gihibhāvasaṅkhātaṃ visuddhiṃ icchantena kasmā āvi kātabbā? Antarāyabhāvānupagamanena phāsuvihārapaccayattā. Idha ‘‘ajjuposatho pannaraso’’ti na vuttaṃ parato divasaniyamassa kattukāmatādhippāyena avuttattā. Evaṃ pana te bhikkhū sabbadivasesu uddisiṃsu.
135 “起始”这里说的就是戒巴帝摩卡,虽然本意是指结集的巴帝摩卡。“五者”是依照论母中所说的来说的。“未犯者”是依人而立的教示。然而《古义疏》中说:“‘应行伍波萨他’说到这里就是动议。所谓三番宣告,就是‘若有罪者’等三句,加上末尾‘我第二次、第三次询问’这一句,共有两种。其中,第一遍是为记起罪而坐的人说的,第二遍是为没记起的人提醒。”“于语门”是依显了的方式直接说的。虽然也能以身表来做,但因为不属于身业,所以只应以语表来表明。“于僧团中”等,据说是特征语。为了行僧团伍波萨他而坐在僧团中,就是在那个僧团中;为了行别众伍波萨他而坐在别众中,就是在那个别众中;如果只打算在一个人面前行清净伍波萨他,就应在那一人面前表明。对此,思辨者说:“由此表明,这妄语不仅发生在僧团中,而且依这里所说的特征,即便没有‘尊者们,请表明清净’等规定,如果在别众伍波萨他中,有罪的人想行伍波萨他却不表明,默不作声地做了,也犯故意妄语罪。据说这是为了揭示这个意思才说的特征语。”他们的意思是,否则就不会说“于别众中”了。导师认为,这是依表明的意图而说的,并非作这种思辨。因为表明的时候,若以“我向僧团表明”的意图来表明,就叫于僧团中表明;若向坐在自己两边的人表明,就叫于别众中;若以“我将向某位同法者表明”的意图来表明,就叫于一人处表明。应当知道,对已经分别过的文句再作分别,是为了显示并没有别的意思。巴利
135.‘‘Ādimeta’’nti sīlapātimokkhameva vuttaṃ, kiñcāpi ganthapātimokkho adhippeto. ‘‘Pañcannaṃ vā’’ti mātikāyaṃ vuttānaṃ vasena vuttaṃ. Anajjhāpanno vāti puggalādhiṭṭhānadesanā. Porāṇagaṇṭhipade pana ‘‘‘uposathaṃ kareyyā’ti ettāvatā ñatti hoti. Yāvatatiyānussāvanā nāma ‘yassa siyā āpattī’tiādivacanattayaṃ, ante ‘dutiyampi tatiyampi pucchāmī’ti idañcāti duvidhaṃ. Tattha paṭhamaṃ āpattiṃ saritvā nisinnassa, dutiyaṃ asarantassa sāraṇattha’’nti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Vacīdvāre’’ti pākaṭavasena ujukameva vuttaṃ. Kiñcāpi kāyaviññattiyāpi karīyati, kāyakammābhāvā pana vacīviññattiyāyeva āvi kātabbā. ‘‘Saṅghamajjhe vā’’tiādi lakkhaṇavacanaṃ kira. Saṅghuposathakaraṇatthaṃ saṅghamajjhe ce nisinno, tasmiṃ saṅghamajjhe. Gaṇuposathakaraṇatthañce gaṇamajjhe nisinno, tasmiṃ gaṇamajjhe. Ekasseva santike ce pārisuddhiuposathaṃ kattukāmo, tasmiṃ ekapuggale āvi kātabbāti, ‘‘etena na kevalaṃ saṅghamajjhe evāyaṃ musāvādo sambhavati, atha kho ettha vuttalakkhaṇena asatipi ‘pārisuddhiṃ āyasmanto ārocethā’tiādividhāne gaṇuposathepi sāpattiko hutvā uposathaṃ kattukāmo anārocetvā tuṇhībhūtova karoti ce, sampajānamusāvādāpattiṃ āpajjatīti imassatthassa āvikaraṇato lakkhaṇavacanaṃ kireta’’nti vadanti takkikā. Aññathā ‘‘gaṇamajjhevā’’ti na vuttanti tesaṃ adhippāyo. Ārocanādhippāyavasena vuttanti no takkoti ācariyo. Ārocento hi saṅghassa ārocemīti adhippāyena āvi karonto saṅghamajjhe āvi karoti nāma. Attano ubhatopasse nisinnānaṃ ārocento gaṇamajjhe. Ekassevārocessāmi sabhāgassāti adhippāyena ārocento ekapuggale āroceti nāma. Pubbe vibhattapadassa puna vibhajanaṃ atthavisesābhāvadīpanatthanti veditabbaṃ.
136-7 诸比丘,不应每日……中略……犯恶作。说了这话之后,又说诸比丘,我允许在伍波萨他日诵巴帝摩卡。这就说明:那恶作只在非伍波萨他日才算犯,而在伍波萨他日,即使每天诵也是可以的。因此,那些比丘在十四日诵了之后,又在十五日诵了,所以世尊说每半月一次。在这里,第一句显示:和合日就是伍波萨他日。两句合起来遮止第八日,是为了防止对每日的遮止被过度推广。这话说的是什么意思呢?如果僧团分裂之后,在月朔日又和合了,在那一天举行和合伍波萨他,就会犯两种恶作——被这两句合在一起所遮止,这就是所说的意思。否则,和合伍波萨他就不是每日的事;如果是每日的事,那就应当昼夜都做。而且,在那个半月里,常规伍波萨他也不是每日的事;如果是每日的事,那就应当昼夜都做。再者,在那个半月里,如果常规伍波萨他没有诵,就应当做和合伍波萨他,这就成了犯戒。是不是应该按照例外的方式来理解呢?不是,因为那样会引出不想要的结果。这话说的是什么意思呢?就是在和合日做了和合伍波萨他之后,到了那个半月里常规伍波萨他日到来时,就不应再做常规伍波萨他,这就是例外。也就是说,遮止在应当作为例外的地方之外,另外制定通则。巴利
136-7.‘‘Na, bhikkhave, devasikaṃ…pe… dukkaṭassā’’ti vatvā ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, uposathe pātimokkhaṃ uddisitu’’nti idaṃ anuposathe eva taṃ dukkaṭaṃ , uposathe pana devasikampi vaṭṭatīti dīpeti, tasmā te bhikkhū cātuddasiyaṃ uddisitvāpi pannarasiyaṃ uddisiṃsu, tenāha ‘‘sakiṃ pakkhassā’’ti. Tattha purimena sāmaggīdivaso uposathadivaso evāti dīpeti. Ubhayena aṭṭhamiṃ paṭikkhipitvā devasikaṃ paṭikkhepassa atippasaṅgaṃ nivāreti. Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti? Bhinno ce saṅgho pāṭipadadivase samaggo hoti, tasmiṃ divase sāmaggīuposathaṃ karonto ubhayampi dukkaṭaṃ āpajjanto ubhayena ekībhūtena nivārito hotīti vuttaṃ hoti. Aññathā sāmaggīuposatho na devasiko. Ce, ahorattaṃ kātabbo. Tasmiñca pakkhe pakatiuposatho na devasiko. Ce, ahorattaṃ kātabbo. Tasmiñca pakkhe pakatiuposatho anuddiṭṭho. Ce hoti, sāmaggīuposatho kātabboti āpajjati. Na apavādanayena gahetabbattāti ce? Na, aniṭṭhappasaṅgato. Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti? Sāmaggīdivase sāmaggīuposathaṃ katvā puna tasmiṃ pakkhe pakatiuposathadivase sampatte pakatiuposatho na kātabboti. Apavādoti. Apavāditabbaṭṭhānato aññattha ussaggavidhānaṃ nivāreti.
“和合的范围到底怎样?”这里的意思是:所谓和合,就是同类者聚集在一起。那么,所谓同类者,是指所有共同修法的人,还是指因住处相同而称为同类者?如果共同修法者之间的和合才叫和合,那就应当希望所有分散而住的人也和合。如果是按住处来说,那就是指同一住处中的同类者。否则就会变成“同一住处就是和合”。“请不要离开我们”,意思就是愿不成为已离去者。巴利
Kittāvatānu kho sāmaggīti etthāyamadhippāyo – sāmaggī nāmesā sabhāgānaṃ sannipāto. Sabhāgā ca nāma yattakā sahadhammikā, te sabbepi honti, udāhu āvāsasabhāgatāya sabhāgā nāma hontīti. Tattha yadi sahadhammikānaṃ sāmaggī sāmaggī nāma, sabbesaṃ puthuvibhattānaṃ sāmaggī icchitabbā. Athāvasathavasena, ekāvāsasabhāgānanti vuttaṃ hoti. Aññathā ekāvāse sāmaggīti āpajjati. Mā no agamāsīti agato mā hoti.
关于允许结界的讨论注释巴利
Sīmānujānanakathāvaṇṇanā
138 世尊先否定了以同一住处为标准的和合,接着想允许以同一界为标准的和合,于是说:“诸比丘,我允许划定界。”那么,接下来就应该说明住处的范围了。照这样说,同一住处的范围,就等于同一界的范围。他应该说:“诸比丘,我允许划定界。”所以要知道:这里并不是以已获允许的已结之界来确定同一住处的范围,而是以近行界来确定。怎么知道呢?从经藏本身就可知道,正如经中说:“那时,具寿伍巴南达释子一人(单独)在两个住处安居……乃至……同一意图。”否则,如果只以同一住处才有和合,那么在众多住处和非住处中就不可能有和合了。这样一来,他去那个住处时,就会在界外举行伍波萨他。这与经文“诸比丘,在伍波萨他日不应前往有比丘的非住处”等说法相违,因为即使有僧团在非住处,也不应举行伍波萨他。如果在非住处也能得到和合,那就不该说“至此为和合,乃至同一住处”。所以应当知道,前一种说法完全被后一种说法否定了,因此即使以不同住处为标准,也有和合。否则便会有破夏的非期望过失。怎么说呢?如果仅以同一住处才有和合,那么在众多住处和非住处中就不可能有和合了。这样一来,他去那个住处时,就会在界外举行伍波萨他。有人说:“就像说‘我们做那甘马’之后却没做等情况一样,因为还观待未来,所以说‘我们做’的时候是不成立的。”有记载说:“即使不清理界,也可以宣说界相。”最低限度是七肘半高,如象的身量。如果有一处相连,就不应做。关于这一点,《随义疏》中说:“在四方四座山顶之下,有像背石一样的石头立着,即使有同一相连的状态,但地上没有连接,而只是把地下相连的部分视为不须计较,这样来立界称说,是允许的。因此说:‘背石纵然极其巨大,仍然只算作石头。’如果就它地下广大这一点来说,那就应该算作山了。”——这是《随义疏》中所说的。“在堆聚而成的土堆上,如果草丛树木生长出来,那就是山”,法喜长老这样说;“并非如此”,伍巴帝萨长老这样说。巴利
138. Ekāvāsagatānaṃ vasena sāmaggiṃ paṭikkhipitvā ekasīmagatānaṃ vasena anujānitukāmo bhagavā ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, sīmaṃ sammannitu’’nti āha. Atha āvāsaparicchedaṃ vattukāmo bhaveyya. Ettāvatā ekāvāso yāvatā ekāsīmā. ‘‘Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, sīmaṃ sammannitu’’nti vadeyya. Tasmā na idha anuññātabaddhasīmāvasena ekāvāsaparicchedo hoti, upacārasīmāvaseneva hotīti veditabbaṃ. Kathaṃ jānitabbanti ce? Pāḷitova, yathāha ‘‘tena kho pana samayena āyasmā upanando sakyaputto eko dvīsu āvāsesu vassaṃ vasi…pe… ekādhippāya’’nti (mahāva. 364). Aññathā vassacchedoti aniṭṭhappasaṅgova, kathaṃ? Ekāvāsavaseneva ce sāmaggī, bahuāvāsaanāvāsesu na sambhaveyya. Tato so taṃ āvāsaṃ gacchanto bahiddhā uposathaṃ karoti. ‘‘Na, bhikkhave, tadahuposathe sabhikkhuko anāvāso gantabbo’’tiādi (mahāva. 181)-pāḷivirodho satipi saṅghe anāvāse uposathassa akattabbato. Anāvāsepi ce sāmaggī labbhati, ‘‘ettāvatā sāmaggī, yāvatā ekāvāso’’ti na vattabbaṃ, tasmā sabbathā purimanayo pacchimeneva paṭikkhittoti katvā nānāvāsavasenapi sāmaggīti veditabbaṃ. ‘‘Taṃ kammaṃ karomāti vatvā na akaṃsū’tiādīsu viya anāgatampi apekkhati, tasmā ‘karomā’ti vutte na vaṭṭatī’’ti vadanti. ‘‘Sīmaṃ asodhetvāpi nimittaṃ kittetuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti likhitaṃ. Heṭṭhimakoṭiyā aḍḍhaṭṭhamaratanubbedho hatthippamāṇo. Sace eko baddho hoti, na kātabboti ettha ‘‘catūsu disāsu catunnaṃ pabbatakūṭānaṃ heṭṭhā piṭṭhipāsāṇasadise pāsāṇe ṭhitattā ekābaddhabhāve satipi pathavito uddhaṃ tesaṃ sambandhe asati heṭṭhā pathavigatasambandhamatte abbohārikaṃ katvā kittetuṃ vaṭṭati. Teneva ‘piṭṭhipāsāṇo atimahantopi pāsāṇasaṅkhyameva gacchatī’ti vuttaṃ. Pathavito heṭṭhā tassa mahantabhāve gayhamāne pabbatameva hotī’’ti anugaṇṭhipade vuttaṃ. ‘‘Cinitvā katapaṃsupuñje tiṇagumbarukkhā ce jāyanti, pabbato hotīti dhammasiritthero. Nevāti upatissatthero’’ti vuttaṃ.
关于“石头”,他们说用石灰做的石头也可以。但因为砖已经被排除,所以需要再考察。大小应该是三十二婆罗重的球状石块,按重量算,不是按个数算。“那根”指的是像树桩一样竖起来的石头。巴利
Pāsāṇoti ‘‘sudhāmayapāsāṇopi vaṭṭatī’’ti vadanti. Vīmaṃsitabbaṃ iṭṭhakāya paṭikkhittattā. Dvattiṃsapalaguḷapiṇḍappamāṇo tulatāya, na tulagaṇanāya. Sopīti khāṇuko viya uṭṭhitapāsāṇo.
“乃至四五棵树的相状”:有些版本里没有“相状”这个词。这里如果有三棵实心树、两棵非实心树,就应以实心树占多数为宜。又说:“坟场在这里也算作林,因为它是自然生长的。”不过有些人说:“四棵树里若有两棵是实心树,就可以。实心树更多,或者相等,也可以。所以即使树很多,只要有两棵是实心树,就可以。”巴利
Catupañcarukkhanimittamattampīti ekaccesu nimittasaddo natthi. Ettha tayo ce sārarukkhā honti, dve asārarukkhā, sārarukkhānaṃ bahuttaṃ icchitabbaṃ. ‘‘Susānampi idha ‘vanamevā’ti saṅkhyaṃ gacchati sayaṃjātattā’’ti vuttaṃ. Keci pana ‘‘catūsu dve antosārā ce, vaṭṭati. Antosārā adhikā, samā vā, vaṭṭati. Tasmā bahūsupi dve ce antosārā atthi, vaṭṭatī’’ti vadanti.
关于“后分”这个词,这里有人说:因为已经离开了那些被系缚的地方,所以可以。同样,在长途道路上,因为所站的位置和所到达的位置不同,所以也可以。巴利
Parabhāgeti ettha ‘‘etehi baddhaṭṭhānato gatattā vaṭṭati. Tathā dīghamaggepi gahitaṭṭhānato gataṭṭhānassa aññattā’’ti vadanti.
关于“每半月”这一说法,这里写道:“随半月而行,或属于半月。”有些人说:因为提到“内衣湿透”,所以只应在恰好有那么大水量[的地方]来做。而“湿透”这个词,是从最低限度来说明河流的特征。对于这样的河流,在四个月里,不管水少还是水多,只要水漫过并流动的地方,即使水很少,站在那里做[也]是可以的——有些人这样说。还有人说:因为说过“流动之处就是河流的标志”,所以从桥以下,只要有那么多水在流动,那就是河流。巴利
Anvaddhamāsanti ettha ‘‘anubaddho addhamāso, addhamāsassa vā anū’’ti likhitaṃ. ‘‘Antaravāsako temiyatī’’ti vuttattā tattakappamāṇaudakeyeva kātuṃ vaṭṭatīti keci. Temiyatīti iminā heṭṭhimakoṭiyā nadilakkhaṇaṃ vuttaṃ. Evarūpāya nadiyā yasmiṃ ṭhāne cattāro māse appaṃ vā bahuṃ vā udakaṃ ajjhottharitvā pavattati, tasmiṃ ṭhāne appodakepi ṭhatvā kātuṃ vaṭṭatīti eke. ‘‘Pavattanaṭṭhāne nadinimitta’nti vuttattā setuto parato tattakaṃ udakaṃ yadi pavattati, nadī evā’’ti vadanti.
在自然水池等地方,静止的水只要以“自然水池”等名称来标示,就可以作为界相,即使中间没有间隔也没问题,就像河流对岸的界相一样。如果那个地方过了一段时间变成了村庄或田地,就可以在那里另外认定一个新的界。“可举起者”是指可以拿起来带走的东西。巴利
Jātassarādīsu ṭhitodakaṃ jātassarādipadesena anantarikampi nimittaṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭati nadipārasīmāya nimittaṃ viya. Sace so padeso kālantarena gāmakhettabhāvaṃ pāpuṇāti, tattha aññaṃ sīmaṃ sammannituṃ vaṭṭati. Ukkhepimanti uddharitvā gahetabbakaṃ.
对于未结界的住处,在结界时预留出接近的范围,注疏里写的是“为将来要认定的界预留空间”。关于“已进入界相范围内的人”,他们解释说:如果只有一个人有半数意愿想留在界内,那就不需要所有人都到场,因此说“已进入界相范围内的人”,而且这是依照随顺规则来说的。关于“不来也可以”,注疏里写的是“因为界还没有结,所以不成别众”。在别的村田里站着唱说界相的时候,以及在认定共住界的时候,并没有前来的必要——这是所说的。“或者击鼓为号”,注疏里写的是“宣告说我们要作认定的结束”,由此可以成立:在那种情况下,那样做是允许的。这有什么用呢?是为了让事情方便。也就是说,不必举行大众集会的辛苦,用较少的人就能把事情办成。如果在结大界的时候有障碍,为了表明仅凭这个数量也能安乐而住,所以说了“第一”。怎么知道“从此以下就不允许”呢?因为僧甘马以二十人众为作持的极限。如果连同堪能作甘马的人一起,取二十一位比丘,那是允许的。应当知道,仅以这个数量作为安乐坐卧的限度。如果把同一个界相告诉其他人之后再来结,有些人说这也是允许的。巴利
Abaddhasīmavihārānaṃ sīmāya upacāraṃ ṭhapetvāti ‘‘āyatiṃ sammannitabbāya okāsaṃ ṭhapetvā’’ti likhitaṃ. Antonimittagatehi panāti ‘‘ekassa upaḍḍhaṃ antokattukāmatāya sati sabbesaṃ āgamane payojanaṃ natthīti katvā ‘antonimittagatehī’ti vuttaṃ, tañca sāmīcivasenā’’ti vadanti. Anāgamanampi vaṭṭatīti ‘‘sīmāya abaddhattā vaggaṃ nāma na hotī’’ti likhitaṃ. ‘‘Aññasmiṃ gāmakhette ṭhatvā nimittakittanakāle, samānasaṃvāsakasīmāya sammannanakāle ca āgamanapayojanaṃ natthī’’ti vuttaṃ. Bherisaññaṃ vāti ‘‘sammannanapariyosānaṃ karomāti vatvā’’ti likhitaṃ, tena tādise kāle taṃ kappatīti siddhaṃ hoti. Kiṃ iminā? Sukhakaraṇatthanti mahājanasannipātanaparissamaṃ akatvā appatarehi sukhakaraṇatthaṃ. Yadi mahāsīmābandhanakāle antarāyo hoti, tattakenapi sukhavihāroti dassanatthaṃ ‘‘paṭhama’’nti vuttanti eke. Tato oraṃ na vaṭṭatīti kathaṃ paññāyatīti? Vīsativaggakaraṇīyaparamattā saṅghakammassa. Kammārahena saddhiṃ ekavīsati bhikkhū ce gaṇhāti, vaṭṭati. Tattakappamāṇaṃ sukhanisajjavasena veditabbaṃ. Tameva nimittaṃ aññepi kittetvā sace bandhanti, vaṭṭatīti eke.
不过,在这样结成的界中……“因为界中间的区域属于村田”,这是为了说明:和合的分界不是按住处来划分,而是只按界来划分。“把可作界相的石放好后”,这是针对可移动的界相而说的。从这里开始是难词解释次第:他们不能废除——那些人没有察觉到不别住,心想“我们要废除共住界”,努力去废除,却废除不了。“一勒多那量”,是因为容易辨认中间,所以这样说。即使只有一指节那么长也可以。从破界开始结,是惯常做法。按照惯常做法去做,疑惑就消除了。“如臼”,是指像地臼一样的小坑。有些人说,“在前面”是就地小屋而说的。从下面不降下,是因为从墙以内放置界相而宣说的缘故,所以不从下面的虚空降下;若在上面造了楼阁,则是这个意思。附着于墙,是指依附于墙的。据说这些附着于墙的也不被称为“一结”。整个楼阁都处于界中,无论是一结也好,不是也好。多罗树根山,是渐渐变细的。虚空山崖,是指没有围障的山崖。有孔岩石,是指洞窟。洞窟内,是指山中的洞窟。然而,关于门,后面说“以内”,其意旨是:从一切方面都从界外的洞窟降下。巴利
‘‘Evaṃbaddhāsu pana…pe… sīmantarikā hi gāmakhettaṃ bhajatī’’ti na āvāsavasena sāmaggīparicchedo, kintu sīmāvasenevāti dassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. ‘‘Nimittupagapāsāṇe ṭhapetvā’’ti sañcārimanimittassa tapparato vuttaṃ. Ito paṭṭhāya gaṇṭhipadakkamo hoti – na sakkhissantīti te avippavāsaṃ asallakkhetvā ‘‘samānasaṃvāsakameva samūhanissāmā’’ti vāyāmantā samūhanituṃ na sakkhissanti. ‘‘Ekaratanappamāṇā’’ti suviññeyyantarā hotīti katvā vuttaṃ. Ekaṅgulamattampi vaṭṭateva. Khaṇḍasīmato paṭṭhāya bandhanaṃ āciṇṇaṃ. Āciṇṇakaraṇena vigatasammoho hotīti. Kuṭigeheti kuṭighare bhūmighare. Udukkhalaṃvāti bhūmiudukkhalaṃ viya khuddakāvāṭaṃ. ‘‘Pamukhe’’ti bhūmikuṭiṃ sandhāya vuttanti eke. Heṭṭhā na otaratīti bhittito oraṃ nimittāni ṭhapetvā kittitattā heṭṭhā ākāse na otarati, upari kate pāsādeti attho. Bhittilaggeti bhittinissitake. Ime kira bhittilaggāpi ‘‘ekābaddhā’’ti na vuccanti. Sabbo pāsādo sīmaṭṭho hotīti ekābaddho vā hotu, mā vā. Tālamūlakapabbato nāma anupubbena tanuko. Ākāsapabbhāranti aparikkhepapabbhāraṃ. Susirapāsāṇo nāma leṇaṃ hoti. Antoleṇanti pabbatassa antoleṇaṃ. Dvāraṃ pana sandhāya parato ‘‘orato’’ti vuttaṃ, sabbathāpi sīmato bahileṇena otaratīti adhippāyo.
净化大界之后的意思是:即使人已经去了很远的地方,只要他还属于这个界、跟这个界有关系,就仍然算在这个界里。所以,不能不管他而直接办僧事,这是这段话的用意。如果是这样,那就应该说“把依附于该界的人排除之后,才可以办僧事”。《大义注》里也只说“净化界之后应当办”。有些人说,大长老们也只说“应当净化”。还有的文本写作“或者净化大界之后应当办僧事”。而且后面会说到“按照所说的方式”,所以有些人认为共通的那段文本才更好。在前一种说法里,意思是从破界起身之后,又落入大界之中;使人举起之后再办,是不允许的。为什么呢?因为他站在界内。有些人说,树下面伸入地里的根就属于破界,或者不算数。又说:“如果从中间砍断,那么在大界那边的根就属于大界,在破界那边的根就属于破界,因为那时不再受到所依附的土味等东西的支撑。”这是他们的说法。又说:“在结界之后才长出来的树上坐着办僧事,是可以的,就像在后结界的房子里一样。”接着给出理由说:“在结界时就已存在的树上坐着办,是不可以的,因为它没有进入上方的界。”如果这样,那么结界时并没有再登树之事,只有结界时才登上去,这就成了过失。然而,后来长出来的树因为与那个界相连,所以已经算在界数之内;同样,先前就存在的树也应当这样理解。从“任何”这个说法来看,草等东西也包括在内。有些人说,大长老们也是把草净化之后才办僧事的。巴利
Mahāsīmaṃ sodhetvāti sīmaṭṭhaṃ dūragatampi sīmagataṃ sīmasambandhaṃva, tasmā taṃ anāmasitvā ṭhātabbanti adhippāyo. Yadi evaṃ ‘‘tannissitakaṃ apanetvā kammaṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti vattabbaṃ. Mahāaṭṭhakathāyampi ‘‘sīmaṃ sodhetvā kātabba’’nti ettakameva vuttaṃ. Mahātherāpi ‘‘sodhetabba’’micceva vadantīti eke. ‘‘Mahāsīmaṃ sodhetvā vā kammaṃ kātabba’’nti ca pāṭho atthi. ‘‘Vuttanayenevā’’ti ca parato vakkhati, tasmā sādhāraṇapāṭhova sundaroti eke. Purimanayepīti khaṇḍasīmāya uṭṭhahitvā mahāsīmāya onatepīti attho. Ukkhipāpetvā kātuṃ na vaṭṭati. Kasmā? Anto ṭhitattā. Rukkhassa heṭṭhā pathavigataṃ mūlaṃ khaṇḍasīmāva hoti, abbohārikaṃ vāti apare. ‘‘Majjhe pana chinne mahāsīmāya ṭhitamūlaṃ mahāsīmameva bhajati, khaṇḍasīmāya ṭhitaṃ khaṇḍasīmameva bhajati tadāyattapathavirasādīhi anuggahitattā’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Sīmāya pacchā uṭṭhitarukkhe nisīditvā kammaṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭati pacchāsīmāyaṃ katagehe viyā’’ti vatvā ‘‘bandhanakāle ṭhitarukkhe nisīditvā kātuṃ na vaṭṭati uparisīmāya agamanato’’ti kāraṇaṃ vadanti. Evaṃ sati bandhanakāle puna ārohaṇaṃ nāma natthi, bandhitakāle eva āruhatīti āpajjati. Pacchā uṭṭhitarukkho pana tappaṭibaddhattā sīmasaṅkhyameva gato, evaṃ pubbe uṭṭhitarukkhopīti gahetabbaṃ. ‘‘Yaṃ kiñcipī’’ti vacanato tiṇādipi saṅgahitaṃ. Mahātherāpi tiṇaṃ sodhetvāva karontīti.
140 因为从中间到角落,所以就说“从角到角”。他们说“由于无心,也会犯戒”。“跨越”的意思是覆盖。那覆盖的是什么?是结界。有人说:“‘最末的……数目’——因此,下方的船不算在内”,这并不合理,因为在第二巴拉基格中关于船载货物的部分,那也被包含在内。另有人说:“这是按中等身材男子的负重份量来说的。”由于比丘尼也可能有河对岸的结界,所以对她们说“一位比丘尼前往河对岸”所说的过失,是为了避免这个过失,这是论师的推论。两处都用了“坚固”一词。因此,为了避免诵戒的障碍,诵戒日被确定为固定的。在这里,“船”指的是尺寸合适、大众共用、有柱子的船,而不是筏子,这是论师的推论。意思是砍伐树木制成的。如果同属一个村田,就应把所有界标内的比丘都置于伸手可及的范围内,然后举行甘马。如果是不同的村田,不来也可以。仅仅在两岸提及界标,并不包含岛,所以在岛上必须提及界标。他们说:“坐在河下游的比丘会破坏甘马,因为河流只在上游那一边属于界内。”巴利
140. Yasmā majjhato koṇaṃ hoti, tasmā ‘‘koṇato koṇa’’nti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Āpattiñca āpajjati acittakattā’’ti vadanti. Pārayatīti ajjhottharati. Kā sā? Sīmā. ‘‘Yā sabbantimena…pe… vahatī’’ti tato heṭṭhimā nāvāsaṅkhyaṃ na gacchatīti katvā vuttanti eke, taṃ na yuttaṃ dutiyapārājike nāvaṭṭhabhaṇḍādhikāre tassāpi adhippetattā. Majjhimapurisassa bhārappamāṇena vuttanti eke. Bhikkhunīnampi nadīpārasīmāsambhavato tāsaṃ ‘‘ekā vā nadīpāraṃ gaccheyyā’’ti vuttadosapariharaṇatthanti ācariyassa takko. Ubhayatthāpi dhuva-saddo gahito. Tena uposathantarāya pariharaṇatthaṃ uposathadivaso niyamatova vutto. Ettha ca nāvā nāma pamāṇayuttā sabbasādhāraṇā thambhanāvā adhippetā, na kullanāvāti no takkoti ācariyo. Rukkhaṃ chinditvā katoti attho. Sace ekaṃ gāmakhettaṃ, sabbanimittānaṃ anto ṭhite bhikkhū hatthapāsagate katvā sammannitabbā. Nānāgāmakhettaṃ ce, anāgamanampi vaṭṭati. Ubhayatīre nimittakittanamattena dīpako saṅgahito na hoti, tasmā dīpake nimittāni kittetabbāneva. ‘‘Nadiyā heṭṭhā nisinnabhikkhu kammaṃ kopeti. Upariyeva hi nadī hotī’’ti vadanti.
伍波萨他堂等注释巴利
Uposathāgārādikathāvaṇṇanā
141 141. 从“僧团若希望,或精舍……或石窟”这句话来看,界不仅被允许在地面上,也被允许在精舍等的上方,因为伍波萨他甘马才是关键,这一点已经成立。如果问:怎么知道界是以伍波萨他为关键的呢?因为正是以伍波萨他为理由才开许的:在甘马中,只说“共住”就已经够了,却又另外说了“同一伍波萨他”。有记载说:“除了伍波萨他以外,其余的甘马叫共住。”“除去一个后”是圣典的原文。巴利
141. ‘‘Yaṃ saṅgho ākaṅkhati vihāraṃ vā…pe… guhaṃ vā’’ti vacanato na kevalaṃ pathaviyaṃyeva, vihārādīnaṃ uparipi sīmā anuññātā hoti uposathakammapadhānattāti siddhaṃ. Tappadhānā sīmāti kathaṃ paññāyatīti ce? Tadadhikārānuññātattā, sammutiyaṃ ‘‘samānasaṃvāsā’’ti ettāvatā siddhe visuṃ ‘‘ekūposathā’’ti vacanato ca. ‘‘Uposathaṃ ṭhapetvā sesakammāni samānasaṃvāsā nāmā’’ti likhitaṃ. ‘‘Ekaṃ samūhanitvā’’ti pāḷipāṭho.
142 “已安居者”这句话,是针对同一界内和合的情况而说的。如果不是这样,那么在不同界中安住的人,以能听见为准则;即使在同一界内,但站在伸手可及的范围之外的人,也以能听见为准则,这样就会得出不合理的结论。这里的“已甘马或未甘马”,是指伍波萨他堂的甘马,不是指界的甘马。怎么知道呢?从上下文主题、从后面的授欲规定以及授清净规定就能知道。其中,前一个理由能遮止前一种不合理的结论,后一个理由能遮止后一种,应当这样理解。“伍波萨他口”是指伍波萨他的场所。有记载说:“‘伍波萨他口’是指伍波萨他堂的场所。”任何界标都可以提及,这又是怎么知道的呢?因为只说到“首先应提及界标,提及界标后”这些内容。如果问:既然前面已经说过,这里就不再说了吗?那不是理由,因为在佛陀的教说中不存在懈怠。有些人认为:在取消界的时候,必须先取消伍波萨他堂,然后才能成功取消界。这种说法不合理,因为未结界的伍波萨他堂甘马是成立的,这不是论师的推论。“伍波萨他口”是指伍波萨他堂的入口,这是诸论师所说。关于伍波萨他口的界标提及,应按照界中所说的方法来做。有些人认为:即使一个人也可以提及。他们说:“无论是殿堂,还是凉亭等中的任何一种,但在甘马语中,必须说‘伍波萨他口’。”有记载说:“古旧住所就是根本住所。”所谓“仅如瓶量”,这就是它的特征。巴利
142.Katovassāti ekasīmāya samagge sandhāya vuttaṃ. Aññathā nānāsīmāyaṃ ṭhitānaṃ savanaṃ pamāṇaṃ, ekasīmāyapi hatthapāsaṃ muñcitvā ṭhitānaṃ vā savanameva pamāṇanti aniṭṭhaṃ āpajjati. Tattha sammatāya vā asammatāya vāti uposathāgārasammutiyā, na sīmāsammutiyā. Kathaṃ paññāyatīti? Adhikārato, parato chandadānapaññattito, pārisuddhidānapaññattito ca. Tattha purimaṃ kāraṇaṃ purimaṃ aniṭṭhaṃ nivāreti, pacchimaṃ pacchimanti veditabbaṃ. Uposathamukhanti uposathaṭṭhānaṃ. ‘‘Uposathamukhassāti uposathāgāraṭṭhānassā’’ti likhitaṃ. Yāni kānici nimittāni kittetuṃ vaṭṭetīti idaṃ kathaṃ paññāyatīti? ‘‘Paṭhamaṃ nimittā kittetabbā nimitte kittetvā’’ti ettakameva vuttattā. Paṭhamaṃ vuttattā na vuccantīti ce? Taṃ pana akāraṇaṃ, na hi buddhānaṃ desanāya ālasiyaṃ atthi. Sīmāsamūhananakāle uposathāgāraṃ samūhanitvāva sīmāsamūhananaṃ ijjhatīti eke. Taṃ ayuttaṃ abaddhāya sīmāya uposathāgārasammutisiddhitoti no takkoti ācariyo. Uposathamukhanti uposathāgārassa mukhanti ācariyā. Uposathamukhassa nimittakittanā sīmāya vuttanayena kātabbā. Ekenāpi kittetuṃ vaṭṭatīti eke. ‘‘Pāsādo vā hotu, maṇḍapādīsu vā aññataro. Kammavācāya pana ‘uposathamukha’micceva vattabba’’nti vadanti. ‘‘Porāṇako āvāso nāma mūlāvāso’’ti likhitaṃ. Vadati ghaṭamattā iti hi lakkhaṇaṃ.
不离界的许可注释巴利
Avippavāsasīmānujānanakathāvaṇṇanā
143-4 “Manamhi vūḷho”是另一种读法。其中,“manamhi vūḷho”的意思是“我被慢心所载”。除去村和村近郊,就是除去被称为内宅的村以及村近郊。有些人说:“‘村’指的是有围墙的村,‘村近郊’指的是没有围墙的。”但这与注释书相矛盾。所以,“村”是就住宅、街道等而言,“村近郊”是就适合围栅的地方而言。不过,这里有好几种读法。这该怎么办呢?应当仔细审查圣典和注释书,按照它们彼此相符的方式来采纳。比丘们的前甘马语无效,这是指在共住界已经包含村和村近郊而结定的情况下,再在其上作不离界决意时,才说得通。但如果只是纯林野被决意,那里为什么无效呢?难道“除去村和村近郊”这句话在那里就没有意义了吗?回答说:确实如此,但因为会导致漏失宣告的过失,所以那句话还是必须说的。正是基于这个意趣,才说“前甘马语无效”。或者,从某种意义上说,两种甘马语不能并存。如果因为“他们彼此不成为对方甘马中的满数者”而这样说,那么两个别住僧团是否也适用这一规则呢?不适用,因为已允许接受和储存,也因为辱骂等缘没有差别,还因为只期待甘马的舍置。Tassā一词指比丘尼僧团。“不令甘马语成别众”,意思是不扰乱甘马。“此处”指“除去村”这个地方。“如果比丘的不离衣界本来就不涉及村和村近郊,那为什么在村中结界时,却宣告不离衣界呢?”对此写道:“这是依照惯例,并不是另有所图。”又说:“从义理上说,这个不离衣界即使在外面,也仍然是未结之界。”有人说:“因为内含村而结的共住界不算入村数,所以说如此。”而那个共住界也只是算入界数,意思就是算入不离衣界之数。这里应当审察:把村包含在内而结的界,是应该站在林野处宣说不离衣界的甘马语,还是应该站在村中宣说呢?即使站在村中作,其效力也遍及如法之地。若说因为站在界外而结的弊病随顺,所以不应站在非如法之地而作——这不是我的推论,这个道理在“合并”甘马中也是一样,阿阇梨是这样说的。站在片界中作不离衣界等甘马语的地方,据说大界才称为“不离衣界”。巴利
143-4. ‘‘Manamhi vūḷho’’ti vā pāṭho. Tattha manamhi vūḷhoti manaṃ vūḷho amhīti attho. Ṭhapetvā gāmañca gāmūpacārañcāti antaragharasaṅkhātaṃ gāmañca gāmūpacārañca ṭhapetvā. Keci ‘‘parikkhittaṃ gāmaṃ sandhāya ‘gāma’nti vuttaṃ, aparikkhittaṃ sandhāya ‘gāmūpacāra’’nti vadanti, taṃ pana aṭṭhakathāya virujjhati. Tasmā nivesanaracchādayo sandhāya gāmaṃ, parikkhepārahaṭṭhānāni sandhāya ‘‘gāmūpacāra’’nti ca vuttaṃ. Ettha pana anekadhā paṭhanti. Kiṃ tena, pāḷiñca aṭṭhakathañca suṭṭhu upaparikkhitvā yathā samenti, tathā gahetabbaṃ. Bhikkhūnaṃ purimakammavācā na vaṭṭatīti gāmagāmūpacāre antokatvā samānasaṃvāsakasīmāya sammatāya upari avippavāsasīmāsammutiyaṃ yujjati. Yattha pana kevalaṃ araññaṃyeva sammataṃ, tattha kathaṃ na vaṭṭatīti. Tattha ‘‘ṭhapetvā gāmañca gāmūpacārañcā’’ti vacanaṃ na sātthakanti ce? Vuccate – evametaṃ, kintu anussāvanahānippasaṅgato taṃ vacanaṃ vattabbamevāti imināva adhippāyena ‘‘purimakammavācā na vaṭṭatī’’ti vuttaṃ siyā. Ekasmiṃ vā atthe kammavācādvayaābhāvatoti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Na hi te aññamaññassa kamme gaṇapūrakā hontī’’ti vuttattā ubhinnaṃ nānāsaṃvāsakasaṅghānampi ayameva vidhi āpajjeyyāti ce? Nāpajjati paṭiggahasannidhīnaṃ anuññātattā, omasanādipaccayā avisesato, kammapaṭippassaddhimattāpekkhatāya ca. Tassāti bhikkhunisaṅghassa. Na kammavācaṃ vaggaṃ karontīti kammaṃ na kopentīti attho. Etthāti ṭhapetvā gāmanti ettha. ‘‘Yadi bhikkhūnaṃ avippavāsasīmā gāmañca gāmūpacārañca na otarati, atha kasmā gāme sīmābandhanakāle avippavāsaṃ sammannantīti ce? Āciṇṇakappena, na tato aññaṃ kañci atthaṃ apekkhitvā’’ti likhitaṃ. ‘‘Atthato hi sā bahiddhāpi abaddhā eva hotī’’ti vuttaṃ. Antaragāme baddhā samānasaṃvāsasīmā yasmā gāmasaṅkhyaṃ na gacchati, tasmāti eke. Sopi sīmāsaṅkhyameva gacchatīti avippavāsasīmāsaṅkhyaṃ gacchatīti attho. Idaṃ panettha vicāretabbaṃ – gāmaṃ antokatvā baddhāya sīmāya puna avippavāsasammutiyaṃ araññapadese ṭhatvā avippavāsakammavācā kātabbā, udāhu gāme ṭhatvāti? Gāme ṭhatvā katāyapi kappiyabhūmiyā pharatīti. Bahisīme ṭhitasammatadosānulomattā akappiyabhūmiyaṃ ṭhatvā na kātabbāti no takko, esa nayo samūhananepīti ācariyo. Khaṇḍasīmāyaṃ ṭhatvā avippavāsasīmātiādīsu mahāsīmā kira ‘‘avippavāsasīmā’’ti vuttā.
146 如果尊者认可废除这一共同居住、同一伍波萨他之界,就请保持沉默。这一读法见于安达卡写本和某些锡兰本。有些本子把“samugghāto etissā sīmāyā”写在前面,有些则写成“etissā sīmāya samugghāto”。巴利
146. ‘‘Yassāyasmato khamati etissā sīmāya samānasaṃvāsāya ekūposathāya samugghāto, so tuṇhassā’’ti andhakapotthake, sīhaḷapotthakesu ca kesuci pāṭho atthi. Kesuci ‘‘samugghāto etissā sīmāyā’’ti paṭhamaṃ likhanti, kesuci ‘‘etissā sīmāya samugghāto’’ti ca.
村界等论的注释巴利
Gāmasīmādikathāvaṇṇanā
147 关于“它以及另一种”,这里指的是通过划定而给出的村落界,以及另一种界。如果有人问:那是哪一种呢?回答就说“自然村落”等等。它们就像已结的界一样,意思是:那一种是界,另一种也是界。正因为这样,才用单数说“获得三衣不离的豁免”。有人认为这不合理,因为两者都是村落。也有人说:“它们是,不获得”应该用复数来表达。对于所说的“它以及另一种”,有人解释说:“在中间划分后给出的村落界和自然村落等,是不分开的。”有人读作“比丘居住”,也写作“他们居住”。由于文中说“从他站立的处所”,所以用单数才合适。诸比丘,一切河都不是界,这是在否定哪一种界呢?老师们说:是否定已结的界,因为会落入十一种失坏界中的某一种。如果先结了界,后来才出现河等,那就会有否定的过失,所以它否定的只是未结的界。就像一切村落都是村落界一样,一切河都不是界。然而,老师说:这是为了显示界的差别,也就是说,对每个比丘来说,水掷所及的范围就是界,这种说法不合正理。而“从中等身材男子周围水掷所及的范围”这句话,是为了说明在一条河里,四众等僧团各自分别进行四众应作等甘马时,界限是怎样的。老师们说:这也是为了显示三衣离与不离的界限,就像显示七肘间界一样。因此,即使没有水掷所及的界限,在河内做甘马也是可以的,这个道理就成立了。巴利
147.Sācāti sā paricchinditvā dinnagāmasīmā ca itarā ca. Sā katamāti ce? ‘‘Pakatigāmā’’tiādimāha. Baddhasīmāsadisāyeva hontīti sā ca hoti itarā ca hotīti adhippāyo, tasmāyeva ‘‘ticīvaravippavāsaparihāraṃ labhatī’’ti ekavacanaṃ kataṃ, taṃ na yuttaṃ ubhinnampi gāmattāti eke. ‘‘Honti, na labhantī’’ti ca bahuvacanampi karontīti. ‘‘Sā ca itarā cā’’ti vuttā ‘‘majjhe bhinditvā dinnagāmasīmā pakatigāmādayo abhinnā’’ti ca vadanti. ‘‘Bhikkhuvasatī’’ti pāṭho, ‘‘vasantī’’ti ca likhitaṃ. ‘‘Athassa ṭhitokāsato’’ti vuttattā ekavacanameva yuttaṃ. Sabbā, bhikkhave, nadī asīmāti kataraṃ sīmaṃ paṭikkhipati? Baddhasīmaṃ, ekādasavipattisīmaññatarappasaṅgatoti ācariyā. Sace paṭhamaṃ sīmāya baddhāya pacchā nadiādayo honti, paṭikkhepoti pasaṅgo āpajjati, tasmā abaddhasīmameva paṭikkhipati. Yathā sabbo gāmo gāmasīmā, tathā sabbā nadī asīmā. Kintu tassa tassa bhikkhuno udakukkhepasīmāti sīmānānattaṃ dassetīti no takkoti ācariyo. Yaṃ majjhimassa purisassa samantā udakukkhepāti pana ekissā nadiyā catuvaggādīnaṃ saṅghānaṃ visuṃ catuvaggakaraṇīyādikammakaraṇakāle sīmāparicchedadassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Ticīvarena vippavāsāvippavāsaparicchedadassanatthampi sattabbhantarasīmāya paricchedadassanaṃ viyāti ācariyā, tasmā udakukkhepaparicchedābhāvepi antonadiyaṃ kammaṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭatīti siddhaṃ.
这里还有一个差别:如果是在船上,就按船上所说的方式;如果是在商队中,就按商队所说的方式。如果他住超过四个月,就应当按村落中所说的方式,理解为三衣不离。这里也有这个差别:如果商队在水掷范围内,有些人说以水掷界为量;老师们则说以商队本身为量。还有,在“若有众多比丘”等处,因为想表达有的行决意伍波萨他、有的行众伍波萨他、有的行僧伍波萨他,所以不说“众多僧团”而说“比丘们”。至于“不足则不行”,伍巴提萨长老说,这是因为可能出现界混杂。因为正在安置时,不足的不应安置。也有说“不安置也可以”。至于“在行进中”,则写道“不超出水掷范围而回转时,可以作”。至于“其他界的通知”等,是因为害怕从界产生甘马失败而说,还是因为害怕从众产生?因为同一甘马不可能在不同界中完成,所以是从界来说。也有人认为,因为同一甘马不可能由处在不同界的僧团完成,所以是从众来说。但这种想法不对,因为会落入“漏失听闻”所说的过失。老师说:因为在一个界中,不完成一个甘马,就是漏失。巴利
Ayaṃ pana viseso – tattha nāvāgato ce, nāvāyaṃ vuttanayena. Satthagato ce, satthe vuttanayena. So ce atirekacātumāsaniviṭṭho, gāme vuttanayena ticīvarāvippavāso veditabbo. Tatthāpi ayaṃ viseso – sace sattho udakukkhepassa anto hoti, udakukkhepasīmāpamāṇanti eke. Satthova pamāṇanti ācariyā. Sace panettha bahū bhikkhūtiādimhi keci adhiṭṭhānuposathaṃ, keci gaṇuposathaṃ, keci saṅghuposathanti vattukāmatāya ‘‘bahū saṅghā’’ti avatvā ‘‘bhikkhū’’ti vuttaṃ. Ūnakaṃ pana na vaṭṭatīti ettha sīmāsambhedasambhavatoti upatissatthero. Ṭhapente hi ūnakaṃ na ṭhapetabbaṃ. ‘‘Aṭhapetumpi vaṭṭati evā’’ti vuttaṃ. Gacchantiyā panāti ettha ‘‘udakukkhepamanatikkamitvā parivattamānāya kātuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti likhitaṃ. Aññissā sīmāya ñattītiādi kiṃ sīmato kammavipattibhayā vuttaṃ , udāhu parisatoti? Ekakammassa nānāsīmāya asambhavato sīmatoti. Ekakammassa nānāsīmaṭṭhasaṅghena asambhavato parisatotipi eke. ‘‘Savanaṃ hāpetī’’ti vuttadosappasaṅgatoti no takko. Ekissā hi sīmāya ekaṃ kammaṃ aniṭṭhapento hāpetīti ācariyo.
在外岸所生的树,其树枝伸入河中的情况,以及在河岸打桩的情况,还有在桥或桥墩等立于外岸的情况,这里所说的“净界”,就是把村界范围内的伸手所及之处纳入。在片界中,可以把树与片界分开来作。为什么?因为系在岸上树边的船,是以村为依托的。书中写道:“触及两岸村界而立的桥,可以与触及片界和大界而立的树相比拟。”在这里,先要这样审察:在那种地方所作的业,是算作在河中所作,还是算作在村界中所作,还是算作在两处所作?如果算作在河中所作,那就只应净水掷界,不应净另一界。如果算作在村界中所作,那就不应净水掷界。如果算作在两处所作,就会导致“在两个界中可以作同一个业”这种不想要的结果。那么,是否也会导致“在另一界作公告,在另一界作随说”以及“以片界和大界之处的身和合而作业”这些不想要的结果呢?对此回答说:如上所说的业,可以算作在两处所作,但不会导致如上所说的不想要的结果。为什么?诸师说:“因为公告和随说各自在每一个界中生起,或者因为作务的比丘们各自站在每一个界中。”然而,仅仅因为能够站在两处,这并不是正确的理由。真正的理由是:这个业是在处于合一状态的界处所作的,这是不变的理由。因为当两个河村界处于合一状态时,是可以作业的。如果在七家内界中有河、海或天然湖泊,那么站在其中的比丘,不算作站在七家内界之内。如果那里有尚未达到河等特征的小岛、石块或树木,就算作七家内界之内。如果那里是人们往来的地方,就算作村田。是什么村田?人们从那里往来,如果所有人都往来,就各别算作村田——诸位阿阇梨这样说。巴利
Bahinaditīre jātarukkhassa antonadiyaṃ paviṭṭhasākhāya vāti ettha ca naditīre khāṇukaṃ koṭṭetvāti ettha ca sace pana setu vā setupādā vā bahitīre patiṭṭhitāti ettha ca sīmāsodhanaṃ nāma gāmasīmaṭṭhe hatthapāsānayanaṃ. Khaṇḍasīmāya uṭṭhitarukkhato viyojetvā kātuṃ vaṭṭati. Kasmā? Tīraṭṭhe rukkhe baddhanāvāya gāmo ādhāroti. ‘‘Ubhatobhāgena gāmasīmaṃ phusitvā ṭhitasetu khaṇḍasīmāmahāsīmāyo phusitvā ṭhitarukkhena upametabbo’’ti ca likhitaṃ. Tattha purimanaye tāva idaṃ vicāretabbaṃ – tādise ṭhāne katakammaṃ kiṃ nadiyaṃ katasaṅkhyaṃ gacchati, udāhu gāmasīmāyaṃ, atha ubhayatthāti? Kiñcettha taṃ ce nadiyaṃ katasaṅkhyaṃ gacchati, udakukkhepasīmāva sodhetabbā, na itarā. Atha gāmasīmāyaṃ katasaṅkhyaṃ gacchati, udakukkhepasīmā na sodhetabbā. Yadi ubhayattha katasaṅkhyaṃ gacchati, dvīsu sīmāsu ekakammaṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭatīti aniṭṭhappasaṅgo āpajjati. Tato ‘‘aññissā sīmāya ñatti, aññissā anussāvanā hotī’’ti idañca ‘‘khaṇḍasīmāmahāsīmaṭṭhānaṃ kāyasāmaggiyā kammaṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti idañcāniṭṭhaṃ āpajjatīti? Ettha vuccate – yathāvuttaṃ kammaṃ ubhayattha katasaṅkhyaṃ gacchati, na ca yathāvuttaṃ aniṭṭhaṃ āpajjati. Kasmā? ‘‘Ñattianussāvanānaṃ ekekasīmāyaṃ pavattattā, kārakabhikkhūnaṃ vā ekekasīmāyaṃ ṭhitattā’’ti vadanti. Ubhayatthāpi ṭhātuṃ sakkuṇeyyatāya pana taṃ akāraṇaṃ. Ekībhāvaṃ upagatasīmaṭṭhāne katattāti idaṃ acalakāraṇaṃ. Ekībhāvaṃ upagatāsu hi dvīsu nadīgāmasīmāsu kammaṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭatīti ca. Sattabbhantarasīmāyaṃ ce nadī hoti, samuddo vā, jātassaro vā. Tesu ṭhitabhikkhu sattabbhantarasīmāyaṃ ṭhitasaṅkhyaṃ na gacchati. Tattha ce nadiādilakkhaṇaṃ appatto dīpako, pāsāṇo, rukkho vā hoti, sattabbhantarasaṅkhyaṃ gacchati. Manussehi vaḷañjanaṭṭhānaṃ ce taṃ hoti, gāmakhettasaṅkhyaṃ gacchati. Kataragāmakhettaṃ? Yato manussā sañcaranti, sabbe ce sañcaranti, visuṃ gāmakhettasaṅkhyaṃ gacchatīti ca ācariyā.
按后一种说法,如果桥没有碰到河的特征位置就停在那里,那就算进入村界。假如那里只有一个村,就净化那个村;如果两岸各有两个村,就要净化两个村之后再作甘马。这样作,就等于在两处都作了。按这个道理,对于两条河以及天然池沼,也应当知道一次甘马就能成就。这个道理对于小界和大界也同样适用。如果桥碰到了河的特征位置就停在那里,那么水掷界也应当净化。巴利
Pacchimanaye sace setu nadīlakkhaṇaṭṭhānaṃ aphusitvā ṭhito, gāmasīmāsaṅkhyaṃ gacchati. Tattha eko ce gāmo, taṃ sodhetvā, dvīsu tīresu sace dve, dvepi gāme sodhetvā kammaṃ kātabbaṃ. Evañhi kataṃ ubhayatra kataṃ hoti. Iminā nayena dvīsu nadīsu, jātassaresu ca ekakammapasiddhi veditabbā. Ayaṃ pana nayo khaṇḍasīmāmahāsīmānampi labbhateva. Sace setu nadīlakkhaṇaṭṭhānaṃ phusitvā ṭhito, udakukkhepasīmāpi sodhetabbā.
唯界同一性,无离居空者;
知此一甘马,依界如是说。
一界区、二界区,或三界区、四界区;
于彼应为一甘马,否则僧众生忿。巴利
Sīmānameva cekattaṃ, vehāsaṭṭhaṃ vinā gato; Viditvā ekakammassa, sīmato idamādise. Ekasīmaṃ dvisīmaṃ vā, tisīmaṃ catusīmakaṃ; Ekakammaṃ siyā tassa, kopo parisato siyāti.
这里有一个差别:在河里做的时候,从掷水处以外,凡与树木等相连的范围,都是无界限的。在村里做的时候,若比丘站在与河相连之树的掷水处以外,便是无界限的;从那以内,则是有界限的。在已结界的范围内,若比丘站在与已结界相连之树的已结界以内,便是有界限的,应当这样理解。因此才说“应清净界之后再作甘马”。至于“如果桥或桥墩等立在外岸,则不可作甘马”这句话,就像气根等一样,只应作整个界的清净,这一点应当审察。在“于大雨时”等句中,这里的“大雨”应理解为像四个月下雨那样,所以如果四个月一直下大雨,那么一切被洪水淹没的地方就都成了河。如果一次大雨的洪水持续四个月,或者不断流淌,那么立在外岸而被洪水淹没的地方,一切也都是河。从淹没而流淌的地方开始,无论是那条河、别的河,还是先前没有河的地方,只要依它自身的流动而具备了河的特征,从淹没而流淌的地方开始就可以。所谓“淹没村界、邑界”,是就持续四个月而说的。有记载说“在不可行之道,即当天不能往返的地方”。但《安达卡注》中所说的,不应采纳。为什么呢?因为对河也有同样的过失。在“葫芦等”中,“等”字也包含莲花、青莲等。这一切都是未生池,只算入村界。其意思是:如果是造池者所造的,就算入村界;如果是周围岸上的村庄所造的,就算入一切村;如果是与其他村的田地无关的地方,就算入各自的村界。巴利
Ayaṃ panettha viseso – nadiyaṃ karontānaṃ udakukkhepato bahi rukkhādisambandho appamāṇaṃ. Gāme karontānaṃ nadiyaṃ sambandharukkhassa udakukkhepato bahi ṭhitabhikkhu appamāṇaṃ, tato oraṃ pamāṇaṃ. Baddhasīmāya sambandharukkhassa baddhasīmāya ṭhitabhikkhu pamāṇanti veditabbaṃ, teneva vuttaṃ ‘‘sīmaṃ sodhetvā kammaṃ kātabba’’nti. ‘‘Sace pana setu vā setupādā vā bahitīre patiṭṭhitā kammaṃ kātuṃ na vaṭṭatī’’ti vacanampi pārohādīsu viya sakalasīmāsodhanameva kātabbanti sādheti, vīmaṃsitabbaṃ. Ativuṭṭhikāle panāti ettha ativuṭṭhi nāma yathā cātumāsikāyāti veditabbā, tasmā catumāsaṃ ativuṭṭhiyeva sace hoti, sabbopi oghena otthaṭokāso nadī eva. Atha ekissāpi ativuṭṭhiyā ogho catumāsaṃ tiṭṭhati, sandati vā, bahitīre patiṭṭhitaoghena otthaṭokāso sabbopi nadī eva. Nadiṃ ottharitvā sandanaṭṭhānato paṭṭhāyāti tameva vā nadiṃ aññaṃ vā apubbaṃ vā padesaṃ attano pavattavasena nadilakkhaṇappattaṃ ottharitvā sandanaṭṭhānato paṭṭhāya vaṭṭati. Gāmanigamasīmaṃ ottharitvāti catumāsappavattiṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. ‘‘Agamanapatheti tadahu gatapaccāgataṃ kātuṃ asakkuṇeyyake’’ti likhitaṃ. Yaṃ pana andhakaṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttaṃ, taṃ na gahetabbaṃ. Kasmā? Nadiyampi taṃdosappasaṅgato. Tipusakādīti ettha ādi-saddena kamaluppalādīnipi saṅgahaṃ gacchanti . Sabbopi ajātassaro hoti, gāmasīmāsaṅkhyameva gacchatīti yehi kataṃ, tesaṃ gāmasīmāsaṅkhyaṃ vā, samantato tīraṭṭhagāmehi ce kataṃ, sabbagāmasaṅkhyaṃ vā, aññehi gāmakhettehi asambandhaṭṭhānaṃ ce, visuṃgāmasīmāsaṅkhyaṃ vā gacchatīti attho.
148 “枝蔓交错”这个词,是用来说明彼此靠近;因此,这里说的是界与界之间发生重叠。可是,当这个界扩展时,就会造成界与界混杂。由于把已结界的地方也包含进去,所以应当说这是“部分重叠的界”,于是就有了混杂的过失。“诸比丘,不应以界重叠界”——在这里,有些人这样解释其中的用意:“对于先结的界,后来自己所要结的界不应与它重叠。”因为先已认可的界中并没有重叠,所以这个用意要通过“覆盖”才讲得通;因此,后来要结的界不应重叠先结的界。如果结界时不先在先结之界的边界中间留出界中间区,而是把界相全部或部分包含在内,这就叫“重叠”;把别人已结之界的全部或部分界相包含在内,这就叫“覆盖”。所以世尊才说“结界的人应当留出界中间区”等等。这句话的意思是:先把先结之界的界中间区作为后结之界的界相留出来,然后再结界。这两种过失,在比丘界和比丘尼界之间不会互相发生。至于“它扩展时会造成界与界混杂”这句话,这里只是说造成界与界混杂而已。有些人说“在那里所作的甘马不坏”,那是不合理的,因为已经说过要砍掉树枝、气根以及清净界等。这一切都应当好好思择,亲近大寺善知识之后,该采纳的就采纳,该舍弃的就舍弃。巴利
148.Saṃsaṭṭhaviṭapāti iminā āsannattaṃ dīpeti, tena padesasambhindanā idha sambhedoti dīpeti. So pana vaḍḍhanto sīmāsaṅkaraṃ karotīti baddhasīmaṭṭhānappavesanavasena ‘‘ekadesabaddhasīmā’’ti vattabbato saṅkaradoso hoti. Na, bhikkhave, sīmāya sīmā sambhinditabbāti ettha ‘‘paṭhamaṃ baddhasīmāya pacchā attanā bandhitabbasīmā na sambhinditabbā’’ti eke adhippāyaṃ saṃvaṇṇayanti. Paṭhamaṃ sammatasīmāyaṃ sambhedābhāvato svādhippāyo ajjhottharaṇena yujjati, tasmā pacchā bandhitabbasīmāya paṭhamaṃ baddhasīmā na sambhinditabbā. Sakalaṃ vā ekadesato vā nimittānaṃ antokaraṇena paṭhamaṃ baddhasīmāya sīmantarike akittetvā sammannanato hi sambhindati nāma, paresaṃ baddhasīmaṃ sakalaṃ vā ekadesato vā nimittānaṃ antokaraṇena ajjhottharati nāma, tenevāha ‘‘sīmaṃ sammannantena sīmantarikaṃ ṭhapetvā’’tiādi. Tassattho – paṭhamaṃ baddhasīmāya sīmantarikaṃ pacchā bandhitabbasīmāya nimittabhūtaṃ ṭhapetvā pacchā sīmaṃ sammannitunti. Imā dvepi vipattiyo bhikkhubhikkhunīsīmānaṃ aññamaññaṃ na sambhavanti. So pana vaḍḍhanto sīmāsaṅkaraṃ karotīti ettha kevalaṃ sīmāsaṅkarameva karoti. Tasmiṃ katakammāni na kuppantīti keci, taṃ nayuttaṃ sākhāpārohachedanasīmāsodhanānaṃ vuttattā. Idaṃ sabbaṃ suṭṭhu vicāretvā garukule payirupāsitvā gahetabbayuttakaṃ gahetabbaṃ, itaraṃ chaḍḍetabbaṃ.
关于伍波萨他分类等问题的注释巴利
Uposathabhedādikathāvaṇṇanā
149 比丘们,有这两种伍波萨他。这句话是因为当时还没有允许和合伍波萨他而说的。在和合伍波萨他的前行阶段,应当说今天是和合伍波萨他,但世尊并没有说明用甘马语来进行,论师们依据巴利文本所示的次第,指出了应当念诵的步骤。同样,五种巴帝摩卡念诵的次第也应当知道是这样成立的。三人或两人念诵巴帝摩卡,这就叫作非法和合——在这里,僧团虽然名义上是和合的,但从不和合之说的角度,按照实际做法判定为和合。尽管如此,以与不和合相对立而言,称为和合;以与和合相对立而言,则称为不和合。或者,从别众甘马等的产生来说,以及从和合与不和合状态的出现来说,才这样说,应当如此理解。如法别众——在这里,令清净是如法的,只是僧团的意欲到来,而不是别众的,所以叫作别众。他们说:做一次就是善作,但会犯罪,不能再做。他们说:从五个人中取一个人的意欲之后,四个人可以念诵巴帝摩卡。这是合理的,因为当持欲的比丘到达僧团面前时,僧团就能运作,所以说意欲已经到达僧团。巴利
149. ‘‘Dveme , bhikkhave, uposathā’’ti tadā sāmaggīuposathassa ananuññātattā vuttaṃ. Sāmaggīuposathassa pubbakicce ‘‘ajjuposatho sāmaggī’’ti vattabbaṃ, na ca kammavācāya bhagavatā payogo dassito, pāḷinayato aṭṭhakathācariyehi uddisitabbakkamo dassito. Tathā pañcannaṃ pātimokkhuddesānaṃ uddesakkamo siddhoti veditabbaṃ. Tayo vā dve vā pātimokkhaṃ uddisanti, adhammena samaggaṃ nāma hotīti ettha kāmaṃ saṅghassa sāmaggī nāma hoti vaggakathāya yathākammaṃ sāmaggīvavatthānato. Tathāpi vaggapaṭipakkhabhāvena samaggaṃ, samaggapaṭipakkhabhāvena ca vaggaṃ nāma kataṃ. Āveṇikato vā gaṇakammādisambhavato, tassa ca samaggavaggabhāvasambhavato vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Dhammena vagganti ettha pārisuddhikaraṇaṃ dhammikaṃ, saṅghasseva chandāgamanaṃ, na gaṇassāti katvā vaggaṃ nāma hoti. ‘‘Ekavāraṃ kataṃ sukataṃ, āpattiṃ pana āpajjati, puna kātuṃ na labhantī’’ti vadanti. ‘‘Pañcasu ekassa chandaṃ āharitvā catūhi pātimokkhaṃ uddisituṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti vadanti, taṃ yuttaṃ, chandahārake bhikkhūnaṃ santikaṃ patte tena saṅgho pahoti, tasmā chando saṅghappatto hotīti katvā vuttaṃ.
巴帝摩卡念诵事的注释巴利
Pātimokkhuddesakathāvaṇṇanā
150 在《论母注》(疑网注·因缘解释)里,因为这样说过:“‘诸尊者,请僧团听我……中略……如果已经公开说明,他就安乐。诸尊者,我在这里问……中略……所以请默然。我这样受持。’说完之后,又以‘诸尊者,因缘已诵出’等语句,把其余已经听到、已经宣告的内容作为诵出。”所以在“我这样受持,诸尊者已经听过”这里,说了“我受持”之后,“诸尊者,因缘已诵出”这句话应当理解为省略的说法,正是因此才按小诵段的略语形式写下来。同样,在《论母注》中“如果已经公开说明,他就安乐,诸尊者,在这里”这个地方,也有人认为“诸尊者,因缘已诵出”这句话应当理解为省略的说法。有些人说:“说了‘应当在不争论中学习’时,因缘的诵出就算完毕,所以不公开说明的人就犯恶作。”这种说法不合理。为什么?因为以“诵出因缘之后”这句结束语,就已经说明了因缘的完毕,而且在因缘结束时也说到了恶作。书中写道:“所谓Sarabhañña,就是用声音宣说。”决意诵习,就是生起“我要诵习”的心。他们说:“只要说了‘我禀白’,就可以宣说。”这适用于默然的时候。他们说:“如果被利养等压制而阻止,那不能作为标准。”说明这同一个道理:如果正在宣说时中断,就应当再次禀白。巴利
150.Mātikāṭṭhakathāyaṃ (kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. nidānavaṇṇanā) ‘‘suṇātu me, bhante, saṅgho…pe… āvikatā hissa phāsu hoti, tatthāyasmante pucchāmi…pe… tasmā tuṇhī. Evametaṃ dhārayāmī’ti vatvā ‘uddiṭṭhaṃ kho āyasmanto nidāna’ntiādinā nayena avasese sutena sāvite uddiṭṭho hotī’’ti vuttattā ‘‘evametaṃ dhārayāmīti sutā kho panāyasmantehī’’ti ettha ‘‘dhārayāmī’’ti vatvā ‘‘uddiṭṭhaṃ kho āyasmanto nidāna’’nti vacanaṃ saṃkhittanti gahetabbaṃ, teneva khuddakapeyyālavasena likhitaṃ. Evaṃ mātikāṭṭhakathāyampi ‘‘āvikatā hissa phāsu hoti, tatthāyasmante’’ti etthāpi ‘‘uddiṭṭhaṃ kho āyasmanto nidāna’’nti vacanaṃ saṃkhittanti gahetabbanti eke. Keci ‘‘avivadamānehi sikkhitabba’nti vutte nidānuddeso niṭṭhito nāma hoti, tasmā anāvikaronto āpattiṃ āpajjatī’’ti vadanti, taṃ na yuttaṃ. Kasmā? ‘‘Nidānaṃ uddisitvā’’ti niṭṭhānavacanena hi nidānassa niṭṭhitabhāvo vutto, nidānāvasāne ca āpatti vuttāti. ‘‘Sarabhaññaṃ nāma sarena bhaṇana’’nti likhitaṃ. Sajjhāyaṃ adhiṭṭhahitvāti ‘‘sajjhāyaṃ karomī’’ti cittaṃ uppādetvā. ‘‘Āpucchāmīti vuttamattena kathetuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti vadanti. Taṃ tuṇhībhāve yujjati. ‘‘Athāpi lābhādinā abhibhūto vāreti, taṃ na pamāṇa’’nti vadanti. Eseva nayoti kathento yadi vicchindati, puna āpucchitabbanti.
关于呵责非法甘马等内容的注释巴利
Adhammakammapaṭikkosanādikathāvaṇṇanā
154 “为了不让他们受到伤害”,僧团不对僧团作甘马;而且还会给许多人带来其他伤害,因此这样说。巴利
154.‘‘Tesaṃanupaddavatthāyā’’ti saṅgho saṅghassa kammaṃ na karoti, aññopi upaddavo bahūnaṃ hoti, tasmā vuttaṃ.
波利提木叉诵者应请等事的注释巴利
Pātimokkhuddesakaajjhesanādikathāvaṇṇanā
155 先说“以长老为上首的巴帝摩卡”,后来又不加区分地说“其中若有聪明能干的人,就应交给他”,由此可见,“尊者”这个称呼也适用于长老,这一点可以成立。又从“去吧,贤友,略说或广说吧”这句话来看,即使没有障碍,也以体力为标准,这一点也可以成立。巴利
155. ‘‘Therādhikaṃ pātimokkha’’nti vatvāpi pacchā avisesena ‘‘yo tattha byatto paṭibalo, tassādheyya’’nti vuttattā ‘‘bhante’’ti vacanaṃ therassāpi atthīti siddhaṃ hoti. ‘‘Gacchāvuso saṃkhittena vā vitthārena vā’’ti vacanato asatipi antarāye thāmaṃ pamāṇanti siddhaṃ hoti.
关于远行等事例的注释巴利
Disaṃgamikādivatthukathāvaṇṇanā
163 “若他有共住的比丘侍者”这是原文的读法。“于季节雨季,于季节年之寒季与热季”是如此写着的。巴利
163. ‘‘Sacassa saddhiṃcarā bhikkhuupaṭṭhākā atthī’’ti pāṭho. ‘‘Utuvasseti utusaṃvacchare hemantagimhesū’’ti likhitaṃ.
清净布施的注释巴利
Pārisuddhidānakathāvaṇṇanā
164 “我给予清净”——老师写道:“有罪者给长老们(‘我给予’),在故意妄语时会产生恶作。”这到底是什么原因呢?因为“故意妄语时的恶作罪”只是世尊所说的,所以它是非所作而生起的。然而在“我给予清净”这句话里,明显能看到有造作,因此看起来像故意妄语中的巴吉帝亚,应当仔细考察。那些老师确实很伟大。其中,“我给予”是就自己伍波萨他甘马得以成就的因由而说的。“取”和“告知”是为了免除取者没有告知的恶作而说的。同样的道理也适用于给予同意。其中,“我给予”是表明自己心意和合的话,其余如前所说,优波帝萨长老这样解释。或者,第一句是就先前和合的状态说的,第二句是就后来应当做的状态说的,第三句是为了免除持同意者的恶作而说的。在两种情况下,由于有“到达僧团后离去”等说法,同意和清净的给予只有在僧团和合时才能成立,不和合时则不成立,这就确定了。由于有“到达僧团后被举罪者承认,清净已送达”等说法,被举罪者等的同意和清净给予也能成立,这就确定了,但那只是在认为对方是常态比丘的想之下才成立,否则不成立,这是推论。知道是沙弥而给予,则无效,而且有罪;不知道而给予,则有效,而且无罪。有些(长老)这样说。“猫链清净”这里,链是紧接着绑起来的,又用另一条链,所以仅仅链就成为清净,优波帝萨长老这样说。若真是这样,那个限定词就没有意义了。猫链是绑着的,因为只在家里连接。就像它哪里也不去,同样,那个(清净)也哪里都不去,据说这就是(他的)意思。巴利
164.Pārisuddhiṃ dammīti ‘‘sāpattiko therānaṃ deti, sampajānamusāvāde dukkaṭaṃ sambhavatī’’ti ācariyena likhitaṃ. Kiṃ nu kho kāraṇaṃ? Sampajānamusāvādena dukkaṭāpatti nāma kevalaṃ bhagavatā vuttattā akiriyasamuṭṭhānā hotīti. ‘‘Pārisuddhiṃ dammī’’ti ettha pana kiriyā paññāyati, tasmā sampajānamusāvāde pācittiyaṃ viya dissati, suṭṭhu upaparikkhitabbaṃ. Mahantā hi te ācariyā nāma. Tattha ‘‘dammī’’ti attano uposathakammanibbattinimittaṃ vuttaṃ. ‘‘Harā’’ti ca ‘‘ārocehī’’ti ca hārakassa anārocanapaccayā dukkaṭamocanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Eseva nayo chandadānepi. Tattha ‘‘dammī’’ti attano cittasāmaggidīpanavacanaṃ, sesaṃ vuttanayameva, evaṃ upatissatthero vaṇṇeti. Atha vā paṭhamaṃ samaggabhāvaṃ sandhāya, dutiyaṃ pacchā vidhātabbabhāvaṃ, tatiyaṃ chandahārakassa dukkaṭamocanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Ubhayatthāpi ‘‘saṅghappatto pakkamatī’’tiādivacanato saṅghe samagge eva chandapārisuddhidānaṃ ruhati, nāsamaggeti siddhaṃ. ‘‘Saṅghappatto ukkhittako paṭijānāti, āhaṭā hoti pārisuddhī’’tiādivacanato ukkhittakādīnampi chandapārisuddhidānaṃ ruhatīti siddhaṃ, tañca kho pakatattasaññāya, no aññathāti takko. Jānitvā sāmaṇerassa dinne na yāti, āpatti ca, ajānitvā dinne yāti ca, anāpattīti eke. Biḷālasaṅkhalikā nāma pārisuddhīti ettha saṅkhalikā nāma anantarena sambajjhati, aññena ca saṅkhalikenāti kevalaṃ saṅkhalikā pārisuddhi nāma hotīti upatissatthero. Evaṃ sante visesanaṃ niratthakaṃ hoti. Biḷālasaṅkhalikā baddhāva hoti antogehe eva sampayojanattā. Yathā sā na katthaci gacchati, tathā sāpi na katthaci gacchatīti kira adhippāyo.
关于意愿、布施等谈论的注释巴利
Chandadānādikathāvaṇṇanā
165-7 有人说:比丘给了同意之后,前往破界、界中间或界外再回来,不会破坏甘马。所以他们先取了要出行的比丘们的同意,结好破界;等到再结园界时,就不再取他们的同意了。从“请暂时到一边去”等说法来看,任何比丘甘马,只要有居士等人在伸手可及的范围内,就不成立,这一点由此可以确定。“在界外”就是界外。对他不需要授予职责这件事,意思是即使他在场也无妨。这是指连同座位和水。“十五日也”中的“也”字把十四日也包括进去,因此《大注》里说“如果此不可行”。至于“今日我伍波萨他是十五日”这样的决意,常时并没有作用,也不会变成别的,这是一些人的看法。巴利
165-7. ‘‘Chandaṃ datvā khaṇḍasīmaṃ vā sīmantarikaṃ vā bahisīmaṃ vā gantvā āgato bhikkhu kammaṃ na kopeti, tasmā gamikabhikkhūnaṃ chandaṃ gaṇhitvā khaṇḍasīmaṃ bandhitvā puna vihārasīmaṃ bandhituṃ tesaṃ chandaṃ na gaṇhantī’’ti vadanti. ‘‘Muhuttaṃ ekamantaṃ hothā’’tiādivacanato yaṃ kiñci bhikkhukammaṃ gahaṭṭhādīsu hatthapāsagatesu na vaṭṭatīti siddhaṃ. Nissīmanti bahisīmaṃ. Tassa sammutidānakiccaṃ natthīti tasmiṃ satipi vaṭṭatīti attho. Āsanena saha udakanti attho. Pannarasopīti api-saddo cātuddasiṃ sampiṇḍeti, tena vuttaṃ mahāaṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘yadi no eta’’nti. ‘‘Ajja me uposatho pannaraso’’ti adhiṭṭhānaṃ sadā na kiñci, na aññathāti eke.
关于犯戒忏悔仪轨等的注释巴利
Āpattipaṭikammavidhikathādivaṇṇanā
169-170 “我忏悔”——有些人说,用任何一种语言说出来时,忏悔和接受都成立,因为这是以可见的行为而说清净。有疑的比丘应该说:“尊者,我对某一土喇咤亚罪有疑,当我无疑时,我将忏悔该罪。”这样做之后,在他无疑之前,不能接受同分罪,而对于其他甘马,他名为清净。之后,当无疑时,应忏悔。虽然经与注疏中并无“不”字,但即使忏悔了也没有过失。同样,“我从这里起来后将忏悔该罪”一语,是在全体僧团犯了同分罪,以及有疑的情况下适用。因此写道:“全体僧团犯了同分罪后,当见到清净时,将在其面前忏悔该罪,这样说后,可以进行伍波萨他。”巴利
169-170.Paṭidesemīti yāya kāyaci bhāsāya vutte desanā ca paṭiggaho ca hotiyeva diṭṭhāvikammena visuddhiyā vuttattāti keci. Vematikena ‘‘ahaṃ, bhante, ekissā thullaccayāpattiyā vematiko, yadā nibbematiko bhavissāmi, tadā taṃ āpattiṃ paṭikarissāmī’’ti vattabbaṃ. Evaṃ kate yāva nibbematiko na hoti, tāva sabhāgāpattiṃ paṭiggahetuṃ na labhati, aññesañca kammānaṃ parisuddho nāma hoti. Puna nibbematiko hutvā desetabbaṃ. Na cāti neva pāḷiyaṃ na aṭṭhakathāyaṃ atthi, desite pana doso natthīti. Tathā itovuṭṭhahitvā taṃ āpattiṃ paṭikarissāmīti ettha ca sakalasaṅghe sabhāgāpattiṃ āpanne, vematike ca. Tathā ca ‘‘sabbo saṅgho sabhāgāpattiṃ āpajjitvā yadā suddhaṃ passissatī’’ti, ‘‘tadā tassa santike taṃ āpattiṃ paṭikarissatī’ti vatvā ‘uposathaṃ kātuṃ labhatī’’ti ca likhitaṃ.
无犯十五法等注释巴利
Anāpattipannarasakādikathāvaṇṇanā
172-3 在前一个部分里,读作“Atthaññe”;在后一个部分里,读作“Athaññe”。他们看见那些人进入或正在进入界内。然而,持法想的人是因为无知才这样。“Vematikapannarasakaṃ uttānameva”是读法。巴利
172-3. ‘‘Atthaññe’’ti pubbavāre, ‘‘athaññe’’ti pacchāvāre pāṭho. Sīmaṃ okkante vā okkamante vā passanti. Dhammasaññino pana aññāṇena honti. ‘‘Vematikapannarasakaṃ uttānamevā’’ti pāṭho.
关于进入界内者的省略说注释巴利
Sīmokkantikapeyyālakathāvaṇṇanā
178 从“不应不情愿地给予”这句话可以得出:如果有意愿,就应该给予。巴利
178. ‘‘Na akāmā dātabbā’’tivacanato icchāya sati dātabbāti siddhaṃ.
关于“见相”等说法的注释巴利
Liṅgādidassanakathāvaṇṇanā
180 “不超越”在这里的意思是:据说,那些人是执持不同见解而不同住的人。因为对于因甘马而不同住的人,应当让他舍弃邪见之后,再为他做接纳甘马。这样做之后,才可以和他一起做伍波萨他。另一种说法是:只要舍弃邪见就可以了。如果知道某人是因为不见罪、不做忏悔而被举罪,或者是因为不舍弃邪见而被举罪,还和他一起做事,就犯巴吉帝亚。因此,应当知道这些人就是随顺被举罪者的人——有些人这样说。巴利
180.Nābhivitarantīti ettha laddhinānāsaṃvāsakā kira te. Kammanānāsaṃvāsakañhi diṭṭhiṃ paṭinissajjāpetvā tassa osāraṇakammaṃ kātabbaṃ. Evañhi kate tena saddhiṃ uposathaṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭati. Itarena laddhinissajjanamattena kātunti vuttaṃ. Āpattiyā adassane appaṭikamme ukkhittakañca diṭṭhiyā appaṭinissagge ukkhittakañca jānitvā tena saddhiṃ karontassa pācittiyaṃ, tasmā ime ukkhittānuvattakāti veditabbāti eke.
不应去与应去这一章的注释巴利
Nagantabbagantabbavārakathāvaṇṇanā
181 “不应去”是针对什么说的?从“除了僧团”这句话来看,在某个精舍里住着一百位比丘时,他们全都因为某种事务,分成十人一组,各自站在不同的水界等界场里,可以举行伍波萨他。对于新造堂等不同界场的范围,为了伍波萨他决意的目的,即使是界场,即使是河流,也不应去。因为舍弃了重的巴帝摩卡诵之后,不应再作轻的,所以“除了僧团”这句话得以成立。其中,从“在哪个住处有伍波萨他执行者……中略……不作就不应去”这句话来看,可以成立:即使已经舍弃了伍波萨他,也可以从住处前往。有人说:“从那里,为了举行清净伍波萨他,已舍弃伍波萨他的人可以去,或者进入缺界。”因此,这根本不是伍波萨他的障碍,所以写为“自己的伍波萨他障碍”。巴利
181.Na gantabboti kiṃ sandhāya? ‘‘Aññatra saṅghenā’’ti vacanato yasmiṃ vihāre sataṃ bhikkhū viharanti, te sabbe kenacideva karaṇīyena dasa dasa hutvā visuṃ visuṃ nānāudakukkhepasīmādīsu ṭhatvā uposathaṃ kātuṃ labhanti. Navakammasālādikā nānāsīmākoṭi uposathādhiṭṭhānatthaṃ sīmāpi nadīpi na gantabbā. Garukaṃ pātimokkhuddesaṃ vissajjitvā lahukassa akattabbattā ‘‘aññatra saṅghenā’’ti vacanaṃ sādheti. Tattha ‘‘yasmiṃ āvāse uposathakārakā …pe… akatvā na gantabbo’’ti vacanato vissaṭṭhauposathāpi āvāsā gantuṃ vaṭṭatīti siddhaṃ. ‘‘Tato pārisuddhiuposathakaraṇatthaṃ vissaṭṭhauposathā gantuṃ vaṭṭati, khaṇḍasīmaṃ vā pavisitunti apare vadantī’’ti vuttaṃ. Iminā neva uposathantarāyoti ‘‘attano uposathantarāyo’’ti likhitaṃ.
应当回避之人的显示论注释巴利
Vajjanīyapuggalasandassanakathāvaṇṇanā
183 183. 对于犯了究竟罪的人,如果心想“在座的大众中有斗诤等怖畏,我不会去做”,然后坐下,这是可以的。有些人说:在其他甘马中,他坐在大众中,没有罪。从“诸比丘,除了僧团和合之外,不应在非伍波萨他日行伍波萨他”这句话来看,和合日就是非伍波萨他日,这似乎是从义理上说的。老师们说:这是依据“诸比丘,有这两种伍波萨他”这句话而说的,否则就与《附随》的巴利文相违。如果僧团在十四日或十五日和合,为了表明不应说“今天伍波萨他和合”,而应按照平常的方式来做,所以作了这样的教示——我们不这样推论。否则,如果在所说的这两种日子里和合,却不在那天行伍波萨他,反而要在非伍波萨他日才行和合伍波萨他,那就会有过失。否则,因为先前已经禁止了,现在就没有再禁止的必要。因为先前已经说过“诸比丘,不应每天诵巴帝摩卡”。或者,因为先前已经说过“诸比丘,我允许在伍波萨他日诵巴帝摩卡”,而且后来又说“每半月一次,在十四日或十五日”以及“诸比丘,有这两种伍波萨他”,所以在其他日子不应行伍波萨他——从义理上就会导致不想要的结论。应当知道:为了表明当有僧团和合时,其他日子按照平常的方式虽然不是伍波萨他日,却也名为伍波萨他日,所以作了这样的教示来遮止。巴利
183. ‘‘Antimavatthuṃ ajjhāpannassa nisinnaparisāya kalahādibhayena nāhaṃ karissāmī’’ti cittaṃ uppādetvā nisīdituṃ vaṭṭati. Aññakamme tassa nisinnaparisāya āpatti natthīti eke. ‘‘Na ca, bhikkhave, anuposathe uposatho kātabbo aññatra saṅghasāmaggiyā’’ti (mahāva. 183) vacanato sāmaggīdivaso anuposathadivasoti atthato vuttaṃ viya dissati. ‘‘Dveme, bhikkhave, uposathā’’ti vuttavacanavasenetaṃ vuttaṃ, aññathā parivārapāḷiyā virujjhatīti ācariyā. Cātuddasiyaṃ, pannarasiyaṃ vā ce saṅgho samaggo hoti, ‘‘ajjuposatho sāmaggī’’ti avatvā pakatinīhāreneva kattabbanti dassanatthaṃ yathādesanā katāti no takko. Aññathā yathāvuttadvaye ce sāmaggī hoti, tattha uposathaṃ akatvā anuposathadivase eva sāmaggīuposatho kātabboti āpajjati. Aññathā pubbe paṭisiddhattā idāni paṭisedhanakiccaṃ natthi. ‘‘Na, bhikkhave, devasikaṃ pātimokkhaṃ uddisitabba’’nti (mahāva. 136) pubbe hi vuttaṃ. Atha vā ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, uposathe pātimokkhaṃ uddisitu’’nti pubbe vuttattā ‘‘sakiṃ pakkhassa cātuddase vā pannarase vā’’ti ca ‘‘dveme, bhikkhave, uposathā’’ti (mahāva. 149) ca pacchā vuttattā tato aññasmiṃ divase uposatho na kātabboti atthato āpannaṃ aniṭṭhaṃ, sati saṅghasāmaggiyā añño divaso pakativasena anuposathopi uposathadivaso nāma hotīti dassanavasena nivāretumpi evaṃdesanā katāti veditabbā.
3. 入雨安居犍度的注释巴利
3. Vassūpanāyikakkhandhakavaṇṇanā
允许入雨安居的注释巴利
Vassūpanāyikānujānanakathāvaṇṇanā
184 在《大义注》里也有“saṅkāsayissanti”这个读法,据说岛上的人读作“saṅkāpayissanti”。当思考“到底有多少种入雨安居”时,有人问“以什么为相”,于是世尊所说的“诸比丘,我允许入雨安居”这个入雨安居,应当说“我在这三个月中入雨安居”之后才入。雨季的月份有四个月。其中,前三个月和后三个月,共有两种三个月。因此,那些比丘就生起了这样的想法。巴利
184.Mahāaṭṭhakathāyampi ‘‘saṅkāsayissantī’’ti pāṭho, dīpavāsino ‘‘saṅkāpayissantī’’ti paṭhanti kira. ‘‘Kati nu kho vassūpanāyikā’’ti cintāyaṃ ‘‘kiṃ nimitta’’nti vutte ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, vassaṃ upagantu’’nti yaṃ vassūpagamanaṃ vuttaṃ, taṃ ‘‘imaṃ temāsaṃ vassaṃ upemī’’ti vatvā upagantabbaṃ. Vassānamāsā ca cattāro. Tattha paṭhamaṃ temāsaṃ, pacchimaṃ temāsanti duvidhaṃ temāsaṃ. Tenāyaṃ tesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ cintā ahosi.
关于禁止雨安居期间出行等说法的注释巴利
Vassānecārikāpaṭikkhepādikathāvaṇṇanā
185 185. 应当知道:因为不顾念地离去,或者在别处让黎明生起,就有罪。在这里,首先要说的是:他在自恣日还没到来、尚余七天时,因为有应作之事而离去。根据“诸比丘,那位比丘可能回到那个住处,也可能不回来,诸比丘,那位比丘的前安居仍然成立,而且在承诺上无犯”这句话,可以知道这是针对不到七日的情况说的。同样地,根据“他在当天没有应作之事而离去,或者有应作之事而离去,诸比丘,那位比丘的前安居不成立,而且在承诺上有恶作罪”这句话,也可以知道。巴利
185.Anapekkhagamanena vā aññattha aruṇaṃ uṭṭhāpanena vā āpatti veditabbāti ettha paṭhamaṃ tāva so sattāhaṃ anāgatāya pavāraṇāya sakaraṇīyo pakkamati. ‘‘Āgaccheyya vā so, bhikkhave, bhikkhu taṃ āvāsaṃ na vā āgaccheyya, tassa, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno purimikā ca paññāyati, paṭissave ca anāpattī’’ti vacanato oraṃ sandhāya vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Tathā hi ‘‘so tadaheva akaraṇīyo pakkamati, sakaraṇīyo pakkamati, tassa, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno purimikā ca na paññāyati, paṭissave ca āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti (mahāva. 207) vuttaṃ.
允许七日应作事的注释巴利
Sattāhakaraṇīyānujānanakathāvaṇṇanā
187-8 第二,应当知道(这)是在七日之后,因为经文这样说:“他在那七天里在外度过,诸比丘,那位比丘的前安居就不成立,而且在承诺时犯恶作罪。”同样地,经文又说:“他在那七天里在界内返回,诸比丘,那位比丘的前安居就成立,而且在承诺时无犯。”(《大品》207)即使有两个原因,如果没有破坏雨安居的原因,也应当知道有罪。因此,这三句话按各自的情况被连接起来,成为分开的句子。“三句缺失”是指它们不存在。巴利
187-8. Dutiyaṃ pana ‘‘so taṃ sattāhaṃ bahiddhā vītināmeti, tassa, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno purimikā ca na paññāyati, paṭissave ca āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti vacanato sattāhato paraṃ veditabbaṃ. Tathā hi ‘‘so taṃ sattāhaṃ anto sannivattaṃ karoti, tassa, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno purimikā ca paññāyati, paṭissave ca anāpattī’’ti (mahāva. 207) vuttaṃ. Satipi kāraṇadvaye vassacchedakāraṇābhāve āpatti veditabbā, tasmā tīṇipi etāni vacanāni yathāsambhavaṃ yojitāni viggahāni honti. Tīṇi parihīnānīti tāsaṃ natthitāya.
关于派人前往后随即开许的注释巴利
Pahiteyevaanujānanakathāvaṇṇanā
199 比丘们,我允许为了僧团事务而外出,但要在七天内返回。根据这句话,在雨安居期间,为了处理需要集中办理的事务而外出,是可以的。不过在这里,即使是出于对法的欲求而来,也会损耗僧团的收入来源。所以又说“建好住所之后”。“Āgata”就是到来的意思。这里的“bhāve ettha”中,这个“ta”后缀是表示状态。关于“为了僧团事务而外出”,据说法喜长老说:“这只适用于与住所相关的僧团事务,不适用于其他事务。”义注也把那个词提出来,并用“在伍波萨他堂等住所中的任何事务”等说法,只举住所为例来说明,所以应该仔细审查。巴利
199. ‘‘Anujānāmi bhikkhave, saṅghakaraṇīyena gantuṃ, sattāhaṃ sannivatto kātabbo’’ti vacanato antovasse saṃhārikabhāvena gantuṃ vaṭṭati. Tattha dhammachandavasenapi āgate saṅghassa āyamukhaṃ vinassati. Tato ‘‘senāsanāni katvā’’ti ca vuttaṃ. Āgatanti āgamanaṃ. Bhāvettha tapaccayoyaṃ. Saṅghakaraṇīyena gantunti ettha ‘‘senāsanapaṭisaṃyuttesu eva saṅghakaraṇīyesu, na aññesū’’ti dhammasiritthero vadati kira. Aṭṭhakathāyampi taṃ padaṃ uddharitvā ‘‘yaṃ kiñci uposathāgārādīsu senāsanesū’’tiādinā senāsanameva dassitaṃ, tasmā upaparikkhitabbaṃ.
没有受邀就前去是不允许的。这样做的话,就会断掉夜间住宿的资格,还会犯恶作罪,人们把这叫做“破雨安居”。所谓“确实受邀”,在这里是指:即使在家居士们约定说“我们在某天做布施等善事,所有比丘都请集合来吧”,这样也是可以去的。从自恣日后的初九日开始,为了寻找粪扫衣,就像在卡维拉港那样,所有人都可以去,因为在家居士们每年都会按时准备好并放置好。这在《安达卡义注》中也说过:“或者由比丘僧团作出约定‘请周围所有的比丘都来’,或者由在家居士们发出通告,去那里的人不会断掉夜间住宿的资格。”还说:“即使只邀请一次说‘请每年都来’,也是可以的。”另外还说:“从衣时开始,像在卡维拉港那样,先定好时间,为从各处来的人准备好布施,然后发出通告,这种做法的模式是显而易见的,其他人也这么说。”不过,诸位阿阇梨并不是这样说的。巴利
Animantitena gantuṃ na vaṭṭatīti tassa ratticchedo ca dukkaṭāpatti ca hoti, taṃ ‘‘vassacchedo’’ti ca vadanti. Nimantitoyeva nāma hotīti ettha upāsakehi ‘‘imasmiṃ nāma divase dānādīni karoma, sabbe sannipatantū’’ti katāyapi katikāya gantuṃ vaṭṭati. Pavāraṇāya navamito paṭṭhāya paṃsukūlikacīvaraṃ pariyesituṃ kāvīrapaṭṭane viya sabbesaṃ gantuṃ vaṭṭati anusaṃvaccharaṃ niyamato upāsakehi sajjitvā ṭhapanato. Vuttampi cetaṃ andhakaṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘bhikkhusaṅghena vā katikā katā ‘samantā bhikkhū gacchantū’ti, ghosanaṃ vā kataṃ upāsakehi, tattha gacchantassa ratticchedo natthīti tathā ‘anusaṃvaccharaṃ āgacchantū’ti sakiṃ nimantitepi vaṭṭatī’’ti ca ‘‘cīvarakālato paṭṭhāya niyamaṃ katvā samantato āgatānaṃ sajjetvā dānato kāvīrapaṭṭane ghosetvā karaṇākāro paññāyatīti apare’’ti ca. Ācariyā pana evaṃ na vadanti.
关于障碍、无罪和破雨安居的注释巴利
Antarāyeanāpattivassacchedakathāvaṇṇanā
201 有人依据“如果去了远处,应以七日往返的方式令明相生起”这句话说:这所说明的是,当存在某种障碍、而该障碍允许破雨安居时,可以在不破雨安居的情况下,以七日事缘的方式度过。然而持律者们不接受这种说法,因此应当知道,“应以七日往返的方式令明相生起”这句话,是针对如临时出现等因缘而说的。关于这一点,上文说“然而老师们不这样说”。Gāvuṃ vā 指牛或公牛。Bahisīmāya ṭhitānaṃ 指那些站在界外的人,伍巴帝萨长老说也包括站在分界内的人。关于破雨安居,是指破雨安居这件事。那些将精舍移往他处安居的人,应集合到该处,宣告“由于如此这般的原因,我们将这座精舍迁往名为某处的地方,在那里安居”,然后才可以做。巴利
201. ‘‘Sace dūraṃ gato hoti, sattāhavārena aruṇo uṭṭhāpetabbo’’ti vacanato ‘yasmiṃ antarāye sati vassacchedaṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭati, tasmiṃ antarāyeva vassacchedamakatvā sattāhakaraṇīyena vītināmetuṃ vaṭṭatīti dīpitanti apare’’ti vuttaṃ. Vinayadharā pana na icchanti, tasmā ‘‘sattāhavārena aruṇo uṭṭhāpetabbo’’ti idaṃ tatruppādādinimittaṃ vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Taṃ sandhāya ‘‘ācariyā pana evaṃ na vadantī’’ti vuttaṃ. Gāvuṃvāti balibaddhaṃ vā. Bahisīmāya ṭhitānanti tehi khaṇḍasīmāya ṭhitehipīti upatissatthero. Vassacchede assa vassacchedassa. Vihārā aññattha vuṭṭhāpentehi tattheva sannipatitvā ‘‘iminā ca iminā ca kāraṇena imasmiṃ nāma padese imaṃ vihāraṃ netvā vuṭṭhāpemā’’ti anussāvetvāva kātabbanti.
关于在牛栏等地入雨安居的注释巴利
Vajādīsuvassūpagamanakathāvaṇṇanā
203 与牛栏同行的人,在破雨安居这件事上不犯戒——据说这里的意思是:不会构成破雨安居。因为商队没有固定住处,所以不说“在这个精舍”,只需要说“我在这里入雨安居”这么多就够了。有人这样写道:“然而,在商队里入雨安居是不允许的,因此不能说‘在这个精舍,这三个月’或者‘我在这里入雨安居’,意思只是说,仅仅以表示依止的方式才是允许的。”但这种说法与注释书相矛盾。因为注释书里说:“‘我在这里入雨安居’要说三遍。”如果说注释书的话前后矛盾呢?并不矛盾,因为这是没有理解其意旨。商队有两种:停驻的和在路上的。其中,在停驻的商队里,可以在小屋里说“我在这里入雨安居”然后住下。正是针对这种情况,才说:“比丘们,我允许在商队里入雨安居。”但在移动的商队里,因为没有小屋,就不能入雨安居。如果有轿子或车屋,那是可以的,在牛栏里也一样。在这三种情况下,比丘不犯破雨安居罪。巴利
203.Vajena saddhiṃ gatassa vassacchede anāpattīti vassacchedo na hotīti kira adhippāyo. Satthassa avihārattā ‘‘imasmiṃ vihāre’’ti avatvā ‘‘idha vassaṃ upemī’’ti ettakaṃ vattabbaṃ. ‘‘Satthe pana vassaṃ upagantuṃ na vaṭṭatīti ‘imasmiṃ vihāre imaṃ temāsa’nti vā ‘idha vassaṃ upemī’ti vā na vaṭṭati, ālayakaraṇamatteneva vaṭṭatīti adhippāyo’’ti likhitaṃ. Taṃ pana aṭṭhakathāya virujjhati. ‘‘Idha vassaṃ upemīti tikkhattuṃ vattabba’’nti hi vuttaṃ. Aṭṭhakathāvacanampi pubbāparaṃ virujjhatīti ce? Na, adhippāyājānanato. Sattho duvidho ṭhito, sañcāroti. Tattha ṭhite kuṭikāya ‘‘idha vassaṃ upemī’’ti vatvā vasitabbaṃ. Idañhi sandhāya ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, satthe vassaṃ upagantu’’nti vuttaṃ, sañcārimhi pana satthe kuṭikāya abhāvato vassaṃ upagantuṃ na vaṭṭati. Sati sivikāya vā sakaṭakuṭikāya vā vaṭṭati, tathā vajepi. Tīsu ṭhānesu bhikkhuno natthi vassacchede āpatti.
关于“他也能自恣”,此处作如下考察:“诸比丘,我允许去有牛栏的地方”这句话,是为了保护雨安居,还是为了保护不犯破雨安居罪?如果是为了保护雨安居,那就和“诸比丘,无住处者不应入雨安居”这句话相矛盾。若说是为了保护不犯破雨安居罪,那么“他不能自恣”便得以成立。那么此处的道理何在?因为只有这三种情况才能自恣,其他情况不能。譬如被野兽等所逼之人,只要尚未舍弃所入之处,就能自恣;一旦舍弃,便不能自恣——这就是此处的道理。有阿阇梨说:“去有村落的地方也能自恣,这属于其中一种情况。”因为他先前并非依“我在这里入雨安居”而入,而是依“在这个精舍”而入,而后者已被舍弃。若非如此,那么在没有精舍的情况下,仅仅针对村落说“我在这里入雨安居”而入,是被允许的。这算犯戒吗?不算——因为正如“诸比丘,我允许在牛栏、商队、船上入雨安居”这句话,其中并没有“在村落中入”的说法。又因“在三种情况下,比丘不犯破雨安居罪”这句话表明:在这些情况下是有入雨安居的;若无入安居,便无破安居。所以“然而在商队中不能入雨安居”一语,是针对没有小屋之时说的,此义已经成立。关于“在三种情况下,比丘不犯破雨安居罪”,有人这样写道:“只有与那些人同行时才不犯;如果违抗而行,就有罪,而且不能自恣。”因此,注疏中说:“如果商队在雨安居期间到达比丘想去的地方后继续前进……中途在某个村落停留或散开”等等。据此可知,即使是那些违抗而行的人,也不算违抗而行。所以应当知道:此说是为了显示他们仍然可以自恣。巴利
Pavāretuñca labhatīti etthāyaṃ vicāraṇā – ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, yena vajo, tena gantu’’nti idaṃ kiṃ vassarakkhaṇatthaṃ vuttaṃ, udāhu vassacchedāpattirakkhaṇatthanti? Kiñcettha yadi vassarakkhaṇatthaṃ, ‘‘na, bhikkhave, asenāsanikena vassaṃ upagantabba’’nti idaṃ virujjhati. Atha vassacchedāpattirakkhaṇatthaṃ vuttanti siddhaṃ na so pavāretuṃ labhatīti, kā panettha yutti? Yato ayameva tividho pavāretuṃ labhati, netaro. Vāḷehi ubbāḷhādiko hi upagataṭṭhānāpariccāgā labhati. Pariccāgā na labhatīti ayamettha yutti. Yena gāmo, tattha gatopi pavāretuṃ labhatīti ekenāti ācariyo. Yo hi pubbe ‘‘idha vassaṃ upemī’’ti na upagato, ‘‘imasmiṃ vihāre’’ti upagato, so ca pariccatto. Aññathā vinā vihārena kevalaṃ gāmaṃ sandhāya ‘‘idha vassaṃ upemī’’ti upagantuṃ vaṭṭatīti. Āpajjatūti ce? Na, ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, vaje satthe nāvāya vassaṃ upagantu’’nti vacanaṃ viya ‘‘gāme upagantu’’nti vacanābhāvato. Yasmā ‘‘tīsu ṭhānesu bhikkhuno natthi vassacchede āpattī’’ti vacanaṃ tattha vassūpagamanaṃ atthīti dīpeti tadabhāve chedābhāvā, tasmā ‘‘satthe pana vassaṃ upagantuṃ na vaṭṭatī’’ti kuṭiyā abhāvakālaṃ sandhāya vuttanti siddhaṃ. Tīsu ṭhānesu bhikkhuno natthi vassacchede āpattīti ‘‘tehi saddhiṃ gacchantasseva natthi, virujjhitvā gamane āpatti ca, pavāretuñca na labhatī’’ti likhitaṃ, tasmā yaṃ vuttaṃ aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘atha sattho antovasseyeva bhikkhunā patthitaṭṭhānaṃ patvā atikkamati…pe… antarā ekasmiṃ gāme tiṭṭhati vā vippakirati vā’’tiādi, taṃ ettāvatā virujjhitvā gatānampi virujjhitvā gamanaṃ na hoti, tasmā pavāretabbanti dassanatthanti veditabbaṃ.
这里,有人问:因为“搭一个树叶遮盖的小屋后就可以进去”这句话,为了坐卧处而爬树是允许的,这已经成立,难道不与圣典相违吗?回答:不。因为正是通过禁止它才得以成立,而且在这里又再次加以禁止。又问:通过“诸比丘,没有坐卧处的人不应入雨安居”这一禁止,就像“诸比丘,不应在露天入雨安居”这一禁止一样,就能成立吗?回答:不。因为那样会推出露天也被认可为坐卧处的结论。事实上,从“在露天的草堆里”这句话来看,露天已经被认定为坐卧处了。住在四柱大厅的露天处,也会被称为“住在四柱大厅里”,所以就会得出在那里也允许的结论。因此,这里所说的“没有坐卧处的人”,应当理解为:自己或别人没有为他准备好固定居住的坐卧处的人。否则,两种禁止中就会有一种变成多余,还会得出在树根下、在敞棚里也可以入雨安居,以及没有准备好坐卧处的人也可以住在内室里的结论。问:怎么知道这里所说的坐卧处就是指有门闩的住处呢?答:从制戒的因缘可以知道。因为这条“没有坐卧处的人入雨安居”的犯戒,是在“那时,诸比丘没有坐卧处就入雨安居,被寒冷和炎热所苦”这个因缘中制定的。所以,这里所说的坐卧处,应当理解为能遮挡寒冷等的住处。问:如果是这样,那岂不是成立这只是前面那种说法的展示吗?答:不。因为它显示了先前没有涉及的其他含义。在第二禅的解说中,“由于寻伺止息,成为无寻无伺”这些话,就是例证。问:通过禁止露天这一因缘,只禁止了外面的露天,并没有禁止四柱大厅中间的露天,所以这个因缘不能作为标准吗?答:不。因为这是决定性的。有些学处确实依赖因缘,这一点已经成立。那么,怎样知道这个学处有所依赖,那个学处无所依赖呢?这里并没有像《两分分别》那样对学处逐句分析,也没有无犯的部分啊?答:在这里,也可以从说法的方式知道。因为从“天下雨时,比丘们跑到树根下,甚至跑到没有遮蔽的地方”这两个因缘语句来看,无论外面还是里面,一切会被雨淋到的地方,在这里都叫“露天”。而不会被雨淋到、但也没有遮蔽的地方,在这里也应当理解为如此。这样就成立了。因此,“不应前往”并不是禁止在那里安住,而是禁止说“我在这里入雨安居”这句话。《安达卡注》中说:焚烧尸体成灰后,为了骨骸而造小屋。有记载说:“‘有台之床’,就是农舍、石屋。”又说:“在没有门扉的住处,如果在自己安排好的、有共同关系的地方,住在有门扉的住处,是允许的。”也有这样的实践:“没有坐卧处的人不应入雨安居”,这在圣典和注释书中都有,所以应当仔细考察。巴利
Tattha ‘‘padaracchadanaṃ kuṭiṃ katvā upagantabba’’nti vacanato senāsanatthāya rukkhaṃ āruhituṃ vaṭṭatīti siddhaṃ hoti, na pāḷivirodhatoti ce? Na, tappaṭikkhepeneva siddhattā, imassa idha punapi paṭikkhepanato. ‘‘Na, bhikkhave, asenāsanikena vassaṃ upagantabba’’nti iminā paṭikkhepena siddhe ‘‘na, bhikkhave, ajjhokāse vassaṃ upagantabba’’nti paṭikkhepo viya siyāti ce? Na, ajjhokāsassa asenāsanabhāvānumatippasaṅgato. Ajjhokāso hi ‘‘ajjhokāse palālapuñje’’ti vacanato senāsananti siddhaṃ. Catusālaajjhokāse vasantopi ‘‘catusālāya vasatī’’ti vuccati, tasmā tattha vaṭṭatīti āpajjati, tasmā idha asenāsaniko nāma attanā vā parena vā attano nibaddhavāsatthaṃ apāpitasenāsanikoti veditabbaṃ. Aññathā dvinnaṃ paṭikkhepānaṃ aññatarātirekatā ca rukkhamūlepi nibbakosepi vassaṃ upagantuṃ vaṭṭatīti ca, apāpitasenāsanikenāpi gabbhe vasituṃ vaṭṭatīti ca āpajjati, sadvārabandhameva senāsanaṃ idha adhippetanti kathaṃ paññāyatīti ce? Nidānato. Ayañhi asenāsanikavassūpagamanāpatti ‘‘tena kho pana samayena bhikkhū asenāsanikā vassaṃ upagacchanti, sītenapi uṇhenapi kilamantī’’ti imasmiṃ nidāne paññattā, tasmā sītādipaṭikkhepameva idha senāsananti adhippetabbanti siddhaṃ. Evaṃ sante siddhaṃ pubbapakkhanidassananti ce? Na, pubbe aparatthapavattisūcanato. Dutiyajjhānaniddese ‘‘vitakkavicārānaṃ vūpasamā avitakkaṃ avicāra’’nti (dī. ni. 1.228; ma. ni. 1.271) vacanāni nidassanaṃ. Ajjhokāsapaṭikkhepanidānena bahiajjhokāsova paṭikkhitto, na catusālādimajjhagato ajjhokāsoti āpajjati, tasmā na nidānaṃ pamāṇanti ce? Na, niyamato. Kiñci hi sikkhāpadaṃ nidānāpekkhaṃ hotīti sādhitametaṃ. Idaṃ sāpekkhaṃ, idaṃ anapekkhanti kathaṃ paññāyati, na hi ettha ubhatovibhaṅge viya sikkhāpadānaṃ padabhājanaṃ, anāpattivāro vā atthīti? Idhāpi desanāvidhānato paññāyati. ‘‘Deve vassante rukkhamūlampi nibbakosampi upadhāvantī’’ti hi imehi dvīhi nidānavacanehi bahi vā anto vā sabbaṃ ovassakaṭṭhānaṃ idha ajjhokāso nāma. Anovassakaṭṭhānampi anibbakosameva idha icchitabbanti siddhaṃ hoti. Tena na upagantabbanti na ālayakaraṇapaṭikkhepo, ‘‘idha vassaṃ upemī’’ti vacanapaṭikkhepo. Chavasarīraṃ dahitvā chārikāya, aṭṭhikānañca atthāya kuṭikā karīyatīti andhakaṭṭhakathāvacanaṃ. ‘‘Ṭaṅkitamañcoti kasikuṭikāpāsāṇaghara’’nti likhitaṃ. ‘‘Akavāṭabaddhasenāsane attano pāpite sabhāgaṭṭhāne sakavāṭabaddhe vasati ce, vaṭṭatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Payogopi atthi, ‘‘asenāsanikena vassaṃ na upagantabba’’nti pāḷi ca aṭṭhakathā ca, tasmā upaparikkhitabbaṃ.
关于非法决议等言论的注释巴利
Adhammikakatikādikathāvaṇṇanā
205 在《大分别》中所说的,这里指的是《安达卡注》的说法:未满十五岁的沙弥不应住在这个精舍里,不应到处去捡粪扫衣,不应接受布片施食,不应在其他精舍吃饭,不应吃其他比丘或比丘尼的东西,彼此既不交谈也不闲聊,不应诵经,用陶钵是可以的,资具不具足的人不能住。巴利
205.Mahāvibhaṅge vuttanti ettha ayaṃ andhakaṭṭhakathāvacanaṃ ūnapannarasavassena sāmaṇerena idha vihāre na vatthabbā, na paṃsukūlaṃ āhiṇḍitabbaṃ, na coḷabhikkhā gahetabbā, na aññavihāre bhuñjitabbaṃ, na aññassa bhikkhussa vā bhikkhuniyā vā santakaṃ bhuñjitabbaṃ, aññamaññaṃ neva ālapeyyāma na sallapeyyāma, na sajjhāyitabbaṃ, mattikāpattena vaṭṭati, na aparipuṇṇaparikkhārassa vāsoti.
206 妄语是指欺骗性的不实之言。有些人说:“这是以欺骗的方式答应之后而说的。”也有人说:“与国王所说的话相符,在家人就把它理解为妄语,所以这样说。”巴利
206.Musāvādoti visaṃvādo adhippeto. Keci ‘‘visaṃvādanavasena paṭissuṇitvāti vutta’’nti ca, ‘‘rañño vuttavacanānurūpato musāvādoti gahaṭṭhā gaṇhantīti vutta’’nti ca vadanti.
207 207.“前安居也不被认许。为什么?因为当‘我住后安居’的心念生起时,对最初坐卧处的执取就止息了。当‘我就住前安居’的心念再次生起时,对后者的执取就止息了。两种住处都没有固定的规约。”这是书中的记载。不过,《古代难点》中说:“如果在最初执取的地方没有住下,而是到别的精舍执取坐卧处后住了两三天,那么最初的执取就止息了,所以前安居不被认许。最后的执取不止息。这其实是按天数来止息的。如果后三个月住在别处,前安居也不被认许,这叫做按坐卧处执取来止息。”这两种解释在这里都不是所要表达的意思。在此人已经承诺的地方,前安居不被认许,而且违犯承诺会犯恶作罪。那么,在什么情况下前安居被认许呢?在旅途中的两个住处,如果当天有最后的执取,在那里,以七日事由前往最初执取之处的人,不破雨安居;而此人当天没有事由就离开等情形,书中记载说:“所谓事由,就是指七日事由。”巴利
207.‘‘Purimikāca na paññāyati. Kasmā? ‘Dutiye vasāmī’ti citte uppanne paṭhamasenāsanaggāho paṭippassambhati. Puna ‘paṭhame eva vasāmī’ti citte uppanne dutiyo paṭippassambhati. Ubhayāvāse vidhānaṃ natthī’’ti likhitaṃ. Porāṇagaṇṭhipade pana ‘‘paṭhamaṃ gahitaṭṭhāne avasitvā aññasmiṃ vihāre senāsanaṃ gahetvā dvīhatīhaṃ vasati, tato paṭhamaggāho paṭippassambhatīti purimikā ca na paññāyati. Pacchimaggāho na paṭippassambhati. Idañhi divasavasena paṭippassambhanaṃ nāma hoti. Atha pacchimaṃ temāsaṃ aññasmiṃ vasati, purimikā ca na paññāyati, idaṃ senāsanaggāhānaṃ vasena paṭippassambhanaṃ nāmā’’ti vuttaṃ. Ubhopete atthavikappā idha nādhippetā. Yatthāyaṃ paṭissuto, tattha purimikā ca na paññāyati, paṭissave ca āpatti dukkaṭassa. Kattha pana purimikā paññāyatīti? Antarāmagge dvīsu āvāsesu yattha tadaheva pacchimaggāho, tattha paṭhamaṃ gahitaṭṭhāne sattāhakaraṇīyena gacchato na vassacchedo, so tadaheva akaraṇīyo pakkamatītiādimhi ‘‘karaṇīyaṃ nāma sattāhakaraṇīya’’nti likhitaṃ.
在《律藏之外·夜断抉择》里说到“听法等”。开头四种情况,因为指的是无牵挂地离开,所以没有说“以七日事由”,因为如果那样,就不存在无牵挂地离开了。其中,前两种情况是就还没入雨安居的人说的,所以已经入安居的人当天以七日事由出去、在七日之内回来,不算破雨安居,这一点成立。后两种情况是就已入安居的人无牵挂地离开说的,“在自恣日还没到之前的七天,有事的人离开”,这是为了说明:超过七天还不回来,就算破雨安居。其中,因为没有说“无事的人离开”,所以没有破安居的因缘就不该离开,这一点成立。不过,自恣之后可以离开,因为自恣就依附在那一天。其中,“或者不回来”是指因为遇到障碍。但导师说:“为了说明即使怀着‘我不再回这里’这种无牵挂的心,有事的人也可以离开,所以没有说‘无事的人’。”又说:“据说在锡兰岛有一种叫小自恣的仪式,做了那种自恣之后,有事的人就随自己方便离开,他们也展示了具体做法。”还说:“其中,有六个黎明在雨安居之内,一个在外,所以算他住满了三个月,另一些人这样主张”,以及“导师不这么说”。在一切情况下,“入寺”是指按自己的雨安居算,进入依自己雨安居所得的住处——这是古师的说法。如果没有入住,就不算入雨安居,因为这里没有说“我在这座寺院住这三个月”。有人写道:“即使没有义注里说的夜断因缘,若想着‘我住到别的寺院去再回来’而离开,也仍然算破雨安居。”巴利
Pāḷimuttakaratticchedavinicchaye ‘‘dhammassavanādī’’ti vuttaṃ. Ādimhi catūsu vāresu nirapekkhapakkamanassādhippetattā ‘‘sattāhakaraṇīyenā’’ti na vuttaṃ tasmiṃ sati nirapekkhagamanābhāvato. Tattha purimā dve vārā vassaṃ anupagatassa vasena vuttā, tasmā upagatassa tadaheva sattāhakaraṇīyena gantvā antosattāhaṃ āgacchato na vassacchedoti siddhaṃ. Pacchimā dve vārā upagatassa nirapekkhagamanavasena vuttā, ‘‘sattāhaṃ anāgatāya pavāraṇāya sakaraṇīyo pakkamatī’’ti tato bahiddhā sattāhaṃ vītināmentassa vassacchedoti dassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Tattha ‘‘akaraṇīyo pakkamatī’’ti vacanābhāvā vinā ratticchedakāraṇena gantuṃ na vaṭṭatīti siddhaṃ. Pavāretvā pana gantuṃ vaṭṭati pavāraṇāya taṃdivasasannissitattā. Tattha na vā āgaccheyyāti antarāyena. Ācariyo pana ‘‘na puna idhāgacchāmī’ti nirapekkhopi sakaraṇīyova gantuṃ labhatīti dassanatthaṃ akaraṇīyo’ti na vutta’’nti vadati. ‘‘Sīhaḷadīpe kira cūḷapavāraṇā nāma atthi, taṃ pavāraṇaṃ katvā yathāsukhaṃ sakaraṇīyā gacchanti, payogañca dassentī’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Tattha cha aruṇā antovasse honti , eko bahi, tasmā so temāsaṃ vuttho hotīti apare’’ti ca, ‘‘ācariyo evaṃ na vadatī’’ti ca vuttaṃ. Sabbattha vihāraṃ upetīti attano vassaggena pattagabbhaṃ upetīti porāṇā. Asatiyā pana vassaṃ na upetīti ettha ‘‘imasmiṃ vihāre imaṃ temāsa’’nti avacanena. ‘‘Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttaratticchedakāraṇaṃ vinā tirovihāre vasitvā āgacchissāmīti gacchatopi vassaccheda’’nti likhitaṃ.
208 “承诺后安居”是指:中途出家的比丘,或者雨安居中断的人所作的承诺。但其他人如果没有先入前安居,就不应该在后安居中作承诺。他们认定“在任何情况下,夜间中断就是安居中断”之后就这样说。不过有些人不同意。为了成立这个说法,他们展开种种繁琐议论。那又有什么用呢。巴利
208.Paṭissuto hoti pacchimikāyāti antarā pabbajitabhikkhunā, chinnavassena vā paṭissuto, aññena pana purimaṃ anupagantvā pacchimikāyaṃ paṭissavo na kātabbo. Ratticchede sabbattha vassacchedoti sanniṭṭhānaṃ katvā vadanti. Keci pana na icchanti. Taṃ sādhetuṃ anekadhā papañcenti. Kiṃ tena.
自恣犍度注释巴利
4. Pavāraṇākkhandhakavaṇṇanā
《不安乐住论》的注释巴利
Aphāsukavihārakathāvaṇṇanā
210 因为先说了“贤友,我向僧团自恣”,后面看起来就好像也应该接着说“请僧团对我说”。不过这里的意思是:正因为我向僧团自恣,所以属于僧团的上座、中座、新学比丘,所有尊者都应该毫无差别地对我说。巴利
210. ‘‘Saṅghaṃ āvuso pavāremī’’ti vuttattā pacchāpi ‘‘vadatu maṃ saṅgho’’ti vattabbaṃ viya dissati. Ayaṃ panettha adhippāyo – yasmā ahaṃ saṅghaṃ pavāremi, tasmā tattha pariyāpannā therā, majjhimā, navā vā avisesenāyasmanto sabbepi maṃ vadantūti.
自恣分类的注释巴利
Pavāraṇābhedavaṇṇanā
212 比丘们,所谓“两种自恣”,在这里的意思是:当有那样的事务时,无论在哪里自恣都可以。正因如此,大寺的比丘们在十四日自恣后,至今仍在十五日举行身和合。他们为了拜见大塔,甚至在初八日就前往支提山,那也是想在十四日自恣的人的做法。有记载说:“因为‘在自恣日前七天,有事务的人可以离开,不犯戒’这句话,所以这成了惯例。”有人说“如果不作决意,就犯恶作”,这是针对一个人说的恶作;而所说的前行法,也应套用到僧团或团体上。巴利
212.Dvemā, bhikkhave, pavāraṇāti ettha tādise kicce sati yattha katthaci pavāretuṃ vaṭṭati. Teneva mahāvihāre bhikkhū cātuddasiyaṃ pavāretvā pannarasiyaṃ kāyasāmaggiṃ idānipi denti. Cetiyagiri mahādassanatthampi aṭṭhamiyaṃ gacchanti, tampi cātuddasiyaṃ pavāretukāmānaṃyeva hoti. ‘‘Sattāhaṃ anāgatāya pavāraṇāya sakaraṇīyo pakkamati, anāpattīti vacanato idaṃ āciṇṇa’’nti likhitaṃ. ‘‘No ce adhiṭṭhaheyya, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti ekassa vuttadukkaṭaṃ, tasseva vuttaṃ pubbakiccañca saṅghagaṇānampi netabbaṃ.
自恣布施允许的论述注释巴利
Pavāraṇādānānujānanakathāvaṇṇanā
213 那位比丘,指的是给予自恣的人。巴利
213.Tena ca bhikkhunāti pavāraṇādāyakena.
无犯十五法等注释巴利
Anāpattipannarasakādikathāvaṇṇanā
他们这样说:因为“当自恣已被宣布、僧团也已自恣时,一切人的自恣就算善作”这句话,所以仅仅凭着自恣,连给予自恣的人也就成为已自恣者了。巴利
‘‘Tassā ca pavāraṇāya ārocitāya saṅghena ca pavārite sabbesaṃ suppavāritaṃ hotīti vacanato kevalaṃ pavāraṇāya pavāraṇādāyakopi pavāritova hotī’’ti vadantīti.
222 222.“大众未起座”是指自恣结束后,还在互相交谈。“有一部分已起座”是指有些人仍照原样坐着,有些人已经回到各自的住处。“应再次自恣”是指所有人应当再次聚集起来行自恣。“他们同时到来,应在他们面前自恣”,对此有这样的记载:“已经离开的人不必叫回来,只应在仍坐着的人面前行自恣;在伍波萨他犍度中也是同样的道理。”
“所有大众都已起座,他们同时到来,应在他们面前自恣”,他们解释说:“如果所有人都起座离开了,而且没办法召集起来,那么召集一部分人来行自恣是可以的。”为什么?据说因为不存在需提出动议而作的僧团甘马,所以不构成别众。但在这里,不论是一部分人离开了,还是所有人都离开了,都应当把全体召集起来,不提出动议,直接行自恣。只召集一部分人来行自恣是不允许的,因为说了“尊者,我向僧团自恣”。因为全体聚集之后,他们才能成为所见、所闻、所疑的陈述者。即使知道有未到场的人,也像在部分人面前说自恣语一样。就像召集四位在场者来舍弃所犯的尼萨耆亚衣等那样,自恣不是这样,因为它取决于全体。“和合众的自恣已被制定”这句话就是这里的依据。“除此之外不合规矩,因为注释书中没有认可”,伍巴帝萨长老这样说。以较少者在他们面前行自恣,不提出动议,有这样的说法。所谓“客比丘”,是指从九月起才来的,或者在牛栏、商队、船上度过雨安居的。巴利
222.Avuṭṭhitāya parisāyāti pavāretvā pacchā aññamaññaṃ kathentiyā. Ekaccāya vuṭṭhitāyāti ekaccesu yathānisinnesu ekaccesu sakasakaṭṭhānaṃ gatesu. Puna pavāretabbanti punapi sabbehi samāgantvā pavāretabbaṃ. Āgacchanti samasamā, tesaṃ santike pavāretabbanti ‘‘gate anānetvā nisinnānaṃyeva santike pavāretabbaṃ, uposathakkhandhakepi eseva nayo’’ti likhitaṃ. Sabbāya vuṭṭhitāya parisāya āgacchanti samasamā, tesaṃ santike pavāretabbanti ‘‘yadi sabbe vuṭṭhahitvā gatā, sannipātetuñca na sakkā, ekacce sannipātāpetvā pavāretuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti vadanti. Kasmā? Ñattiṃ ṭhapetvā kattabbasaṅghakammābhāvā vaggaṃ na hoti kira. Ettha pana ekaccesu gatesupi sabbesu gatesupi sabbe sannipātāpetvā ñattiṃ aṭṭhapetvā kevalaṃ pavāretabbaṃ. Ekacce sannipātāpetvā pavāretuṃ na vaṭṭati ‘‘saṅghaṃ, bhante, pavāremī’’ti vacanato. Sabbepi hi sannipatitā pacchā diṭṭhaṃ vā sutaṃ vā parisaṅkitaṃ vā vattāro honti. Anāgatānaṃ atthibhāvaṃ ñatvāpi ekaccānaṃ santike pavāraṇāvacanaṃ viya hoti. Sammukhībhūte cattāro sannipātāpetvā nissaggiyaṃ āpannacīvarādinissajjanaṃ viya pavāraṇā na hoti sabbāyattattā. ‘‘Samaggānaṃ pavāraṇā paññattā’’ti vacanañcettha sādhakaṃ. ‘‘Ito aññathā na vaṭṭati aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ananuññātattā’’ti upatissatthero vadati. ‘‘Thokatarehi tesaṃ santike pavāretabbaṃ ñattiṃ aṭṭhapetvāvā’’ti vuttaṃ. Āgantukā nāma navamito paṭṭhāyāgatā vā vajasatthanāvāsu vutthavassā vā honti.
237 有人写道:“邪见以十件事为基础,也就是‘如来……’等等。”又说:“没有布施……”等等。巴利
237. ‘‘Dasavatthukā micchādiṭṭhi hoti tathāgatotiādī’’ti likhitaṃ. ‘‘Natthi dinnantiādī’’ti vuttaṃ.
239 239. 写道:“应当与他一起自恣,说:‘我们观察之后就会知道。’”巴利
239. ‘‘Upaparikkhitvā jānissāmāti tena saha pavāretabba’’nti likhitaṃ.
5. 皮革犍度注释巴利
5. Cammakkhandhakavaṇṇanā
索纳咖古利维萨故事的注释巴利
Soṇakoḷivisavatthukathāvaṇṇanā
242 “八十……让人做”这句话,是在说明“聚集八万村长”这件事的原因。这里本该说“于八万村落中”,却说成了“于八十个千村落中”。以村为首的是村长,他们的人数有数千。所谓“业所染”,是借就近的说法来讲的。其实他们的眼药色,是由业、缘、时节所生的。本该说“因为某种该做的事”,却只说“因为某种”。这里的“如是”一词,是用在譬喻上的。如是,在譬喻、教导、询问、决定、承诺、譬喻中。向前看的人,是表示不恭敬意义的属格。然后,那人看见世尊香室的门关得很牢,就以神通随心所欲地前往,进入小屋后代为禀报。在精舍的阴影里,就是精舍渐渐扩大的阴影中。“啊!确实”写的是“啊!伟大”。世尊和许多人一起游行的记载,是为了通过具寿索那精进努力的示现,来激励那些没有发起精进的人,也是为了显示:为了保护这样柔嫩的脚,才允许穿凉鞋。巴利
242.Asītiyā…pe… kāretīti ‘‘asīti gāmikasahassāni sannipātāpetvā’’ti imassa kāraṇavacanaṃ. Tattha ‘‘gāmānaṃ asītiyā sahassesū’’ti vattabbe ‘‘asītiyā gāmasahassesū’’ti vuttaṃ. Gāmappamukhā gāmikā, tesaṃ sahassāni. ‘‘Kammacittīkatānī’’ti upacārena vuttaṃ. Kammapaccayautusamuṭṭhāne hi tesaṃ añjanavaṇṇabhāvo. ‘‘Kenacideva karaṇīyenā’’ti vattabbe ‘‘kenacidevā’’ti vuttaṃ. Ettha evaṃ-saddo opamme pavattati. Evamupamānopadesapucchāvadhāraṇapaṭiññātaopamme. Purato pekkhamānānanti anādaratthe sāmivacanaṃ. Tato pana bhagavato gandhakuṭiyā kavāṭaṃ subaddhaṃ passitvā icchitākārakusalatāya iddhiyā gantvā kuṭiṃ pavisitvā ārocesi. Vihārapacchāyāyanti vihārassa vaḍḍhamānacchāyāyaṃ. ‘‘Aho nūnāti aho mahanto’’ti likhitaṃ. Bhagavato sambahulehi saddhiṃ āhiṇḍanaṃ āyasmato soṇassa vīriyārambhanidassanena anāraddhavīriyānaṃ uttejanatthaṃ, evaṃ sukhumālānaṃ pādarakkhaṇatthaṃ upāhanā anuññātāti dassanatthañca.
索那出家这件事的注释巴利
Soṇassapabbajjākathāvaṇṇanā
243 在那里,要取相的意思就是:观察那些根的特征。巴利
243.Tattha ca nimittaṃ gaṇhāhīti tesaṃ indriyānaṃ ākāraṃ upalakkhehi.
244 244. “已决意”是指已经通达、亲自证见而安住。“决意于出离”等说法,既指涅槃,也指阿拉汉果。“那确实因为从一切烦恼中出离,所以称为‘出离’;因为从家宅中远离,所以称为‘远离’;因为没有瞋害,所以称为‘无瞋’;因为生在取灭尽之时,所以称为‘取灭尽’;因为生在渴爱灭尽之时,所以称为‘渴爱灭尽’;因为没有愚痴,所以称为‘无痴’。”这是所说的内容。有些论师说,这一切都是指阿拉汉果。“可能会有这样的情况”是指有时会这样,或者那位尊者会这样。返回者,知者。应做之事就是对自己应做的。或者就是这样的读法。在“决意于出离”这一项中,说的是阿拉汉果。有些论师说,在其余各项中,指的是涅槃。在“决意于无痴”这一项中,指的是涅槃。有些论师说,在其余各项中,指的是阿拉汉果。有人说:“在这一切当中,两者都有。”心的远离、已决意者的、以及取灭尽的——这里是业格义中用属格。见了诸处的生起与坏灭之后。巴利
244.Adhimutto hotīti paṭivijjhitvā paccakkhaṃ katvā ṭhito hoti. Nekkhammādhimuttotiādīhi nibbānaṃ, arahattañca vuttaṃ. ‘‘Tañhi sabbakilesehi nikkhantattā ‘nekkhamma’nti ca gehato pavivittattā ‘paviveko’ti ca byāpajjābhāvato ‘abyāpajja’nti ca arahattaṃ upādānassa khayante uppannattā ‘upādānakkhayo’ti ca taṇhāya khayante uppannattā ‘taṇhakkhayo’ti ca sammohābhāvato ‘asammoho’ti ca vuccatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Sabbehi arahattaṃ vuttanti keci. Siyā kho evamassāti kadāci evamassa, assa vā āyasmato evaṃ siyā. Paccāgacchanto jānanto. Karaṇīyamattānanti attano. So eva vā pāṭho. Nekkhammādhimuttoti imasmiṃyeva arahattaṃ kathitaṃ. Sesesu nibbānanti keci. Asammohādhimuttoti ettheva nibbānaṃ. Sesesu arahattanti keci. ‘‘Sabbesvevetesu ubhayampī’’ti vadanti. Pavivekañca cetaso, adhimuttassa, upādānakkhayassa cāti upayogatthe sāmivacanaṃ. Āyatanānaṃ uppādañca vayañca disvā.
对禁止一切纯青等说法的注释巴利
Sabbanīlikādipaṭikkhepakathāvaṇṇanā
246 “用染色布擦拭之后”这是一种读法。有人说“因为已经说过‘除去垢物等’,所以打两三个孔来用是可以的”,这种说法不能采纳。巴利
246. ‘‘Rañjanacoḷakena puñchitvā’’ti pāṭho. ‘‘Khallakādīni apanetvā’ti vuttattā dve tīṇi chiddāni katvā vaḷañjetuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti vadantānaṃ vādo na gahetabbo.
关于禁止车乘等的注释巴利
Yānādipaṭikkhepakathāvaṇṇanā
254 由于原文说“超过四指”,所以有些人认为四指以下是可以的。关于“两端红枕”这里写道:“不过,袈裟色是可以的,只是红花等染成的红色不行。”巴利
254. ‘‘Caturaṅgulādhikānī’’ti vuttattā caturaṅgulato heṭṭhā vaṭṭatīti eke. Ubhatolohitakūpadhānanti ettha ‘‘kāsāvaṃ pana vaṭṭati, kusumbhādirattameva na vaṭṭatī’’ti likhitaṃ.
关于禁止一切皮革等的注释巴利
Sabbacammapaṭikkhepādikathāvaṇṇanā
255 他们为什么这样做呢?这与你何干?巴利
255.Kissa tyāyanti kissa te ayaṃ.
256 “在家众所用”是指为在家众而做的。注释里写的是:“我允许在任何地方坐,这就是它的意思。”虽然《长部注》里说“除了棉垫,其他所有像牛毛毯之类用宝物缝边的都允许”,但到了律的语境里,因为要站在重戒的角度来处理,所以这里还是应该按这里所说的意思来理解。又说:“不过,在经教的说法中,因为也是针对在家众等人而说的,为了把他们包含进来,才说除了棉垫……都允许,看起来是这样。这是其他长老的说法。”巴利
256.Gihivikatanti gihīnaṃ atthāya kataṃ. ‘‘Yattha katthaci nisīdituṃ anujānāmīti attho’’ti likhitaṃ. Kiñcāpi dīghanikāyaṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘ṭhapetvā tūlikaṃ sabbāneva gonakādīni ratanaparisibbitāni vaṭṭantī’’ti vuttaṃ, atha kho vinayapariyāyaṃ patvā garuke ṭhātabbato idha vuttanayenevettha attho gahetabbo. ‘‘Tattha pana suttantikadesanāya gahaṭṭhādīnampi vasena vuttattā tesaṃ saṅgaṇhanatthaṃ ṭhapetvā ‘tūlikaṃ…pe… vaṭṭantī’ti vuttaṃ viya khāyatīti apare’’ti vuttaṃ.
259 鹿母是它的名字,风鹿也是它的名字。有记载写作“黑狮、黑面猴”。皮革不合用,那么它通过什么方式才合用的理由,后面会说明。有人说“按照个人情况开许的例外已经被否定”。既然“诸比丘,任何皮革都不应持用”这句话已经成立,那么这里说“诸比丘,牛皮”这句话,应当理解为:是因为担心后面在“诸比丘,在一切边地,允许用皮革做敷具”那里产生开许的联想,才这么说的。巴利
259.Migamātukoti tassa nāmaṃ. Vātamigoti ca tassa nāmaṃ. ‘‘Kāḷasīho kāḷamukho kapī’’ti likhitaṃ. Cammaṃ na vaṭṭatīti yena pariyāyena cammaṃ vaṭṭissati, so parato āvi bhavissati. ‘‘Attano puggalikavasena parihāro paṭikkhitto’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Na, bhikkhave, kiñci cammaṃ dhāretabba’’nti ettāvatā siddhe ‘‘na, bhikkhave, gocamma’’nti idaṃ parato ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, sabbapaccantimesu janapadesu cammāni attharaṇānī’’ti ettha anumatippasaṅgabhayā vuttanti veditabbaṃ.
第6篇 药犍度注释巴利
6. Bhesajjakkhandhakavaṇṇanā
五药等内容的注释巴利
Pañcabhesajjādikathāvaṇṇanā
260 若既是药又是油膏这句话,要从后面由这两者反而更加瘦弱等说法看出它与前文相矛盾,因此应当知道,这是不顾因缘、只按现前所得而说的。为什么不顾因缘而说呢?因为用意在于顾及其他。因为在一切佛陀的时代,酥油等也都是七日药,世尊正是着眼于这一点,所以才说应以作食而渗透,且不显现为粗食。因为按时受取、按时食用在这里并没有限定时间。那么世尊顾及其他的用意又从何成立呢?那些根本药等受取后是尽形寿的,已有时间限定。至于诸比丘,我允许这五种药按时受取、按时食用这句话,应当知道它的意思是储存之后,在后续诸日按时才允许食用。否则,因无殊胜之故,若既是药又是油膏这样的寻思就不可能生起。如果说因为允许了美食,所以是随顺疾病的适宜之物而说?这也不对,因为可以看到会导致更加瘦弱等状态。如果说像依甘蔗汁而有糖那样,也应当说依新酥而有酥,所以新酥不应另说?不对,因为用意在于显示差别。就像虽然取了糖就已成立,但为了把甘蔗汁安立在糖浆的位置上,后面还是另许了甘蔗汁,这是就甘蔗的一般性而言。同样,新酥是为了显示差别之法,所以另许新酥,应当知道这个道理。而它的差别之法,应当依据药戒的注释来理解。因为那里说想要煮酥而食的人,即使未洗也可以煮。那里说的是已煮的酥,不是未煮的。糖也一样。而新酥则是未煮的。巴利
260.‘‘Yaṃbhesajjañceva assā’’ti parato ‘‘tadubhayena bhiyyoso mattāya kissā hontī’’tiādinā virodhadassanato nidānānapekkhaṃ yathālābhavasena vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Yathānidānaṃ kasmā na vuttanti ce? Tadaññāpekkhādhippāyato. Sabbabuddhakālepi hi sappiādīnaṃ sattāhakālikabhāvāpekkhāti tathā vacanena bhagavato adhippāyo, teneva ‘‘āhāratthañca phareyya, na ca oḷāriko āhāro paññāyeyyā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tathā hi kāle paṭiggahetvā kāle paribhuñjitunti ettha ca kālaparicchedo na kato. Kutoyeva pana labbhā tadaññāpekkhādhippāyo bhagavato mūlabhesajjādīni tāni paṭiggahetvā yāvajīvanti kālaparicchedo. Yaṃ pana ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, tāni pañca bhesajjāni kāle paṭiggahetvā kāle paribhuñjitu’’nti vacanaṃ, taṃ ‘‘sannidhiṃ katvā aparāparasmiṃ divase kāle eva paribhuñjituṃ anujānāmī’’ti adhippāyato vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Aññathā atisayattābhāvato ‘‘yaṃ bhesajjañceva assā’’tiādi vitakkuppādo na sambhavati. Paṇītabhojanānumatiyā pasiddhattā ābādhānurūpasappāyāpekkhāya vuttānīti ce? Tañca na, bhiyyoso mattāya kisādibhāvāpattidassanato. Yathā ‘‘ucchurasaṃ upādāya phāṇita’’nti vuttaṃ, tathā ‘‘navanītaṃ upādāya sappi’’nti vattabbato navanītaṃ visuṃ na vattabbanti ce? Na, visesadassanādhippāyato. Yathā phāṇitaggahaṇena siddhepi parato ucchuraso visuṃ anuññāto ucchusāmaññato guḷodakaṭṭhāne ṭhapanādhippāyato. Tathā navanīte visesavidhidassanādhippāyato navanītaṃ visuṃ anuññātanti veditabbaṃ. Visesavidhi panassa bhesajjasikkhāpadaṭṭhakathāvasena veditabbaṃ. Vuttañhi tattha ‘‘pacitvā sappiṃ katvā paribhuñjitukāmena adhotampi pacituṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.622). Tattha sappi pakkāva hoti, nāpakkā. Tathā phāṇitampi. Navanītaṃ apakkameva.
这里有人问:像生酥那样,甘蔗汁也应该放在七日药的部分里来说吗?不应该这样说。为什么?如果放在七日药的部分里说,那么甘蔗汁就会像糖一样,按照糖的名义,有病的人被禁止用糖蜜,甘蔗汁也同样被禁止;如果不说,那它就像糖一样,不算作糖蜜。这里没有说,后来通过另外的说法,它才被放在糖水的位置上。正是为了这个目的,它在午后允许喝饮料的部分里被提到。那么,它就是夜分药吗?不是,因为和注释相违。如果说“不取‘依’的‘所依’义”?这话是什么意思呢——“应知依甘蔗汁而制成的糖蜜”,这是尼萨耆亚注释里的话,那里“依”的意思是把它作为缘。不是,因为看不到后面还有别的动作。比如“缘眼及色”等说法里,“缘”这个表示努力的说法后面可以看到“生起”这个别的动作,但“依甘蔗汁”这里看不到别的动作。这种说法不对,因为即使没有别的动作,这个说法也能成立。比如“四大及四大所造色”这里,虽然没有别的动作,表示努力的说法也成立,这里也应该一样吗?不是,因为那里还观待其余的经文。比如说了四大所造,那段经文还观待“或转起之色”这个剩余的读法,而这个注释的话不观待任何经文。因为注释师说的是完整的话。或者,那色只是施设而已。比如“有所造色”等说法里只是施设,这里也应这样理解。但这里“依甘蔗汁”是以甘蔗汁为起点、从它开始的意思,所以说“无病比丘索求混有甘蔗汁的食物来吃,应以美食学处来治,比丘尼则以应悔过”——有人说这不对。他们应该先指出没有差别的理由,然后再说。巴利
Etthāha – navanītaṃ viya ucchurasopi sattāhakālikapāḷiyaṃ eva vattabboti? Na vattabbo. Kasmā? Sattāhakālikapāḷiyaṃ vutte ucchuraso guḷāpadesena yathā agilānassa phāṇitaṃ paṭisiddhaṃ, tathā ucchurasopīti āpajjati, avutte pana guḷaṃ viya so phāṇitasaṅkhyaṃ na gacchati. Idha avatvā pacchā vacanena guḷodakaṭṭhāneva ṭhapito hoti. Tadatthameva pacchābhattaṃ vaṭṭanakapānakādhikāre vutto, tasmā eva yāmakālikoti ce? Na, aṭṭhakathāvirodhato. Na upādāyatthassa nissayatthattāti ce? Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti – ‘‘ucchurasaṃ upādāya ucchuvikati phāṇitanti veditabbā’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.623) yadetaṃ nissaggiyaṭṭhakathāvacanaṃ, tattha ‘‘upādāyā’’ti imassa nissāya paccayaṃ katvāti atthoti. Na, parato aparakiriyāya adassanato. Yathā ‘‘cakkhuñca paṭicca rūpe cā’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.204, 400; 3.421, 425; saṃ. ni. 2.43) ‘‘paṭiccā’’ti imassa ussukkavacanassa ‘‘uppajjatī’’ti aparakiriyā dissati, na tathā ‘‘ucchurasaṃ upādāyā’’ti ettha aparakiriyā dissatīti. Ayuttametaṃ tattha tadabhāvepi siddhattā. Yathā ‘‘cattāro ca mahābhūtā catunnañca mahābhūtānaṃ upādāya rūpa’’nti (dha. sa. 584) ettha aparakiriyāya abhāvepi ussukkavacanaṃ siddhaṃ, tathā etthāpi siyāti? Na, tattha pāṭhasesāpekkhattā. Yathā cattāro mahābhūtā upādāya vuttaṃ, pavattakaṃ vā rūpanti imaṃ pāṭhasesaṃ sā pāḷi apekkhati, na tathā idaṃ aṭṭhakathāvacanaṃ kañci pāṭhaṃ apekkhati. Paripuṇṇavādino hi aṭṭhakathācariyā. Saññākaraṇamattaṃ vā tassa rūpassa. ‘‘Atthi rūpaṃ upādāyā’’tiādīsu (dha. sa. 584) hi saññākaraṇamattaṃ, evamidhāpīti veditabbaṃ. Idha pana ‘‘ucchurasaṃ upādāyā’’ti ucchurasaṃ ādiṃ katvā, tato paṭṭhāyāti attho, tasmā ‘‘ucchurasena saṃsaṭṭhaṃ bhattaṃ agilāno bhikkhu viññāpetvā bhuñjanto paṇītabhojanasikkhāpadena kāretabbo, bhikkhunī pāṭidesaniyenā’’ti vuttaṃ, taṃ ayuttanti eke. Te visesahetuno abhāvaṃ dassetvā paññāpetabbā.
到这里,如果有人错误地理解“依甘蔗汁,即以甘蔗汁为起点”等语句的含义,认为“依甘蔗汁”这句话就说明甘蔗汁就是糖蜜,那么“或未煮”这句话就没有意义了,因为“未煮”已经涵盖了甘蔗汁。反过来,如果认为“或已煮”才说明甘蔗汁是糖蜜,那么“依甘蔗汁”这句话就没有意义了——此答复已说,彼被证成为无答。他们说“或未煮”是指比丘自己未煮,“无事之已煮”是指比丘自己没有因缘而煮,因此必须另外说明“有事之已煮”。但这样的解释是错误显示的。为什么?因为《大义注》中说“焦甘蔗糖或捣甘蔗糖只在午前适用”,而“有事之已煮”这句话与主张相违,所以没有说。又因为《大般遮梨耶》中说:“然而‘这有事之已煮适用还是不适用’——这样提问之后,说‘甘蔗糖午后不适用者确实不存在’,这是合理的。”(巴利律注2.623)因此“有事之已煮”之义也已经说了,所以是难以显示的,这就成立了。“为食之义”:食物之目的;食物之作用即存养,此为其义。巴利
Ettāvatā ‘‘ucchurasaṃ upādāyāti ucchurasaṃ ādiṃ katvā’’tiādīnaṃ padānaṃ atthaṃ micchā gahetvā yadi ‘‘ucchurasaṃ upādāyā’’ti vacanena ucchuraso phāṇitaṃ siyā, ‘‘apakkā vā’’ti vacanaṃ niratthakaṃ apakkavacanena ucchurasassa gahitattā. Atha ‘‘pakkā vā’’ti vacanena ucchuraso phāṇitanti siddhaṃ, ‘‘ucchurasaṃ upādāyā’’ti vacanaṃ niratthakanti uttaraṃ vuttaṃ, taṃ anuttaranti sādhitaṃ hoti. So cetehi apakkā vāti sāmaṃ bhikkhunā apakkā vā. Avatthukapakkā vāti bhikkhunāva sāmaṃ vinā vatthunā pakkā vāti attho. Tasmā aññathā ‘‘savatthukapakkā vā’’ti ca vattabbanti attho dassito, so duṭṭhu dassito. Kasmā? Mahāaṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘jhāmaucchuphāṇitaṃ vā koṭṭitaucchuphāṇitaṃ vā purebhattameva vaṭṭatī’’ti vuttattā, ‘‘savatthukapakkā vā’’ti vacanassa ca laddhivirodhato avuttattā. ‘‘Mahāpaccariyaṃ pana ‘etaṃ savatthukapakkaṃ vaṭṭati no vaṭṭatī’ti pucchaṃ katvā ‘ucchuphāṇitaṃ pacchābhattaṃ no vaṭṭanakaṃ nāma natthī’ti vuttaṃ, taṃ yutta’’nti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.623) vuttattā ca savatthukapakkā vāti attho ca vuttoyeva hoti, tasmā duddassitoti siddhaṃ. Āhāratthanti āhārapayojanaṃ. Āhārakiccaṃ yāpananti atthoti ca.
262 所谓“受用油”,就是指用七日药来受用。巴利
262.Telaparibhogenāti sattāhakālikaparibhogena.
263 “有因缘”在这里应当知道,按有病和无病分成两种有因缘。因为在非时食学处的无犯部分中,对一夜药等三种并没有区分,一概说为有因缘。在这个犍度里说:“诸比丘,我允许病者用糖,无病者用糖水;诸比丘,我允许病者用盐醋,无病者用水掺和。”所以可以确定,有因缘按有病和无病分为两种。不然的话,在没有因缘时,对糖水等就会犯戒。这样一来就与经文相违。巴利
263.Sati paccayeti ettha satipaccayatā gilānāgilānavasena dvidhā veditabbā. Vikālabhojanasikkhāpadassa hi anāpattivāre yāmakālikādīnaṃ tiṇṇampi avisesena satipaccayatā vuttā. Imasmiṃ khandhake ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, gilānassa guḷaṃ, agilānassa guḷodakaṃ, anujānāmi, bhikkhave, gilānassa loṇasovīrakaṃ, agilānassa udakasambhinna’’nti vuttaṃ. Tasmā siddhaṃ satipaccayatā gilānāgilānavasena duvidhāti. Aññathā asati paccaye guḷodakādīsu āpajjati. Tato ca pāḷivirodho.
“Piṭṭhehi”是指研磨油。“Koṭṭhaphala”是Koṭṭha树的果实,也有写成“或者Madana果”的。“Hiṅgujatu”是阿魏树的茎、嫩枝和芽熬煮制成的树脂。“Hiṅgusipāṭikā”是它的根和枝熬煮制成的树脂。“Taka”是这种树的树皮煮出来的汁水。“Takapattī”是它的叶子煮出来的汁水。“Takapaṇṇī”是它的果实煮出来的汁水。另一种说法是:“Taka”就是虫胶,“Takapattī”是kittima-loma虫胶,“Takapaṇṇī”是熟虫胶。“Ubbhida”是指盐碱土做成的。巴利
Piṭṭhehīti pisitatelehi. Koṭṭhaphalanti koṭṭharukkhassa phalaṃ. ‘‘Madanaphalaṃ vā’’ti ca likhitaṃ. Hiṅgujatu nāma hiṅgurukkhassa daṇḍapallavapavāḷapākanipphannā. Hiṅgusipāṭikā nāma tassa mūlasākhapākanipphannā. Takaṃ nāma tassa rukkhassa tacapākodakaṃ. Takapattīti tassa pattapākodakaṃ. Takapaṇṇīti tassa phalapākodakaṃ. Atha vā ‘‘takaṃ nāma lākhā. Takapattīti kittimalomalākhā. Takapaṇṇīti pakkalākhā’’ti likhitaṃ. Ubbhidaṃ nāma ūsapaṃsumayaṃ.
264 264. Chakaṇa 就是牛粪。Pākatikacuṇṇa 指的是没有煮过的涩粉,所以他们这样说:除了香粉,其他一切都可以用。Cālitehi 指的是过滤过的。巴利
264.Chakaṇaṃ gomayaṃ. Pākatikacuṇṇaṃ nāma apakkakasāvacuṇṇaṃ, tena ‘‘ṭhapetvā gandhacuṇṇaṃ sabbaṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti vadanti. Cālitehīti parissāvitehi.
265 用各种材料制成的,意思是用各种药物制成的。巴利
265.Nānāsambhārehi katanti nānosadhehi.
关于糖等开许的注释巴利
Guḷādianujānanakathāvaṇṇanā
274 “自己煮成的”和“一起煮成的”看起来像是在说明两种情形,所以对牛奶等来说,只要加热到一定程度就算煮过了。因此,它们就和生米等一样了。巴利
274. Sāmaṃ pakkaṃ samapakkanti duvidhaṃ viya dīpeti, tasmā khīrādīsu uṇhamattameva pāko. Tena uttaṇḍulādisamānā honti.
276-8 他们说:在出现“以佛为首”的地方,不称“比丘僧团”而称“僧团”,是为了把世尊也包含进去。“Nāga”指象。巴利
276-8. ‘‘Buddhappamukha’nti āgataṭṭhāne ‘bhikkhusaṅgho’ti avatvā ‘saṅgho’ti vuccati bhagavantampi saṅgahetu’’nti vadanti. Nāgoti hatthī.
279 “令狭窄”是指对比丘的粪道和比丘尼的尿道,按同样的方式。因为没有被禁止,所以烧灼是可以的。那么,按照外科手术的类比,也不可以吗?不是的,因为这是对已经禁止的事情再次加以禁止,是为了说明应当禁止的范围之极限。这话是什么意思呢?先前已经禁止的外科手术,后来汇总起来,通过“诸比丘……土喇咤亚”两次对外科手术作了禁止。因此,所谓应当禁止的是狭窄处周围两指宽的地方。这说明从外科手术本身来说并没有(额外的罪)。再者,先前只在狭窄处禁止了外科手术,后来连狭窄处周围两指宽的地方也禁止了。所以,那只是对狭窄处附近的禁止,并不是对另外那个(外科手术本身)的禁止,这一点已经成立。在这里,“刀”就像在“应当为他寻找持刀者”等语句中那样,是指任何用来切割的东西。因此说“或用刺”等等。然而在这里应当知道,在比丘尼分别中,通过枝条、涂药口的方式已经开许了涂药。另有一些人,把“或外科手术”这个读法加以变通后,施行灌肠手术。据说“Vatthī”是指火罐。他们解释说,用那个来切割就叫作灌肠手术。应当向他们展示“应当为他寻找持刀者”这一句的分别,加以驳斥。“Aṇḍavuḍḍhī”是疝气。“Ādānavattī”意思是绷带。巴利
279.Sambādheti vaccamagge bhikkhussa bhikkhuniyā ca passāvamaggepi anulomato. Dahanaṃ paṭikkhepābhāvā vaṭṭati. Satthavattikammānulomato na vaṭṭatīti ce? Na, paṭikkhittapaṭikkhepā, paṭikkhipitabbassa tapparamatādīpanato, kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti? Pubbe paṭikkhittampi satthakammaṃ sampiṇḍetvā pacchā ‘‘na, bhikkhave…pe… thullaccayassā’’ti dvikkhattuṃ satthakammassa paṭikkhepo kato. Tena sambādhassa sāmantā dvaṅgulaṃ paṭikkhipitabbaṃ nāma. Satthavattikammato uddhaṃ natthīti dīpeti. Kiñca bhiyyo pubbe sambādheyeva satthakammaṃ paṭikkhittaṃ, pacchā sambādhassa sāmantā dvaṅgulampi paṭikkhittaṃ, tasmā tasseva paṭikkhepo, netarassāti siddhaṃ. Ettha ‘‘satthaṃ nāma satthahārakaṃ vāssa pariyeseyyā’’tiādīsu viya yena chindati, taṃ sabbaṃ. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘kaṇṭakena vā’’tiādi. Khāradānaṃ panettha bhikkhunivibhaṅge pasākhe lepamukhena anuññātanti veditabbaṃ. Eke pana ‘‘satthakammaṃ vā’’ti pāṭhaṃ vikappetvā vatthikammaṃ karonti. ‘‘Vatthī’’ti kira agghikā vuccati. Tāya chindanaṃ vatthikammaṃ nāmāti ca atthaṃ vaṇṇayanti, te ‘‘satthahārakaṃ vāssa pariyeseyyā’’ti imassa padabhājanīyaṃ dassetvā paṭikkhipitabbā. Aṇḍavuḍḍhīti vātaṇḍako. Ādānavattīti ānahavatti.
禁止人肉的说法注释巴利
Manussamaṃsapaṭikkhepakathāvaṇṇanā
280 因为经文里说“诸比丘,人肉……犯土喇咤亚”,又说“诸比丘,不应不观察……犯恶作”,所以不观察而食就同时犯恶作和土喇咤亚两种罪。因此,即使是可食用的肉,只要没有先观察就吃,也还是犯恶作。有些人说:“只有知道是肉时才犯。对于糕饼之类的食物,不知道是肉的人,有什么好观察的?”另一些人说:“即使不知道,也犯,因为这是笼统规定的。”巴利
280. ‘‘Na, bhikkhave, manussamaṃsaṃ…pe… thullaccayassā’’ti vuttattā, ‘‘na ca, bhikkhave, appaṭi…pe… dukkaṭassā’’ti ca vuttattā appaṭivekkhaṇadukkaṭañca thullaccayañcāti dve āpajjati, tasmā kappiyamaṃsepi appaṭivekkhaṇapaccayā dukkaṭameva. Keci ‘‘maṃsabhāvaṃ jānantova āpajjati. Pūvādīsu ajānantassa kā paccavekkhaṇā’’ti vadanti. Ajānantopi āpajjati sāmaññena vuttattāti keci.
象肉等禁止说的注释巴利
Hatthimaṃsādipaṭikkhepakathāvaṇṇanā
281 281.“这些……一切都不允许”,这句话只是说明这十种——人肉等等——都是不许可的,并不是在说明犯戒轻重类别的说法。“无论知道还是不知道,吃了就有罪”,这也是没有明确限定的说法,因为它没有说“这是哪一种罪”。这两处说法,是根据前面已经确定的原则——对人肉等犯土喇咤亚,对其余的犯恶作——才能理解其用意,所以才这样说的。这里的用意是:因为这些人肉等是不许可的,所以对人肉等犯土喇咤亚罪;对其余的一切情况,处处都是恶作罪。因为在经文本身中,就是把血等归入肉类,然后说“诸比丘,人肉……土喇咤亚”。就在同一处,对象肉等也制定了恶作罪。因此,锡兰的注释中说:“对人肉,或头发,或指甲,或骨头,或血,都是土喇咤亚。”正是由于这一点——巴利
281.Imesaṃ…pe… sabbaṃ na vaṭṭatīti idaṃ dasannampi manussamaṃsādīnaṃ akappiyabhāvamattaparidīpanavacanaṃ, nāpattivibhāgadassanavacanaṃ. Yaṃ kiñci ñatvā vā añatvā vā khādantassa āpattiyevāti idampi aniyamitavacanameva ‘‘ayaṃ nāma āpattī’’ti avuttattā . Tadubhayampi heṭṭhā manussādīnaṃ maṃsādīsu thullaccayadukkaṭāpattiyo hontīti gahitanayehi adhippāyo jānituṃ sakkāti evaṃ vuttaṃ. Tatrāyaṃ adhippāyo – yasmā etesaṃ manussādīnaṃ maṃsādīni akappiyāni, tasmā manussānaṃ maṃsādīsu thullaccayāpatti. Sesānaṃ sabbattha dukkaṭāpattīti. Pāṭheyeva hi lohitādiṃ maṃsagatikaṃ katvā ‘‘na, bhikkhave, manussamaṃsaṃ…pe… thullaccayassā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tattheva hatthādīnaṃ maṃsādīsupi dukkaṭāpatti paññattā. Tena vuttaṃ sīhaḷaṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘manussamaṃse vā kese vā nakhe vā aṭṭhimhi vā lohite vā thullaccayamevā’’ti vuttaṃ. Iminā eva –
骨头、血、皮、毛,这些都不允许。巴利
‘‘Aṭṭhipi lohitaṃ cammaṃ, lomamesaṃ na kappatī’’ti. –
《小戒》偈颂句的含义与意旨很容易理解。在“接受”这一处,说的是因不恭敬而犯的恶作。他们说:“水生动物、人等的肉也是不可以的。”虽然有龙王所说的过患,但只取“嫌责”这一点,而说“因为厌恶”。巴利
Khuddasikkhāgāthāpadassa attho ca adhippāyo ca suviññeyyoti. Paṭiggahaṇeti ettha anādariyadukkaṭaṃ vuttaṃ. ‘‘Udakamanussādimaṃsampi na vaṭṭatī’’ti vadanti. Nāgarājena vuttādīnave satipi ujjhāyanādhikārameva gahetvā ‘‘paṭikūlatāyā’’ti vuttaṃ.
关于粥、蜜丸等的注释巴利
Yāgumadhugoḷakādikathāvaṇṇanā
283 “应依法处理”这句话是结集者说的。世尊确实不曾把同一条学处制定两次,所以有些人说:这是就这类情形而说的。这是针对最初制定而言,即便如此,那些比丘也没有犯戒。为什么?因为数数食学处的缘起中说:“而且我们一早就去托钵,已经吃过了。”在《母经分别》中也说:“所谓数数食,就是已经受请五种食物中的某一种,却放下那种,去吃其他五种食物中的某一种,这叫做数数食。”因此可以确定,所谓其他食物,就是从受请中得到的任何食物。由于从可饮粥的受请中得到的并不是食物,所以那些比丘心想“在这里没有犯戒”就吃了。不过,这里因为说了“应依法处理”,所以吃下从其他受请中得到的食物才犯戒,吃别的则不犯,这是被允许的。从那以后,在无犯的条款中就说到“常施食、筹施食、半月食、斋日食、月初日食”。但在先前毗舍离制定戒律的时候,这些还没有;如果有,就会和缘起及《母经分别》相违。因此,由于缘起中说“而且我们一早就去托钵,已经吃过了”,而且在句分别中也不加区分地说“吃其他五种食物中的某一种”,所以无论是先受请还是后受请,放下受请的食物而只吃未受请的,就犯戒,否则不犯。虽然这样算是犯了,但因为说过“诸比丘,除了受请之外,不得食用他人可饮的粥”,所以先受请的食物之外,后来得到的受请食物,以及吃常施食等时,是犯戒的。这样,犯戒就好像成了已发生的事,为了避免由此产生追加制定的问题,也为了避免在未受请的食物上产生犯戒的问题,同时把最初制定的学处归结为这个含义,世尊才说“应依法处理”。因此从那以后,只有吃后来受请的食物才犯戒。而在这些当中,吃常施食等则不犯。正因为这样,具寿优波离长老在无犯的条款中加入了“常施食”等五个词句而结集。那些大德是了解意趣的,所以最初世尊所说的“除了五种食物之外,一切处都不犯”这句话,后来也随护它,不说非食的蜜丸,而只说可饮的粥。老师是这样说的。巴利
283.Yathādhammo kāretabboti idaṃ saṅgītikārakavacanaṃ. Na hi bhagavā tameva sikkhāpadaṃ dvikkhattuṃ paññapesi, evaṃ evarūpesūti eke. Paṭhamapaññattameva sandhāya vuttaṃ, tathāpi na ca te bhikkhū sāpattikā jātā. Kathaṃ? Paramparabhojanasikkhāpadassa aṭṭhuppattiyā. ‘‘Apica mayaṃ kālasseva piṇḍāya caritvā bhuñjimhā’’ti vuttaṃ. Mātikāvibhaṅge (pāci. 227) ca ‘‘paramparabhojanaṃ nāma pañcannaṃ bhojanānaṃ aññatarena bhojanena nimantito, taṃ ṭhapetvā aññaṃ pañcannaṃ bhojanānaṃ aññataraṃ bhojanaṃ bhuñjati, etaṃ paramparabhojanaṃ nāmā’’ti vuttaṃ, tasmā aññaṃ bhojanaṃ nāma nimantanato laddhaṃ yaṃ kiñcīti siddhaṃ. Yasmā na bhojjayāgunimantanato laddhabhojanaṃ, tasmā ‘‘ettha anāpattī’’ti te bhikkhū paribhuñjiṃsūti. Ettha ‘‘yathādhammo kāretabbo’’ti vuttattā pana aññanimantanato laddhabhojanameva bhuñjantassa āpatti, netaranti anuññātaṃ. Tato paṭṭhāya tassa anāpattivāre ‘‘niccabhatte salākabhatte pakkhike uposathike pāṭipadike’’ti vuttaṃ. Pubbe vesāliyā paññattakāle natthi, yadi atthi, aṭṭhuppattimātikāvibhaṅgavirodho, tasmā ‘‘apica mayaṃ kālasseva piṇḍāya caritvā bhuñjimhā’’ti aṭṭhuppattiyaṃ vuttattā, padabhājanepi ‘‘aññaṃ pañcannaṃ bhojanānaṃ aññataraṃ bhojanaṃ bhuñjatī’’ti avisesena vuttattā ca paṭhamaṃ vā pacchā vā nimantitaṃ bhojanaṃ ṭhapetvā animantitameva bhuñjantassa āpatti, netaranti kiñcāpi āpannaṃ, ‘‘na, bhikkhave, aññatra nimantitena aññassa bhojjayāgu paribhuñjitabbā’’ti vuttattā pana paṭhamanimantitabhojanato aññaṃ pacchā laddhaṃ nimantitabhojanaṃ, niccabhattādīni ca bhuñjantassa āpattīti āpajjamānaṃ viya jātanti anupaññattippasaṅganivāraṇaṃ, animantanabhojane āpattippasaṅganivāraṇañca karonto, paṭhamapaññattisikkhāpadameva iminā atthena pariṇāmento ca ‘‘yathādhammo kāretabbo’’ti bhagavā āha, tasmā tato paṭṭhāya pacchā nimantanabhojanaṃ bhuñjantasseva āpatti. Tesu na niccabhattādīnīti āpannaṃ. Tenevāyasmā upālitthero tassa anāpattivāre ‘‘niccabhatte’’tiādīni pañca padāni pakkhipitvā saṅgāyi. Adhippāyaññū hi te mahānāgā, tasmā paṭhamameva yaṃ bhagavatā vuttaṃ ‘‘pañca bhojanāni ṭhapetvā sabbattha anāpattī’’ti vacanaṃ, pacchāpi taṃ anurakkhantena abhojanaṃ madhugoḷakaṃ aparāmasitvā bhojjayāgu eva vuttāti evaṃ ācariyo.
这里有人问:就像那位长老用后来得到的理由,把常施食等编进(戒律)那样,同样地,在衣犍度里把数数食编进去之后,为什么不说“诸比丘,已出衣期的比丘有六种开许”呢?回答说:是为了显示前面所说的理由。否则,这条学处就会在毗舍离和盲者林两地各制一半。如果不是这样,那些比丘就成了犯戒的人,但他们并不是犯戒的人,因为即使在还没有禁止的时候,也看到他们心生疑惑。经里说:“那么,婆罗门,你就给比丘们吧。比丘们因为心有疑惑,不肯接受。”正是为了消除他们“这会不会是专门指定给我们的”这种疑惑,世尊在让他们“吃吧”而他们吃了之后,才说:“诸比丘,我允许粥和蜜丸。”同样地,在这里,他们被已经制定的数数食学处压住,心想:那还怎么吃数数食呢?对此,有些老师说:那些比丘虽然依数数食学处知道“别人的食物是不允许的”,但因为世尊另外开许说“诸比丘,我允许粥……”,他们就以为“像初供、大粗食等一样,是允许的”,于是吃了。所以缘起里说“而且我们一大早就用该吃的粥填饱了”等等。这种说法并不合理,因为它和缘起、母经分别相违,会导致在无犯条款里常施食等根本不可能存在,也绕不开比丘们成为犯戒者这一点,还会因为错误执取的因缘,推出世尊曾经开许过的结论。因为世尊有时从戒律的角度,即使本来是允许的,也会禁止,比如“以偈颂吟唱得来的食物,我不该吃”。所以,针对世尊的意趣,才说“他们心有疑惑,不肯接受”;而针对学处,世尊也说“诸比丘,我允许粥……”,只是为了表明自己的意趣。世尊的意趣是很难把握的。就像对婆罗门那碗粥,因为没有人祈请,世尊就禁止说“不该吃”。可是阿难长老祈请之后做好的三辛粥,世尊并没有说“阿难,即使是祈请来的,那也是不允许的”,而只是说“阿难,即使是放在室内煮的”等等。因此,从“如果不是放在室内煮的,那就允许”这一意趣的显示来看,世尊是在支持关于精美食物、汤和饭的祈请学处,也就是说,即使是世尊也是允许的,更何况是我们呢。巴利
Etthāha – yathā pacchāladdhalesena therena niccabhattādipakkhepo kato, evaṃ kathinakkhandhake paramparabhojanaṃ pakkhipitvā ‘‘atthatakathinānaṃ vo, bhikkhave, cha kappissantī’’ti kimatthaṃ na vuccanti? Vuccate – yathāvuttalesanidassanatthaṃ. Aññathā idaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ vesāliyaṃ, andhakavinde cāti ubhayattha upaḍḍhupaḍḍhena paññattaṃ siyā. No ce, sāpattikā bhikkhū siyuṃ, na ca te sāpattikā appaṭikkhittepi tesaṃ kukkuccadassanato. ‘‘Tena hi, brāhmaṇa, bhikkhūnaṃ dehīti. Bhikkhū kukkuccāyantā na paṭiggaṇhantī’’ti hi vuttaṃ. Tesañhi ‘‘paribhuñjathā’’ti bhagavato āṇattiyā paribhuttānampi ‘‘odissakaṃ nu kho idaṃ amhāka’’nti vimatippattānaṃ vimativinodanatthaṃ ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, yāguñca madhugoḷakañcā’’ti vuttaṃ. Evamidhāpete paññattaṃ paramparabhojanasikkhāpadaṃ omadditvā paramparabhojanaṃ kathaṃ bhuñjissantīti. Etthāhu keci ācariyā paramparabhojanasikkhāpadeneva ‘‘aññassa bhojanaṃ na kappatī’’ti jānantāpi ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, yāguñcā’’ti visuṃ anuññātattā ‘‘paṭaggidānamahāvikaṭādi viya kappatī’’ti saññāya bhuñjiṃsu. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘apica mayaṃ kālasseva bhojjayāguyā dhātā’’tiādi, taṃ ayuttaṃ tattha aṭṭhuppattimātikāvibhaṅgavirodhena anāpattivāre niccabhattādīnaṃ asambhavappasaṅgato, bhikkhūnaṃ sāpattikabhāvānatikkamanato, micchāgāhahetuppasaṅgena bhagavatā anuññātappasaṅgato ca. Te hi bhikkhū yasmā bhagavā katthaci vinayavasena kappiyampi ‘‘gāthābhigītaṃ me abhojaneyya’’nti (saṃ. ni. 1.194; su. ni. 81; mi. pa. 4.5.9) paṭikkhipati, tasmā bhagavato adhippāyaṃ pati ‘‘kukkuccāyantā na paṭiggaṇhantī’’ti vuttaṃ, sikkhāpadaṃ pati bhagavāpi attano adhippāyappakāsanatthameva ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, yāguñcā’’ti āha. Duravaggāho hi bhagavato adhippāyo. Tathā hi bhāradvājassa pāyāsaṃ abhojaneyyanti akataviññattippasaṅgato paṭikkhipi. Ānandattherena viññāpetvā sajjitaṃ tekaṭulayāguṃ pana ‘‘yadapi, ānanda, viññattaṃ, tadapi akappiya’’nti avatvā ‘‘yadapi, ānanda, antovuttha’’ntiādimevāha. Tena no ce taṃ antovutthaṃ kappatīti adhippāyadassanena paṇītabhojanasūpodanaviññattisikkhāpadāni upatthambheti bhagavatopi kappati, pageva amhākanti.
284 世尊允许病人用糖,这是依据“诸比丘,那些适合病人比丘食用的东西”这句话来说的,因此他们对这里的接受生起了疑惑。而在这里,本来应该说“诸比丘,我允许病人用糖水”,但因为重点在糖上,所以先说了先前已允许的,然后才允许非病人的糖水。因此,病人有因缘时可以用糖,没有因缘时糖水也可以用,这就说明了其中的差别。对此,有人说:“糖水在时限药中属于七日药,因为是世尊特别允许的,超过七日就犯恶作。”这种说法不合理,因为与水混合后,它就失去了七日药的性质。有人说:“就像芒果等与水混合后变成时分药一样,它也失去了七日药的性质,之后便归入尽形寿药。”这种说法是合理的,而且因为是世尊特别允许的,即使没有审察也没有过失。有人说:“因为说的是‘糖水’,所以它是水性的。”如果与水混合就成了水性,那蜂蜜也应该是这样,因为它也是这样被允许的。不应这样认为,如果它是水性的,那就应该不用接受就可以用,但事实并非如此——正如某部《甘提帕达》中所说:“在任何情况下都应审察之后再接受。”巴利
284.Gilānasseva bhagavatā guḷo anuññātoti ‘‘yāni kho pana tāni gilānānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ paṭisāyanīyānī’’ti (pārā. 622) vacanavasena vuttaṃ, teneva te idha paṭiggahaṇe kukkuccāyiṃsu. Idha pana ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, gilānassa guḷodaka’’nti vattabbe guḷādhikārattā pubbe anuññātañca vatvā agilānassa guḷodakaṃ anuññātaṃ, tena gilānena sati paccaye guḷo paribhuñjitabbo, guḷodakaṃ asati paccayepi vaṭṭatīti imaṃ visesaṃ dīpeti. Tattha ‘‘guḷodakaṃ kālikesu sattāhakālikaṃ, bhagavatā odissānuññātattā sattāhātikkamena dukkaṭa’’nti vadanti, taṃ na yuttaṃ, udakasambhinnattā sattāhakālikabhāvaṃ jahati. ‘‘Yathā ambādi udakasambhinnaṃ yāmakālikaṃ jātaṃ, tathā sattāhakālikaṃ jahitvā tadanantare yāvajīvike ṭhita’’nti vadanti, taṃ yuttaṃ, tañca bhagavatā odissānuññātattā paccavekkhaṇābhāve doso natthi. ‘‘Guḷodaka’nti vuttattā udakagatika’’nti vadanti. Yadi udakamissaṃ udakagatikaṃ hoti, madhupi siyā taṃ tathā anuññātattā. Mā hotu, appaṭiggahetvā paribhuñjitabbaṃ siyā udakagatikattā, tañca na hoti, ‘‘sabbatthāpi upaparikkhitvā gahetabba’’nti aññatarasmiṃ gaṇṭhipade vuttaṃ.
285 “空屋”指的是第四禅。巴利
285.Suññāgāranti catutthajjhānaṃ.
净地开许事注释巴利
Kappiyabhūmianujānanakathāvaṇṇanā
295 “Oravasadda”就是大声的意思。“被许多人围绕着”这一句里,即使只有一个人也成立。有人说:“在许多人当中,哪怕只有一个人开口说话,也可以同时成立。”因为原文说的是“接触之后”,所以没有接触的情况下就不成立。从“没有过失”这句话来看,其余情况也是被允许的。有人说:“如果墙壁已经先修整好了,之后再把那面墙补满,那就不可以在那里做,只有在自然的地面上才可以做。”这种说法似乎和后文注释里“用砖等物所作的堆积”等说法相矛盾。“或者泥团”这一句里说:“如果没有作意、没有决意,那么从所记得的位置开始算;如果上方已经决意了,那么下方放着的物品就是不清净的,只有上方放着的才是清净的,这就是这里的区别。”在这里,取得作净屋是允许的,意思是应当再这样重新作净。“我们给作净屋”这句话,意思是用来作净屋的用途。不过另一些人说,食堂本身就是住处,所以也可以在那里作。还有人说:“即使没有作净,也是可以的。”巴利
295.Oravasaddanti mahāsaddaṃ. Bahūhi samparivāretvāti ettha ekenāpi vaṭṭati. ‘‘Bahūsu ekassapi vacanena saha siyāti vutta’’nti vadanti. ‘‘Āmasitvā’’ti vuttattā anāmasite na vaṭṭati. ‘‘Doso natthī’’ti vacanena sesāpi anuññātā. ‘‘Bhittiñce upasante pacchā taṃ pūrenti, tattha kātuṃ na vaṭṭati, pakatibhūmiyaṃyeva kātuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti vadanti. Taṃ upari aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘iṭṭhakādīhi katācayassā’’tiādinā virujjhati viya. Mattikāpiṇḍaṃ vāti ettha ‘‘asatiyā anadhiṭṭhitāya saritaṭṭhānato paṭṭhāya ce upari adhiṭṭhitā, heṭṭhā ṭhitaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ akappiyaṃ, upariṭṭhitameva kappiyaṃ, ayamettha viseso’’ti vuttaṃ. Ettha kappiyakuṭi laddhuṃ vaṭṭatīti evaṃvidhe puna kātabbāti attho. Kappiyakuṭiṃ kātuṃ demāti ettha kappiyakuṭikiccaṃ kātunti adhippāyo. Bhojanasālā pana senāsanameva, tasmā tattha kātabbanti apare. ‘‘Akatepi vaṭṭatī’’ti vuttaṃ.
有人写道:“所谓‘口边存留’,就是进食时留在嘴边的东西。”“口边存留”就是它的名称。有人说:“如果是存留,那就应该犯巴吉帝亚;但口边存留只犯恶作,所以这里所说的‘存留’并非此意。”由于提到了“把它变成他自己的东西”,所以不带留恋地舍弃并非这里所要表达的意思。有些人认为,就像在衣的净施中那样,这里只应理解为合乎律制的形式而已。巴利
‘‘Mukhasannidhi nāma bhojanakāle sannidhī’’ti likhitaṃ. Mukhasannidhīti tassa nāmaṃ. ‘‘Yadi sannidhi hoti, pācittiyaṃ bhaveyya, mukhasannidhi pana dukkaṭaṃ, tasmā sannidhi anadhippetā’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Tassa santakaṃ katvā’’ti vuttattā anapekkhavissajjanaṃ nādhippetaṃ. Cīvaravikappane viya kappiyamattaṃ ñātabbanti keci.
关于基尼亚结发外道事件的注释巴利
Keṇiyajaṭilavatthukathāvaṇṇanā
300 有人说:自己接受下来的食物,只在午前把它舍出去,由沙弥等做成饮料再给,那就只限午前可以用,午后不能用,因为它是属于依食物而接受的东西。不过,再次接受并没有过失;而且午前接受的东西已经舍出去了,又不是自己拿的,所以看不出有什么过失,应当仔细考察之后再接受。萨鲁卡是块茎,人们称作“这里的一点东西”。也有写道:“帕鲁萨卡是果腊地方的一种树。”由于特别说明是“熟菜汁”,所以说“未熟的也可以用”。依照库伦德的语句也可成立。洗米水也是谷汁。有写道:“无渣的甘蔗汁是七日药。”萨维提是伽耶特里。Chandas 是吠陀的韵律。因为说过“诸比丘,出家者不应劝人做不合宜的事”,所以对未受具足者也一样,不仅限于十学处,而且凡是比丘不合宜的,在那上面也是如此,这是意趣。巴利
300. ‘‘Attanā paṭiggahitaṃ purebhattameva pariccajitvā sāmaṇerādīhi pānakaṃ katvā dinne purebhattameva vaṭṭati, na pacchābhattaṃ savatthukapaṭiggahitattā’’ti vadanti, tattha puna paṭiggahaṇe niddosattā, purebhattameva paṭiggahaṇassa nissaṭṭhattā, attanā ca aggahitattā doso na dissati, upaparikkhitvā gahetabbaṃ. Sālūkā nāma kandā, ‘‘ito kiñcitaka’’nti voharanti. ‘‘Phārusakanti goḷavisaye eko rukkho’’ti ca likhitaṃ. ‘‘Pakkaḍākarasa’’nti visesitattā ‘‘apakkaṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Kurundivacanenapi siddhameva. Taṇḍuladhovanodakampi dhaññaraso eva. ‘‘Nikkasaṭo ucchuraso sattāhakāliko’’ti likhitaṃ. Sāvittīti gāyatti. Chandasoti vedassa. ‘‘Na, bhikkhave, pabbajitena akappiye samādapetabba’nti vuttattā anupasampannassāpi na kevalaṃ dasasu eva sikkhāpadesu, atha kho yaṃ bhikkhussa na kappati, tasmimpīti adhippāyo’’ti vuttaṃ.
305 “两种布”只是从名称上来说的,也就是绢布和索摩罗布。“三种”就是再加上丝布,成为三种。神通所成的衣,是善来比丘们所生起的。提婆达多衣,是阿那律长老得到的。文中写道:“过了夜分时,按储藏来说;过了七日,按药学分处来说。”巴利
305.Dve paṭā desanāmenevāti cīnapaṭṭasomārapaṭṭāni. Tīṇīti pattuṇṇena saha tīṇi. Iddhimayikaṃ ehibhikkhūnaṃ nibbattaṃ. Devadattiyaṃ anuruddhattherena laddhaṃ. ‘‘Yāmātikkame sannidhivasena sattāhātikkame bhesajjasikkhāpadavasenā’’ti likhitaṃ.
7. 咖提那犍度注释巴利
7. Kathinakkhandhakavaṇṇanā
咖提那许可的注释巴利
Kathinānujānanakathāvaṇṇanā
306 306. 有人写道:“所谓‘咖提那’,意思是由于能成就五种利益,所以是坚固的。”不说“他们适合五种”,而说“他们将适合”,这个未来时的说法要在“vo”表示属格的情况下才讲得通,因为他们在那一刻还没有成就咖提那。不过在这两种义解当中,后一种才合适,因为他们那些波婆耶人全都持守一切头陀支。因为只有对接受邀请的人,才制定不告而行的学处,别众食也是这样。对没有受持、没有决意三衣的人,不存在不持衣而行的问题;对有余衣的人,则可能受取随宜衣、第四衣等。对另一种人,也可以通过未决意的方式获得。只有非粪扫衣者才会有衣的生起。“在咖提那成就的界内”这句话是就近行界说的。应当知道,由于住在近行界的人可以分得亡者衣等,而结界内并没有这种生起,所以这里指的正是近行界。谁得到咖提那敷展?也就是谁成就?意思是五个人成就。因为咖提那布的施主,最少有四人,一人是接受者。在《瞻波犍度》中说:“诸比丘,如果这个四众比丘僧团,除了三种甘马——授达上、自恣、出罪——”因此应当理解为“不是五众所应作的”。有人说:“僧团把咖提那布给某人时,即使不放在伸手范围内,或者站在界外,也可以给。”但必须放在伸手范围内才能给。为什么?因为“他已达到堪受此甘马”。又说:“用那里生起的米等物换成衣物时,只有已成就咖提那的人才能得到那些衣物;如果用衣物换成米等物,则所有人都能得到。”在第一次自恣时已自恣的人得到,这是按最高标准说的。如果因为障碍而没有自恣的人,也已住过雨安居,也能成就咖提那敷展,所以应把其他人作为补足人数来敷展咖提那,这怎么知道呢?因为《附随》中说:“两个人的咖提那已敷展——敷展者和随喜者。”这是用单数说的;又在那里说:“僧团的咖提那已敷展,众的咖提那已敷展,个人的咖提那已敷展。”巴利
306.‘‘Kathinanti pañcānisaṃse antokaraṇasamatthatāya thiranti attho’’ti likhitaṃ. ‘‘Pañca kappantī’’ti avatvā ‘‘kappissantī’’ti anāgatavacanaṃ ‘‘vo’’ti imassa sāmivacanapakkhe yujjati tesaṃ tasmiṃ khaṇe anatthatakathinattā. Dvīsu panetesu atthavikappesu pacchimo yutto sabbesampi tesaṃ pāveyyakānaṃ sabbadhutaṅgadharattā. Nimantanaṃ sādiyantasseva hi anāmantacāro paññatto, tathā gaṇabhojanaṃ. Asamādānacāro anadhiṭṭhitaticīvarassa natthi atecīvarikassa yāvadatthacīvaracatutthādicīvaraggahaṇasambhavato. Itarassāpi anadhiṭṭhānamukhena labbhati. Cīvaruppādo apaṃsukūlikasseva. ‘‘Kathinatthatasīmāya’’nti upacārasīmaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Upacārasīmaṭṭhassa matakacīvarādibhāgiyatāya baddhasīmāya tatruppādābhāvato viññeyyametaṃ upacārasīmāvettha adhippetāti. Kathinatthāraṃ ke labhantīti ke sādhentīti attho. Pañca janā sādhenti. Kathinadussassa hi dāyakā pacchimakoṭiyā cattāro honti. Eko paṭiggāhakoti. ‘‘Tatra ce, bhikkhave, yvāyaṃ catuvaggo bhikkhusaṅgho ṭhapetvā tīṇi kammāni upasampadaṃ pavāraṇaṃ abbhāna’’nti (mahāva. 388) campeyyakkhandhake vuttattā ‘‘na pañcavaggakaraṇīya’’nti gahetabbaṃ. ‘‘Yassa saṅgho kathinadussaṃ deti, taṃ hatthapāse akatvāpi bahisīmāya ṭhitassapi dātuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti vadanti, taṃ hatthapāse katvā eva dātabbaṃ. Kasmā? ‘‘Tassa kammappattattā’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Tatruppādena taṇḍulādinā vatthesu cetāpitesu atthatakathinānameva tāni vatthāni pāpuṇanti. Vatthehi pana taṇḍulādīsu cetāpitesu sabbesaṃ tāni pāpuṇantī’’ti vuttaṃ. Paṭhamapavāraṇāya pavāritā labhantīti idaṃ ukkaṭṭhakoṭiyā vuttaṃ. Antarāyena appavāritānampi vutthavassānaṃ kathinatthārasambhavato itare gaṇapūrake katvā kathinaṃ attharitabbanti kathaṃ paññāyatīti ce? ‘‘Dvinnaṃ puggalānaṃ atthataṃ hoti kathinaṃ atthārakassa ca anumodakassa cā’’ti (pari. 403) parivāre ekavacanakaraṇato, tattheva ‘‘saṅghassa atthataṃ hoti kathinaṃ, gaṇassa puggalassa atthataṃ hoti kathina’’nti (pari. 414) vacanato ca.
在其他寺院住过雨安居的人,也得不到(咖提那利益)。这里指的是同一界内,还是不同界内?这里要讨论的是:如果是指同一界内,那就和后面注疏里的话矛盾了——注疏说:“如果同一界内有许多寺院,应当把所有比丘召集到一处敷展咖提那,不可以各别敷展。”因为这句话表明,所有人只能有一次咖提那敷展。如果是指不同界内,那就和伍巴南达“同一意乐”的许可矛盾。因为世尊说过:“诸比丘,你们给这个愚人同一意乐吧。”这句话表明,他在两个住处都能成就咖提那敷展。应当求两者不相违背,因为并没有被遮止。因此,应当理解其意趣是:无论同一界内还是不同界内,只要近行界不同,住在其他寺院的人,即使住过雨安居,也得不到。有人说:“在第二个自恣日受具足戒的人,也能在第一个自恣日自恣,而且成为住雨安居者并获得利益,所以允许沙弥入雨安居,沙弥也能得到咖提那利益。”巴利
Aññasmiṃvihāre vutthavassāpi na labhantīti idaṃ kiṃ ekasīmasmiṃ, udāhu nānāsīmasminti? Kiñcettha – yadi tāva ekasīmasmiṃ, parato ‘‘sace pana ekasīmāya bahū vihārā honti, sabbe bhikkhū sannipātetvā ekattha kathinaṃ attharitabbaṃ, visuṃ visuṃ attharituṃ na vaṭṭatī’’ti iminā aṭṭhakathāvacanena virujjhati. Idañhi vacanaṃ sabbesaṃyeva eko kathinatthāroti dīpeti. Atha nānāsīmasmiṃ, upanandassa ekādhippāyadānānumatiyā virujjhati. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘detha, bhikkhave, moghapurisassa ekādhippāya’’nti (mahāva. 364). Idañhi vacanaṃ dvīsupi āvāsesu tassa kathinatthārasiddhiṃ dīpetīti. Avirodhova icchitabbo appaṭisiddhattā, tasmā ekasīmasmiṃ vā nānāsīmasmiṃ vā nānūpacāre aññasmiṃ vihāre vutthavassāpi na labhantīti adhippāyo veditabbo. ‘‘Pacchimikāya upasampanno paṭhamapavāraṇāya pavāretumpi labhati, vassiko ca hoti ānisaṃsañca labhatīti sāmaṇerānaṃ vassūpagamanaṃ anuññātaṃ hoti, sāmaṇerā kathinānisaṃsaṃ labhantī’’ti vadanti.
“足以满足三件袈裟中的任何一件”——这句话看起来和圣典里“不是只靠桑喀帝、上披衣、下裙就敷展了咖提那”的说法相冲突。因为这段圣典表明:只要缺了三件袈裟中的任何一件,咖提那就不算敷展。是这样吗?不是。因为知道它的用意。世尊说这段圣典,并不是想表达“缺了三件袈裟中的任何一件,咖提那就不算敷展”。如果是那样,就不该说“不是只靠桑喀帝、上披衣、下裙”。是这样吗?不是。因为知道其意趣。有人想用桑喀帝来敷展,那么离开桑喀帝就不算敷展;其余两件也是如此。这就是这里的意趣。正因如此,在白分中,以“用桑喀帝敷展”这样的方式,只说了这一件衣。既然如此,就应当知道“以二十四种情形,咖提那未敷展;以十七种情形,咖提那已敷展”是随宜按最高标准说的。因此,在黑分中,所列……乃至界外随喜等二十四种情形,若全部具足,固然未敷展;即使只具其中一种,比如以相所作等情形不成立,咖提那也未敷展——应当这样理解其意趣。在白分中,未割截衣、已割截衣……乃至界内随喜等十七种情形,若全部具足,固然已敷展;即使只具其中一种,其余全不具足,咖提那也已敷展——应当这样理解其意趣。否则彼此就会互相矛盾,应随其实际情况配合起来理解。巴利
Tiṇṇaṃ cīvarānaṃ aññatarappahonakanti idaṃ ‘‘na aññatra saṅghāṭiyā uttarāsaṅgena antaravāsakena atthataṃ hoti kathina’’nti imāya pāḷiyā virujjhanaṃ viya dissati. Ayañhi pāḷi tiṇṇaṃ cīvarānaṃ aññataravirahenāpi na atthataṃ hoti kathinanti dīpetīti ce? Na, tadatthajānanato, na tiṇṇaṃ cīvarānaṃ aññataravirahena na atthataṃ hoti kathinanti hi dīpetukāmo bhagavā taṃ pāḷimāha. Yadi evaṃ ‘‘aññatra saṅghāṭiyā uttarāsaṅgena antaravāsakenā’’ti na vattabbā siyāti ce? Na, adhippāyajānanatova. Yo saṅghāṭiyā attharitukāmo, tassa aññatra saṅghāṭiyā na atthataṃ hoti. Esa nayo itaratthāpīti ayamettha adhippāyo. Teneva sukkapakkhe ‘‘saṅghāṭiyā atthataṃ hotī’’tiādinā nayena ekameva cīvaraṃ vuttaṃ, evaṃ sante ‘‘catuvīsatiyā ākārehi anatthataṃ hoti kathinaṃ, sattarasahi ākārehi atthataṃ hoti kathina’’nti yathārahaṃ ukkaṭṭhakoṭiyā vuttanti veditabbaṃ, tasmā kaṇhapakkhe ullikhita…pe… nissīmaṭṭhānumodanānaṃ catuvīsatiyā ākārānaṃ sambhavantānaṃ sabbena sabbaṃ abhāvenapi nimittakatādīnaṃ asambhavantānaṃ aññatarabhāvenapi na atthataṃ hoti kathinanti evamadhippāyo veditabbo. Sukkapakkhepi ahatāhatakappa…pe… sīmaṭṭhānumodanānaṃ sattarasannaṃ ākārānaṃ sambhavantānaṃ aññatarabhāvenapi itaresaṃ sabbena sabbaṃ abhāvenapi atthataṃ hoti kathinanti evamadhippāyo veditabbo. Aññathā aññamaññavirodho, yathāsambhavaṃ yojetvā veditabbo.
这里简要说明其要点:在黑分(黑月分)中,依据“以郁多罗僧敷展咖提那衣时,不是单靠桑喀帝、也不是单靠安陀会就能算敷展咖提那衣”这一说法的限定,那么那件咖提那衣就可能算是未敷展。在白分(白月分)中,依据“以无相所作而敷展咖提那衣”这一说法的限定,当以无相所作敷展咖提那衣时,即使作了那样的广说,咖提那衣仍然是已敷展。这两种说法看似互相矛盾。如果按照前面所说的方式把握其意趣,就能消除矛盾,应当这样理解。巴利
Tatridaṃ mukhamattanidassanaṃ – kaṇhapakkhe ‘‘uttarāsaṅgena atthate kathine na aññatra saṅghāṭiyā na aññatra antaravāsakena atthataṃ hoti kathina’’nti vacanappamāṇato taṃ kathinaṃ anatthataṃ siyā. Sukkapakkhe ca ‘‘animittakatena atthataṃ hoti kathina’’nti vacanappamāṇato animittakatena kathine atthate tañce parikathā kataṃ, tathāpi atthatameva kathinaṃ hotīti ayaṃ duvidhopi virodho. Yathāvuttanayena adhippāye gahite parihāro hotīti veditabbaṃ.
有人说“他给出很多利益”,这话像是在显示他对利养贪求;但世尊以“随所需而寻求衣”的制定为入口,开了方便之门,因此这是为了护持僧团。“不能不做”——对因不尊重而不做的人,犯恶作。有记载这样写。在“我们随喜”这里,是就总摄一切而这样说的。据说《大注》中说:“应由一个人说‘我随喜’,否则‘不合宜’。”决意咖提那衣之后,只要说“我以此桑喀帝敷展咖提那衣”这句话,话一说完,这个人就算已敷展。有记载说:“甘马语只需一种就有效,这是说只对咖提那布作甘马语,对其余衣物的布施只是告知,这就是它的意思。”“在同一界内”的意思是同一近行界内,这个义理说得通。但有些人说:“指的是结界界。在同一界内、同一处所敷展时,就于一切处都成已敷展,因为说了‘一切比丘聚集后’,即使由他们随喜,也算已敷展。在近行界所划定的范围内,各处所得之物,就由各处的人获得。进入那里的人也应获得,因为一切人都已敷展,这就是差别之处。据说《大注》中也是这样说的。”这应当审察。巴利
Yo ānisaṃsaṃ bahuṃ detīti iminā paccayalolabhāvaṃ viya dīpeti, tathāpi bhagavatā yāvadatthacīvarapariyesanapaññāpanamukhena dvāraṃ dinnanti katvā saṅghānuggahatthaṃ hoti. ‘‘Akātuṃ na hotīti anādariyena akarontassa dukkaṭa’’nti likhitaṃ. Anumodāmāti ettha sabbasaṅgāhikavasena evaṃ vuttaṃ. ‘‘Anumodāmī’’ti ekakena vattabbaṃ, itarathā ‘‘na vaṭṭatī’’ti mahāaṭṭhakathāyaṃ kira vuttaṃ. Kathinacīvaraṃ adhiṭṭhahitvā ‘‘imāya saṅghāṭiyā kathinaṃ attharāmī’’ti vācāya bhinnamattāya puggalassa atthataṃ hoti. ‘‘Kammavācā pana ekāyeva vaṭṭatīti kathinadussassa eva kammavācā, sesacīvaradāne apalokanamevāti attho’’ti likhitaṃ. Ekasīmāyāti ekaupacārasīmāyāti attho yujjati. Keci pana ‘‘baddhasīmā adhippetā ekasīmāya ekaṭṭhāne attharite sabbattha attharitaṃ hoti ‘sabbe bhikkhū sannipatitvā’ti vuttattā, tehipi anumodantehi attharitameva hoti, upacāraparicchinne tattha tattha laddhaṃ tehi tehi laddhabbaṃ hoti. Tattha paviṭṭhehipi labhitabbaṃ sabbehipi attharitattā, ayaṃ viseso. Mahāaṭṭhakathāyampi evameva vutta’’nti vadanti, vīmaṃsitabbaṃ.
308 二十四相具足,所以属于大所缘地。有文写道:“‘长缝’是指后作的缝纫,或者折叠起来缝纫。”所谓“痒处”,是指先前的绑缚。意思是:看到咖提那布薄弱,想把它和自身坚固的常布缝合起来做成双层再缝的人,因为常布比咖提那布大,所以先按常布的尺寸比例在绑缚的痒处缝合,用绳子绑好后再做,这就叫“第一衬布已缝合放置”。应当知道,这是为了显示:在咖提那衣尚未做成时,先绑上的布是内衬布;这一说法见于《大筏疏》和《库伦德》,只是文字上有差别,义理上没有不同,所以才这样说。有文写道:“这显示什么呢?有人可能会想:‘这样作成的双层衣,因为常布大,只算常衣之数,不算咖提那衣之数。’不应这样看。即使处于内衬布的状态,它仍然是咖提那衣。即使那常布很大,它仍然是自己的咖提那衣。因为最低限度需要五条,所以想把咖提那布剪成许多碎片再缝的人,从咖提那衣上取一条布,缝到另一件非咖提那衣上。”或者,许多咖提那布是粪扫衣,细小的用来做一件衣,大块的用来补不足而施与。比丘从咖提那衣中取一部分布条,缝到另一件衣上。这里有人问:那些粪扫衣的咖提那布,是应当施与可以作为决意对象的最后者,还是细小的也可以施与?这里,因为细小的不算作衣,所以不应施与。有些人说:“甘马语在那里不生效。”由于圣典中有“以粪扫衣而敷展”的理趣开许,而且在注释中,通过认可处于内衬布状态的咖提那布,以其自性虽不可决意,但以旧衣的状态,即使是可决意者,也认可其为咖提那衣,所以细小的也可以施与。有些人说:“因为敷展咖提那的人会把它们缝合起来作成咖提那衣,所以允许。”应当采纳更合理的说法。巴利
308. Catuvīsati ākāravantatāya mahābhūmikaṃ. ‘‘Dīghasibbitanti pacchākatasibbanaṃ, ovaṭṭitvā sibbanaṃ vā’’ti likhitaṃ. Kaṇḍusaṃ nāma pubbabandhanaṃ. Paṭhamacimilikā ghaṭetvā ṭhapitā hotīti kathinadussaṃ dubbalaṃ disvā taṃ balavatā attano pakatidussena saddhiṃ ghaṭetvā dupaṭṭaṃ katvā sibbitukāmehi kathinadussato pakatidussassa mahantatāya paṭhamaṃ tappamāṇānurūpaṃ bandhakaṇḍuse ghaṭetvā rajjukehi bandhitvā kataṃ hotīti adhippāyo. Kathinacīvarassa appatāya paṭhamaṃ baddhadussaṃ kucchicimilikā hoti, mahāpaccariyaṃ, kurundiyañca vuttavacananidassanaṃ, byañjane eva bhedo, atthe natthīti dassanatthaṃ katanti veditabbaṃ. ‘‘Iminā kiṃ dīpetīti ce? Tathākataṃ dupaṭṭacīvaraṃ pakaticīvarassa mahantatāya pakaticīvarasaṅkhyameva gacchati, na kathinacīvarasaṅkhyanti kassaci siyā, nevaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Evaṃ kucchicimilikabhāvena ṭhitampi kathinacīvaraṃ. Mahantampi taṃ pakaticīvaraṃ attano kathinacīvaramevāti. Heṭṭhimakoṭiyā pañcakassa icchitabbattā kathinadussaṃ khaṇḍākhaṇḍaṃ bahudhā chinditvā sibbitukāmo kathinacīvarato paṭṭaṃ gahetvā aññasmiṃ akathinacīvare paṭṭamāropetī’’ti likhitaṃ. Atha vā bahūni kathinadussāni paṃsukūlāni khuddakakhuddakāni ekacīvaratthāya, mahantāni ca ūnatthāya dinnāni honti. Kathinacīvaratoti bhikkhu ekaccato kathinacīvarato paṭṭaṃ gahetvā aññasmiṃ āropeti. Etthāha – kiṃ paṃsukūlāni kathinadussāni vikappanupagapacchimāni dātabbāni, udāhu khuddakānipīti? Ettha acīvarasaṅkhyattā khuddakāni dātuṃ na vaṭṭati. Kammavācā tattha na ruhatīti eke. ‘‘Paṃsukūlena atthataṃ hotī’’ti pāḷiyaṃ nayadānato kucchicimilikabhāvena ṭhitassa kathinadussassa attano sabhāvena anadhiṭṭhānupagassa purāṇacīvarabhāveneva adhiṭṭhānārahassapi kathinacīvarabhāvānumatimukhena aṭṭhakathāyaṃ padānato ca khuddakānipi dātuṃ vaṭṭati. Tañhi kathinatthārako ghaṭetvā kathinacīvaraṃ karissatīti katvā kappatīti eke, yuttataraṃ gahetabbaṃ.
僧团的蓄藏与储存,因为归属僧团,由僧团所作。因为过了夜就必须舍出去,所以称为“尼萨耆亚”。五片布条作为它的量,就是“五条”;或者以这个量,或者更多,就是这个意思。“即日裁剪”,是指僧团为敷展咖提那者诵了甘马语之后所给的布,必须在当天就裁剪、做成圆整。因为这样给的布,在《附随》中说“前行由七法所摄”,并不是施主正在布施的,所以如果施主把已经完成前行的布交给僧团,僧团接受后应该用甘马语给予。并且要在同一个界场内决意、敷展之后,让僧团随喜,因为已经完成前行的人不需要再做。正是针对敷展者手中拿到的布,才说“不是仅以划线”等等。已经完成前行的布,是否还要再洗、再拆开重做,以言教为准呢?不是,因为已经裁剪过的布不可能再裁剪一次。如果说“必须在别的地方裁剪”?不是,因为在出家篇中以“令剃除须发”的言教为准,如果对已经剃发的光头者找来头发放在头上,再令剃除后出家,就会有过失。如果说“这里用‘非’字遮止了”?不是,因为用“非桑喀帝”的“非”字遮止,如果拿郁多罗僧衣来敷展,就成了未敷展,会有不想要的过失。所以不应该固执。即使说“站在界外近行处”,也应该采用前面所说的判断。巴利
Nicayasannidhi saṅghāyattā saṅghena katattā. Rattātikkantaṃ nissajjitabbattā ‘‘nissaggiya’’nti vuccati. Pañca khaṇḍāni paṭṭāni pamāṇaṃ assāti pañcakaṃ. Tena vā atirittena vāti attho. Tadaheva sañchinnenāti saṅghena kathinatthārakassa kammavācaṃ vatvā dinneneva tadaheva sañchinnena samaṇḍalikatena bhavitabbaṃ. Evaṃ dinnaṃyeva hi parivāre ‘‘pubbakaraṇaṃ sattahi dhammehi saṅgahita’’nti vuttaṃ, na dāyakena diyyamānaṃ, tasmā pariniṭṭhitapubbakaraṇameva ce dāyako saṅghassa deti, sampaṭicchitvā kammavācāya dātabbaṃ. Tena ca tasmiṃyeva sīmāmaṇḍale adhiṭṭhahitvā attharitvā saṅgho anumodāpetabbo katapubbakaraṇassa puna kattabbābhāvato. Atthārakassa hatthagatameva hi sandhāya ‘‘na ullikhitamattenā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Pariniṭṭhitapubbakaraṇampi puna dhovitvā visibbitvā kātabbameva vacanapamāṇatoti ce? Na, chinnassa puna chedāsambhavato. Aññasmiṃ ṭhāne chinditabbamevāti ce? Na, pabbajjādhikāre ‘‘kesamassuṃ ohārāpetvā’’ti vacanappamāṇato muṇḍikassa chinnepi kese pariyesitvā sirasmiṃ ṭhapetvā puna ohārāpetvā pabbājetabbappasaṅgato, na idha na-kārena paṭisiddhattāti ce? Na, ‘‘na aññatra saṅghāṭiyā’’ti na-kārena paṭisiddhattā uttarāsaṅgena atthate anatthataṃ hotīti aniṭṭhappasaṅgato, tasmā abhiniveso na kātabbo. ‘‘Bahiupacārasīmāya ṭhito’’ti vuttattāpi pubbe vuttavinicchayova gahetabbo.
309 关于“以不积蓄的方式敷展,咖提那衣才算完成”这句话,这里要考察的是:两种积蓄到底只限于咖提那敷展月之内,还是也包括那之前?施主什么时候可以布施?只在咖提那敷展月之内,还是也包括那之前?即使在咖提那敷展月里,能不能指定说“我为了在某一天敷展而布施”?这些都需要考察。两种积蓄只在咖提那敷展月之内。施主也不能像布施雨安居衣那样,指定布施咖提那衣。为什么?因为注释书里以“咖提那布施者有义务”等说法讲过。如果说那只是最高标准呢?不对,因为说过“名为咖提那者,只有最高标准才允许”。如果说这不是针对到来而说的呢?不对,这也是针对到来而说的,之前布施的不允许。巴利
309.Asannidhikatena atthataṃ hoti kathinanti ettha kiṃ kathinatthāramāseyeva duvidhopi sannidhi adhippeto, udāhu tato pubbepi, dāyakena vā kadā dātabbaṃ, kiṃ kathinatthāramāseyeva, udāhu tato pubbepi, kathinatthāramāsepi asukasmiṃ divaseyeva atthāratthāya dammīti dātuṃ vaṭṭati na vaṭṭatīti idaṃ vicāretabbaṃ. Kathinatthāramāse eva duvidhopi sannidhi. Dāyakenāpi vassāvāsikaṃ viya kathinacīvaraṃ uddissa dinnaṃ na vaṭṭati. Kasmā? ‘‘Kathinadāyakassa vattaṃ atthī’’tiādinā (mahāva. aṭṭha. 306) nayena aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttattā. Ukkaṭṭhamattametanti ce? Na, ‘‘kathinaṃ nāma atiukkaṭṭhaṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti (mahāva. aṭṭha. 308) vuttattā. Na āgamanaṃ sandhāya vuttanti ce? Na, idampi āgamanameva sandhāya vuttaṃ, pubbe dinnaṃ na vaṭṭatīti.
310 关于“咖提那的”,指的是咖提那的敷展。“为了出起”,意思是平息、不再运作。问:显示这些出起是为了什么?是为了通过说明五种无犯的时间界限,让比丘们在这段时间里生起防护。否则,分别中说“所谓衣时,就是未敷展咖提那时为雨安居的最后一个月,已敷展咖提那时为五个月”,如果不了解中间离去等出起的情况,就可能错误地认为五个月里都无犯。要知道,这样一来,他就会把实际犯戒的情况当成无犯,从而犯下相应的罪,并且对其他比丘的利养造成障碍。巴利
310.Kathinassāti kathinatthārassa. Ubbhārāyāti vūpasamāya, appavattiyāti attho. Kimatthiyaṃ ubbhāranidassananti ce? Pañcahi anāpattikālapariyantadassanena tesu saṃvaruppādanatthaṃ. Aññathā ‘‘cīvarakālasamayo nāma anatthate kathine vassānassa pacchimo māso, atthate kathine pañca māsā’’ti (pārā. 649) vibhaṅge vuttattā antarāpakkamanantikādiubbhārābhāvepi pañcahi pañcasu māsesu anāpattiyevāti micchāgāho siyā . Tato āpattikhette anāpattikhettasaññāya taṃ taṃ āpattiṃ āpajjati, itaresañca bhikkhūnaṃ lābhantarāyaṃ karotīti veditabbaṃ.
取七事的讨论注释巴利
Ādāyasattakakathāvaṇṇanā
311 311. 在“决了边际”这一项里,两种障碍是一起断除的。这里所说的,与《附随》注释书所说的一致,也与这部《犍度》的正文相符,因为两者都是由于舍弃了责任。这是针对“在界外所说的决了边际”而说的。不过《附随》里说:“有四种咖提那出起:可能在界内出起,可能在界外出起,即作竟边际、决了边际、失坏边际、期望断绝。”其中,“在界外出起的决了边际”,就是这里所展示的方式。那么,“在界内出起的决了边际”是怎样的呢?有人拿了未作成的衣后,想着“我不再回来”而离去,在所到之处得不到安适住处,便又回到原来的住处,他的衣障碍仍然存在。而他在“我不再作此衣”这一念头刚生起时,衣障碍就断了,所以是在界内出起,因此决了边际有两种。古注书中这样写道,这是合理的;否则,在界内“我不再作此衣”而进行的出起,就不能与其他诸项合在一起,那就成为多余的了。“越界者”,即越过衣时界限者。于出起中,衣障碍似乎先断,然而由于有所期待,在作衣时仍会十分努力,这是就“相似”而依《附随》说“两种障碍不前不后一起断除”。由于这里说“已作衣者”,所以不成立。巴利
311.Sanniṭṭhānantike dvepi palibodhā ekato chijjantīti idha, parivāraṭṭhakathāyañca vuttaṃ imissā khandhakapāḷiyā sameti ekato ubhinnampi dhuranikkhepassa katattā. ‘‘Idaṃ bahisīmāyameva vuttaṃ sanniṭṭhānantikaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Yaṃ pana vuttaṃ parivāre ‘cattāro kathinuddhārā siyā antosīmāya uddhariyyanti, siyā bahisīmāya uddhariyyanti, niṭṭhānantiko sanniṭṭhānantiko nāsanantiko āsāvacchediko’ti (pari. 416). Tattha bahisīmāya sanniṭṭhānantiko uddhariyyatīti idha dassitanayova. Kathaṃ antosīmāya sanniṭṭhānantiko? Akatacīvaramādāya ‘na paccessa’nti gato, gatagataṭṭhāne phāsuvihāraṃ alabhanto tameva vihāraṃ āgacchati, tassa cīvarapalibodho ṭhito. So ca ‘nevimaṃ cīvaraṃ kāressa’nti citte uppannamatte chijjati, tasmā antosīmāya uddhariyyati, tasmā duvidho sanniṭṭhānantiko’’ti porāṇagaṇṭhipade likhitaṃ, taṃ yuttaṃ, aññathā antosīmāya ‘‘nevimaṃ cīvaraṃ kāressa’’nti pavattaubbhāro itaresu samodhānaṃ na gacchatīti atiritto siyā. Sīmātikkantikoti cīvarakālasīmātikkantiko. Saubbhāre cīvarapalibodho paṭhamaṃ chijjanto viya khāyati, atha kho sāpekkhatāya cīvarakaraṇe saussāhova hotīti lesaṃ sandhāya parivāravasena ‘‘dve palibodhā apubbaṃ acarimaṃ chijjantī’’ti (mahāva. aṭṭha. 311) vuttaṃ. ‘‘Katacīvaro’’ti vuttattā idha na sambhavati.
316 316. 如果一个人不留下任何自己的资具就离开,这就称为“取持而去”。所有《结文》中都写道:“在咖提那出起中并没有差别。只是因为各人的意乐不同,才仅仅为了显示分项而说了取持等项。”但在这里,应当审察因各人意乐不同而有的用意。由于没有“离去边际”,所以说了“随其所能”。如果在衣未做成时,以放下责任的方式,离去边际也可以成立,那么是否也应该说离去边际这一项呢?不是,因为这会和决了边际的特征相混淆。而且,衣未做成的人也没有闻边际。巴利
316. Sabbaṃ attano parikkhāraṃ anavasesetvā pakkamanto ‘‘samādāya pakkamatī’’ti vuccati. ‘‘Kathinuddhāre viseso natthi. Puggalādhippāyavisesena kevalaṃ vāradassanatthaṃ samādāyavārā vuttā’’ti sabbesu gaṇṭhipadesu likhitaṃ. Idha pana puggalādhippāyena payojanaṃ vīmaṃsitabbaṃ. Pakkamanantikassa abhāvā ‘‘yathāsambhava’’nti vuttaṃ. Vippakatepi dhuranikkhepavasena pakkamanantikatā sambhavati, tasmā pakkamanantikavāropi vattabboti ce? Na, sanniṭṭhānantikalakkhaṇappasaṅgato. Akatacīvarassa na savanantikatā ca.
这里从一开始就说明分句的分别:未受持分有七种,已受持分也有七种,这样就是两组七段。接着,除去离去边际,衣未完成者的未受持分和已受持分,就是两组六段。再往后,按已定、决了、灭尽、灭尽边际来显示三组三分。其中第一组三分,是在内界生起“他将不至”时,没有触及这个规定,只在外界生起“他将不至”,所以离去边际和越界分在这里并不适用。“断望分虽然可以生起,但按所说的理由没有说。”第二组三分是在内界生起“他将不至”,这里虽然可以有离去边际,但因为所指的正是那些断除衣障的人,所以没有说——这是古师注疏里说的。在全部十五分中,都只是指衣未完成者,这是推理。如果可受持的衣未受持,就没有决了分。如果决了还有剩余,就没有灭尽分——古师这样说。第三组三分用“未受持”这个词加以区别而展开,意义上和第一组三分一致。这就是显示其意义的用处。因为这三种义理差别可以用这三种咖提那衣的收摄来显示,所以按一个关联把它们结合起来。否则,第一组三分就会变成六段,像这十五分末尾的六段一样。第三组三分之后生起的第四组三分,是依“在内界‘他将至’”这一说法的差别而生起。这样结合时,为了和其余听闻分等不相违的次第,所以应知第四组三分不成立,而成为六段。这样,三组三分和一组六分,应知就是第一组十五分。现在,正是这十五分,以加前缀的差别而成为第二组,名叫受持十五分。又说携带未完成衣,是第三组十五分;受持,是第四组十五分——已经显示。这样,应知有四组十五分。其中,在第一、第二组十五分中,完全指未做衣;在其余两组中,应联系未完成衣来理解。《古结句》中说:“在有衣望时,应在先前常系属之处取衣,别处不适当。如果衣望已断而衣生起,那衣不构成衣障。”在尼萨耆亚第三咖提那中出现的衣期望,这里就是指衣望——这是推理。哪里有衣望,那地方以处所转喻而被称为衣望,所以有“他亲近那衣望”等说法;因此,“无望而得”等的含义,应理解为“在没有衣望的地方而得”等。在这里,按完成、善完成、坏失、断衣望成为一轮,这就成了一组四法。所以前面说的三组三分,各加断衣望而成为三组四法,即应知为一种无望十二分。紧接着的有望十二分中,虽然也可以得到第一种十二分的次第,但因为它没有差别,所以把那一组十二分作为未说而成立之后,为了特别显示其差别,从最初开始说“他将在内界期望”。应知:这句是为了给第二组四法中的“他到了界外后听到”等说法,以及第三组四法中的听闻分等提供位置。然而,应知这组十二分,即使按无望也可以得到,但在这里已作为未说而成立,所以没有显示。这样,这里举出了两组十二分。在应作十二分中,也应举出两组十二分:如所显示的无望十二分,以及未说而成立的有望十二分。现在是远行者九分。其中,因为单凭“远行者出发”这一句,“他将不期望”这一点就已经未说而成立,所以那项没有说。至此,住处障碍的不存在已经显示。巴利
Tatrāyaṃ ādito paṭṭhāya vāravibhāvanā – ādāyavārā satta, tathā samādāyavārāti dve sattakavārā. Tato pakkamanantikaṃ vajjetvā vippakatacīvarassa ādāyavārā, samādāyavārā cāti dve chakkavārā. Tato paraṃ niṭṭhānasanniṭṭhānanāsanantikānaṃ vasena tīṇi tikāni dassitāni, tattha paṭhamattikaṃ antosīmāya ‘‘na paccessa’’nti imaṃ vidhiṃ anāmasitvā bahisīmāyaṃ eva ‘‘na paccessa’’nti pavattaṃ, tasmā pakkamanantikasīmātikkantikasaubbhārā tattha na yujjanti. ‘‘Āsāvacchediko sambhavantopi yathāvuttakāraṇena na vutto. Dutiyattikaṃ antosīmāya ‘na paccessa’nti pavattaṃ, ettha kiñcāpi pakkamanantiko sambhavati, tathāpi yehi cīvarapalibodho chijjati, tesaṃyevādhippetattā na vutto’’ti porāṇagaṇṭhipade vuttaṃ. Sabbasmimpi pannarasake vippakatacīvarassevādhippetattāti takko. Adhiṭṭhānupage ca vippakate sati na niṭṭhānantiko. Niṭṭhānāvasese sati na nāsanantikoti porāṇā. Tatiyattikaṃ anadhiṭṭhita-padena visesetvā pavattaṃ, atthato paṭhamattikena sameti. Tassa atthadassanapayojanaṃ kira taṃ. Yasmā ime tayo atthavikappā imehi eva tīhi kathinuddhārehi sakkā dassetuṃ, tasmā imeva yojitā ekasambandhavasena, aññathā paṭhamattikaṃ chakkaṃ bhaveyya imassa pannarasakassa ante chakkaṃ viya. Tatiyattikānantaraṃ catutthattikaṃ sambhavantaṃ ‘‘antosīmāyaṃ ‘paccessa’’nti vacanavisesena sambhavati. Tathā ca yojiyamānaṃ itarehi savanantikādīhi aviruddhakkamaṃ hoti, tasmā catutthattikaṃ ahutvā chakkaṃ jātanti veditabbaṃ. Evaṃ tīṇi tikāni ekaṃ chakkañcāti paṭhamaṃ pannarasakaṃ veditabbaṃ. Idāni idameva pannarasakaṃ upasaggavisesena dutiyaṃ samādāyapannarasakaṃ nāma kataṃ. Puna vippakatacīvaraṃ ādāyāti tatiyaṃ pannarasakaṃ, samādāyāti catutthaṃ pannarasakaṃ dassitaṃ. Evaṃ cattāri pannarasakāni veditabbāni . Tattha paṭhamadutiyesu pannarasakesu sabbena sabbaṃ akatacīvaraṃ adhippetaṃ, itaresu dvīsu vippakatanti yojetabbaṃ. ‘‘Pubbe nibaddhaṭṭhāne cīvarāsāya gahetabbaṃ, aññattha na vaṭṭati. Upacchinnāya ce cīvarāsāya cīvaraṃ uppannaṃ, na taṃ cīvarapalibodhaṃ karotī’’ti porāṇagaṇṭhipade vuttaṃ. Nissaggiyesu tatiyakathine āgatacīvarapaccāsā idha cīvarāsāti takko. Yattha cīvarāsā, taṃ ṭhānaṃ adhikaraṇūpacārena ‘‘cīvarāsā’’tveva vuccatīti katvā ‘‘taṃ cīvarāsaṃ payirupāsatī’’tiādi vuttaṃ, tasmā anāsāya labhatīti anāsāyitaṭṭhāne labhatītiādinā attho gahetabbo. Ettha niṭṭhānasanniṭṭhānanāsanaāsāvacchedikavasena eko vāroti idamekaṃ catukkaṃ jātaṃ, tasmā pubbe vuttāni tīṇi tikāni āsāvacchedikādhikāni tīṇi catukkānīti ekaṃ anāsāyadvādasakanti veditabbaṃ. Tadanantare āsāyadvādasake kiñcāpi paṭhamadvādasakkamo labbhati, tathāpi taṃ nibbisesanti tamekaṃ dvādasakaṃ avuttasiddhaṃ katvā visesato dassetuṃ ādito paṭṭhāya ‘‘antosīmāya paccessa’’nti vuttaṃ, taṃ dutiyacatukke ‘‘so bahisīmagato suṇātī’’tiādivacanassa tatiyacatukke savanantikādīnañca okāsakaraṇatthanti veditabbaṃ. Idaṃ pana dvādasakaṃ anāsāya vasena labbhamānampi iminā avuttasiddhaṃ katvā na dassitanti veditabbaṃ. Evamettha dve dvādasakāni uddharitāni. Karaṇīyadvādasakepi yathādassitaanāsāyadvādasakaṃ, avuttasiddhaṃ āsāyadvādasakañcāti dve dvādasakāni uddharitabbāni. Idāni disaṃgamikanavakaṃ hoti. Tattha yasmā ‘‘disaṃgamiko pakkamatī’’ti vacaneneva ‘‘na paccessa’’nti idaṃ avuttasiddhameva, tasmā taṃ na vuttaṃ. Ettāvatā āvāsapalibodhābhāvo dassito.
321 “不放弃衣份”这句话,说明他具备衣的障碍。“衣份”是指自己应得的那一份衣。“不放弃”是指心里还想要。如果他得到衣,那么在雨安居的住处,依结束、已完成、消灭这三项,构成一组三分;同样依这三项,在途中构成一组三分;在到达的地方又构成一组三分——这样三组三分,应知共为九分。此后,依结束、已完成、消灭以及越界、善资具,说为安乐住五分。在这两种情况下,其余的咖提那衣残余明显不会生起。而这五分的差别在于:已受持的那一分不会生起,因为“他将至”是指他还会返回。巴利
321. ‘‘Cīvarapaṭivīsaṃ apavilāyamāno’’ti iminā cīvarapalibodhasamaṅgitamassa dasseti. Paṭivīsoti attano pattabbo cīvarabhāgo. Apavilāyamānoti ākaṅkhamāno. Tassa cīvaralābhe sati vassaṃvutthāvāse niṭṭhānasanniṭṭhānanāsanantikānaṃ vasena ekaṃ tikaṃ, tesaṃyeva vasena antarāmagge ekaṃ, gataṭṭhāne ekanti tiṇṇaṃ tikānaṃ vasena ekaṃ navakaṃ veditabbaṃ. Tato paraṃ niṭṭhānasanniṭṭhānanāsananti kasīmātikkantikasaubbhārānaṃ vasena phāsuvihārapañcakaṃ vuttaṃ. Ubhayattha sesakathinuddhārāsambhavo pākaṭova. Ayaṃ panettha pañcake viseso – samādāyavāro na sambhavati ‘‘paccessa’’nti paccāgamanādhippāyato.
325 比丘们,这两种就是咖提那衣的障碍,也就是咖提那展布的随系缘。巴利
325.Dveme bhikkhave kathinassa palibodhāti kathinatthārassa anupabandhanapaccayāti.
8. 衣篇注释巴利
8. Cīvarakkhandhakavaṇṇanā
吉瓦咖故事注释巴利
Jīvakavatthukathāvaṇṇanā
326 326.“王舍城人”,意思是住在王舍城的人。巴利
326.Rājagahakoti rājagahavāsī.
328 因为他不愚钝,所以没过多久就获得了智慧。我是你的父亲,这是什么意思呢?因为你是我养大的。巴利
328. Amohajātikattā na cirasseva viññutaṃ pāpuṇi. Ahaṃ te pitā, kenaṭṭhena? Yasmā tvaṃ mayā posāpito.
329 “Sakke vissaṭṭhamatte”是原文,而在第八学处中,正是“vissaṭṭhamattova”。巴利
329. ‘‘Sakke vissaṭṭhamatte’’ti pāṭho, aṭṭhamasikkhāpade vissaṭṭhamattova.
《灯光王故事》的注释巴利
Pajjotarājavatthukathāvaṇṇanā
334 关于“坐下进食者”这一说法,这里有人讲:“《法句》中提到‘在城外看见之后’,所以,他把两天里得到的食物各取一份,两部注疏都是这么说的,因此这样理解是合理的。”巴利
334.Bhuñjituṃ nisinnassāti ettha ‘‘dhammapade ‘bahinagare disvā’ti vuttaṃ, tasmā dvīsu divasesu dinnaṃ tena tesu ekekaṃ gahetvā dvīsu aṭṭhakathāsu vuttanti yujjatī’’ti vadanti.
《三十种泻药事》的注释巴利
Samattiṃsavirecanakathāvaṇṇanā
336 关于“一口一口地”这句话:虽然(食物)被混进了糖等东西里,但那是世尊自己受用的,所以没有过失。巴利
336.Kabaḷe kabaḷeti ettha kiñcāpi guḷādīsu pakkhittaṃ, taṃ pana bhagavāva paribhuñji, tasmā natthi doso.
《请求选择的故事》的注释巴利
Varayācanakathāvaṇṇanā
337 据说有一种叫“大背毯”的毛毯,其绒毛超过四指长。巴利
337.Mahāpiṭṭhiyakojavaṃ nāma atirekacaturaṅgulapupphaṃ kira.
关于允许使用毯子等规定的注释巴利
Kambalānujānanādikathāvaṇṇanā
340 “在附近”是指墓地的附近。有些人说,在墓地外面也可以。他们说明了订立约定的方式后,说:“如果一方先说‘我的财物,既是你的,也是我的’,另一方也这样说,就可以。”这是关于同等资具的做法。巴利
340.Upacāreti susānassa upacāre. Bahipi vaṭṭatīti eke. Katikakaraṇaṃ dassetvā ‘‘mayhaṃ santakaṃ tava ca mama ca hotūti vatvā itarena ca tathāvutte vaṭṭatī’’ti samānaparikkhāravidhiṃ vadanti.
342 有人说,因为讲过“即使是在界片之内也可以做甘马”,所以其他的僧事也可以坐在那里做。据说岛上的人说,如果这样的话,就跟偷盗所做的一样了,所以不可以。他们说,因为是被偷盗所取,所以不能得到,卧坐具犍度里所提到的经文就是证明。因此,按照他们的见解,应当知道这是它独有的特征。巴利
342. ‘‘Khaṇḍasīmāyapi sammannituṃ vaṭṭatīti vuttattā sesakammānipi tattha nisīditvā kātuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Evaṃ sante corikāya katasadisaṃ hoti , tasmā na vaṭṭatī’’ti dīpavāsino vadanti kira. ‘‘Corikāya gahitattā na pāpuṇātīti senāsanakkhandhake āgatasuttañca sādhaka’’nti vadanti, tasmā tesaṃ matena idaṃ āveṇikalakkhaṇanti veditabbaṃ.
关于库房甘马等事的注释巴利
Bhaṇḍāgārasammutiādikathāvaṇṇanā
343 不过,这里所说的“库房”是它独有的特征。巴利
343.‘‘Idaṃ pana bhaṇḍāgāranti āveṇikalakkhaṇa’’nti vuttaṃ.
染衣话题的注释巴利
Cīvararajanakathāvaṇṇanā
344 在牛粪里没有罪,因为被丑陋的样子挡住了。他们说:“藏红花不允许。”也有写成“Allikāya”的读法。巴利
344. Gomaye āpatti natthi, virūpattāvāritaṃ. ‘‘Kuṅkumapupphaṃ na vaṭṭatī’’ti vadanti. ‘‘Allikāyā’’tipi pāṭho atthi.
允许坐具等事的注释巴利
Nisīdanādianujānanakathāvaṇṇanā
353 这里说的“不可能处”,要结合《论事》来考察受持:因为在色品中已说“四生起的”,所以是贪心不存在时业生起不得解脱,还是贪为缘存在时业生起才存在。巴利
353.Aṭṭhānametanti ettha rūpakaṇḍe ‘‘catusamuṭṭhānika’’nti vuttattā kammasamuṭṭhānaṃ rāgacittābhāvā na muccatīti vā rāgapaccaye sati kammasamuṭṭhānaṃ hotīti vā vicāretvā gahetabbaṃ kathāvatthunā ca.
362 只以门闩防护为标准:用这四种安放的理由来安放时,只应该安放在设有门闩防护的住处,这就是他的用意。巴利
362.Aggaḷaguttiyeva pamāṇanti imehi catūhi nikkhepakāraṇehi ṭhapentena aggaḷaguttivihāreyeva ṭhapetuṃ vaṭṭatīti adhippāyo.
僧团衣生起论的注释巴利
Saṅghikacīvaruppādakathāvaṇṇanā
363 363. 如果没有敷展(咖提那)而说“一衣月”,那是不该说的。为什么?因为世尊并没有说过“诸比丘,我允许他们那些衣直到衣月”。那么,未敷展咖提那的人就没有得到允许吗?不是的,因为前面已经允许了,而且这里是为了说明其中隐含的意义才那样说的。前面确实说过:“所谓非时衣,就是未敷展咖提那时,在十一个月里生起的;已敷展咖提那时,在七个月里生起的;即使是在允许的时节里特别指定布施的,这也叫非时衣。”从这段话可以成立:未敷展咖提那的人,在“一衣月”期间生起的衣,只属于他们。所以这里不再说那个,而是说“直到咖提那舍出”,就是为了说明这个隐含的意义:一个人即使只得到三位补足僧数的人,也能敷展咖提那。否则,这个意思就看不出来。有人说:“持律者们应当知道,所以别人才那样说。”已敷展咖提那的人,在五个月里,一切都只属于那位比丘,这是其中的关联。这里用的是绝对相属意义的宾格。因为已经限定为“此处雨安居的僧团”,而且在“我们布施雨安居衣”这句话里,“此处”已经含有指定的意味,所以对他们说的时候就能得到。某部《本母》里写道:“因为是在非时生起,又因为接近衣时,而且未敷展咖提那的人和已住雨安居的人都在允许的范围内,所以才这样说。”不过另有一些人这样说:把“此处雨安居僧团”一直到“未来的雨安居”这一段拿来审问之后,应该把“为什么?因为在非时生起”这一句写在后面“在那里,现前的大众全都得到”的末尾。为什么?因为后面说到“从衣月开始直到寒季”,这话没有差别,所以有些智者才那样说。这里用“此处”这个词作了限定,那里则没有,所以应当知道两者并不矛盾。“这些衣属于我”这句话本身就是决意,这里是就最殊胜的程度说的。有人说:“即使说‘这些衣属于我’,也已经成为决意了。”有人说:“说‘属于我’的时候,其实还没有所谓的‘衣’,所以必须说‘诸衣属于我’。”所谓“误取”,就是仍然属于僧团所有。有人写道:“‘已取’这个说法到底指什么,虽然不清楚,但那些份额,从意义上说就是已经获得的份额。”有人说:“如果其中一份还没有分到,后来的人仍然可以得到。”巴利
363. No ce atthataṃ hoti ‘‘ekaṃ cīvaramāsa’’nti na vattabbaṃ. Kasmā? ‘‘Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, tasseva tāni cīvarāni yāva cīvaramāsā’’ti vacanassa abhāvato, tasmā anatthatakathinassa ananuññātanti ce? Na, heṭṭhā anuññātattā, tato līnatthadīpanatthamidha tathā vuttattā ca. Heṭṭhā hi ‘‘akālacīvaraṃ nāma anatthate kathine ekādasamāse uppannaṃ, atthate kathine sattamāse uppannaṃ, kālepi ādissa dinnaṃ, etaṃ akālacīvaraṃ nāmā’’ti (pārā. 500) vacanato anatthatakathinānaṃ ekacīvaramāse uppannaṃ, tesaṃyeva hotīti siddhaṃ, tasmā idha taṃ avatvā ekopi tayo gaṇapūrake labhitvā kathinaṃ attharituṃ labhatīti imaṃ līnatthaṃ pakāsetuṃ ‘‘yāva kathinassa ubbhārāyā’’ti vuttaṃ. Itarathā ayamattho na ñāyati. ‘‘Jānitabboca vinayadharehīti tathā vuttoti apare’’ti vuttaṃ. Atthataṃ hoti, pañca māse sabbaṃ tasseva bhikkhuno hotīti sambandho. Accantasaṃyogavasena upayogavacanaṃ. ‘‘Idha vassaṃvutthasaṅghassā’’ti niyamitattā ‘‘vassāvāsikaṃ demā’’ti ettha ca ‘‘idhā’’ti adhikārattā tasmiṃ vutte labhati. ‘‘Piṭṭhisamaye uppannattāti cīvarakālassāsannattā ca anatthatakathinānampi vutthavassānañca anuññātaṭṭhānattā eva vutta’’nti aññatarasmiṃ gaṇṭhipade likhitaṃ. Keci pana ‘‘yaṃ pana idaṃ ‘idha vassaṃvutthasaṅghassā’tiādiṃ katvā yāva ‘anāgatavasse’ti padaṃ, tāva pucchitvā ‘kasmā? Piṭṭhisamaye uppannattā’ti idaṃ parato ‘tatra sammukhībhūtānaṃ sabbesaṃ pāpuṇātī’ti imassa pariyosāne ‘kasmā? Piṭṭhisamaye uppannattā’ti likhitabbaṃ. Kasmāti ce? Parato ‘cīvaramāsato paṭṭhāya yāva hemantassā’ti vuttena nibbisesattā, tasmā eva ekaccesu paṇḍitanti vadantī’’ti vadanti. Idha pana idha-saddena visesitaṃ, tattha natthi, tasmā aññamaññavirodho natthīti gahetabbaṃ. ‘‘Mayhimāni cīvarāni pāpuṇantī’’ti vacanamevādhiṭṭhānaṃ, idamettha ukkaṭṭhavasena vuttaṃ. ‘‘Mayhimāni cīvarānī’ti vuttepi adhiṭṭhitameva hotī’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Mayhimānī’ti vutte tassa cīvarāni nāma natthi, tasmā ‘cīvarāni pāpuṇantī’ti vattabbamevā’’ti vadanti. Duggahitānīti saṅghikāneva honti. ‘‘Gahitameva nāmā’ti imassa idaṃ pattanti kiñcāpi na viditaṃ, te pana bhāgā tesaṃ atthato pattāyevāti adhippāyo’’ti likhitaṃ. ‘‘Ekasmiṃ apatite puna āgatā labhantī’’ti vuttaṃ.
伍巴南达释迦子故事的注释巴利
Upanandasakyaputtavatthukathāvaṇṇanā
364 “诸比丘,除了在雨安居期间住过的人以外”——这是针对袈裟时节而作的遮止。在某一座精舍里,有人这样说:“就像国王的精舍那样,在各别分院或在这里住过的人,都应该得到。”然后布施出去。又有这样的记载:“以七日为限,只要让天亮就行”,这话只是口头上说说而已,因为在一座精舍里并没有七日办事的规定。巴利
364. ‘‘Na, bhikkhave, aññatra vassaṃvutthenā’’ti cīvarasamayaṃ upādāya paṭikkhepo kato .Ekasmiṃ vihāre ‘‘rājavihāre viya nānāpariveṇesu vā idha vā vutthā labhatū’’ti vatvā dinnaṃ. ‘‘Sattāhavārena aruṇameva uṭṭhāpetīti etaṃ vacanamattameva ekavihāre sattāhakiccābhāvā’’ti ca likhitaṃ.
亡者物品的注释巴利
Matasantakakathāvaṇṇanā
369 “比丘的”是指比丘命终之时。其中,“钵与衣”是通过指出主要资具来显示一切资具,应当如此理解。有人说:这也是非法得来的,因为已经命终,所以只有僧团才是适合的。并非如此,这种想法与“钵四事中一切不适合的钵”的原则完全相违。住在非法得来的坐卧处,也无犯。某个住处有两位比丘同住,其中一人命终,另一人不让他的资具离去,以盗心取走,那就是取了僧团之物,应按物品价值处罚。若在非住处取,则不应处罚,因为取的是无主物。若命终时无法说话,仅以心意施与,便能生福,僧团就是它的主人。或者,不可信赖的人自己取走,取得不成立;若以盗心取,则按物品价值处罚。那位住在住处的人,谁是主人?有人说:“依据‘僧团是主人’的说法,僧团应以强力阻止他。”有人说:“因为生前已被取走,所以僧团不是主人。”若是主人亲自看见而能夺回,僧团也能夺回,因为僧团处于主人的位置。其他人说,应当审察后再取。巴利
369.Bhikkhussāti bhikkhusmiṃ kālaṃkate. Tattha ‘‘pattacīvare’’ti padhānaparikkhāradassanamukhena sabbaparikkhāranidassananti veditabbaṃ. Adhammena uppannañcetaṃ hoti, saṅghassa kappiyameva matattāti eke. Noti takko pattacatukke sabbathā akappiyapattanayavirodhato. Adhammena uppannasenāsane ca vasato anāpatti. Aññatarasmiṃ āvāse dve bhikkhū vasanti, tattha ceko kālaṃkato, itaro tassa parikkhāraṃ apāpetvā taṃ theyyacittena gaṇhāti, saṅghasantakaṃ gahitaṃ hoti, bhaṇḍagghena kāretabbo. Anāvāse gaṇhāti, na kāretabbo assāmikassa gahitattā. Maraṇasamaye vattuṃ asahanto ce citteneva deti, puññaṃ pasavati, saṅghova tassa sāmī. Paro vā avissāsiko sayameva gaṇhāti, gahaṇaṃ na ruhati, theyyacittena ce, bhaṇḍagghena kāretabbo. Tassa ca āvāsagatassa ko sāmī. ‘‘Saṅgho sāmī’’ti vacanato saṅghena balakkārena so vāretabboti eke. Jīvamānakāle gahitattā na saṅgho sāmīti eke. Sāmiko ce sayaṃ passitvā acchindituṃ labhati, saṅghopi labhati sāmiṭhāne ṭhitattāti itare, vicāretvā gahetabbaṃ.
亡者留下的金银等不适宜出家人持有的物品。如果这些已经被接收了,就按已说之接收法处理。如果是如法得来的,就应当告知净人。如果被抓来的是奴仆,僧团不是主人;如果是园民,僧团是主人。如果有牛、水牛之类,属于住处范围内的,僧团是主人;不属于住处范围内的,僧团不是主人。如果僧团将其携入住处、视为己有后,再置于近处界外,那么执事的僧团是主人,园民也是这样。亡者的资具如果是以寄存的方式放着的,寄存者本人就是主人。如果价值很高,剩下的部分僧团是主人。“由某位瞻病者”——这是说明应该说的次第。再者,瞻病者人数众多时,世尊为示应施与一切人,在甘马语中说了“诸瞻病者”。在沙弥章中读作“衣”。说“我把这个施给你、给、当给、奉献、舍离、放弃”,或者说“施与某某……乃至……放弃”,无论在面前说还是在背后说,都已经算是布施了,这是布施的特征;而当说“你拿”时回答“我拿”,就是“苏丁那、善取”,这是拿取的特征。因此,以“我的东西成为你的和我的”等话语,可以做成共同资具,诸位老师是这样写的。巴利
Matakassa hiraññādiakappiyabhaṇḍaṃ hoti. Uggahitañcetaṃ hoti, uggahite vuttanayena paṭipajjitabbaṃ. Dhammena uppannaṃ ce, kappiyakārako ācikkhitabbo. Dāso ce gahito hoti, na saṅgho sāmī, ārāmiko ce, saṅgho sāmī. Gāvīmahiṃsīādayo honti, āvāsagatānaṃ saṅgho sāmī, anāvāsagatānaṃ na saṅgho sāmī. Saṅgho ce āvāsaṃ ānetvā attano santakaṃ katvā pacchā samīpe bahisīmāya ṭhapeti, kārakasaṅgho sāmī, tathā ārāmike. Matakassa parikkhāro nikkhepavasena ṭhapito hoti, esova sāmī. Mahaggho ce hoti, sesassa saṅgho sāmī. ‘‘Kenaci gilānupaṭṭhākenā’’ti vattabbakkamo etena dassito. Puna upaṭṭhākānaṃ bahubhāve sati sabbesaṃ dātabbakammaṃ dassentena bhagavatā kammavācāyaṃ ‘‘gilānupaṭṭhākāna’’nti vuttaṃ. Sāmaṇeravāre ‘‘cīvara’’nti pāṭho. ‘‘Imaṃ tuyhaṃ demi dadāmi dajjāmi oṇojemi pariccajāmi vissajjāmi nissajjāmī’ti vā ‘itthannāmassa demi…pe… nissajjāmī’ti vā vadati, ‘sammukhā vā parammukhā vā vutte dinnaṃyeva hotī’ti dānalakkhaṇassa ca ‘tuyhaṃ gaṇhāhī’ti vutte ‘mayhaṃ gaṇhāmī’ti vadati, ‘sudinnaṃ suggahitañcā’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.469) gahaṇalakkhaṇassa ca vuttattā ‘mama santakaṃ tava ca mama ca hotū’ti evamādivacanena samānaparikkhāraṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭatīti ācariyā’’ti likhitaṃ.
不过在《附结》里,先作了极其繁琐的铺陈,然后又这样说:关于这一点,诸师的主张是——如果有多位或两位比丘想共用资具,他们就把各自现有的物品连同将来会生起的东西,全都舍给一位可意的人,那个人再把它舍还给他们。到这一步,他们就成了共用资具者。这个共用资具的特征,因为落入圣典等中所说的特征范围内,所以是确定不移的;但因为它覆盖了古规而行,所以应当遮止。若想依照诸师之意去做,也可以照做——这是另一些师长的说法。还有人说:雨安居后的沙弥,在五学处中犯了一条之后又被重新摄受,他得不到利养,这就叫作犯了根本事。巴利
Anugaṇṭhipade pana atīva papañcaṃ katvā puna ‘‘idamettha ācariyānaṃ sanniṭṭhānaṃ – sacesambahulā, dve vā samānaparikkhāraṃ kattukāmā honti, te sabbe attano santakaṃ vattamānaṃ uppajjanakena saddhiṃ pesalassa ekassa pariccajanti, so puna tesameva pariccajati, ettāvatā te samānaparikkhārikā hontīti. Idaṃ samānaparikkhāralakkhaṇaṃ pāḷiādīsu vuttalakkhaṇeyeva patanato acalappattaṃ hoti, tathāpi porāṇavidhiṃ ajjhottharitvā vattanato paṭisedhetabbo, ācariyānaṃ matānusārena kātabbaṃ kātukāmenāti apare’’ti vuttaṃ, ‘‘vassaṃvutthasāmaṇero pañcasu sikkhāpadesu ekaṃ atikkamitvā puna gahito lābhaṃ na labhati, antimavatthuṃ ajjhāpanno nāma hotī’’ti vadanti.
已完成雨安居者们的尚未生起的衣的讨论注释巴利
Vassaṃvutthānaṃanuppannacīvarakathāvaṇṇanā
375 衣已经出现但还没分配时离开——这里说的是:即使僧团已经宣布“僧团同意从这些(衣)所得中,给每位比丘分配这么多雨安居衣”,他若还俗离去,就得不到。即使他再出家、受具足戒,然后等着分衣,也还是得不到,因为他已经从原先的状态退失了。反过来,如果在衣已经分配之后才还俗离去,那就得到了。巴利
375.Uppanne cīvare abhājite pakkamatīti ettha ‘‘saṅghena tatruppādato ekekassa bhikkhuno ettakaṃ vassāvāsikaṃ dātuṃ saṅghassa ruccatī’’ti sāvitepi vibbhamati, tato na labhati, puna pabbajitvā upasampajjitvā cīvarabhājanaṃ sambhāventopi na labhatiyeva pubbapakatito bhaṭṭhattā. Atha pāpite vibbhamati, labhatī’’ti ca vuttaṃ.
僧团分裂时关于衣生起的讨论注释巴利
Saṅghebhinnecīvaruppādakathāvaṇṇanā
376 “在彼海”,就是指阎浮提洲。巴利
376.Parasamuddeti jambudīpe.
八衣论母的注释巴利
Aṭṭhacīvaramātikākathāvaṇṇanā
379 因为未被围起来的地方中,哪些区域应当围起来难以了知,所以说了“又复”等话。其中,常集会的地方也应该算在边界范围之内。《大筏疏》里写道:“在比丘们当中……乃至……得到,这是指‘我们在近行界内给与’这样给与的情形。”如果说“在共住界”,那么站在别住界等处的人就得不到,因为那些是各自分开的共住界。共住界和不分离界有这样的差别:如果说“我在不分离界给与”,就得不到村界所在的地方。为什么?因为说了“除了村和村近处之外”。但如果说“在共住界给与”,那么站在有不分离界的地方的人,以及站在别处的人,都能得到。有人说:“站在别住界里说‘我给与界内僧团’时,应该只以近行界为范围来给与。”也有人说:“站在别住界里说‘我在不分离界给与’时,就在那里得到。”这里说“乃至满百由旬而坐”,有人说:寺院近处以手肘的距离为近行,村外等处则以十二手肘为近行。有人说:“如果说‘给与此寺院的僧团’,即使处在同一个围隔之内,越过围隔和应当围隔的地方而站着的人,也得不到。”有人说:“从比丘尼寺院外面随便哪里站着说‘给与僧团’时,比丘僧团才是所有者。”关于“一人去”,应当让所有人都得到之后再离开,或者取来之后再让所有人得到,否则去了的人得不到。同利共分制在有根本住处时才存在,根本住处毁坏时,制也毁坏。同利共分的话,在有两处或多处时才适用。因此,认为只剩一处时也适用,这种想法是不对的。巴利
379. Yasmā aparikkhittassa parikkhepārahaṭṭhānaṃ dubbijānaṃ, tasmā ‘‘apicā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha dhuvasannipātaṭṭhānampi pariyantagatameva gahetabbaṃ. ‘‘Mahāpaccariyaṃ pana bhikkhūsupi…pe… pāpuṇātīti ‘upacārasīmāya demā’ti evaṃ dinnameva sandhāyā’’ti likhitaṃ . ‘‘Samānasaṃvāsakasīmāyā’’ti vutte khaṇḍasīmādīsu ṭhitānaṃ na pāpuṇāti tāsaṃ visuṃ samānasaṃvāsakasīmattā. Samānasaṃvāsakaavippavāsasīmānaṃ idaṃ nānattaṃ – ‘‘avippavāsasīmāya dammī’’ti dinnaṃ gāmaṭṭhānaṃ na pāpuṇāti. Kasmā? ‘‘Ṭhapetvā gāmañca gāmūpacārañcā’’ti vuttattā. ‘‘Samānasaṃvāsakasīmāyā’’ti dinnaṃ pana yasmiṃ ṭhāne avippavāsasīmā atthi, tattha ṭhitānaṃ, itaratra ṭhitānañca pāpuṇāti. ‘‘Khaṇḍasīmāyaṃ ṭhatvā ‘sīmaṭṭhakasaṅghassa dammī’ti vutte upacārasīmāya eva paricchinditvā dātabba’’nti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Avippavāsasīmāya demā’’ti khaṇḍasīmāyaṃ ṭhatvā dinne tattheva pāpuṇātīti keci. Yojanasatampi pūretvā nisīdantīti ettha vihārūpacāre hatthapāsena, bahigāmādīsu dvādasahatthena upacāroti eke. ‘‘Imasmiṃ vihāre saṅghassā’’ti vutte ekābaddhā hutvāpi parikkhepaparikkhepārahaṭṭhānaṃ atikkamitvā ṭhitānaṃ na pāpuṇātīti eke. ‘‘Bhikkhunivihārato bahi yattha katthaci ṭhatvā ‘saṅghassā’ti vutte bhikkhusaṅghova sāmī’’ti vadanti. Ekopi gantvāti ettha sabbesaṃ vā pāpetvā gantabbaṃ, ānetvā vā pāpetabbaṃ, itarathā gatassa na pāpuṇāti. Samānalābhakatikā mūlāvāse sati siyā, mūlāvāsavināsena katikāpi vinassati. Samānalābhavacanaṃ sati dvīsu, bahūsu vā yujjati. Teneva ekasmiṃ avasiṭṭhe yujjatīti no mati.
“ 或以短暂的时间,或以断根的方式;
别人的业属于别人,可能就不会有同住一处的情况。”巴利
‘‘Tāvakālikakālena, mūlacchedavasena vā; Aññesaṃ kammaṃ aññassa, siyā nāvāsasaṅgamo’’ti. –
在任何情况下,只要已经布施出去,就说“成为平等的一份”。有人说:“如果说‘我们每人各得一份’,那是可以的”,因为已经作了分配。有人说:“衣服布施给比丘僧团时,粪扫衣行者不可得。”如果说“给与二部僧团”,因为没说“给与比丘僧团”,又和比丘尼僧团混在一起,而且个人不包括在里面,所以个人另外得到一份。既然如此,如果说“我给与比丘僧团和比丘尼僧团”,这和“给与二部僧团就是已经布施了”这句话相违背吗?不违背,那只是表明布施给两个僧团这件事,并不是在施设“二部僧团”这个概念,所以没有“给与比丘僧团、比丘尼僧团和你”这样的说法。或者有人说:“应该以注释书的说法为准,不应该去推论。”因为一位比丘不像半途出行等情况那样有两种可能,所以“二部僧团”这个说法不包含一位比丘。有人说:“如果说‘给与一切住处、塔和法’,那么在所有寺院里,塔和法各应给一位比丘一份。”如果说“给与比丘僧团和塔”,相违背吗?不违背,因为那里说了“比丘僧团”,而这里和住处结合在一起,所以在各个住处应该各得一份,他们是这样会通的。关于“使归于自己”:如果因为非时不能受用,那即使全部也不可以吗?因为说了“送往比丘僧团”,而且以“我送”而执取,所以不可以。关于“后安居者亦”:这里“亦”字是决定的意思,意思是“唯有后安居者”。否则,如果理解为集合的意思,“识相者说”这句话就没有意义了。为什么?他们开始做详细解释。那又怎样呢?因为后面“从衣月起始……乃至唯过去安居者得”这句话已经成立,所以不再讨论,因此“识相者”这句话是就不可动摇的意义而说的。如果站在外界近处……乃至到达的所有人都得到,那么意思是“在任何地方安居者”,因为《疑度注》中说:“在任何地方安居的所有到达者都得到。”然而,如果从夏季第一天开始说,那么因为只有刚过去的冬季才叫“已安居”,不是雨季,所以说了“应安立纲目”。或者说,那些被长老们派遣的人,他们得到,据说就是这个意思。巴利
Sabbattha dinnamevāti ‘‘samānabhāgova hotī’’ti vadanti. ‘‘Ekamekaṃ amhākaṃ pāpuṇātīti ce vadati, vaṭṭatī’’ti vadanti vibhāgassa katattā. ‘‘Bhikkhusaṅghassa cīvare dinne paṃsukūlikānaṃ na vaṭṭatī’’ti vadanti. ‘‘Ubhatosaṅghassā’’ti vutte ‘‘bhikkhusaṅghassā’’ti avuttattā bhikkhunisaṅghena missitattā, tattha apariyāpannattā ca puggalo visuṃ labhati. Evaṃ sante ‘‘bhikkhusaṅghassa ca bhikkhunisaṅghassa ca dammī’’ti vuttepi ‘‘ubhatosaṅghassa dinnameva hotī’’ti iminā virujjhatīti ce? Na virujjhati, taṃ dvinnaṃ saṅghānaṃ dinnabhāvameva dīpeti, na ubhatosaṅghapaññattiṃ, tasmā eva ‘‘bhikkhusaṅghassa ca bhikkhunisaṅghassa ca tuyhañcā’’ti vāro na vutto. Atha vā aṭṭhakathāvacanameva pamāṇaṃ, na vicāraṇāti eke. Yasmā eko addhānādiyako viya duvidho na hoti, tasmā ubhatosaṅghaggahaṇena eko bhikkhu na gahitoti . ‘‘Sabbāvāsassa ca cetiyassa ca dhammassa cā’ti vutte sabbavihāresu cetiyadhammānaṃ ekekassa bhikkhuno bhāgo dātabbo’’ti vadanti. ‘‘Bhikkhusaṅghassa ca cetiyassa cā’’ti vutte na virujjhatīti ce? Na, tattha ‘‘bhikkhusaṅghassā’’ti vuttattā, idha vihārena ghaṭitattā ca tamhi tamhi vihāre ekabhāgaṃ labhitabbamevāti pariharanti. Attano pāpetvāti vikāle aparibhogattā sakalopi vaṭṭeyyāti ce? ‘‘Bhikkhusaṅghassa harā’’ti vuttattā, tena ‘‘harāmī’’ti gahitattā ca na vaṭṭati. Pacchimavassaṃvutthānampīti ettha api-saddo avadhāraṇattho, pacchimavassaṃvutthānamevāti attho, itarathā samuccayatthe gahite ‘‘lakkhaṇaññū vadantī’’ti vacanaṃ niratthakaṃ siyā. Kasmāti ārabhitvā papañcaṃ karonti. Kiṃ tena, parato ‘‘cīvaramāsato paṭṭhāya…pe… atītavassaṃvutthānameva pāpuṇātī’’ti iminā siddhattā na vicāritaṃ, tena vuttaṃ ‘‘lakkhaṇaññū’’ti acalavasena. Sace pana bahiupacārasīmāya ṭhito…pe… sampattānaṃ sabbesaṃ pāpuṇātīti yattha katthaci vutthavassānanti adhippāyo ‘‘yattha katthaci vutthavassānaṃ sabbesaṃ sampattānaṃ pāpuṇātī’’ti (kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. akālacīvarasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā) kaṅkhāvitaraṇiyaṃ vuttattā. Gimhānaṃ paṭhamadivasato paṭṭhāya vutte pana yasmā anantarātītaṃ hemantaṃ eva vutthā nāma honti, na vassaṃ, tasmā ‘‘mātikā āropetabbā’’ti vuttaṃ. Ye vā therehi pesitā, tesaṃ pāpuṇātīti kira attho.
瞻波犍度的注释巴利
9. Campeyyakkhandhakavaṇṇanā
二驱出等语的注释巴利
Dvenissāraṇādikathāvaṇṇanā
395 “未达驱出”:在这里,“驱出”只被允许用在污家者身上,而这个人并不是污家者,所以就说他“未达”。如果是这样,那怎样才算善驱出呢?因为《小品》里说:“僧团若愿意,可以作驱出甘马。”又从“对应该受彼恶甘马的人,给他作彼恶甘马”这句话来看,应当知道这两者就形成了循环。巴利
395.Appattonissāraṇanti ettha nissāraṇaṃ nāma kuladūsakānaṃyeva anuññātaṃ, ayaṃ pana kuladūsako na hoti, tasmā ‘‘appatto’’ti vutto. Yadi evaṃ kathaṃ sunissārito hotīti? Cūḷavagge ‘‘ākaṅkhamāno saṅgho pabbājanīyakammaṃ kareyyā’’ti (cūḷava. 27) vuttattā. ‘‘Tassapāpiyasikakammārahassa tassapāpiyasikakammaṃ karontī’’ti vacanato cakkaṃ bandhanti ñātabbaṃ.
优波离问经的注释巴利
Upālipucchākathāvaṇṇanā
400 “从他人之后”这句话,是在优波离问“从他人之后”时写下的。在《罪起巴利》中说:“未满二十岁的人不能来,因为他的事相已经败坏。”应当知道,在这个瞻波犍度中,只是把非法甘马分成两种,合起来成为五种。正因为如此,在《附随》中针对这个犍度说“五种非法的”。由“盲、哑、聋者被接纳”这句话,可以成立:即使是没有出家的人,他的达上也能成立。巴利
400.‘‘Paratoti upālipucchato para’’nti likhitaṃ. Dosāritapāḷiyaṃ ‘‘ūnavīsativasso na āgato vippannavatthukattā’’ti vuttaṃ. Imasmiṃ campeyyakkhandhake adhammakammāniyeva dvidhā katvā pañcāgatānīti veditabbaṃ. Teneva parivāre imasmiṃ khandhake ‘‘pañca adhammikānī’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Andhamūgabadhiro sosārito’’ti iminā apabbajitassapi upasampadā ruhatīti siddhaṃ.
憍赏弥犍度注释巴利
10. Kosambakakkhandhakavaṇṇanā
憍赏弥诤论事的注释巴利
Kosambakavivādakathāvaṇṇanā
451 451. 关于“经师”这个词:这里虽然提到了“持律者、持论母者”,但那是针对两部毗崩伽(巴帝摩卡的分别)说的,并不是指持犍度者。贤友,这里依据“这是罪”这句话,才说“他对那个罪持有罪见”。后来那位持律者回想起“有事实时以事实为准,不是以制定为准”,于是对那个罪生起了罪见,因此最后说“其他比丘对那个罪持有罪见”。巴利
451.Suttantikoti ettha kiñcāpi ‘‘vinayadharo mātikādharo’’ti vuttaṃ, ubhatovibhaṅgaṃ pana sandhāya vuttaṃ, na khandhakabhāṇako hoti. Āvuso ettha āpattīti vacanaṃ upādāya ‘‘so tassā āpattiyā āpattidiṭṭhi hotī’’ti vuccati. Pacchā vinayadharo ‘‘vatthumhi sati pamāṇaṃ, na paññattiya’’nti satiṃ paṭilabhitvā tassā āpattiyā āpattidiṭṭhi ahosi, tena vuttaṃ ante ‘‘aññe bhikkhū tassā āpattiyā āpattidiṭṭhino hontī’’ti.
455 他们写成“如我所白”,因为这是单数,所以说“已制”。巴利
455. ‘‘Yathā mayā ñattī’’ti likhanti ‘‘paññattā’’ti ekavacanattā.
长生童子命本生事的注释巴利
Dīghāvuvatthukathāvaṇṇanā
458 458. 他们写成:“诸比丘,往昔在波罗奈城有位梵授王。”但在古本中并没有“在波罗奈”这个词,他们说“没有这个词反而更好”。巴利
458. ‘‘Bhūtapubbaṃ, bhikkhave, bārāṇasiyaṃ brahmadatto’’ti likhanti. Purāṇapotthakesu ‘‘bārāṇasiya’’nti natthi, ‘‘natthibhāvova sundaro’’ti vadanti.
波利列耶卡之行叙述的注释巴利
Pālileyyakagamanakathāvaṇṇanā
467 467.“守护林”这个说法,是结集长老们为了让意思容易理解而说的。也有人讲“波利离耶是个村名,是依这个村名来说的”,这种说法和《法句注》并不矛盾。巴利
467.Rakkhitavanasaṇḍeti saṅgītittherehi suviññeyyaṃ katvā vuttaṃ. ‘‘Pālileyyoti gāmo, tassa vasenā’’tipi vadanti, taṃ dhammapadaṭṭhakathāya na virujjhati.
十八事论的注释巴利
Aṭṭhārasavatthukathāvaṇṇanā
473 然而……我说不应遮止:在这里,如果有人遮止了有资格受用坐卧处之人的坐卧处,那个人就犯恶作罪。如果先把僧团关于“好争吵的人等在这里没有机会”之类的规约说了出来,却不把它分配;或者有人仗着“我是佛”而强行自己给自己分配、把持住处,有人对他说“你们要依道理受用”而加以阻止——这两种情况都没有过失。在这里,对于为了平息争吵而来到的憍赏弥比丘们,也不说“按戒腊次第”,但因为已经说了“如果没有僻静处,即使作成僻静处也应当给予”,所以,作成僻静处后给予,却又加以遮止,那个人就有罪。据说这个义理应当通过允许别住者等人受用寺院周边来成立——注疏里是这样写的。巴利
473.Natveva…pe… paṭibāhitabbanti vadāmīti ettha senāsanārahassa yo senāsanaṃ paṭibāhati, tasseva āpatti dukkaṭassa. ‘‘Kalahakārakādīnamettha okāso natthītiādikaṃ saṅghassa katikaṃ vatvā taṃ na paññāpentassa vā ‘ahaṃ buddho’ti pasayha attanā attano paññāpetvā gaṇhantaṃ ‘yuttiyā gaṇhathā’ti vatvā vārentassa vā doso natthi. Idha kalahavūpasamanatthaṃ āgatānaṃ kosambikānampi ‘yathāvuḍḍha’nti avatvā ‘vivitte asati vivittaṃ katvāpi dātabba’nti vuttattā vivittaṃ katvā dentaṃ paṭibāhentasseva āpattīti kira ayamattho pārivāsikādīnaṃ vihārapariyantadāpanena sādhitabbo’’ti likhitaṃ.
僧团和合说的注释巴利
Saṅghasāmaggīkathāvaṇṇanā
475 那时,那些追随被举比丘的比丘们,给那位被举的比丘解了罪,然后来到举罪的比丘们那里……说:“为了平息这件事,我们来让僧团和合。”对通达律相的人来说,这句话的判定不容易理解。因为当有作甘马的僧团存在时,另一个僧团是不能给他解罪的。如果解罪,那些比丘因为已经和作甘马的僧团成了同见者,就跟他们成了共住关系;这样一来,没有取得举罪者们的同意就解罪,他们的甘马就失效了。所以,他们是按照世尊“那么,诸比丘,你们给那位比丘解罪吧”(《大品》474)的教导,由追随被举者的人来解罪呢?还是出了界外去解罪呢?还是取得另一方的同意后解罪呢?难道不应该属于其中某一种情况吗?然而这一点在所有的难解段落中都没有被详细讨论过。这里的推论是这样的——巴利
475. ‘‘Atha kho te ukkhittānuvattakā bhikkhū taṃ ukkhittakaṃ bhikkhuṃ osāretvā yena ukkhepakā bhikkhū…pe… tassa vatthussa vūpasamāya saṅghasāmaggiṃ karomā’’ti vacanaṃ duviññeyyavinicchayaṃ vinayalakkhaṇakusalassa. Vijjamāne hi kārakasaṅghe itaro saṅgho osārituṃ na labhati. Osārento ce, te bhikkhū kārakasaṅghena samānaladdhikabhāvaṃ pattattā tena samānasaṃvāsakā honti, tato ukkhepakānaṃ chandaṃ aggahetvā osārentānaṃ kammaṃ kuppati, tasmā ‘‘tena hi, bhikkhave, taṃ bhikkhuṃ osārethā’’ti (mahāva. 474) bhagavato vacanena ukkhittānuvattakā osāresuṃ, udāhu nissīmaṃ gantvā, udāhu itaresaṃ chandaṃ gahetvā osāresuṃ, nanu etesamaññatarenettha bhavitabbaṃ, na ca panetaṃ sabbagaṇṭhipadesu vicāritaṃ. Ayaṃ panettha takko –
僧团为比丘作甘马,所依事由若犹在;
则此甘马之解除,非他人所宜。
“ 彼止息则罪咎灭,僧团亦非作者;
以能令出罪复位故,作者是随顺者。”巴利
‘‘Yasmiṃ vatthusmiṃ saṅghena, katakammassa bhikkhuno; Sati tasmiṃ na aññassa, paṭippassambhanaṃ khamaṃ. ‘‘Viramante tato doso, api saṅgho akārako; Osāretuṃ alaṃ yasmā, kārako anulomiko’’ti.
477 所谓八种使者支,就是:能听、能让人听、能领受、能记住、能理解、能让人理解、善巧、能看出合适与不合适、不制造争论——这些已经说过了。巴利
477. ‘‘Aṭṭha dūtaṅgāni nāma sotā ca hoti, sāvetā ca uggahetā ca dhāretā ca viññātā ca viññāpetā ca kusalo ca sahitāsahitadassano ca akalahakārako cāti etānī’’ti vuttaṃ.